Aculaser Cx11 Cx11f Cx21 Cx21f (SM, CD)

SERVICE MANUAL
Color Multi-Function Page Printer
EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F

AcuLaser CX21/CX21F
SEOT04007
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing
procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR
REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL
ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER
SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
4. ALWAYS WEAR GLOVES FOR DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY TO AVOID INJURY FROM SHARP METAL EDGES.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO
THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC
WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-
SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
About This Manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and proce-
dures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration Symbols Used in this Manual

Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.
information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.
NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of the Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
A D J U S T M E N T
product. R E Q U IR E D that is necessary to keep the product's quality.
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling C A U T IO N
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition
the product. that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT equipment.
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-
approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product. C H E C K May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference: P O IN T condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also
• System Connection Diagram and Printer System Electrical Connection provide additional information that is related to a specific subject, or
• Packaging Specification comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
• Exploded diagram & Parts List
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
• Electrical circuit boards schematics W A R N IN G
that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
• System Parameter/List of Error List
Abbreviations
The following is a representative example of abbreviations (both original and common ones) used in this manual.
ADC............... Automatic Density Control HT..............................................Half Tone ORN ..........................................ORANGE TR ................................................ Transfer
AG .................................... Analog Ground HUM...........................................Humidity PC................................Personal Computer VIO ..................................................Violet
APS............................... Auto Paper Select HVPS............ High Voltage Power Supply PCDC .........Pixel Count Dispense Control WHT ................................................White
ARC................. Auto Registration Control ICDC ........Image Count Dispense Control PH .................................... Paper Handling XERO ....................................Xerographic
ASSY......................................... Assembly ID........................................Image Density PHD....................................... Printer Head Y ....................................................Yellow
ATS.......................... Auto Tray Switching (or Identification) PNK.................................................... Pink YEL................................................ Yellow
B .......................................................Black IBT ..................Intermediate Belt Transfer POP ..................... Paper On Photoreceptor
BCR ............................... Bias Charge Roll (Intermediate Transfer Unit) PPM............................... Prints Per Minute
Bk .....................................................Black INTL,INLK .................................Interlock PR,P/R........................................... Process
BLK ..................................................Black IOT ...................... Image Output Terminal PV ........................................Print Volume
BLU ................................................... Blue K .......................................................Black PWB(A) ..................Printed Wiring Board
BRN................................................ Brown L ..........................................................Left (Assembly)
BTR ............................. Bias Transfer Roll L/H ............................................Left Hand R ........................................................Right
(Transfer Unit) LD........................................... Laser diode R .........................................................Rear
C ........................................................Cyan LDD..........................Lightly Doped Drain R/H ..........................................Right Hand
CLN ...............................................Cleaner LED .......................... Light-emitting diode REF ............................................Refresher
CRU...............Customer Replaceable Unit LEF..................................Long Edge Feed REGI. .....................................Registration
CRUM .................................CRU Monitor LH..............................................Left Hand RH ...........................................Right Hand
CTRG .........................................Cartridge LV......................................... Low Voltage ROS....................... Raster Output Scanner
DET ...................................... Detoner Roll LVPS .............Low Voltage Power Supply ROT.................................................Rotary
DEVE. ...................................... Developer M ................................................. Magenta RTC.........................Rubber Tube Charger
DIAG. .......................................Diagnostic MAG.......................................... Mag. Roll RTN.................................................Return
DISP ........................................... Dispense MCU.......................Machine Control Unit SEF..................................Short Edge Feed
dpi ......................................... dots per inch MOB.................................. Marks On Belt SG ...................................... Signal Ground
DTS.........................................Detack Saw MOT ................................................ Motor SMH .................. Special Material Handler
DUP ............................................... Duplex MSI............................ Multi Sheet Inserter SNR.................................................Sensor
ESB............................Electro Static Brush N/P.............................................. No Paper SOL. ............................................ Solenoid
ESS ............................. Electric Subsystem NVM.......................Non Volatile Memory SOS ......................................Start Of Scan
F........................................................ Front OEM ..Original Equipment Manufacturing STM .......................... Single Tray Module
FEED,FDR ..................................... Feeder OHP............................... Overhead Project SW.................................................. Switch
FIP .....................Fault Isolation Procedure (In this manual, TEMP. ................................... Temperature
GND ..............................................Ground OHP means a transparent sheet.) TM........................................ Tray Module
GRN................................................. Green OP.............................................. Operation TNER,TNR ......................................Toner
GRY................................................... Gray OPC .................. Organic Photo Conductor TP ............................................Thermopile
Safety Information
To prevent accidents during a maintenance procedure, strictly observe the Warnings and Cautions and never depart from the instructions given in this document.
Do not do anything that is dangerous even if not specifically described in this manual.
In addition to the descriptions below and those given in this manual, there are many situations and circumstances that could result in serious bodily injury.
Always pay enough attention to secure safety when working with the printer.
Power Supply
Before starting any service procedure, turn the printer off and unplug the power cord
from the wall outlet. If you need to work on the printer with power applied, such as
voltage measurement, strictly follow the instructions in this manual and use extreme
caution to avoid an electric shock.
W A R N IN G If you need to work on the printer with power applied, never

touch any electronic components other than the target
component.
The power supply switch/inlet part (MAIN POWER SWITCH
& INLET) is live even after the power switch is turned off. Use
extreme caution not to touch the live part when working on the
printer with the power supply cable connected.
Do not touch any live part unless instructed to do so.
Leg_001_002RA
Mechanical Components High Temperature Assembly
When servicing any driving assembly (e.g., gears), first turn the power off and unplug When working with hot parts (FUSER etc.) make sure to turn the power off, unplug the
the power cord. Then manually rotate the assembly. power cable, and leave the printer until it cools down sufficiently to work on it to
prevent burn injury.
W A R N IN G Do not touch the driving part (e.g., gears) while the assembly
(printer) is operating. W A R N IN G As the inside of the printer is high-temperature state immediately
after the operation, leave it more than 30 minutes before working.
Caution Label
(Refer to “Caution Label About High-temperature Surface”)
FUSER Unit
Leg_001_022RA
Laser Beam
Caution Label
Letting a laser beam get into your eye directly could result in (Refer to “Caution Label About High-temperature Surface”)
W A R N IN G
loss of vision.
Never open the Cover where the Warning Label About Laser
Beam is affixed.
Before disassembling or assembling, be sure to turn the power
off.
If you need to work on the printer with power applied, strictly
follow the instructions in this manual.
Understand hazardous nature of the laser beam, use extreme
caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone around you.
C H E C K The laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more

P O IN T coherent phases than any other light (sunlight, electric light).
The beam has excellent monochromaticity and convergence,
thus it reaches long distances. Because of these characteristics, ROS ASSY
the laser beam converges into one point, causing high density
and high temperature. And that is why a laser beam is harmful
to the human body.
The laser beam in this printer is invisible.
Leg_001_003RB
Warning/Caution Labels Warning label for Laser Beam
The label is attached on the top of the laser beam emitting unit (ROS ASSY) to
Warning labels and caution labels are attached on the corresponding locations on or in
alert the service personnel the danger of laser beam.
the printer.
(Refer to “Laser Beam”)
C H E C K In maintenance work, check that the labels are free from peeling
P O IN T and soiling.
Caution Label About High-temperature Surface

The labels are attached on the Fuser assy and the perimeter alerting the user to
avoid burn injury.
(Refer to “High Temperature Assembly”) Leg_Sec001_023EA
Leg_Sec001_018EA
Leg_Sec001_020EA
Leg_Sec001_019EA
Cautions relating to Toner cleaning Cautions relating to Storage of Paper
To prevent ignition, explosion, burn, injury, etc., do not use a general vacuum To achieve the appropriate printing results, unused paper that is stored outside of the
cleaner for cleaning dropped toner. (To do so may cause the toner to catch fire by unit should be sealed up by packing material or put into a plastic bag to prevent it from
sparks in the vacuum cleaner.) becoming moist.
W A R N IN G Do not pick up dropped toner with a general vacuum cleaner. To

do so may cause ignition.
Leg_Sec001_014EA
Safety Devices
Use extra care when checking or servicing the safety devices (e.g., interlock switches,
fuses, thermostat). The printer's cover, control panel and any other parts which are
directly related to the user's safety should also be observed carefully.
As the major safety devices, the printer is equipped with the following four interlock
switches:
SWITCH ASSY TOP
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
SWITCH-INLK FUSER SWITCH ASSY TOP
When any one of the above interlock switches turns off, +24VDC supply to the
motors and solenoid is cut off. The SWITCH ASSY TOP turns off when the
COVER ASSY TOP is opened. The SWITCH-INLK FRONT does when the
COVER FRONT ASSY U is opened, and the SWITCH-INLK FUSER does when
the COVER FUSER is opened.
FUSER LOCK SWITCH FUSER LOCK SWITCH
The FUSER LOCK SWITCH turns off when the latch lever of the FUSER ASSY
is released, then AC power supply to the Heater of the FUSER ASSY is cut off.
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
Leg_001_024RA
Schematic Diagram of Safety System
Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Descriptions
A 28 April, 2005 First release
B 13 July, 2005 <Modification>
CHAPTER 1:
• Reception Setting (p.69) / New information is added.
CHAPTER 4:
• 4.2.3.7 HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI (p.351) / A caution box is added.
• 4.2.4.4 FRAME ASSY-PH (p.365) / New information is added.
C 20 January, 2006 <Modification>
CHAPTER 1:
• All specifications are fixed.
• Throughput (p.20) / The information is revised.
• Power Consumption (p.21) / The values are revised.
• Temperature and humidity (p.23) / The value in the table is revised.
• 1.2.3.1 Scanner basic specifications (p.41) / Scanning Resolution is added.
CHAPTER 3:
• 3.4.4.2 List of Service Request (p.159) / Controller related error codes are added.
• FIP-C6 /C7 /C8 /C9 (p.258) / Controller related error FIPs are added.
CHAPTER 5:
• 5.2.2 Firmware Update (p.547) / A description of USB driver is added.
• 5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data (p.554) / A NOTE about the utility is added.
CHAPTER 7:
• 7.4 Parts List (p.601) / This section are fully revised.
• 7.5 Exploded Diagram (p.609) / This section are fully revised.
D 2 March, 2007 <Modification>
Revision and addition regarding the newly released AcuLaser CX21/CX21F were made through the entire manual.
EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/CX21F Revision D
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.3 Drive Transmission Path ......................................................................... 106
2.2.4 Paper Feed ................................................................................................ 112
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 18 2.2.5 Xerographic .............................................................................................. 118
1.1.1 Printer Section ............................................................................................ 18 2.2.6 Electrical................................................................................................... 130
1.1.2 Scanner Section .......................................................................................... 18 2.2.7 Operating Modes ...................................................................................... 132
1.1.3 Fax Section ................................................................................................. 18 2.2.8 Flying-start printing.................................................................................. 133
1.1.4 Controller .................................................................................................... 19
2.3 Scanner Operating Principles ............................................................................ 134
1.1.5 Software ...................................................................................................... 19
2.3.1 Scanner Mechanism Overview................................................................. 134
1.2 Basic Specifications............................................................................................. 20 2.3.2 ADF Mechanism Overview...................................................................... 136
1.2.1 Whole System ............................................................................................. 20
1.2.2 Printer Section ............................................................................................ 29
1.2.3 Scanner Section .......................................................................................... 41
Chapter 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
1.2.4 ADF section ................................................................................................ 42 3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 139
1.2.5 Copy Performance ...................................................................................... 43 3.1.1 Procedure for troubleshooting .................................................................. 139
1.2.6 Fax Performance ......................................................................................... 45 3.1.2 Checking Installation Status ..................................................................... 139
1.2.7 Controller Specifications ............................................................................ 46 3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work................................... 140
1.3 Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 47 3.2 Errors/Warnings Display................................................................................... 141
1.3.1 Panel Specifications.................................................................................... 47 3.3 MFP Maintenance Mode ................................................................................... 143
1.3.2 Basic Functions........................................................................................... 52 3.3.1 Self diagnosis............................................................................................ 143
1.3.3 Setup Functions .......................................................................................... 64 3.3.2 Fax Maintenance....................................................................................... 147
1.3.4 List of Setup Menu ..................................................................................... 66
3.4 Printer ................................................................................................................ 153
1.3.5 Special Operations ...................................................................................... 77
3.4.1 Notes on Using FIP................................................................................... 153
1.4 Status Sheet ......................................................................................................... 79 3.4.2 Warming-Up Flowchart at Power-ON ..................................................... 154
1.4.1 Printer Section ............................................................................................ 79 3.4.3 FIP ............................................................................................................ 155
1.4.2 Fax Section ................................................................................................. 85 3.4.4 FIP by Message Display ........................................................................... 156
3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble .............................................................. 259
Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 3.4.6 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble.............................................................. 291
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 88 3.5 Scanner/ADF Section ........................................................................................ 296
2.1.1 Outline Specifications................................................................................. 89 3.5.1 FIP by Message Display ........................................................................... 296
2.1.2 Detection Mechanisms................................................................................ 92 3.5.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms................................................................. 298
2.2 Printer Section Operating Principle..................................................................... 94 3.6 Fax Function...................................................................................................... 300
2.2.1 Print Process ............................................................................................... 94 3.6.1 Troubleshooting by Panel Message.......................................................... 300
2.2.2 Flow of Print Data .................................................................................... 105 3.6.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms................................................................. 301
3.6.3 Other Troubles and the Remedies ............................................................ 303
14
3.6.4 Collecting Error Information .................................................................... 305 5.2.1 Writing USB ID........................................................................................ 545
5.2.2 Firmware Update ...................................................................................... 547
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 5.3 Fax Function...................................................................................................... 554
5.3.1 Fax unit Firmware Update........................................................................ 554
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 313 5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data................................................................... 554
4.1.1 Precautions................................................................................................ 313
4.1.2 Before you start work ............................................................................... 315
4.1.3 List of Screws ........................................................................................... 316
Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE
4.1.4 Tools ......................................................................................................... 317 6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 559
4.1.5 Conventions used in descriptions of procedures ...................................... 318 6.2 On-site Service .................................................................................................. 560
4.2 Printer ................................................................................................................ 319 6.2.1 Details of On-site Servicing ..................................................................... 561
4.2.1 SCANNER................................................................................................ 319 6.3 Lubrication and Glueing.................................................................................... 564
4.2.2 COVER..................................................................................................... 321 6.3.1 Printer Section .......................................................................................... 564
4.2.3 MSI ........................................................................................................... 342 6.3.2 Scanner/ADF Section ............................................................................... 564
4.2.4 PH ASSY .................................................................................................. 362
6.4 Printer Maintenance Function ........................................................................... 566
4.2.5 TRANSFER .............................................................................................. 379
6.4.1 Maintenance Menu ................................................................................... 566
4.2.6 XERO ....................................................................................................... 400
6.4.2 Maintenance Information Output ............................................................. 568
4.2.7 ROS........................................................................................................... 414
4.2.8 DEVE........................................................................................................ 417 6.5 Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement........................ 575
4.2.9 FUSER...................................................................................................... 428 6.5.1 Consumables............................................................................................. 575
4.2.10 DRIVE .................................................................................................... 433 6.5.2 Regular Replacement Parts....................................................................... 576
4.2.11 ELECTRICAL ........................................................................................ 441
4.2.12 500 PAPER CASSETTE & 500 PAPER FEEDER ............................... 455 Chapter 7 APPENDIX
4.3 Scanner Section ................................................................................................. 494 7.1 System Connection Diagram............................................................................. 578
4.3.1 ADF Unit .................................................................................................. 494
7.2 Printer System Electrical Connection................................................................ 579
4.3.2 COVER..................................................................................................... 495
7.2.1 Connector Summary ................................................................................. 579
4.3.3 IR A Assy ................................................................................................. 498
7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams................................................................... 584
4.4 ADF Section ...................................................................................................... 505 7.2.3 Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts ............................................. 586
4.4.1 COVER..................................................................................................... 505
7.3 Packaging Specification .................................................................................... 599
4.4.2 ADF BASE ASSY .................................................................................... 511
4.4.3 ADF FRAME ASSY ................................................................................ 522 7.4 Parts List............................................................................................................ 601
4.4.4 ADF PCB ASSY....................................................................................... 538 7.5 Exploded Diagram............................................................................................. 609
4.4.5 PAPER GUIDE ASSY ............................................................................. 539 7.6 Schematic Circuit Diagram ............................................................................... 652
7.7 Fax Unit System ................................................................................................ 666
Chapter 5 ADJUSTMENT 7.7.1 List of System Parameter.......................................................................... 666
7.7.2 Error List................................................................................................... 690
5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 544
5.1.1 Precautions................................................................................................ 544
5.1.2 Part/Unit-based Adjustment Items............................................................ 544
5.2 Printer Section ................................................................................................... 545
15
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Overview 1.1.2 Scanner Section

Color CCD
The AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/CX/21F are all-in-one color laser printers, which A4 compatible flatbed scanner with optical resolution of 600 dpi
include scan, copy, and fax functions. (The AcuLaser CX11/CX21 does not have the
fax function.) Scan Speed
Color : 5.0 PPM (for A4 size)
A4 full-color 4-cycle engine, which is the same as AcuLaser C1100, is employed. All
of the four models have a control panel with a large LCD. The control panel of the Monochrome : 25.0 PPM (for A4 size)
CX11F/CX21F (fax-equipped models) are different from that of the CX11/CX21 (fax-
Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
unequipped models).
Capable of loading up to 50 sheets (paper basic weight is 80g/m2).
(Fax model only)
1.1.1 Printer Section
Compact and lightweight engine, which enables True 600 dpi
Print Speed 1.1.3 Fax Section
Color : 5.0 PPM (for A4 printing) High-speed operation suitable for business purposes
Monochrome : 25.0 PPM (for A4 printing) Super G3 compatible
Manual duplex printing supported Communication Speed : 2.4 K to 33.6 Kbps
Paper Feeder Capacity Supports both PSTN and PBX
MP cassette : 200 sheets (paper basic weight is 64g/m2) Improved usability suitable for business purposes
Optional lower cassette : 500 sheets (paper basic weight is 64g/m2) One-touch send button : 3 buttons
Paper Eject Capacity Speed dial : Up to 60 entries
Face-down : 250 sheets
Group dial : Up to 20 groups
NOTE: Conditions for the capacity:
Conforms to Color FAX standards
22 degrees C/55% RH, standard paper (simplex/duplex printing).
The print ratio is 5% for both B/W and color printing (With color Conforms to Communication standards for each country
printing, 5% for each color) Supported countries : 36 countries (AcuLaser CX11F)
: 20 countries (AcuLaser CX21F)
Consumables
Toner Cartridge with CSIC chip (C, M, Y, K)
Photoconductor Unit with CSIC chip
(Transfer Belt and Waste Toner Box are included)
18
1.1.4 Controller
New ASIC for controlling scanning and copying, and a FAX controller are added to the
controller for host-based printer.
AcuLaser CX11/CX11F AcuLaser CX21/CX21F
Type Host-based controller PDL controller
CPU TX4955 (192 MHz) TX4955 (400 MHz)
RAM Standard 128 MB (expandable up to 576 MB)
Control Large LCD with backlight type

Panel
Interface High Speed USB 2.0

High Speed USB 2.0
10/100Base-TX (dependent on
10/100Base-TX
destination)
Fax modular (CX21F only)
Fax modular (CX11F only)
1.1.5 Software
AcuLaser CX11/CX11F AcuLaser CX21/CX21F
Printer ESC/PageS03 ESC/Page-Color, Adobe PostScript

Language 3, PCL5C, PCL XL
Copy Copy Mode: Text, Photos, Text/Photos, and High resolution

Mode 2 in 1 copy is available
Push-type Supports both Local TWAIN and Network TWAIN

Scan
IP Filtering Unsupported Supported
Scan to Unsupported Supported

Mail
19
1.2 Basic Specifications Print*6
Table 1-1. Monochrome Print Mode (Unit: PPM)

1.2.1 Whole System Paper size*1 Standard*2 Low speed*3
LGL, GLG, F4 20.0 4.0
1.2.1.1 Outline Specifications A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, GLT, EXE 25.0 4.0
Envelopes --- 4.0
WARM UP TIME
User defined size (length) 297.00 mm or less 25.0 4.0
(Including ESS system check and RAM check) User defined size (length) 297.00 mm or more 20.0 ---
37 seconds or less: From turning the power on to ready-to-print status. Table 1-2. Color Print Mode (Unit: PPM)
(22 degrees C 55 %RH, rated voltage)
Paper size*1 Standard*2 Low speed 1*4 Low speed 2*5
30 seconds or less: From standby mode to ready-to-print status. LGL, GLG, F4 2.3 --- ---
(22 degrees C 55 %RH, rated voltage)
A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, GLT, EXE 5.0 2.3 1.9
Envelopes --- 2.3 ---
PRINTING MODE
User defined size (length) 297.00 mm or less 5.0 2.3 ---
Color mode (F/C) User defined size (length) 297.00 mm or more 2.3 --- ---
Prints in color with Y, M, C, and K toners
Note *1: For details on the paper orientation, see “ Supported paper size, type and orientation”
Monochrome mode (B/W) (p32).
Prints in monochrome with K toner (The highest printing speed can be achieved in
this mode) *2: Standard mode (Color) : Feeds (prints) papers at the maximum speed of the color
mode.
Standard mode (B/W) : Feeds (prints) papers at the highest speed of the product.
THROUGHPUT
*3: Low speed mode : For thick papers that exceed 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Copy (including transparency/envelope)
Feeds papers at low speed to maintain toner fixation
Color*3 Monochrome*3 *4: Low speed 1 mode : For thick papers that exceed 105g/m2 (28 lb)
Copy Mode (including envelope/label)
A4/300dpi A4/600dpi A4/300dpi A4/600dpi Feeds papers at low speed to maintain toner fixation
First copy 29 sec 73 sec 12 sec 18 sec *5: Low speed 2 mode : Feeds papers at low speed to maintain toner fixation when
Multi copy*1 5 ppm 5 ppm 25 ppm 25 ppm printing on transparencies.
ADF continuous copy*2 5 ppm 1.3 ppm*4 25 ppm 4.5 ppm*4 *6: Note that the time given in the tables above does not apply when the printer is in the
conditions described in Section “1.2.2.7 Printer Engine Restrictions” (p39).
Note *1: Makes multiple copies of one original
*2: Makes one copy of multiple originals using ADF Scan
Monochrome : 2 sec/A4, 300dpi
*3: Memory: Standard / Paper tray, MP tray/SC lamp
Printer: Ready-to-print status after the warm-up Full color : 11 sec/A4, 300dpi
*4: Memory: 320MB
20
NOISE 1.2.1.2 Electrical Characteristics

Sound Pressure POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Table 1-3. Sound Pressure Power supply operating voltage/frequency
Model During printing Standby mode Sleep mode AC 220V/240V ± 10% : 50Hz/60Hz ± 3Hz
Base model 54dB Background noise Background noise
Power supply for the controller
FAX model 57dB Background noise Background noise
DC 5.0V ± 5% : 1A or lower
NOTE 1: Conforms to ISO-7779 concerning measurement and calculation methods
DC 3.3V ± 5% : AVG 3.0 A
2: Figures are actual measurement values (when copying in monochrome)
: MAX 4.0 A or lower
Sound Power
DC 24.0V ± 10% : MAX 1.0 A
Table 1-4. Sound Power
Model During printing Standby mode Sleep mode
POWER CONSUMPTION
Base model 6.6B Background noise Background noise The maximum rated current and power consumption are measured with all engine
FAX model 6.8B Background noise Background noise options and controller options installed.
NOTE 1: Conforms to ISO-7779 concerning measurement and calculation methods Base model/Fax model
2: Figures are actual measurement values (when copying in monochrome)
120V 240V
Maximum Rated Current 7.5A 4.0A
Power Max. 740W 790W
Consumption Continuous copy using ADF Color 189W 191W
(average)* Monochrome 287W 294W
Standby (average) (heater ON, scanner lamp OFF) 58W 59W
Low power consumption (average) (heater OFF) 16W 18W
Power switch OFF 0W 0W
Note *: As for the base model, the values are measured when performing printing.
Scanner consumption current
Table 1-5. Scanner Consumption Current

Output voltage Without ADF With ADF
24V 0.55A 0.83A
12V 0.07A 0.07A
21
Table 1-5. Scanner Consumption Current RESISTANCE TO STATIC ELECTRICITY

Output voltage Without ADF With ADF
5V 0.2A 0.2A Ensure the following conditions using evaluation methods compliant with IEC61000-
4-2 CISPR 24.
(3.3V) 0.15A 0.15A
Contact electric discharge 5 kV : No error on any device after applying
CONSUMPTION CURRENT Aerial electric discharge 10 kV : No error on any device after applying
When using 500-sheet cassette (option)

INSULATION RESISTANCE
5 V/(0.1) A or less
10 MΩ or more
24 V/(0.5) A or less
WITHSTAND VOLTAGE
INRUSH CURRENT
1/2 cycle : 100 A or less (0-peak) There should be no break down during application of the voltages shown below.
Including heater inrush Leak current should be 20mA or less when applying the voltage for one minute.
(Conditions: 23 degrees C or above, with cold start) Table 1-6. Withstand Voltage
Between inlet and non-charged Between primary and secondary
LEAK CURRENT
metal parts supply transformers
120V : 3.5mA or less 120V AC1000V AC1500V
220V series : 3.5mA or less 200V series AC2000V AC3000V
GROUND CONDUCTION
When applying 12 V, 30 A to the product’s earth terminal and the metallic section
where grounding is required, ground resistance should be 0.1 Ω or less.
FAST TRANSIENT/BURSTS (AC LINE NOISE)
Ensure the following conditions using evaluation methods compliant with IEC61000-
4-4.
1 kV : No errors excluding insignificant dot errors
2 kV : There should be no damaged part
INSTANTANEOUS OUTAGES
No effect on printing quality.

DIP : 1 cycle 100 % (rated voltage -10 %)
22
1.2.1.3 Environmental Specifications and Conditions AIR PRESSURE (ALTITUDE)
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY Table 1-8. Air Pressure (Altitude)

Status Altitude
Table 1-7. Temperature and Humidity
Operating Printer 65 to 101 kPa (0 to 3,100 m or less)
Status Temperature Humidity*1 Guaranteed period
Scanner/ADF 0 to 2,500 m or less
When operating*2 10 to 32 degrees C 15 ~ 80 % ---
When stored 0 to 3100 m or lower*
When Normal 12 months after
0 to 35 degrees C 15 to 80%RH Note : Withstands altitude of 0 to 15, 000 m while transported by air. However, this assumes
stored conditions manufacture
that the cargo compartment is maintained at 70.9275 kPa or higher.
Severe High 35 to 40 High 80 to 90
conditions temperature degrees C humidity % RH
max. 48 hours LEVELNESS
Low -20 ~ 0 Low 10 ~ 15
temperature degrees C humidity %RH Difference between front and back: 5 mm or less /445 mm
Note *1: Should be no condensation.
Difference between left and right: 10 mm or less /445 mm
*2: Humidity should be 65 % or less when the temperature is 32 degrees C.
Temperature should be 26 degrees C or less when the humidity is 80 %.
ILLUMINATION
VIBRATION 3, 000 lx or less (do not expose to direct sunlight)
There should be no damage under the following conditions

Frequency : 5Hz to 55Hz
Acceleration : 1.5 G (Between 5 to 10 Hz, however, constant 7.5 mm
double amplitude is assumed.)
Frequency sweep : Logarithmic sweep 10 minutes for one-way

Direction of application : X, Y, Z directions
Number of cycles : 3 cycles for each X, Y, Z direction (1 hour)
SHOCK (DROPPING)
There should be no damage on 1 corner, 3 edges, and 6 sides of the packages under the
conditions below.
Main unit (ADF installed) : 460 mm
500-sheet cassette (option) : 760 mm
23
1.2.1.4 Conformed Safety Standards COMMUNICATION STANDARDS
SAFETY STANDARDS Model Type Applicable Standards

FCC Part 68
Model Type Applicable Standards IC CS03
120V
UL60950 3rd Edition COFETEL
CSA C22.2 No.60950-00 PSTN01
120V
21 CFR Part 1010,1040 TBR21
NOM-019-SCFI-1998 • Ministry of Telecommunication
230V IEC60950 3rd • ANATEL
• CNC
SAFETY STANDARDS (LASER TRANSMISSION) • IDA
230V • SIRIM
Model Type Applicable Standards • PTD
120V FDA21CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, Section 1010, 1040 • AS/ TS001
IEC60825 Class 1 Laser Product • TNA 102
200V series CE Directive • HKTA 2111
Nordic Agency Approvals • MII&NAL
EMI STANDARDS
Model Type Applicable Standards

120V FCC Part15 Subpart B, Class B (AnSI C63.4/11.4D)
EN55022 (CIRSPR Publication22), Class B
EN61000-3-2 (Harmonics) ClassA
EN61000-3-3 (Flicker)
EN55024
230V GB4943
• GB9254 Class B,GB17625.1
• KN22 Class B
• KN61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11
• AS/NZSCISPR22 Class B
24
1.2.1.5 Environmental Characteristics
ENERGY STAR
International Energy Star Program not compliant
BAM
Not compliant
ECO MARK
Not compliant
EXHAUST GAS
Ozone concentration : 0.02 mg/m3 or less

(measurement method conforms to BAM)
Styrene Concentration : 0.02 mg/m3 or less
Dust concentration : 0.075 mg/m3 or less
(measurement method conforms to BAM)
TVOC : 0.2 mg/m3 or less
MISCELLANEOUS
Toner : should have no affect on the human body

(OSHA, TSCA, and EINECS compliant)
OPC : should have no affect on the human body (OSHA
compliant)
Ozone evolution : UL 478, 5th edition compliant
Materials : should not contain any materials prohibited in each
country, nor include harmful substances greater than
accepted.
25
1.2.1.6 Reliability Durability

Number of printable pages
PRINTER SECTION Ave. : 3,000 pages/month
Max. : 45,000 pages/month (Monochrome : Color = 3 : 1)
Paper Jam/ Multi-Feed Rate
Table 1-9. Paper Jam/Multi-sheet Feed Rate (unit: page) SCANNER SECTION
Standard paper Plain paper Special paper Carriage MCBF : 100,000 cycles or more
Reliability issue 500-sheet 500-sheet 500-sheet Opening/Closing of the document cover : 30,000 times
MP tray MP tray MP tray
cassette cassette cassette
Opening/Closing of the scanner module : 2,000 times
Jam rate 1/3000 1/5000 1/2000 1/3000 1/100 ---
Multiple-sheet Light source MTTF : 10,000 hours
1/1500 1/2500 1/1000 1/1500 1/50 ---
feed rate
Note : The above rates are measured under the following conditions. ADF SECTION
Paper size: Regular size
Feed error : 1/2,000 or less
Newly unpacked paper were used.
The 500-sheet cassette does not support special paper. Multi-sheet feed : 1/2,000 or less
Multiple-sheet feed rate: Conditions when adding new paper onto remaining
paper in the tray or cassette are not considered. Paper jam : 1/1,000 or less
MPBF Life of paper feed : 100,000 pages

Main unit: 50,000 pages Life of opening/closing operation : 15,000 times
NOTE: MIBF: 150,000 pages
Number of images: As color printing uses 4 color images (Y, M, C, K), SERVICEABILITY
four images are counted per page.
MTTR (Mean Time to Repair) : Average 30 minutes or less
For LGL size, 8 images are counted per page.
(The MTTR is a time for service
Calculated as Color: Monochrome = 2 : 1.
personnel to locate and correct the
malfunction only, and the time for
Monochrome : 50,000 × 1/3 = 16,700 images
examining malfunction is not
Color : 50,000 × 2/3 × 4 colors = 133,200 images
included.)
MIBF : 16,700 + 133,200 = 149,900 images (approx. 150,000
images)
Mechanical Life
Printer life : 200,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
500-sheet cassette: 200,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
Note: Calculated as Color : Monochrome = 2 : 1

Color only : 150,000 pages
Monochrome only: 200,000 pages
26
1.2.1.7 Outside Dimensions and Weight Dimensions and weight when the option cassette is installed
Dimensions and weight of base model, FAX model, and options Table 1-11. Dimensions and Weight with Option Cassette Installed
Table 1-10. Dimensions and Weight Combination and Condition
Width Depth Height Weight
(mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
Product Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight (kg)
Main unit (Base model) +
Base model 460 467 593 30.9 460 467 724 38.9
500-sheet cassette
FAX model 460* 467 667 33.1 Main unit (FAX model) +
460* 467 798 41.1
500-sheet cassette 440 446 130 8 500-sheet cassette
NOTE 1: Manufacturing tolerance is ± 5 mm in dimensions and ± 0.5 kg in weight. Main unit when the scanner is open
(base model) + 460* --- 979 38.9
2: Consumables are not included in the main unit weight (controller is included). 500-sheet cassette
*: ADF: Width becomes 494 mm when the LGL extension paper tray is opened.
Main unit when the scanner is open
(FAX model) + 460* --- 983 41.1
500-sheet cassette
460mm 467mm
NOTE 1: Manufacturing tolerance is ± 5 mm in dimensions and ± 0.5 kg in weight.
2: Consumables are not included in the main unit weight (controller is included).
*: ADF: Width becomes 494 mm when the LGL extension paper tray is opened.
667mm
460mm 467mm
593mm
798mm
724mm
Base model FAX model
Figure 1-1. Dimensional Outline Drawing
Base model FAX model
Figure 1-2. Dimensional Outline Drawing (main unit + 500-sheet cassette)
27
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT Top

Base Model Fax Model
Installation Method 258mm 258mm
1. Remove the hook that join the upper and the lower parts of the package.
2. Pull out the upper part of the package upward.
3. Take out the photoconductor unit and the toner cartridge boxes. *1 300mm 300mm
4. Hold the handles on the bottom of the main unit, lift up the printer, and place
it at the installation location (two persons are required to perform this
operation). If you lift up the printer holding its right-and-left sides, make sure 100mm 100mm
to support the backside of the LEG with your hands to keep balance. 353mm 353mm
5. Turn the printer power off.
6. Open the cover A to remove the development unit protective cover, and install
the specified toner cartridge. Leg_008_011RB
Front Base Model Fax Model

7. After installing all the 4-color toner cartridges, close the cover A, lift up the
scanner section*2, and open the cover B.
8. Turn up the photoconductor insert lever.
9. Insert the photoconductor unit.
10. Close the cover B.
ROD-CLEANER ROD-CLEANER
11. Fully extend the paper output extension on the cover B. Be sure to extend the
folded part of the paper output when printing on LGL sized papers.
12. Before scanning LGL sized papers using the ADF, extend the folded part of
the ADF paper feed tray extension, and open the LGL paper output extension.
Note *1: The photoconductor unit for domestic FAX model is packed separately. 251mm 251mm
*2: As for FAX model, the scanner section is only lifted when the ADF is Leg_008_012RB
Side
closed. Base Model Fax Model
1016 mm 1005 mm
353 mm 258 mm 353 mm 258 mm

1068 mm 1068 mm
Leg_008_013RB
Figure 1-3. Space Requirements
28
1.2.2 Printer Section 1.2.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications
1.2.2.1 Process Specifications & System RESOLUTION

Printing method : Semiconductor laser beam scanning and dry
600 dpi
electrophotographic process with two ingredients
Light source : Semiconductor laser FIRST PRINT TIME
Photoconductor : Organic photoconductor
The time from receiving the Start command to when trailing edge of the paper leaves
Charging : Roller charging system the paper eject roller.
Development : Two ingredients, None-contact developing system Note that the time given in the tables below does not apply when the printer is in the
conditions described in “1.2.2.7 Printer Engine Restrictions” (p39).
Toner : Made up of two nonmagnetic ingredients
Table 1-12. Monochrome mode (Unit: second or less)
Primary transfer : Intermediate transfer belt method
Simplex printing
Fixing : Heat roller and fuser belt system Paper size
Standard Low speed
A4 9 17
LT 9 17
Table 1-13. Color mode (Unit: second or less)

Simplex printing
Low speed 1
Paper size Low
Standard Thick/Extra
Label/Coated Paper Envelop speed 2
Thick Paper
A4 17 27 24 27 28
LT 17 27 24 27 28
29
PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE PAPER FEED
Table 1-14. Printing Mode by Paper Type Table 1-15. Paper Feed
Printing Speed Mode Sheet
Paper Type capacity Available Paper
F/C B/W Paper feeder Paper type*2/Paper size
*1Height Basic Weight
Plain paper 2 64 to 80g/m2 (RX-80/4024) Standard Standard capacity
Plain paper 2 For printing on reverse side of the Plain paper Standard Standard MP tray 200 sheets Standard paper: RX-80 64g/m2
(reverse side) 2.
180 sheets Standard paper: EPSON High quality Plain 82 g/m2
High quality paper 81 to 105g/m2 (EPSON standard paper) Standard Standard paper
High quality paper For printing on reverse side of the High quality Standard Standard 20mm Plain paper/Recycled paper 64 to 80 g/m2
(reverse side) paper A4, A5, B5, LT, GLT, HLT, Executive
Thick paper 1 106 to 163g/m2 Low Standard 20mm High quality paper 81 to 105 g/m2
speed 1
75 sheets Transparencies: A4, Letter ---
Thick paper 1 For printing on reverse side of the Thick paper Low Standard
75 sheets Labels: A4, Letter ---
Standard
(reverse side) 1. speed 1
20mm Coated paper 105 to 210 g/m2
Thick paper 2 164 to 210g/m2 Low Low
(including double postal card and 4-sided speed 1 speed 20mm Thick paper: 106 to 163 g/m2
postcard) A4, A5, B5, LT, GLT, HLT, F4, LGL 164 to 210 g/m2
(14’), GLG (13’), Executive
Thick paper 2 For printing on reverse side of the Thick paper Low Low
(reverse side) 2. speed 1 speed 20 sheets Envelopes 75 to 105 g/m2
Yokei #0, Yokei #4, Yokei #6
OHP Transparency (color, monochrome) Low Low
Chokei # 3, Chokei #4, Kakugata #3
speed 2 speed
20mm User defined size: 64 to 210 g/m2
Label 2 Labels Low Standard
Width 90.0 to 220.0 mm
speed 1
Length 110.0 to 355.6 mm
Envelopes 75 to 105g/m2Envelops for each country Low Low
500-sheet 500 sheets A4, LT 64 to 105 g/m2
Optional Products
speed 1 speed
cassette 56mm
Coated paper 3 105 to 210 g/m2 Low Low
speed 1 speed
Coated paper 3 For printing on reverse side of the Coated Low Low
(reverse side) paper 3 speed 1 speed
Note *: Reverse side indicates the second print side when feeding manually to print on both Note *1: Environmental condition for the capacity: 22 ºC/55% RH.
sides. *2: Refer to “1.2.2.3 Paper Specifications” (p34).
Paper feed reference
Reference position to feed paper (in any size) is always center of the feeders.
30
COMBINATION WITH OPTIONAL CASSETTE
An optional 500-sheet cassette can be added to the printer to feed papers as follows.
Table 1-16. Combination with Optional Cassette

Combination 1 2
Standard MP tray 200 sheets *1/180 sheets
use use
*2
500-sheet cassette 500 sheets*1,2 --- use
Total Number of Sheets 200*1 700*1
180*2 680*2
Note *1: RX-80 (64 g/m2)
*2: EPSON high quality plain paper (82 g/m2)
31
SUPPORTED PAPER SIZE, TYPE AND ORIENTATION
Table 1-17. List of Supported Paper Size, Type and Orientation

Paper size: unit mm (inch)
Paper MP tray 500-sheet cassette Paper orientaion Manual duplex
Vertical (length) Horizontal (width)
A4 297.00 210.00 { { SEF Available
A5 148.00 210.00 { --- SEF Available
Letter 279.40 (11.00”) 215.90 (8.50”) { { SEF Available
HALF Letter 215.90 (8.50”) 139.70 (5.50”) {*3 --- SEF ---
Standard
Legal 355.60 (14.00’’) 215.90 (8.50’’) { --- SEF Available

GLG 330.20 (13.00’’) 215.90 (8.50’’) { --- SEF ---
GLT 266.70 (10.50”) 203.20 (8.00”) {*3 --- SEF ---
EXECUTIVE 266.70 (10.50”) 184.15 (7.25”) { --- SEF Available
F4 330.00 210.00 {*3 --- SEF ---
User defined size: 110.00 to 355.60 90.00 to 220.00 { --- Free ---
OHP A4: 297.00 A4: 210.00 { --- ---
SEF
LT: 279.40 LT: 215.90 {
Label A4: 297.00 A4: 210.00 { --- ---
SEF
LT: 279.40 LT: 215.90 {
Special paper
Envelop *1 235.00 120.00 {*3 --- SEF ---

235.00 105.00 {*3 --- SEF ---
98.00*2 190.00 {*3 --- LEF ---
235.00 120.00 {*3 --- SEF ---
205.00 90.00 {*3 --- SEF ---
277.00 216.00 {*3 --- SEF ---
Note *1: For details on orientations of envelop and postcard, refer to “Envelop Orientation” "{": Feeding is possible by specifying the size code with the control panel.
(p33).
"SEL (Short Edge Feed)" : Set paper to be loaded from its short side.
*2: Load the envelop with its flap opened. If the length of the envelop is 110 mm or less
when the flap is opened, the envelop cannot be used. "LEF (Long Edge Feed)" : Set paper to be loaded from its long side.
*3: Papers which are only supported by firmware (handled as user defined size by the
video I/F).
32
Envelop Orientation PAPER EJECT CAPACITY

Paper feed 250 sheets, Face down only
direction
NOTE: Conditions for the capacity:
22 degrees C/55% RH, standard paper (simplex/duplex printing).
The print ratio is 5% for both B/W and color printing (With color
Envelopments Yokei #0 Yokei #6*4 Chokei #3
printing, 5% for each color).
Yokei #4 Chokei #4
Kadokei #3
CONSUMABLES AND PERIODIC REPLACEMENT UNIT
NOTE 1: Load envelopes in the MP tray with its print surface facing up
2: Image quality and feed is not guaranteed when printing on the back side Table 1-18. List of Consumables and Periodic Replacement Unit
(flap side) of envelopes. Classification Replacement unit
3: Envelopes with adhesive or tape are not available.
Consumables Toner cartridges (Black, Cyan, Yellow, Magenta)
4: Load the envelop with its flap opened. If the length of the envelop is 110
Photoconductor Unit
mm or less when the flap is opened, the envelop cannot be used.
(with waste toner box)
Printing Surface Set Direction Regular Replacement FUSER ASSY
Parts
Set paper with printing surface facing up. (for both MP tray and 500-sheet HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (Developer)
cassette) 2ND BTR ASSY
Note : For detailed specifications, refer to “1.2.2.5 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit”
Paper feed direction (p37).
Paper feed direction
Printing surface
33
1.2.2.3 Paper Specifications PAPER THAT MAY CAUSE PRINTING DEFECTS, PAPER JAMS OR
PRINTER MALFUNCTION
SUPPORTED PAPER TYPE
Transfer paper (carbon paper, non-carbon paper), thermal paper, impact paper,
Standard paper acid paper
Monochrome : RX-80 paper (monochrome), 4024 paper (20 lb) Paper that is too thin or too thick
Color : EPSON Color Laser Paper Paper that is wet or damp
Plain paper Paper with special coatings or color printer paper with processed surfaces
64g/m2 ~ 105g/m2 Glossy (too slick) paper, paper with too rough surface, or paper that the roughness
(Commonly used copy paper, recycled paper, high quality plain paper) is significantly different between the front side and the back side.
Recommended recycled paper: Green100 Paper with punch holes or perforations
Special paper Creased, curled or torn paper
EPSON transparency sheets (A4) Irregularly shaped paper or paper with non-perpendicular corners
Labels Labels that peel off easily
Thick paper (106 g/m2 ~ 210 g/m2) Paper with glue, staples or paper clips attached to it
Envelopes Special paper for ink jet applications (super-fine, glossy, glossy film, etc.)
EPSON coated paper (A4) Paper previously used in a thermal or ink jet printer
Transparencies for other color laser printers or color photocopiers
C H E C K lb : ream weight = gross weight of 500 sheets of 17” x 22”
P O IN T sized paper Paper that has been already printed by other color/monochrome laser printers or
g/m2 : 1g/m2 = 0.2659763lb photocopiers
Before purchasing a large amount of paper, test the paper if it
Sheets of paper stuck together
7
can be printed normally.

Postcards for ink jet printers, unofficial postcards, and adhesive postcards
Iron print coated paper (for both ink jet and laser printers)
Paper that is deteriorated or discolored, due to temperatures lower than 180 ºC.
34
AVAILABLE PAPER BY FEEDER PRINTING AREA
Table 1-19. Available Paper by Feeder Maximum printable area

216.00 mm (width) x 355.60 mm (length)
Special paper
Standar Plain
Paper Feeder Postcar Thick Envelo Coated NOTE: Continuous printing beyond the guaranteed printing area (border 4mm)
d paper paper OHP Label
d paper pes paper causes soiling inside the mechanism.
MP tray {
Printable area
500-sheet The minimum left, right, top and bottom margins are 4 mm for any type of paper.
{ X X X X X X
cassette
For envelop, however, left and right margins should be 6 mm.
Note { : Paper feed and image quality is guaranteed.
: Paper feed and printing is possible. However, this is limited to types of paper
for general applications. 4mm 4mm
Image quality is not guaranteed.
X : Feed is not possible.
4mm
Printable area
4mm
Figure 1-4. Printable Area
35
1.2.2.4 Image performance SKEW
PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY Table 1-21. Skew

A4 Simplex printing
Table 1-20. Printing start position accuracy
Main scanning direction (| a-b |) 1.2mm
A4 Simplex printing
Sub-scanning direction (| c-d |) 0.8mm
Main scanning direction Reference point (c) ± 2.5mm
Sub-scanning direction Reference point (a) ± 2.0mm
Table 1-22. Length standard of measurement
A4 Simplex printing
Main scanning direction (e) 190mm
c a b
Sub scanning direction (f) 114.5mm
HEIGHT OF CURL OF OUTPUT PAPER

Printable area f Feed direction
Table 1-23. Height of Curl of Output Paper
Paper Type Curl height
Normal paper, plain paper 15mm or less
d
Other special papers No regulation
Note : Measurement conditions
e
1. Print out 20 sheets of paper continuously in order to stabilize the fuser unit.
2. After the 20 pages are printed out, pick out the 21st to 30th pages as samples, and
Figure 1-5. Printing start position accuracy wait for 5 minutes before measuring them.
3. Place those papers on a flat surface with their curls facing upward, measure the length
between the flat surface and the tip of the curl of the bottommost paper, similarly
measure the other three corners, and define the largest value of four corners as the
curl value.
36
1.2.2.5 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit CONDITIONS FOR STORAGE AND TRANSPORT
Temperature and humidity conditions

SPECIFICATIONS
Table 1-25. Temperature and humidity conditions
Table 1-24. Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement
Status Temperature Humidity Guaranteed period
External Weight
Program Configurations Lifetime (pages) Normal 24 months
dimensions (mm) (kg) 0 to 35 degrees C 15 to 80 % RH
Conditions (unopened)
Toner Cartridge Toner Cartridge 1,500*1 52.7 (W) 0.2
Severe High 35 to 40 degrees C High Max. of 1 month
(Y, M, C, K) 285.6 (D) 80 to 95 % RH
4,000*1 0.27 Conditions temperature humidity
58.4 (H)
Low Low
Photoconductor Unit Transfer belt 14,000*2 310 (W) 2.8 -20 to 0 degrees C 5 to 15 % RH
temperature humidity
Photoconductor with B/W continuous: 280 (D)
waste toner box 42,000 110 (H) NOTE 1: Non-condensing
F/C continuous: 2: Storage time after opening is 12 months in the normal operating environment.
10,500
Fuser unit Heat roller 100,000 330 (W) 1.3
110 (D) Storage altitude
105 (H)
65 to 101kPa (0 to 3100m)
Developer unit Development roller K : 100,000 315 (W) 0.7 (Withstands altitude of 0 to 15, 000 m while transported by air. However, this
Y/M/C: 66,700 75 (D) assumes that the cargo compartment is maintained at 70.9275 kPa or higher.)
85 (H)
Package dropping
Second transfer unit Transfer roller 100,000 315 (W) 0.2
35 (D) There should be no damage on 1 corner, 3 edges, and 6 sides of the listed in the
15 (H) table below by drop of 91 cm.
Note *1: Approximate number of printed pages using A4 continuous printing at 5% print rate. Table 1-26. Package dropping
The cartridge lifetime varies according to the paper size and type of printing (toner Package name Drop
save mode etc.)
Toner Cartridge 91cm
*2: Monochrome: Color = 1 : 2, 2p/J, print rate 5% (A4)
The lifetime depends on printing method and the frequency of switching the power. Photoconductor unit + Transfer unit 91cm
The life of the photoconductor unit is reduced by half when printing on LGL sized Fuser unit 91cm
paper only.
Developer unit 91cm
Second transfer unit 91cm
37
1.2.2.6 Notes When Replacing Consumables and Installing Optional

Products
CONSUMABLES
Toner Cartridge
The power supply of the main unit should be on.
If the main unit is turned off, the cartridge that needs to be replaced does not move
to the cartridge replacement position.
Photoconductor Unit
This unit can be replaced regardless of whether or not the main unit is turned on.
OPTIONAL PRODUCTS
500-sheet cassette
Turn off the main unit before installing.
If the main unit is on when the cassette is installed, it is not detected.
Secure the cassette to the main unit with the coupling part on the top surface
inside the unit.
Adding Controller Option Parts
Turn off the main unit before installing. The part will be damaged if the power is
on.
38
1.2.2.7 Printer Engine Restrictions
FACTORS LIMITING PRINTING SPEED
Image Quality Adjustment
Table 1-27. Image Quality Adjustment

Time required
Purpose Condition and control
(sec.)
1 During printing To keep the image density at target level. 1. When printing more than 51 copies (pages) continuously*1 45 seconds
Every time the printer makes 50 copies (pages), it stops the job temporarily to
perform the ADC*2 control.
2. If the printer detect a near-end of Toner Cartridge, it changes the timing of the
ADC control to every 25 copies (pages).
2 Admix*3 • To prevent making a density difference between input When the printer comes into the following conditions, it stops the job temporarily 15 seconds/
(Toner Cartridge → Developer) data and output image. at the timing given for each condition to perform the ADC control. color
• To prevent toner from being stirred unequally. 4
1. A/C* = 100% : 5 per page
• To supply toner when printing an image with high print 2. 35% Average of A/C < 100% : Every 5 to 50 pages
ratio. 3. Average of A/C < 35% : Every 50 copies (pages)
3 Collection (Developer → Toner To prevent excessive amount of toner in the black developer After printing in black and white continuously, the printer rotates the rotary if it 12 seconds *5
Cartridge (collection space)) when printing in black and white continuously. detects that the toner dispense time during the job is equivalent to 30 pages.
Note *1: Condition to print 50 copies (pages) continuously:
The average of the print ratio should be 35% or less for each color.
*2: ADC = Automatic Density Control: A control to ensure stable print density
*3: The printer sometimes perform the ADC control more than once. In such case, the time required can be obtained by multiplying "Time for once ADC" by "Number of executions".
*4: A/C = Area coverage:
Print ratio of each color
*5: 3 seconds x 4 colors
Cooling down
This is performed to prevent the edges of the heat roll from rising in temperature when small-sized paper is used. If the temperature difference between the edges and the center
of the heat roll reach a certain level, the printer stops the current job to perform the cooling down operation. Time required may vary according to paper size, number of printed
pages, etc.
NOTE: Ave.: 60sec /Max. aprox.110sec
39
FACTORS LIMITING PRINTING START
Table 1-28. Factors Limiting Printing Start

Time required
Purpose Condition and control
(sec.)
1 Cycle Down To keep the image density at target level. When the number of printed copies (pages) becomes 20 (by both continuous or 45
intermittent printing) after performing the ADC, the printer performs another
ADC when the current job is finished.
2 Cycle Up To correct the toner density 1. The printer performs the ADC if the SENSOR HUM & TEMP detects that the 45*1
temperature and humidity in the printer are under the following conditions at
power-on or when returning from the low-power mode.
20 degrees C/85% to 32 degrees C/42% or more
2. The SENSOR HUM & TEMP detects the temperature and humidity inside the
printer at power-on. The detected condition is compared to the condition
detected at the previous power-off, and if the difference is as shown below, the
printer performs the ADC.
Temperature: 4 degrees, Humidity: 10%RH
3 Photoconductor Unit Parameter control according to the piece-to-piece variations The printer performs the ADC when replacing the Photoconductor unit with a new 74*2
of Photoconductor. one or used one.
4 New Toner Cartridge Filling toner -> Recovering from an Empty error The printer performs the ADC when replacing the Toner Cartridge with a new 20 ~ 85 sec
one. (Not performed when replacing with a used one.)
5 Prevention of color toner To prevent the color toner from concentrating to the left side 1. When the printer have finished five B/W print jobs in a row, it rotates the 15 sec/color
concentration in the developer, which may cause partly (right side on the Augers of the three developers (C, M and Y) switching the rotary position to let
paper) missed printouts, after printing in black and white the color toner in the developers spread evenly.
continuously. 2. When the printer is turned on for the first time after purchase, it does the same
(By the rotary rotation while performing continuous black operation as described above so that the toner spread evenly in the developers.
and white printing, color toner, which is not used for the B/
W printing, is moved along the spiral of the Auger (The
Auger of the developer for colors do not rotate during black
and white printing). With the color toner concentrated to the
left side, color printing may result in missing the right side
image.)
Note *1: When the operation performed during the warm-up, the warm-up time becomes 74 seconds.
*2: The warm-up time is included. (After the cover is opened and closed, the normal warm-up operation is executed.)
TONER DUTY LIMITING VALUE
240% (to prevent paper from twisting around the FUSER ASSY)
NOTE: If it exceeds 240%, the engine (Mechanical Controller) forces a hard stop.
40
1.2.3 Scanner Section Document Size Detection

Not available
1.2.3.1 Scanner basic specifications ADF Detection
Available
Scan Pause and Resume
Type
Available
Flatbed color image scanner
Lock Mechanism
Scanning Method
Scanner unit cannot be opened when the ADF is open
Carriage moves to read the fixed document
Weight
Sensors
3.3kg
Color CCD 4 Line CCD (RGB_BW)
Dimension (W x D x H)
Maximum Scan Area
460 x 348 x 65 (BOX HEIGHT)
216 mm x 297 mm
Read Accuracy (main scanning)
Maximum Effective Pixels
5,100 x 7,020 pixels (600 dpi) ± 1.5 % /216 mm
Read Accuracy (sub scanning)
Maximum Document Size
± 0.5 % /100 mm at 600 dpi
A4, LT
Optical Resolution
Main scan: 600 dpi
Sub scan: 600 dpi (1-2 phase)
Light Source
White cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL)
Scanning Resolution
9,600 dpi x 9,600 dpi
Gradations
16 bit input, 1/8 bit output for each pixel of each color
Scan Speed
Monochrome: 2 sec/A4, 300 dpi
Full color: 11 sec/A4, 300 dpi
Warm-up Time
Within 45 sec (at 25 degrees C)
(Light intensity output reaches 95 % within 90 sec at 25 degrees C)
41
1.2.4 ADF section Document Size Detection

Available for A4, LT, and B5
1.2.4.1 ADF Basic Specifications Cover Open Detection
Scanning/Paper Feeding Method Available
Small window scanning, U-turn paper feed method Lock Mechanism
Maximum Document Size ADF cannot be opened when the scanner unit is open
A4, LGL, LT, B5 Weight
Width: 182 ~ 216mm 2.65kg
Length: 257 ~ 355.6mm Size

448 x 323 x 90
Maximum Loadable Pages
Registration Accuracy
A4 (80g/m2): 50 sheets
Leading edge registration 0 ± 1.5mm (sub scanning direction)
LT (75g/m2): 50 sheets
Center registration: 0 ± 1.0 mm (main scanning direction)
LGL (80g/m2): 50 sheets
Anti-Skew Accuracy
NOTE: Gross thickness of papers → 8 mm or less
Sub-scanning direction: 0 ± 1.5 mm/297 mm
Basic Weight of Document Paper Main-scanning direction: 0 ± 1.0 mm/200 mm
50 ~ 124g/m2
Magnification Error
Document Paper Type
Laser printer paper, Ink-jet paper, Plain paper, Recycled paper, etc. Main scanning ± 1.5 % /216 mm
Scanning Order Sub scanning ± 1.0% /356 mm

1 to N
Document Stack
Face-down
Document Positioning
Center
Scan Speed
Monochrome: 2 sec/A4, 300 dpi
Full color: 11sec/A4, 300dpi
Detection of Paper Presence on the ADF
Available
42
1.2.4.2 Document Specifications 1.2.5 Copy Performance

SUPPORTED PAPERS 1.2.5.1 Paper Size and Print Area
Paper type Table 1-29. Paper Size and Print Area (unit: mm)
Plain paper/Semi thick paper/Recycled paper/Laser printer paper/Ink-jet paper Print Area
Paper Size:
Paper Type
Paper size (H x V) a1 b a2 c1 d c2
B5/A4/LT/LGL
A4 297 x 210 5 200 5 5 287 5
Document basic weight (g/m2) B5 257 x 182 5 172 5 5 247 5
50 ~ 124g/m2
LGL 215.9 x 355.6 5 205.9 5 5 345.6 5
LT 279.4 x 215.9 5 205.9 5 5 269.4 5
UNSUPPORTED PAPERS
Paper type a1 b a2
Tracing paper for drafting/Coated paper/Thermal paper/Paper with adhesive/
silicone oil paper/CF paper/Cut-and-patched paper/Processed paper/Thick paper
more than 125g/m2.
c1
Document status
Curled document that are 10 mm or more in width and 20 mm or less in
length.Wrinkled or folded document that are 5 mm or more in width and 20 mm or
less in length. Guaranteed
d Printing Area
REMEDY FOR PAPER JAM
If the document is entangled with the roller inside the ADF mechanism, turn the knob
counterclockwise so that the jammed document is ejected to the document tray.
(The knob cannot be turned clockwise) c2
Figure 1-6. Guaranteed Printing Area
NOTE: The scanned area of the original is determined based on the paper size
matching the home position of the original (origin on the document table)
with that of the paper. When the size of the original (original scan area)
exceeds the maximum scan area of the scanner, the original is copied in
the range of the maximum scan area. The scanned area is placed in the
center of the guaranteed printable area with the area beyond the
maximum range cut off.
43
1.2.5.2 Copy Accuracy PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY
ENLARGEMENT PERFORMANCE Table 1-30. Printing Start Position Accuracy
Definition A4 Document table ADF

Enlargement performance is obtained by multiplying magnification error of the Main scanning direction Reference point (c) ± 3.5mm ± 4.5mm
optical scanner read by that of the printer. Sub-scanning direction Reference point (a) ± 3.0mm ± 4.5mm
Scanner: Main scanning ± 1.5 % /216mm
Sub scanning ± 0.5 % /100mm a b
c
Printer : Main scanning 100 ± 0.5 % /190mm
Sub scanning 100 ± 0.5 % /234mm
ADF : Main scanning ± 0.5 % /216mm
Sub scanning ± 0.5 % /356mm Guaranteed f
Printing Area Feed direction
Specification Values
Copy using ADF : Main scanning 100 ± 2.0% /190mm
Sub scanning 100 ± 1.5% /277mm
d
Copy using document table: Main scanning 100 ± 2.0% /190mm
Sub scanning 100 ± 1.0% /277mm
e
Figure 1-7. Printing Start Position Accuracy
SKEW
Table 1-31. Skew

A4 Document table ADF
Main scanning direction (| a-b |) 2.2mm 3.1mm
Sub-scanning direction (| c-d |) 3.4mm 4.8mm
Table 1-32. Length standard of measurement
A4 Simplex printing
Main scanning direction (e) 190 mm
Sub scanning direction (f) 277 mm
44
1.2.6 Fax Performance Supported lines : PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network),
PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
1.2.6.1 Basic Specifications Earth start/Flash start compatible (For German models only)
RECEPTION/TRANSMISSION MODES TRANSMISSION SPEED
Color : 8 bits for each RGB The communication speed is determined automatically by negotiating with the other
party according to the fax protocol.
Monochrome : 1 bit
Transmission speed:
DATA COMPRESSION 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200
16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Color : JPEG
Monochrome : MH, MR, MMR PROTOCOL
Protocol : G3, G3ECM

RECEIVING/TRANSMITTING DENSITY
Supported Countries
Color : 200 x 200 (dpi)
Monochrome : 8 x 15.4, 8 x 7.7, 8 x 3.85 [dot/mm] AcuLaser CX11/CX11F Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
Netherlands, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Portugal, Spain,
Sweden, U.K., Russia, Poland, Czech, Hungary, Switzerland,
PAPER SIZE
Norway, Argentina, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, Taiwan, China,
Color : A4, LT, LGL* Korea, Hong Kong, Singapore, Australia, New Zealand,
Thailand, Malaysia, U.S.A., Canada,
Monochrome : A4, LT, LGL*
AcuLaser CX21/CX21F Austria, Spain, Belgium, Sweden, Denmark, U.K., Finland,
NOTE"*": LGL sized papers only become available when using the ADF France, Poland, Germany, Czech, Greece, Hungary, Netherlands,
Switzerland, Ireland, Norway, Italy, Luxembourg, Portugal
PRINT PAPER SIZE
Color : A4, B5, LT, LGL C A U T IO N Using the product in countries or regions other than the above
supported countries is not guaranteed.
Monochrome : A4, B5, LT, LGL
SUPPORTED LINES
Selecting the country and the line type using the control panel enables the
communication in response to the FAX standards of each country.
45
1.2.7 Controller Specifications 1.2.7.2 Host interface specifications

The printer provides the following host interfaces.
1.2.7.1 Basic Specifications
USB (Rev.2.0 HS) interface
CPU
Network interface
AcuLaser CX11/CX11F
: TX4955 (192 MHz) Fax interface (Fax model only)
AcuLaser CX21/CX21F Phone line
: TX4955 (400 MHz)
Attached telephone
RAM
The locations of the interfaces are shown below.
Standard : 128 MB (P slot= 64 MB + SO slot =64 MB)
Extension : Up to 576 MB with additional memories as follows;
(SO slot=256MB-DIMM + S1 slot=256 MB-DIMM)
DIMM Specification: 90 pin SDRAM (128 bit)
Capacity = 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB Fax interface* (phone line)
Program ROM : 8 MB Flash (Mirror type) Fax interface* (attached telephone)
Panel : LCD 22 characters x 1 line USB interface

Seven LEDs
22 buttons (Base model)
32 buttons (FAX model) Network interface
Interface
Host I/F : USB 2.0 HS
Network
FAX I/F : External board compatible Laser-FAX
Scanner I/F : CCD I/F
Motor I/F
ADF I/F
Figure 1-8. Location of Interfaces
Engine I/F : UART (same as AcuLaser C1100)
NOTE"*":The base model is not equipped with the fax interfaces.
46
1.3 Control Panel
1.3.1 Panel Specifications

EXTERIOR
Advanced/Menu
Buzzer One-Touch button A, B, C 5 lines x 22 characters (132 x 65 dots) button Speed dial button Redial button Cancel button
FAX model
FAX LED (green) FAX button Setup LED (green) Asterisk button Hash button Color Start button
Copy LED (green) Scan LED (green) Data LED (Orange) Error LED (Red) Left button Up button Right button B/W Start button
Base model
Print LED (green) Copy button Scan button Setup button Down button Reset button Ten-key
Figure 1-9. External View of Control Panel
47
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Table 1-33. LCD and LEDs

Name Function
Liquid Crystal Display LCD (132 x 65 dot matrix) allows max. 22 characters x 5 lines display
(LCD) Operation mode and guidance are normally displayed on top line.
The default mode is print mode. So, displays printer status when the product is turned on.
Print LED (green) On : Printer is in print mode / Off: Printer is in modes other than print mode (copy, fax, scan, setup modes)
Copy LED (green) On : Printer is in copy mode / Off: Printer is in modes other than copy mode (print, fax, scan, setup modes)
FAX LED (green) On : Fax mode
(Fax model only) Off : Other than fax mode (print, copy, scan, setup modes)
Scan LED *1 (green) On : Scan mode (Push-scan)
Off : Other than scan mode (print, copy, fax, setup modes)
Setup LED *2 (green) On : Setup mode
Off : Other than setup mode (print, copy, fax, scan modes)
Data LED *3 (orange) Off : No print data exists.
Flashing : Currently receiving print data, copying, sending/receiving fax job, scanning, processing data, or printing.
Error LED *9 (red) Flashing 1*4 : An error has occurred which permits continuing to print by pressing the B/W Start or Color Start button.*6
Flashing : An error has occurred which requires the user to remove the cause of the error.*7
Flashing 2 *5 : An error has occurred which requires the user to press the B/W Star or Color Start button after removing the cause of the error.*8
Off : Indicates no error.
Note *1: Once the push-scan mode is started and the local PC is selected, *9: Error LED turns on or flashes whenever an error has occurred in any of the operation
the printer exits the scan mode after a certain period of time (one minute). modes. An initialization error due to printer, scanner, fax, or ADF failure disables
Wait for the printer to completely exit the scan mode before switching to any other switching mode to the mode relating to the failured part. Errors other than the
modes. initialization errors allow to switch mode and continue operating without displaying
*2: Setup mode doubles with engine stop mode. In the setup mode, the error message (depends on the mode selected). If the error disables some
the engine is stopped. operation, the error message is displayed when the operation is selected.
If scanner error occurs, copy, fax and scan modes become invalid.(Receiving fax is
*3: The status of data LED is either OFF or flashing, not ON. available). An error caused by Twain is displayed. If printer error occurs, copy and
*4: Flashing/Flashing 1 indicates 0.3 sec ON, 0.3 sec OFF print modes become invalid. Fax errors disables the fax mode and receiving fax also
becomes unavailable. System errors are indicated as “Cxxxx Service Req” (service
*5: Flashing 2 indicates 0.6 sec ON, 0.6 sec OFF.
call error), and disables the whole operation. However, when the engine related
*6: If “auto error clear” is set to ON, errors are automatically cleared service call error (Exxxx) has occurred, functions except printer operation can be
in a given time without pressing the Start button. used.
*7: Automatically restored by clearing the error.
*8: Not affected by “auto error clear” set to ON.
48
Table 1-34. List of Button Functions

Button name Function
Copy button Switches the modes. Each time the button is pressed, the current mode is switched. Pressing the button twice turns the current mode to printer mode.
FAX button
Scan button
Setup button
One touch speed dial A Pressing the button immediately sends the fax data to the registered fax number.
One touch speed dial B
One touch speed dial C
Advanced/Menu button Displays advanced menu.
Reset button Resets the copy parameter
Resets the scan parameter.
Resets the fax transmission parameter.
Returns the menu screen on the LCD to the previous level.
Up/Down buttons Used when proceeding through menu items, or selecting the parameters.
Left/Right buttons
Speed dial button Entering numbers after pressing this button immediately send the fax data to the registered fax number.
Redial button Inserts a pause into the number or dials the number that was last entered.
Cancel button Cancels copy, fax transmission, and print job.
Asterisk/Hash buttons Enters numeric characters such as the number of copy, magnification, and fax number (fax model only).
Ten-key
Start Buttons Starts monochrome/color copy, monochrome/color scan, or monochrome/color fax transmission. Also used to clear error/warning.
49
LCD DISPLAY AFTER THE SYSTEM START-UP Contents of the Initial Screen
Top line: Status, Guidance
Moves to print mode initial screen after displaying start-up screen for 2 seconds. Upper right: toner remaining amount, fax reception data accumulation icon
Four lines from the bottom: Messages appears as follows
1st line : Warning message
Start-up screen 2nd line : Operation, status message
3rd line : Operator guidance, time display
4th line : Paper size, paper remaining amount
Display Description
Top line Left status, guidance Displays mode and status
Right Toner remaining amount icon Displays 11 levels to indicate 0 to 100 % by
After 2 Seconds
10% in the order of K, C, M, and Y.
Fax reception data Only displayed when there are received fax
accumulation icon jobs remaining unprinted in the memory. It is
not displayed for accumulated sending jobs.
Print mode initial
screen Four 1st line Warning message Only displayed when warnings occurred.
lines 2nd Operation, status messages Statuses such as ready-to-print, unable to
Toner remaining from the line print, or sleep mode are displayed.
amount icon bottom
3rd line Operator guidance, time Only displayed when the time is set.
display
4th line Paper size, paper remaining Indicates four levels (0, 33, 66, 100 %) in the
amount order of MP tray and the cassette.
Only displayed when they are installed.
Size of paper loaded on the paper feeder is displayed with two or three letters
as shown in the table below.
Paper size: Program Paper size: Program

Fax reception data
accumulation icon A4 A4 Executive EXE
A5 A5 F4 F4
B5 B5 Monarch MON
Letter LT C10 C10
Figure 1-10. LCD Display after the System Start-up Half Letter HLT DL DL
Legal LGL C5 C5
Government Letter GLT C6 C6
Government Legal GLG ISO B5 IB5
50
Alert screen Error Screen

An alert screen displays warning, guidance or any other message informing If an error has occurred, error screen appears. Guidance is displayed as long as the
restricted function. error can be cleared and the job is continuable.
Displayed for certain period of time (normally three seconds) without any
user intervention.
Displayed when the status is ongoing without any user intervention.
User intervention is possible or required.
Figure 1-11. Alert Screen
If the job cancel alert occurs, press the Cancel button again to cancel the job. Press the
Start button to void the cancel.
Figure 1-12. Error Screen
To clear the error, press the Start button. Press the Cancel button to cancel the job that
caused the error.
51
1.3.2 Basic Functions

1.3.2.1 Print Mode
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Button name Idling During printing Twain Fax printing Error*1,2

Copy button Moves to copy mode Invalid Invalid Warning is displayed when receiving data Unable to move to copy mode. In
from the fax board. After receiving the data, copy mode, switches to print mode.
the current mode can be switched.
FAX button Moves to fax mode Moves to fax mode Invalid Moves to fax mode Moves to fax mode. In fax mode,
switch to print mode.
Scan button Moves to scan mode Moves to scan mode Invalid Moves to scan mode Moves to scan mode. In scan mode,
switch to print mode.
Setup button Moves to setup mode Waits for the engine to stop, Invalid Waits for the engine to stop, and moves to Moves to setup mode. In setup mode,
and moves to setup mode. setup mode. switch to print mode.
One touch speed dial A/ Moves to fax mode, Moves to fax mode, and Invalid Moves to fax mode, and dials the registered Moves to fax mode, and dials the
One touch speed dial B/ and dials the registered dials the registered number. number. registered number.
One touch speed dial C number.
Advanced/Menu button Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Reset button Invalid Invalid Invalid Multiple warnings detected Invalid
Up button/ Multiple warnings Multiple warnings detected Invalid Invalid Invalid
Down button detected
Left button/ Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Right button
Speed dial button Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Redial button Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Cancel button Invalid 1. Short press: Local: Invalid 1. Short press: Cancels Job Invalid
Cancels Job Network: Turns the power off when scanning 2. Long press (hold for more than three
2. Long press (hold for is NOT in progress. During scanning, cancels seconds) Cancels all jobs
more than three seconds) the scanning while keeping the power on.
Cancels all jobs When scanning and printing occur at the same
time, the former has priority.
Asterisk/Hash buttons Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Ten-key Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Start Buttons Invalid Invalid Local: Invalid Starts scanning when scanning Invalid 1. Recoverable error: Clears the error
is NOT in progress. Invalid during scanning. 2. Unrecoverable error:
Displays [Error cannot be cleared].
Note *1: All the modes become inoperative when system error occurred.
*2: If the error that requires user intervention to be cleared has occurred, users cannot switch modes until they cancel the error.
If there is an error concerning device that is diagnosed as device failure at start-up, switching between modes is impossible.
52
STATUS DISPLAYED IN PRINT MODE Operation, status messages
Guidance Message Display Descriptions

Reset ---
Display Descriptions Please wait ---
Print mode --- Warming up ---
Scanner is in use --- Calibrating printer ---
Cancel the job Remote job cancellation
Standby ---
STATUS DISPLAYED IN PRINT MODE Ready ---
List of Warnings Printing Including processing the job

Printing test sheet ---
Display Descriptions Scanning locked ---
Could not print --- Scanning ---
Check paper size --- Reset all ---
Image optimum --- Cancel all jobs ---
Check paper type --- Cancel the job ---
Color mismatch --- Writing to ROM module ---
CMYK toner low --- Using fax tool ---
Worn photoconductor --- Printing test sheet ---
Worn fixer ---
Worn CMYK developer soon --- Operator guidance message
Non-genuine toner ---
Display Descriptions
Cancel to stop ---
Start to continue ---
53
Date and Time Display
1/23/2004 13:59 MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM-North
American destinations
23/ 1/2004 DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM-
European destinations
Note: Initial values for time messages depend on the destination. Products for other than North
America are European destination spec.
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN PRINT MODE
Printing
---
Please wait
Scanning
---
Please wait
Manual Duplex Manual duplex printing
Check paper Manual feed
Using networked TWAIN TWAIN is being used
Please wait
Cancel printing? Cancellation of print job
Cancel to stop
Start to continue
Cancel all print jobs? Cancellation of all print jobs
Cancel to stop
Start to continue
Cancel scanning? Cancellation of scan job
Cancel to stop
Start to continue
Scanner Trouble Don’t Change mode
Unable to Copy
Printer Error Don’t Change mode
Unable to Copy
Scanner Trouble Don’t Change mode
Unable to Scan
Fax Trouble Don’t Change mode
Unable to Fax
54
1.3.2.2 Fax Mode
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Button name Idling Scanning FAX

Copy button Moves to copy mode Invalid Moves to copy mode. In copy mode, switch to
print mode.
FAX button Moves to print mode Invalid Unable to move to fax mode.
In fax mode, switch to print mode.
Scan button Moves to print mode Invalid Moves to scan mode
In scan mode, switch to print mode.
Setup button Moves to setup mode Invalid Moves to setup mode.
In setup mode, switch to print mode.
One touch speed dial A 1. Short press: Dials the registered number. Invalid Does not shift to fax mode and dial
One touch speed dial B 2. Long press (hold for more than three seconds): Prompts the user to register new numbers.
Advanced/Menu button When verifying speed dial numbers: Displays details on speed dial numbers. Invalid Invalid
Reset button 1. Short press: Performs initialization Invalid Invalid
2. Long press (hold for more than three seconds): Perform initialization for all the settings
3. Cursor function: Deletes one character
4. Selecting speed dial numbers: Moves to fax initial screen
Up button Changes setup items Invalid Invalid
/Down button
Left button 1. Menu: Changes setup items Invalid Invalid
/Right button 2. Cursor function: Moves cursor
Speed dial button Fax mode initial screen - Speed dial transmission - Group dial transmission - Fax mode initial screen Invalid Invalid
Redial button 1. During dialing: inserts a pause Invalid Invalid
2. Before dialing: dials the number that was last entered
Cancel button Invalid When scanning is in progress, the job is Invalid
canceled and already scanned and
temporarily stored pages are deleted.
Asterisk/Hash buttons Dial setup Invalid Invalid
Ten-key Dial setup Invalid Invalid
Start Buttons Starts scanning. Starts receiving fax when the fax is send during using the attached phone Invalid Clears the error
with the reception mode set to auto switch or phone only. Fax initialization
Other conditions: starts scanning
Note *1: Switching operation mode is available while sending fax, waiting for sending fax, *3: All the modes become inoperative when system error occurred.
and polling. *4: If the error that requires user intervention to be cleared has occurred, users cannot
*2: Depending on the receiver, fax data transmitted in color may be converted into switch modes until they cancel the error. If there is an error concerning device that
monochrome. is diagnosed as device failure at start-up, switching between modes is impossible.
55
SETUP ITEMS Fax Job Information
Fax Mode Setup Items Item Setup menu/item Remarks

Memory Info Used Memory = xxx% xxx is 0 to 100
Setup menu Setup item Remarks Display
Destination Numeric values/speed dial numbers 50 digits Fax Transmssn Job TT : MM Start time
If the numbers are
Waiting/Transmission Status of job
NOT the speed dial
numbers, they can be Dial Number/Speed Dial Address ---
edited (speed dial Fax Reception Job TT:MM Start Time
numbers can only be
Receiving/Waiting/Printing Status of job
deleted).
Dial Number/Speed Dial Address ---
Paper size A4/B5/LT/LGL LGL sized papers can
be used when the Fax Transmssn Job Time = YY/MM/DD TT:MM Start Time
ADF is installed. detailed information Sender = (Speed Dial Name) Registered Name
item
Density -3 - 3 7 levels Number = (Dial Number) Dial Number
Image quality (monochrome) Standard, Quality, High quality, Photo Monochrome only Color Mode = Color/B&W Fax mode
Polling reception On, Off --- Fax Quality = Standard/Qlty/HghQ/ Monochrome only
Overseas Mode On, Off --- Photo
Pages = (number of pages) ---
Display Menu when Unregistered Fax Reception Job Time = YY/MM/DD TT:MM Start Time
detailed information Destination = (Speed Dial Name) Registered Name
Display Remarks
Number = (Dial Number) Destination Dial Number
Not Registered ---
Color Mode = Color/B&W Fax type
Pages = (number of pages) Number of document pages
Advanced Fax Mode setup items Fax Job deletion Delete?
No ---
Item Setup menu/item Remarks Yes
Activity Report Speed Dial List Print of Speed Dial List

Activity Report Print of Fax Activity Report
Fax Setting List Print of Fax Setting List
Memory Job Info Print of Fax Memory Job Informations
Fax job information Memory Info Display Displays the amount of the memory used for the
fax module
Fax Transmssn Job Fax transmission jobs (currently transmitted job
and stored jobs) are listed.
Fax Reception Job Fax reception jobs (currently received job and
stored jobs) are listed.
56
STATUS DISPLAYED IN FAX MODE Operation, Status Messages
Guidance Messages Display Remarks

Reset ---
Display Remarks
Please wait ---
Press start to transmit ---
Warming up ---
Using external phone Press start to receive
Calibrating printer ---
Polling Rcption On ---
Speed Dial ---
Standby ---
Group Dial ---
Fax scanning ---
Speed Dial List ---
Transmitting Fax Only Color Fax
Activity Report ---
Printing Fax report printing
Fax Setting List ---
Memory Job Info ---
Fax Menu Advanced Fax Menu Control instruction Messages
Display Remarks
Cancel Fax Job Press Cancel to Canc. or Start to
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN FAX MODE ---
Continue
List of Warnings
Display Remarks ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN FAX MODE

Check paper size ---
Image optimum --- Display Remarks
Check paper type --- Receiving fax ---
Color mismatch --- Need More Memory ---
CMKY toner low ---
Worn photoconductor ---
Worn fixer ---
Worn developer ---
57
1.3.2.3 Copy Mode SETUP ITEMS
BUTTON FUNCTIONS Setup Items in Copy Mode
Button name Idling Scanning Printing Setup menu Setup items Remarks
Copy Moves to print mode Invalid Moves to print mode Copies 1 - 99 ---
Fax Moves to fax mode Invalid Moves to fax mode Zoom 25 - 400% In increments of 1 %
Scan button Moves to scan mode Invalid Moves to scan mode LGL>LT LGL>LT (78%)
A4>B5 A4>B5 (86%)
Setup Moves to setup mode Invalid Waits for the engine to 100% 100 %
stop, and moves to setup B5>A4 B5>A4 (115%)
mode. HLT>LGL HLT>LGL (154%)
One touch speed dial A Moves to fax mode, and Invalid Invalid Full Copy On/Off ---
One touch speed dial B dials the registered number.
One touch speed dial C Paper Size MP A4, MP B5, MP LGL, MP tray supports the all paper size.
MP LT, LC A4, LC LT Lower cassette (LC) supports
Advanced Shifts from scan mode Invalid Invalid selected paper.
initial screen to advanced
scan menu screen B&W DocType Txt/Ph Text/Photo
Photo
Reset button Short press: Cancels the Invalid Invalid Text
current setting Hgh Ql
Long press (hold for more
than three seconds): Photo This strings is used in for US
Returns all copy settings to Stndrd
their default Fine
S.Fine
Up/Down Scrolls up/down in the Invalid Scrolls up/down in the
setting items setting items ColorDocType Txt/Ph Text/Photo
Photo
Left/Right Selects and changes the Invalid Selects and changes the Text
setting setting Hgh Ql
Speed dial Invalid Invalid Invalid Photo This strings is used in for US
Redial Invalid Invalid Invalid Stndrd
Fine
Stop Invalid Cancels the Cancels the Job
S.Fine
Job
Density -3 - 3 7 levels
Asterisk/Hash buttons Invalid Invalid Invalid
Contrast -3 - 3 7 levels
Ten-key Enters number of pages, Invalid Enters number of pages,
magnification magnification R -3 - 3 7 levels
Start Start Invalid Start G -3 - 3 7 levels
B -3 - 3 7 levels
58
Details on Monochrome/Color Copy Settings
Image data processing Resolution

Document
Target document Mode characteristics Moire Background Outline Scan Print
type
removal noise reducing emphasizing resolution resolution
Text/Photos Color documents printed by offset printing such as Suitable for copying documents consisting black
magazines (moire normally occurs) and everyday office characters and photographic images. Yes Yes Yes 300dpi 600dpi
documents.
Photos Photos, printed materials that contains a lot of photos Emphasizes color and density reproducibility. (High
and any other documents with images that need tone quality mode that stresses gradation and contrast for Yes NO 300dpi 600dpi
reproduction. reproducing photo images.)
Text Documents mainly consist of black text. Performs black text enhancement process in order to
--- Yes --- 300dpi 600dpi
obtain best quality for the documents.
High Technical drawings or any other detailed drawings that Performs black text enhancement process reducing the
resolution consist of a lot of fine lines. background noise. Scan resolution is set to 600 dpi, the
--- Yes --- 600dpi 600dpi
maximum image quality mode for emphasis
reproducibility of the technical drawing, fine lines.
Details on Image Adjustment Settings
Adjustment Setup value coverage

Set contents Description
Item (-) side (+) side
Density Adjust the density of whole area of the image. Increase the density (darken the image): to + side reduce the density (lighten the image): to - side -3 3
Contrast Adjust the contrast (difference between lights and Difference is small: to + side (increases contrast) Difference is large: to - side (decreases contrast)
-3 3
darks) applied to whole area of the image
R Fine adjusts blue (deep blue) components Blue is weak: to - side (Increases G/B relatively by lowering R) Blue is strong: to + side (Decreases G/
-3 3
B relatively by increasing R)
G Fine adjusts red (purplish red) components Red is weak: to - side (Increases R/B relatively by lowering G) Red is strong: to + side (Decreases R/B
-3 3
relatively by increasing G)
B Fine adjusts yellow components Yellow is weak: to - side (Increases R/G relatively by lowering B)
-3 3
Yellow is strong: to + side (Decreases R/G relatively by increasing B)
Advanced Copy Mode Setup Items
Setup menu Remarks

Standard copy ---
2 Pages per Sheet ---
59
Additional Menu Items Operation, Status Messages
Setup menu Setup items Remarks Display Remarks

Docu size A4, B5, LGL, LT --- Please wait ---
Warming printer ---
STATUS DISPLAYED IN COPY MODE Cancel the job Remote job cancellation
Standby ---
Guidance message
Copying ---
Display Remarks Scanning 1st page ---
Press Start to copy --- Scanning 2nd page ---
2 Pages per Sheet ---
No matching Ppr sze ---
Control instruction Messages
Copy menu Advanced copy menu
Display Remarks
Press Cancel to stop ---
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN COPY MODE
List of Warnings
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN COPY MODE
Display Remarks
Could not print --- Display Remarks
Check paper size --- Insufficient memory ---
Image optimum --- Cancelling ---
Check paper type --- Copying
---
Please wait
Color mismatch ---
Cancel Copy Job
CMYK toner low ---
Press Cancel to Canc. Cancellation of copy job
Worn photoconductor --- or Start to Continue
Worn fixer --- ScanCompletePage1
Worn developer --- Set Page2
---
Press Start to Scan
Non-genuine toner --- Press to Finish
60
1.3.2.4 Scan Mode
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Button name Idling Running Error LED

Copy Moves to copy mode Invalid Unable to move to copy mode.
In copy mode, switch to print mode.
Fax Moves to fax mode Invalid Moves to fax mode. In fax mode, switch to print
mode.
Scan Moves to print mode Invalid Unable to move to scan mode.
In scan mode, switch to print mode.
Setup Moves to setup mode Invalid Moves to setup mode. In setup mode, switch to
print mode.
One touch speed dial A Moves to fax mode, and dials the registered number. Invalid Does not shift to fax mode and dial
One touch speed dial B
Advanced/Menu button Shifts from scan mode initial screen to advanced scan menu Invalid Invalid
screen
Reset button 1. Short press: Performs initialization Invalid Invalid
2. Long press (hold for more than three seconds): Perform
initialization for all the settings
Up/Down Scrolls up/down in the setting items Invalid Invalid
Left/Right Opens subsequent menus or backs to previous menu, or Invalid Invalid
exits the menu
Selects and changes the setting
Speed dial Invalid Invalid Invalid
Redial Invalid Invalid Invalid
Cancel button Invalid Local PC: Invalid Invalid
Network: Cancels scanner job
Asterisk/Hash buttons Invalid Invalid Invalid
Ten-key Invalid Invalid Invalid
Start Standard scanning using the document table: Auto select Invalid Clears the error fax initialization
Other than the above: Start
Note *1: All the modes become inoperative when system error occurred.
*2: If the error that requires user intervention to be cleared has occurred, users cannot switch modes until they cancel the error.
If there is an error concerning device that is diagnosed as device failure at start-up, switching between modes is impossible.
61
SETUP ITEMS STATUS DISPLAYED IN SCAN MODE
Scan Mode Setup Items Guidance Messages
Display Remarks Display Remarks

Local PC --- Scan To PC ---
Network PC --- Press Start: scan ---
Using local PC ---
Select Network PC ---
Network PC selection items
Scan menu Advanced scan menu
Display Remarks
PC name Up to 10 PC names are displayed
characters that cannot be displayed MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN SCAN MODE
are replaced with blanks (spaces).
List of Warnings
Push-scan Setup Items Display Remarks

Could not print ---
Setup menu Setup items Remarks
Check Paper size ---
File format PDF/TIFF/JPG ---
Resolution reduce ---
Check paper type ---
Advanced Scan Mode Setup Items Check color adjustment ---
CMYK toner low ---
Display Remarks
Replacephotoconductor soon ---
Standard scan ---
Replace fixer soon ---
Manual scan Not for Auto scan
Replace developer soon ---
Menu added when performing manual scan

Paper size A4/B5/LT/LGL LGL sized papers can be
used when the ADF is
installed.
62
Operation, Status Messages
Display Remarks
Reset ---
Please wait ---
Warming up ---
Standby ---
Scanning ---
Waiting to Connect PC ---
Control instruction messages
Display Remarks
Press Cancel to stop ---
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN SCAN MODE
Display Remarks
Canceling ---
Scanning
---
Please wait
Cancel Scan Job
Press Cancel to Canc. Cancellation of scan job
or Start to Continue
PC Connection failed ---
Net Connection failed Not concluded normally because of
the cable breakage or other reasons.
63
1.3.3 Setup Functions SETUP MODE SETUP ITEMS
BUTTON FUNCTIONS AcuLaser CX11/CX11F
Setup menu Remarks

Button name Setup mode
Printer Settings Information Menu (p66)
Copy Moves to copy mode
Tray Menu (p66)
Fax Moves to fax mode
Setup Menu (p66)
Scan Moves to scan mode
Reset Menu (p67)
Setup Moves to print mode
Support Menu When started in support mode (p67)
One touch speed dial A Moves to fax mode, and dials the registered number.
One touch speed dial B Printer Adjust Menu When started in support mode (p67)
One touch speed dial C Maintenance Menu When started in maintenance mode (p77)
Advanced Invalid Host I/F Settings USB Menu (p67)
Reset Invalid Network Menu (p68)
Up/Down Selects and changes the setting Fax Settings Basic Settings (p68)
Left/Right Selects and changes the setting Transmission Settings (p69)
Speed dial button Invalid Reception Settings (p69)
Redial button Invalid Speed Dial Settings (p69)
Cancel button Invalid Forward Settings (p69)
Asterisk/Hash buttons Invalid Communication Setup (p70)
Ten-key Invalid Fax Factory settings (p70)
Start Invalid Copy Settings Copy Function Settings (p70)
Copy Factory Settings (p70)
Scan Settings Carriage Lock (p70)
64
AcuLaser CX21/CX21F ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN SETUP MODE

Setup menu Remarks
Display Explanation
Printer settings Information Menu (p71)
Clear Speed Dial
Tray Menu (p71) Press Cancel to Clear ---
Emulation Menu (p71) or Start to Continue
Printing Menu (p71) Faxing Processing Fax job
Please Wait
Setup Menu (p72)
Please Wait Processing Scanner carriage lock sequence.
Reset Menu (p72)
PCL Menu (p73)
PS3 Menu (p73)
Support Menu When started in support mode (p73)
Printer Adjust Menu When started in support mode (p73)
Maintenance Menu When started in maintenance mode (p77)
Host I/F settings USB Menu (p74)
Network Menu (p74)
Fax settings Basic Settings (p75)
Transmission Settings (p75)
Reception Settings (p75)
Speed Dial Settings (p75)
Forward Settings (p75)
Communication Setup (p75)
Fax Factory settings (p75)
Copy Settings Copy Function Settings (p76)
Copy Factory Settings (p76)
Scanner settings Carriage lock (p76)
65
1.3.4 List of Setup Menu Setup Menu
Values shown in bold and underlined characters are the factory default setting values. Setup menu Setup items Remarks
Lang English, French, German,
1.3.4.1 AcuLaser CX11/CX11F Italian, Spanish, Swedish,
Danish, Dutch, Finnish,
---
PRINTER SETTINGS Portuguese, Simplified
Chinese, Traditional
Information Menu Chinese, Korean, Russian
Time to Sleep 5 Min, 15 Min, 30 Min, 60
Setup menu Setup items ---
Min, 120 Min, 180 Min
Status Sheets Execute MP Mode Normal, Last ---
Network Status Sheet*1 Execute Size Ignore On, Off ---
USB Ext I/F Status Sheet*2 Execute Auto Cont On, Off ---
C Toner =*3 E F ~ E ∗∗∗∗∗∗ F LCD Contrast 0 ~ 7 ~ 15 ---
M Toner =*3 E F ~ E ∗∗∗∗∗∗ F Time Setting YYYY/MM/DD HH/MM For fax models only, format is as
Y Toner =*3 E F ~ E ∗∗∗∗∗∗ F below.
K Toner =*3 E F ~ E ∗∗∗∗∗∗ F Date Format DD/MM/YY, MM/DD/ For fax models, format depends on
YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD destination as follow:
Photocon =*3 E F ~ E ∗∗∗∗∗∗ F
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM-
Total Pages =*3 0 - 99999999 Domestic destinations MM/DD/
Color Pages =*3 0 - 99999999 YYYY HH:MM-North American
destinations DD/MM/YYYY
B/W Pages =*3 0 - 99999999 HH:MM-European destinations
Note *1: Only displayed when the network interface board is installed, and "network menu" -
"network I/F=ON"
*2: Only displayed when a D4-compliant USB external device is connected, and “USB
Menu” - “USB I/F=On”.
*3: This item is only for display, not changeable.
Tray Menu
Setup menu Setup items

MP Tray Size A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10, DL, C5,
C6, IB5
LC Size A4, LT
MP Tray Plain, Semithk, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Trnsprncy, Labels
LC Type Plain, Semithk, Letterhead, Recycled, Color
66
Reset Menu HOST I/F SETTINGS

Setup menu Setup items USB Menu
Clear Warning Execute
Setup menu Remarks
Clear All Warnings Execute
USB I/F*1 On, Off
Reset Execute
USB speed*1 HS, FS
Reset All Execute
USB Extl/FConfg*2 No, Yes
SelecType Init Execute
Get IPAddress*3 Panel, Auto, PING
Change Toner C Execute
IP*3, 4, 5 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
Change Toner M Execute
SM*3 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
Change Toner Y Execute
GW*3 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
Change Toner K Execute
NetWare*3 On, Off
Reset Fuser Counter Execute
AppleTalk*3 On, Off
MS Network*3 On, Off
Support Menu Rendezvous*3 On, Off
USB Extl/F Init*3 ---
Note *1: After this item is changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the
LCD Backlight Auto, On, Off
power is turned on again. While it is reflected in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back,
the actual change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again.
*2: Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected.Changed to
Printer Adjust Menu
“USB Config=No” automatically when existing the setup mode.
Setup menu Setup items *3: Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected, and “USB
external device=Yes”. Content of the setting depends on the USB external device
Normal 0 ~ 5 ~ 15 settings.
SemiThk 0 ~ 5 ~ 15 *4: The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when “Get IPAddress =
Thick 0 ~ 5 ~ 15 Auto”.
ExtraThk 0 ~ 5 ~ 15 *5: When the “IP Adress” - “Panel” or “PING” is changed to “Auto”, the setting value of
the “Panel” or “PING” is memorized and it is restored and displayed on the panel
Card 0 ~ 5 ~ 15
when the setting is changed back to “Panel” or “PING”. The printer displays
Envelope 0 ~ 5 ~ 15 “192.168.192.168” if the settings are not made from the panel.
Feed Offset -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm
Scan Offset -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm
Calibration Execute
67
Network Menu FAX SETTINGS

Setup menu Setup items Remarks Basic Settings
Network I/F*1 On, Off ---
Network Config*2 No, Yes ---
Line Type PSTN, PBX, FlashStart FlashStart is only available in
Get IPAddress*3 Panel, Auto, PING Default values vary according to Germany and France.
the destination. Adds the FlashStart function to
IP*3, 4 5 0.0.0.0 ~ 192.168.192.168 ~ PBX to support FlashStart
---
255.255.255.255 Dial Type Tone, 10pps, 20pps When the country setting is set to
SM*3 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.0 ~ Australia, “20 pps” is not displayed.
---
255.255.255.255 Personal Number User name and fax number Numbers: 20 digits, names: 32
characters, name can only be set
GW*3 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255 ---
with the tool.
AppleTalk*3 On, Off ---
Speaker Volume Off, 1, 2, 3 4 levels
MS Network*3 On, Off --- Country/Area Set. Argentine, Australia, Austria,
Rendezvous*3 On, Off --- Belgium, Brazil, Canada, China,
Czech, Denmark, Finland, France,
Link Speed*3 Auto, 100 Full, 100 Half, 10 Default values vary according to
Full, 10 Half the destination. Germany, Greece, Holland, Hong
Kong, Hungary, Ireland, Italy,
Note *1: Only displayed when the network interface board is installed. After this item is Korea, Luxemburg, Malaysia, ---
changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned Mexico, New Zealand, Norway,
on again. While it is reflected in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, the actual Poland, Portugal, Russia,
change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again. Singapore, Spain, Sweden,
*2: Only displayed when a network interface board is installed. Changed to “Network Switzerland, Taiwan, Thailand,
Config=No” automatically when existing the setup mode. U.K., U.S.A
*3: Only displayed when a network interface board is installed and “Network Config” is Report Printing Setup English, French, German, Italian, Default values vary according to
set to Yes. Spanish, Swedish, Danish, Dutch, the country setting.
Finnish, Portuguese, Simplified
*4: The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when “Get IPAddress = Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Auto”. Korean, Russian
*5: When the “IP Address” - “Panel” or “PING” is changed to “Auto”, the setting value Note *: Fax basic settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the memory.
of the “Panel” or “PING” is memorized and it is restored and displayed on the panel
“192.168.192.168” if the settings are not made from the panel.
68
Transmission Settings Speed Dial Settings
Setup menu Setup items Remarks Setup menu Setup items Remarks
Auto Redial Tries 0 ~ 5 ~ 99 (times) It set to 14 times in Australia, and it Individual Speed Dial Register, Delete 1 - 60
set to 9 times in New Zealand.
One-Touch Dial Register, Delete A-C
Print Sender Info On, Off ---
Clear Speed Dial Yes, No Clears all the speed dial numbers.
Note *: Fax transmission settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the
Note *1: Displays the list of all the registered fax numbers, and indicates the speed dial
memory.
numbers not in use. If you wish to change the speed dial number, press Up/Down or
Ten-key until desired number shows up. Press the Right button to select the number.
If unregistered number is chosen, then you can register new fax number. If registered
Reception Setting number is selected, the registered information will be deleted. The registered
information cannot be edited nor corrected. Adding new numbers and deleting the
Setup menu Setup items registered information are possible. In the speed dial register process, fax numbers
should be entered using the Ten-key. To delete the information, press the Right
Paper Cassette Auto, MP, LC
button after confirmation screens appears. When the information is either deleted or
Incoming Mode Auto switching, Fax only, Phone only, TAM cleared, the alert screen appears for confirmation.
Attachd Phone Timeout 1 ~ 10 ~ 99 *2: Fax speed dial settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the
Fit to page On, Off memory.
DRPD*3 All, Normal
Note *1: Fax reception settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the
Forward Settings
memory.
*2: Auto reducing function works all the time. Setup menu Setup items
*3: - DRPD=Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Forward Number Resister
- North America only
Forward On, Off
69
Communication Setup SCAN SETTINGS

Setup menu Setup items Remarks Carriage Lock
Activity Report On, Off ---
Transmission Report On, Error Only, Off ---
Carriage Lock Execute
Multiple Trans report On, Error Only, Off Default Setting:
U.S.A.: Error Only
Other than U.S.A.: On
Note *: Fax communication management setting cannot be changed as long as there are jobs
stored in the memory.
Fax Factory Settings

Factory Settings Execute Returns the current settings to
factory default.
Note *1: This function returns all fax settings stored on the fax board and reboots the product.
*2: And deletes all unfinished fax jobs stored on the memory.
COPY SETTINGS
Copy Function Settings

Standard Settings Execute Sets the current value as a copy job
standard value.
Copy Factory Settings

Factory Settings Execute Returns the current settings to
factory default.
70
1.3.4.2 AcuLaser CX21/CX21F Emulation Menu
PRINTER SETTINGS Setup menu Setup items

USB* Auto, PS3, PCL
Information Menu
Network* Auto, PS3, PCL
Setup menu Setup items Note *: PCL=PCL5C
Status Sheets Execute
NetworkStatus Sheet*1 Execute
Printing Menu
PS3 Status Sheet Execute
PS3 Font List Execute Setup menu Setup items
PCL Font Sample Execute Page Size A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10,
USB ExtI/FStatusSht*2 Execute DL, C5, C6, IB5, CTM*1
Cyan (C) toner =*3 E F ~ E ∗∗∗∗∗∗ F Wide A4*2 Off, On
Magenta (M) toner =*3 E F ~ E ∗∗∗∗∗∗ F Orientation Port, Land
Yellow (Y) toner =*3 E F ~ E ∗∗∗∗∗∗ F Resolution 300, 600
Black (K) toner =*3 E F ~ E ∗∗∗∗∗∗ F RITech On, Off
Photocon =*3 E F ~ E ∗∗∗∗∗∗ F Toner Save Off, On
Total pages =*3 0 - 99999999 Image Optimum*2 Auto, Off, On
Color pages =*3 0 - 99999999 Top Offset -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm
B/W pages =*3 0 - 99999999 Left Offset -99.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 99.0 mm
Note *1: Displayed only when “Network I/F” in the Network Menu is set to “On”. Note *1: CTM=W: 90.00~220.00 mm/L: 110.00~355.60 mm
*2: Displayed only when a D4-compliant USB external device is connected, and “USB *2: Available only when PCL is selected.
Menu” - “USB I/F=On”.
*3: This item is only for display, not changeable.
Tray Menu

MP Tray Size A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10,
DL, C5, C6, IB5
LC Size* A4, LT
MP Tray Plain, Semithk, Preprinted, Letterhead, Recycled, Colored,
Transparency, Labels
LC Type* Plain, Semithk, Preprinted, Letterhead, Recycled, Color
Note *: These menu can be selected when option paper feeder is/are mounted.
71
Setup Menu Reset Menu
Setup menu Setup items Remarks Setup menu Setup items

Language English, French, German, Clear Warning Execute
Italian, Spanish, Swedish, Clear All warning Execute
Danish, Dutch, Finnish,
--- Reset Execute
Portuguese, Simplified
Chinese, Traditional Restart All Execute
Chinese, Korean
SelecType Init Execute
Time to Sleep 5min, 15min, 30min, 60min,
--- Change Toner C Execute
120min, 180min
Change Toner M Execute
Paper Source Auto, MP, LC
Change Toner Y Execute
MP Mode Normal, Last ---
Change Toner K Execute
Manual Feed Off, 1st Page, EachPage
Reset Fuser Counter Execute
Copies 1 ~ 999
Quantity 1 ~ 999
Paper Type Normal, SemiThk, Thick,
ExtraThk, Transparency,
Coated
Page Side Front, Back
Auto Eject Page On, Off
Size Ignore On, Off ---
Auto Cont On, Off ---
LCD Contrast 0 ~ 7 ~ 15 ---
Time Setting YYYY/MM/DD HH/MM For fax models only, format is as
below.
Date Format DD/MM/YY, MM/DD/ For fax models, format depends on
YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD destination as follow:
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM-
Domestic destinations MM/DD/
YYYY HH:MM-North American
destinations DD/MM/YYYY
HH:MM-European destinations
72
PCL Menu PS3 Menu
Setup menu Setup items Remarks Setup menu Setup items

FontSource Resident, Download*1 --- Error Sheet Off, On
Font Number 0 ~ 11 --- Coloration Color, Mono
Pitch 0.44 ~ 10.00 ~ 99.99 cpi*2 “Pitch” is displayed when Image Protect Off, On
Height 4.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 999.75 pt*3 selecting fixed-pitch font. Binary Off, On
“Height” is displayed
when selecting Text Detection Off, On
proportional font. Both of
them are not displayed
when selecting bitmapped Support Menu
font.
SymSet IBM-US, Roman-8, Roman-9, Setup menu Setup items
ECM94-1, 8859-2 ISO, 8859-9 ISO, LCD Backlight Auto, On, Off
8859-10ISO, 8859-15ISO, PcBlt775,
IBM-DN, PcMultiling, PcE.Europe,
PcTk437, PcEur858, Pc1004, WiAnsi,
WiE.Europe, WiTurkish, WiBALT, Printer Adjust Menu
DeskTop, PsText, VeInternati, VeUS,
This menu is displayed only when the printer is in the support mode.
MsPublishin, Math-8, PsMath,
VeMath, PiFont, Legal, UK, ANSI ---
ASCII, Swedis2, Italian, Spanish, Setup menu Setup items
German, Norweg1, French2, Normal 0 ~ 5 ~ 15
Windows, McText, Hebrew7, 8859-8
SemiThk 0 ~ 5 ~ 15
ISO, Hebrew8, Arabic8, OCR A,
OCR B, Pc866Cyr, Pc866Ukr, Thick 0 ~ 5 ~ 15
WinCyr, ISOCyr, Pc8Grk, Pc851Grk, ExtraThk 0 ~ 5 ~ 15
WinGrk, ISOGrk, Greek8, Pc862Heb,
Card 0 ~ 5 ~ 15
Pc864Ara, HPWARA
Envelope 0 ~ 5 ~ 15
Form 5 ~ 64 ~ 128 Lines ---
Feed offset -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm
CR Function CR, CR+LF ---
Scan offset -3.5 ~ 0.0 ~ 3.5 mm
LF Function LF, CR+LF ---
Calibration Execute
Tray Assign 4K, 5S, 4 ---
Note *1: Displayed only when a downloaded font is installed.
*2: 0.01 cpi/1 step
*3: 0.25 pt/1 step
73
HOST I/F SETTINGS Network Menu
USB Menu Setup menu Setup items

Network I/F On, Off
Network Config No, Yes
USB I/F*1 On, Off
USB speed*1 HS, FS
IP*1, 4 5 0.0.0.0 ~ 192.168.192.168 ~ 255.255.255.255
USB Extl/FConfg*2 No, Yes
SM*1 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
GW*1 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
IP*3, 4, 5 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
AppleTalk*1 On, Off
SM*3 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
GW*3 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
Bonjour*1 On, Off
AppleTalk*3 On, Off
Link Speed*1 Auto, 100 Full, 100 Half, 10 Full, 10 Half
Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum
Bonjour*6 On, Off
Note *1: Displayed only when “Network Config” is set to Yes.
USB Extl/F Init*3 ---
*2: The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when “Get IPAddress =
Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum Auto”.
Note *1: A change is immediately reflected to the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, but actual *3: When the “IP Address” - “Panel” or “PING” is changed to “Auto”, the setting value
change takes effect after a warm boot or reboot. of the “Panel” or “PING” is memorized and it is restored and displayed on the panel
*2: Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected.Changed to when the setting is changed back to “Panel” or “PING”. The printer displays
“USB Config=No” automatically when existing the setup mode. “192.168.192.168” if the settings are not made from the panel.
*3: Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected, and “USB
external device=Yes”. Content of the setting depends on the USB external device
settings.
*4: The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when “Get IPAddress =
Auto”.
*5: When the “IP Address” - “Panel” or “PING” is changed to “Auto”, the setting value
of the “Panel” or “PING” is memorized and it is restored and displayed on the panel
“192.168.192.168” if the settings are not made from the panel.
*6: Displayed only when a Bonjour-compatible external USB device is connected.
74
FAX SETTINGS Speed Dial Settings
Basic Settings Setup menu Setup items

Indvdual SpeedDial Registered
One-touch Dial Registered
Line Type PSTN, PBX, FlashStart*1
Clear Speed Dial No, Yes
Dial Type Tone, 10 pps, 20 pps
Personal Number User name and fax number
Speaker Volume OFF, 1, 2, 3
Forward Settings
Country/Area Set. Austria, Belgium, Czech, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany,
Greece, Holland, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Luxemburg, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, U.K.
Forward Number 1 ~ 60
Report Printing Setup English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, Danish,
Dutch, Finnish, Portuguese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Forward On, Off
Chinese, Korean
Note *1: FlashStart is only available in Germany and France.
Communication Setup
Transmission Settings Setup menu Setup items

Activity Report On, Off
Setup menu Setup items Transmission Report On, Error, Only, Off
Auto Redial Tries 0 ~ 5 ~ 99 Multiple Trans report On Error, Only, Off
Print Sender Info On, Off
Fax Factory Settings

Reception Setting
Setup menu Setup items Factory Settings Execute
Paper Cassette Auto, MP, LC
Incoming Mode Auto switching, Fax only, Phone only, TAM
Attachd Phone Timeout 1 ~ 10 ~ 99
Fit to page On, Off
75
COPY SETTINGS SCAN SETTINGS
Copy Function Settings Carriage Lock
Setup menu Setup items Setup menu Setup items

Standard Settings Execute Carriage Lock Execute
Copy Factory Settings

Factory Settings Execute
76
1.3.5 Special Operations SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
1.3.5.1 Printer Related Special Operations The following are items specific to this printer.
EEPROM Initialization
LIST OF OPERATING FUNCTIONS
The information concerning usage amount for each of the toner cartridges,
photoconductor unit, and fuser unit are not cleared as they are stored on the engine
The following is a list of the special operating functions supported by this printer.
controller.
C A U T IO N Do not make these functions (except Support mode and panel Maintenance mode
setting value initialization) available to users. After entering maintenance mode, the engine process control is executed forcibly.
After the printer enters the Maintenance mode, engine process control (Calibrating
Printer) is performed after printing since the process control is a cycle process
7
control.
Table 1-35. List of Operating Functions

Function Operating procedure
Support mode Hold [Down ] and turn the printer ON.
Initialization of EEPROM Hold [Color], [Reset], and [Left ] and turn the
power ON (Check for all of the RAM area is
performed).
Initialization of panel settings Hold [Reset] and turn the printer ON.
Update program ROM Hold [Color], [Reset], and [Down ] and turn the
printer ON.
Maintenance mode Hold [Left ], [Up ], [Down ], and [Right ] and
turn the printer ON.
Update engine program Hold [Color], [Reset], [Up ], and [Down ] and
RAM check for all areas [Hold [Color], [Up ], [Left ], and [Right ] and
MFP Maintenance Mode Hold [Color], [Up ], [Down ], and [Right ] and
Reset CPU when a Service Call occurs When a service call error occurs, hold down [Reset],
[Left ], [Up ], [Down ], and [Right ]
simultaneously.
Display detailed information when a Press [Reset], [Left ], and [Right ] when a service
Service Call occurs call error occurs.
77
1.3.5.2 Other Special Operations Table 1-37. Fax maintenance

Setup menu Reference
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION SETUP ITEMS
Memory clear ALL
Setup menu Remarks FAX user area
Engine Status Sheet Exits setup mode and returns to printer mode. Fax system area
“3.3.2.1 Memory Clear” (p148)
Print Log Report Exits setup mode and returns to printer mode. Fax system counter area
Reset 2ndBTRCounter The printer reboots. Fax error history area
Reset C DvlpCounter The printer reboots. Fax system parameter area
Reset M DvlpCounter The printer reboots. Memory check Read data

“3.3.2.2 Memory Check” (p149)
Reset Y DvlpCounter The printer reboots. Write data
Reset K DvlpCounter The printer reboots. Parameter check Read data

“3.3.2.2 Memory Check” (p149)
Reset Fuser Counter The printer reboots. Write data
Clear Error Log --- Module check Whole
MCU DATA Backup --- Image memory
MCU DATA Restore --- Modem “3.3.2.2 Memory Check” (p149)

Gate array
Flash memory
MFP MAINTENANCE MODE Signal check Parameter “3.3.2.5 Signal Check” (p152)
In MFP maintenance mode, self diagnosis and fax maintenance can be executed.
Initiation method and functions are described below. For details, refer to Chapter 3
“Troubleshooting”.
Initiation method
Hold [Color], [Up], [Down], and [Right] and turn the printer ON.
List of functions
Table 1-36. Self diagnosis

Setup menu Reference
Printer “3.3.1.1 Printer Self Diagnosis” (p144)
Scanner “3.3.1.2 Scanner Self Diagnosis” (p144)
Fax “3.3.1.3 Fax Self Diagnosis” (p145)
Panel “3.3.1.4 Panel Self Diagnosis” (p145)
B unit “3.3.1.5 B Unit Self Diagnosis” (p146)
78
1.4 Status Sheet The following consumables information is also printed on the status sheet.
Product Code
This section describes Status Sheet that enables you to check current setups for printing Information on Consumables
and faxing, and operating history. AcuLaser CX11/CX11F AcuLaser CX21/CX21F
Toner cartridge 1,500 page capacity 0193
0318
1.4.1 Printer Section (C) 4,000 page capacity 0189
Toner cartridge 1,500 page capacity 0192
STATUS SHEET (M) 0317
4,000 page capacity 0188
Status sheet is available in simplified and complete version. Toner cartridge 1,500 page capacity 0191
(Y) 0316
Example of these status sheets are shown in Figure1-14 (p81) and Figure1-13 (p80). 4,000 page capacity 0187
Full Status Sheet Toner cartridge 4,000 page capacity

0190 0319
(K)
Printing a full status sheet is made using the printer driver. It is not printed out if
the driver fails to get information on the printer. Photoconductor Unit 1104 ---
Note *: 1,500 page capacity cartridge for K toner is included with shipment and is not
C A U T IO N Aside from the printer driver for the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/ available separately.
CX21/CX21F, EPSON Status Monitor needs to be installed to print
a full status sheet. The last line printed on the status sheet contains the following information.
7
1. Firmware version in DDYM format that starts with IA.
2. Type of the device of code ROM.
Simplified Status Sheet
An simplified status sheet is printed under the conditions described below. * : F lash
Displayed characters vary according to the language setting and are printed in Space : Mask
monochrome.
3. 4-digit CMTD (Color Matching Table Data) version that starts with A.
Selecting “Printer Information” from the control panel.
4. Mechanical controller version expressed by 10-digit numbers that start with MC.
When a full status sheet cannot be printed out using the printer driver. (Refer to “6.4.2.1 Engine Status Sheet” (p568))
5. Space
6. USB ID
AcuLaser CX11/CX11F: 31PXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
AcuLaser CX21/CX21F: 48PXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
79
7. Latest connection status of the USB communication mode.

H : HS
F : FS
Space : no connection with USB
8. USB communication mode
D: D4 compatible device
Space: Non D4 compliant device
9. Number of occurrences of jams indicated by JC and 6 figures
10. Number of replacements of Toner Cartridge indicated by IC and 12 figures, and
number of recoveries from errors (Toner Cartridge) indicated by 12 figures.
Maximum number of times: 255
There is a space between the number of replacements and the number of error
recoveries.
Both numbers are indicated in order of C, M, Y, K with 3 figures for each.
When options are installed, the following information on them are added.
1. RAM DIMM: Total amount of memory including the standard RAM is indicated
as “Installed Memory”.
2. Network/IF Board
Settings in "Network Menu" - "Host I/F Settings" are listed.
"Network" is added in the "Interface"
"LAN HW Address", "LAN HW Revision", and "LAN FW Revision" are
added in the "Hardware Configuration".
NOTE: "LAN HW Address" is the Mac address.

"LAN HW Revision" is always 0 (zero).
"LAN FW Revision" is a version of the Planet.
3. 500-sheet Cassette
"Cassette" appears beside "Input Unit" under "Hardware Configuration".
(Complete status sheet and Abridged status sheet)
Figure 1-13. Full Status Sheet (AcuLaser CX11 series)
80
Figure 1-14. Simplified Status Sheet 1 (AcuLaser CX11 series) Figure 1-15. Simplified Status Sheet 2 (AcuLaser CX11 series)
81
Figure 1-16. Full Status Sheet (AcuLaser CX21 series) Figure 1-17. Simplified Status Sheet 1 (AcuLaser CX21 series)
82
Figure 1-18. Simplified Status Sheet 2 (AcuLaser CX21 series)
83
ENGINE STATUS SHEET
C A U T IO N Do not disclose this information to users.
It can be output from the Maintenance Menu. Refer to Chapter 6 “MAINTENANCE”

for the details on the Engine Status Sheet.
84
1.4.2 Fax Section ACTIVITY REPORT

The following information sheets are available from the "Printing Report" menu which
The Activity Report provides a chronological history of the fax jobs stored in the
is activated by pressing the [Advanced] button in fax mode.
product (fax unit). The history is listed with the following items.
Table 1-38. Items in "Printing Report" Information in the fax header
Menu Item Information on each of the fax jobs
Printing Report Speed Dial List
Start time
Activity Report
Fax number (sender or recipient)
Fax Setting List
Memory Job Info Duration of the fax job
Pages
SPEED DIAL LIST
Mode
The following stored information lists can be printed out. Result
One-Touch Dial List Contents
Fax numbers assigned to the one-touch buttons (with their codes)
C H E C K If an error has occurred when starting up the product in
Speed-Dial List P O IN T "Maintenance Mode", the error code (XXX-XXX) will be displayed
Code in the "Result" column.
Name of the fax number 7
Fax number
Group Dial List
Group-dial code
Name of the group
Fax number (with the code)
C H E C K If no numbers is stored in the above Dial Lists, the product displays

P O IN T a message; "Report Print Error" on the LCD.
85
FAX SETTING LIST MEMORY JOB INFO
Current settings for the items shown in the table below are printed out in a list. Information on fax jobs currently stored in the memory are printed out in a list.
Table 1-39. Fax Setting List Contents Information in the fax header
No. Item Requested date/time
1 Line type Sender or recipient fax number
2 Dial type
Status (waiting to send, waiting to print, and so on)
3 Personal number
Pages
4 Personal name
5 Speaker volume C H E C K "Report Print Error" message is displayed if no job is remaining in
6 Country P O IN T the memory.
7 Auto Redial Tries
8 Sender Record 7
9 Reception Mode
10 Attached Phone Call Time Out
11 DRPD (US model only)
12 Activity Report
13 Transmission Report
14 Multi Trans. Report
Software Version
15 • Fax
• Model
C H E C K When the product is in "Maintenance Mode", the following items

P O IN T are added in the Fax Setting List.
Job Counter Information (counts of transmitted/received
pages)
7
System Error History (error code and occurrence date/time)

See “3.6.4.2 Log Information” (p307) for details on the Fax
Setting List.
86
CHAPTER
2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
2.1 Overview MAIN FEATURES
The AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/CX21F are all-in-one laser printers equipped with Controller type
scanner, copy and fax functions (The AcuLaser CX11/CX21 do not have fax function). AcuLaser CX11/CX11F: Host-based controller using ESC/PageS03
A4 full-color 4 cycle engine and a new controller which includes control circuits for
scanner, ADF and fax are employed on this product. The main controller is AcuLaser CX21/CX21F: PDL controller using ESC/Page-Color
incorporated in the printer mechanism and controls all of the functions. Engine specifications
The diagram below shows the basic configuration of the product. A4, Color 5 ppm / Monochrome 25 ppm, 600 dpi
MFC is employed as new memory, I/O, and ASIC with an image processing
ADF function.
128 MB RAM
Can be expanded up to 512 MB with option RAM
Scanner
Two Built-in Interfaces
High Speed USB 2.0
Ethernet (10/100Base-TX)*
Panel Unit Fax modular (The AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F only)
Note *: Depending on destination, the Ethernet interface is not included in AcuLaser CX11/
CX11F as standard. AcuLaser CX21/CX21F come with the interface regardless of
destination.
Control panel with large LCD
Printer Section
Main Controller
Fax Unit
Figure 2-1. Basic Configuration of the Product
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Overview 88

2.1.1 Outline Specifications Table 2-1. List of Controller Outline Specifications

Item Description
The following shows the outline specifications of the controller.
ROM Capacity AcuLaser CX11/CX11F: 8 MB
Table 2-1. List of Controller Outline Specifications AcuLaser CX21/CX21F: 16 MB
Configuration C567RROG
Item Description
Connector configuration 90pin DIMM
Controller specifications AcuLaser CX11/CX11F: Host-based controller
AcuLaser CX21/CX21F: PDL controller Device MBM29PL32BM-90TN-A5E1
(FUJITSU,32[Mbit] (x16))
Engine Item A4 4 cycles
Slot 1 slot (fixed for standard, no vacancy)
Printing speed 5/25 ppm (Color/Monochrome)
EEPROM Capacity 256[Kbit] SPI serial formula
Scanner UA2510 Scanner
Device M95256-WMW6T (ST micro)
CPU Clock AcuLaser CX11/CX11F: 200 MHz
AcuLaser CX21/CX21F: 400 MHz Host I/F USB Item USB2.0HS
Bus frequency 96 [MHz] Device E05C22AA (Manufactured by EPSON 100PQFP)
Internal core frequency 192 [MHz] (96 [MHz] x 2) Network Cobalt
ASIC Memory + I/O MFC (E05C20BA) Manufactured by NEC FAX I/F External board compatible Laser-FAX
484PBGA 0.13 [um] Scanner I/F CCD I/F UA2510 (Teco) For Scanner connection
Custom I/C ASIC for counterfeiting N3R (B5B-7000) manufactured by OMRON Motor I/F Motor LB1946-K (SANYO,28pin-DIP)
prevention 176QFP Driver
ASIC for USB 2.0 HS E05C22AA Manufactured by EPSON 100PQFP ADF I/F Sheet feed type
(SIX56014F00A) Engine I/F UART
Clock Clock wiring ASIC distribution (CPU, RAM, USB, FAX, N3R) Panel LCD section RCM6106B-A (132 x 65dot)
Clock frequency 96 [MHz] Backlight Installed
USB (Synchronized DMA 24 [MHz] (distributed from ASIC) Switch section 6 x 6 switch matrix
operation)
LED section Seven LEDs are driven by the panel board
FAX 48 [MHz]
RTC Configurations RTC-4543SA + Super capacitor
N3R 48 [MHz]
Backup capability 10 days (because of restriction of the circuit
UART (generated inside ASIC) 48 [MHz] (No SSCG modulation) configuration specification)
Crystal Clock oscillating frequency 48 [MHz] (MA-406 4 [pF]) Power Supply Printer engine 1.0 [A]
24 [V]
oscillator USB 12 [MHz] (MA-406 10 [pF]) 12 [V] Series regulator (PQ12DZ5UJ00H) 0.1 [A]
Video 27.779 [MHz] (MA-406 10 [pF]) Printer engine 1.0 [A]
5 [V]
Reset 3.3V (M51957BFP-C61J) Printer engine 4.0 [A]
3.3 [V]
RAM Standard capacity 128 [MB] SDRAM Series regulator (PQ025EZ5MZPH) 0.5 [A]
2.5 [V]
Configuration C567PROG 64[MB]+C585RAM 64[MB] Series regulator (PQ015EZ1HZPH)
1.5 [V]
Connector configuration 90pin DIMM 1.5 [A] (for internal MFC)
Device MT48LC16M16A2P-75 Series regulator (PQ015EZ01ZPH)
(Micron,256[Mbit] (x16)) 1.5 [A] (for internal CPU)
Slot 2Slots (including standard one slot) Debugging Tool SIF3 Board
Max. capacity 576 [MB]

Sensor I/F*2 Power (24V) ADF I/F*1 CCD_A I/F CCD_B I/F Panel I/F
(2Pin) (2Pin) (12Pin) (14Pin) (13Pin) (30Pin)
CN705 CN704 CN701 CN702 CN405

CN502
S1 S0 P
Motor I/F
CN703 (4Pin)
IC101
JP1
JP2
JP4
CN300 ROM/RAM DIMM (90pin)

CN201 RAM DIMM A (90pin)
CN202 RAM DIMM B (90pin)
IC701
USB I/F CN402

(2Pin) IC401
C588MAIN IC102
FAX I/F*2
CN410 (40Pin)
JP3
R422
IC103 CN602
CN601
Engine I/F
Video I/F (16Pin)
CN407 (2Pin)
CN501
Network I/F Power (5V, 3.3V)

(30Pin) (2Pin)
Figure 2-2. Block Diagram of the C588/C680Main Board
Note *1: Base model does not implement CN704.

*2: Fax model does not implement CN705/CN410.

Data
Address
Other signals CPU
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
CPUCLK
32
96[MHz]
RSTX
VCCOK
COLDRSTX
SSCG oscillator
48[MHz] INTX[4:0]
MFC
EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/CX21F
Reset IC
C567PROG (64MB) SDCLK[0]
ROM/RAM DIMM_90pin 96[MHz]
EEPROM
Data:32bit
C585RAM (64MB) SDCLK[1]
MCLKOUT
RAM DIMM_90pin 96[MHz]
48[MHz] N3R Oscillator for USB
Adr:20bit VIP3S 12[MHz]
Option_RAM SDCLK[2] PCLK
RAM DIMM_90pin 96[MHz] 24[MHz] USB
(E05C22AA)
Built-in SSCG
VIDEO
differential Network I/F
operation Built-in PWM
Engine LVDS VIDEOX
Overview
Debug
PLL frequency
UART multiplier
Fax I/F
FB_CLK
Pixel (External board)
48[MHz]
count
RTC
Figure 2-3. Block Diagram of the Controller
Oscillator for VIDEO Panel
27.779[MHz]
ADCLK
ADF
Power Supply Scanner
CCD Section
5V
CN
3.3V Reg. 2.5V Driver Motor
Reg. 1.5V
Reg. 1.5V
CN
24V Reg. 12V

Revision D
91
2.1.2 Detection Mechanisms

The following shows a list of detection functions.
Table 2-2. Sensor (printer section)

Unit Detection Item Availability Detection Method Remarks
MP tray Paper presence detection Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor ---
Paper size detection Not available --- Enter the paper size from control panel or printer driver
Remaining paper detection Not available --- ---
500-sheet cassette Mounting detection at power ON Not available Electrical continuity Not detected unless the main power is turned off and back on.
Unit detection Available Electrical continuity ---
Cassette presence detection Available Also functions as paper presence. Cassette presence and paper presence are judged by the same
Paper presence detection Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor sensor.
Remaining paper detection Not available --- ---

Paper size detection Not available --- Enter the paper size from control panel or printer driver
MAIN UNIT Paper eject capacity Full detection Not available --- ---
Others OHP sensor Available Reflective photosensor ---
Temperature detection Available Environment sensor ---
(reference)
Humidity detection (reference) Available Environment sensor ---
Density detection (reference) Available Reflective density sensor ---
Toner Cartridge New part detection Available CRUM ---
Presence Detection Available CRUM ---
Color detection Available CRUM Cannot be incorrectly installed as the location of the holes are
different for each color.
Remaining amount detection Available Software counter ---
Near-end detection Available Software counter ---
End detection Available Software counter ---
Photoconductor Unit New part detection Available CRUM ---
(with Transfer Belt and Waste Toner Unit detection Available ---
CRUM
Box)
Home position detection Available Optical type (reflective) sensor ---
Life detection Waste toner detection Available Optical type (interruptive) sensor ---
Near-end detection Available Software counter ---

Table 2-2. Sensor (printer section)

Fuser unit New part detection Not available --- Enter Reset from the control panel.
Unit detection Available Electrical continuity ---
Life detection Near-end detection Available Software counter ---
Developer unit New part detection Not available --- Enter Reset from the control panel.
Unit detection --- When not installed, “Install xxxx TnrCart” is displayed on the
Not available
panel.
Color detection Recognized by rib Cannot be incorrectly installed as the location of the holes are
Available
different for each color.
Life detection Near-end detection Available Software counter ---
Secondary transfer unit New part detection Not available --- Reset from the Control Panel.
Unit detection Not available --- ---
Life detection Near-end detection Available Software counter Not displayed on the panel as it is supposed to be replaced at the
End detection Available Software counter same time as the Fuser unit.
Table 2-3. Sensor (Scanner/ADF)

Scanner unit Opening/Closing of the DOC/ Magnet sensor Connected directly to the controller with a cable detection part on
ADF covers Available the upper housing
Magnet on the cover side
CR home sensor Available Photo-sensor CR home position detection
ADF unit ADF document presence Photo-sensor+Actuator Make sure to insert papers to the correct position
Available
detection
B5/LT detection Micro SW Sets to A4 if not detected properly
Available Detects by the operation of the side guide SW on the backside of
the tray
AS sensor Photo-sensor+Actuator Detects paper presence between the place where documents are
Available
picked up and the separation roller
RS sensor Available Photo-sensor+Actuator Detects paper presence on the turning roller
Opening/Closing of the ADF Micro SW Cover sensor to be opened for clearing paper jam
Available
cover No interlock function

2.2 Printer Section Operating Principle

This section describes printer functions and operating principles of AcuLaser CX11/
CX11F.
2.2.1 Print Process

2.2.1.1 Print Process Overview
This printer is a "full color laser printer" that uses the principle of electrophotographic
recording. The printer contains a drum that forms toner images by four colors of toner
"Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black (simply called YMCK from here on)." The toner
image of each color is formed on the drum, and the toner images formed on the drum is
transferred to the Belt (secondary transfer roller). Full color printing is performed by
overlaying each of the colors on the belt.
The major steps of the print process are described below.

(1) Charging : The drum surface is charged.
(2) Exposure : Image areas are exposed on the drum by a laser beam.
(3) Developing : Image areas on the drum are developed with toner.
(4) Primary transfer : The toner image on the drum is transferred to the Belt.
Figure 2-4. Print Process Overview
(5) Cleaning : The drum is cleaned.
(6) Repeat : In the full color mode, steps (1) to (5) are repeated for
each toner.
(7) Secondary transfer : The toner image on the Belt is transferred to the
paper.
(8) Discharging : The electrical charge of the paper is removed.
(9) Cleaning : The Belt is cleaned.
(10) Fusing : Toner on the paper is fixed with heat and pressure.
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Printer Section Operating Principle 94

2.2.1.2 Print Process Diagram

The diagram below illustrates the entire print process.
Leg_06_002RA
Figure 2-5. Total Print Process Schematic Diagram

2.2.1.3 Technical Explanation of Print Process
CHARGING
At the "Charging" process, BCR (Bias Charge Roll) applies a uniform negative
potential to the drum which rotates at a fixed speed.
BCR keeps contact with the drum and moves together with it.
BCR is a conductive roller, that is negatively charged by HVPS, applies a negative
charge to the drum.
The drum surface is uniformly charged to a negative potential with DC bias
voltage.
The drum is made of conductive material (aluminum cylinder) coated with a
photosensitive material which becomes insulating material in darkness and
becomes conductive when it is subjected to light.
Figure 2-6. Charging Process

EXPOSURE
At the "Exposure" process, a laser beam is applied to the negatively charged surface of
the drum to form an invisible electrostatic latent image onto the drum.
The laser beam is emitted from a laser diode in the ROS ASSY, and directed by
the polygon mirror, fixed mirror and lens of the Scanner Assy in the ROS ASSY.
A single laser beam is output from the laser diode.
The laser beam is irradiated according to the print data (image data) from the
printer controller. The laser beam is output only when a pixel data (minute dot
composing the print data) exists. (On parts to be developed by toner, the laser
diode turns ON, and on parts not to be developed, the laser diode turns OFF.)
The drum surface irradiated by the laser beam becomes a conductor, the negative
charge on the drum flows to the positive side, and the potential on the surface of
the drum is reduced in the result. The section of the drum surface where the
potential has reduced becomes the electrostatic latent image.
Drum
Mirror SOS
PWBA LD
Window
Mirror
SOS Sensor
Lens COL
PWBA SOS
Lens CYL
Scanner Assy
Polygon Mirror
Lens L1 Figure 2-8. Exposure Process
Leg_Sec06_008FA
Figure 2-7. Path followed by the Laser Beam

DEVELOPING
At the "Developing" process, toner is electrically applied to the invisible electrostatic

latent image on the drum, to form a visible image on it.
This printer uses two developing systems: a "rotary developing system" that
successively rotates four Developer Assys, and a "trickle developing system" that
uses developers composed of two components, a carrier and toner.
Developer in the Developer Assy is stirred by a spiral-shaped stirrer called
"Auger", and is supplied to the Magnet Roll located near the drum surface. The
developer is charged by the friction of stirring (toner: negative charge, carrier:
positive charge), and the charges are electrically attracted each other.
As the carrier is a magnetic body, it is attracted to the magnetized Magnet Roll,
and a uniform layer of carrier is formed on the Magnet Roll by passing through a
Trimmer Blade.
A minus voltage is applied to the Magnet Roll together with AC voltage from the
HVPS.
As the electrostatic latent image on the drum that is formed by exposure is charged
positively compared to the other sections on the drum, the toner charged
negatively on the Magnet Roll is attracted only to the image sections on the drum.
Figure 2-9. Development Process (1)

Toner in the Developer Assy is consumed as the number of prints increases. To The charging characteristics of the carrier is depleted due to dirt caused by the
maintain the appropriate development density, the equivalent amount of consumed toner or due to scratches caused by stirring.
toner must be replenished to the Developer Assy from the Toner Cartridge. This To maintain charging characteristics, a minute amount of carrier is mixed into the
replenishment is called "toner dispense". toner in the Toner Cartridge. While toner and carrier are supplied during toner
Two types of control ("PCDC" and "ADC") are used in combination for toner dispense, depleted carrier in the Developer Assy is collected in a separate chamber
dispense. in the Toner Cartridge. This is called the "trickle developing system". Trickle
developing is performed using the rotation of the Rotary Frame Assy during rotary
To obtain a full color image by the four toner colors, a toner image for each of the
developing.
Y, M, C and K colors must be formed on the drum.
On this printer, four Developer Assys are located at 90 degree intervals on the The following shows the mechanism of trickle developing.
circumference of the Rotary Frame Assy, and by rotating the Rotary Frame Assy,
(1) A pipe is inserted into the carrier in the Developer Assy.
the Developer Assy of each color is made to face the drum on which the toner
image of each color is formed. This is called the "rotary developing system". (2) A minute amount of carrier is put into the pipe.
(3) The carrier is skimmed and move farther into the pipe.
(4) The carrier is collected to inside the Toner Cartridge.

PRIMARY TRANSFER (DRUM→BELT)
At the “Primary transfer” process, the toner image formed on the drum surface is
transferred to the Belt surface in Photoconductor Unit by 1st BTR (First Bias Transfer
Roll).
The 1st BTR is a conductive roller, and is positively charged by the HVPS. The 1st
BTR contacts the back side of the Belt and charge the back side to positive.
The negatively charged toner image on the drum surface is attracted to the positive
charge on the back side of the Belt, and is transferred to the Belt from the drum.
Figure 2-12. Primary transfer (Drum→Belt)

CLEANING (DRUM)
At the "Cleaning (drum)" process, residual toner is removed from the drum surface.
Cleaning the drum
Toner that was not transferred to the Belt at the "Primary transfer" process remains
on the drum surface. Since the remaining toner hinder subsequent processes, it is
scraped off by a Cleaning Blade that contacts with the drum, and is collected in the
Waste Toner Box.
Figure 2-13. Cleaning (drum)

REPEAT (FORMATION OF COMPLETE TONER IMAGE)
At the "Repeat (formation of complete toner image)" process, the toner images of each
color formed on the drum surface are successively transferred to the Belt to form a
complete toner image composed of the four colors on the Belt surface.
Figure 2-14. Repeat (1)
Figure 2-15. Repeat (2)

SECONDARY TRANSFER (BELT→PAPER)
At the "Secondary transfer" process, the complete toner image formed on the Belt
surface is transferred to paper by the 2nd BTR (Second Bias Transfer Roll).
The 2nd BTR comes in contact with the Belt only when transferring the image to
paper to prevent the toner image formed on the Belt surface from being destroyed.
Normally, the 2nd BTR is located at its home position where is detected by the 2nd
BTR Retract Sensor. And the 2nd BTR Retract Motor moves the 2nd BTR to
contact with the paper.
The 2nd BTR is a conductive roller. It contacts with the back side of the paper (the
opposite side of the side to be printed), and charged positively by the HVPS.
The Back Up Roll, located on the opposite side of the Belt from the 2nd BTR, is a
conductive roller and earthed to the Frame ground.
By positively charging the back side of the paper by the 2nd BTR, the negatively
charged toner image on the Belt is attracted to the paper and the image appears on
the paper.
Figure 2-17. Secondary transfer (Belt→Paper) (2)
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT

2ND BTR ASSY MOT ASSY MICRO
Figure 2-16. Secondary transfer (Belt→Paper) (1)

DISCHARGING FUSING
At the "Discharging" process, the charge on the paper is neutralized/removed by the At the "Fusing" process, toner is fixed on paper with heat and pressure.
Detack Saw.
Fuser Assy does not have a pressure roll, but has a Fuser Belt instead.
The Detack Saw contacts the back side of the paper. The charge created at the By MOT ASSY FSR drive, Heat Roll rotates and Fuser Belt is driven by the
"Secondary transfer" process is neutralized/removed to prevent the toner from friction. The inner structure of the Fuser Belt is, as shown in the figure below,
splattering around the metal parts. designed to generate a pressure on the Belt and the Heat Roll (Nip Part) to contact
them firmly each other.
CLEANING The toner melts by the Heat Roll heated by the Heater Lamp in the Fuser Assy, and
then the toner is fixed on the paper by the pressure of the Fuser Belt.
At the "Cleaning (belt)" process, the toner remaining on the Belt surface is removed
after the toner image is transferred to the paper.
The Belt Cleaner contacts the Belt only when cleaning the Belt to prevent the toner
image formed on the Belt surface from being destroyed. The IBT Retract Motor
moves the Belt Cleaner to contact the Belt.
Toner remaining on the Belt surface is absorbed by the Cleaning Roll. Then, the
toner is absorbed by the brush and collected in the Waste Toner Box.
Figure 2-19. Fusing
Figure 2-18. Cleaning

2.2.2 Flow of Print Data NOTE 1: Formation of 2-D print image:

One line of the dot image is formed by turning the laser beam from the laser
2.2.2.1 Data Flow diode ON and OFF in accordance with the electric signals (VIDEO signal:
expresses the image data by voltage levels) from the printer controller.
Print data (electric signals) from the Printer Controller follows the flow shown below 2: A single-color image (2-D dot image) is completed by performing the
to become a print image. above operation repeatedly over the entire surface of the image. To
obtain a full color image, formation of 2-D dot images is performed for
each of the four colors.
Host (electric signal) Resolution is determined as follows:
• Main direction : dots/inch
• Sub direction : Lines/inch
Printer controller (electric signal)
ROS ASSY (laser beam)
Electrostatic latent image on drum

(invisible image)
Toner image on drum (toner image)
Toner image on Belt (secondary transfer roller)
Toner image on paper
Print image on paper Figure 2-21. Formation of 2-D Print Image
Leg_Sec06_033FA
Figure 2-20. Overview of Producing Print Image

2.2.3 Drive Transmission Path

CLUTCH ASSY FEED GEAR FEED
2.2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY FEED
Rotation of DRIVE ASSY FEED is transmitted as follows:
DRIVE ASSY FEED
CLUTCH ASSY FEED GEAR FEED

DRIVE ASSY FEED FRONT
Leg_Sec06_042EB
ROLL ASSY TURN 500 ROLL ASSY FEED 500
Figure 2-23. Diagram of Drive Transmission Path
500 FEEDER ASSY

Leg_Sec06_035EB
Figure 2-22. Drive Transmission Flow

2.2.3.2 MOTOR ASSY P/R, DRIVE ASSY PRO

Rotation of MOTOR ASSY P/R and DRIVE ASSY PRO is transmitted as follows: GEAR DRIVE BRUSH
GEAR DTR 23
MOT ASSY P/R DRIVE ASSY PRO GEAR IDLE 26/40

GEAR BRUSH 22/30
GEAR BRUSH 32
IBT ASSY
FLANGE
MOT ASSY P/R
GEAR INPUT GEAR-19
DRUM
GEAR BRUSH 22/30 CAM ASSY-IBT CL
CAM ASSY
GEAR BRUSH 32
GEAR INPUT
GEAR-19
GEAR DRIVE BRUSH DRIVE ASSY PRO
FRONT
ROLL ASSY BRUSH IBT GEAR IDLE 26/40
Leg_Sec06_045EC

GEAR DTR 23
ROLL DTN
Leg_Sec06_036EB

2.2.3.3 MOTOR ASSY MAG, MOTOR ASSY ROT

Rotation of MOTOR ASSY MAG and MOTOR ASSY ROT is transmitted as follows:
MOT ASSY MAG
MOT ASSY MAG MOT ASSY ROT

INPUT GEAR(C)
INPUT GEAR(K)
GEAR IDLE DISP(K)
GEAR IDLE DISP INPUT GEAR FRAM ASSY-ROTARY
GEAR IDLE DISP(C)

GEAR IDLE DISP(Y)
GEAR AUGER DISPENCE INPUT GEAR(M)
GEAR IDLE DISP(M)
AUGER DISPENCE GEAR MAG

INPUT GEAR(Y)
GEAR IDLE GEAR AUGER SUPPLY ROLL MAG
FRAM ASSY-ROTARY MOT ASSY ROT
GEAR AUGER ADMIX AUGER SUPPLY FRONT
Leg_Sec06_044FC
AUGER ADMIX
Developer ASSY-DEVE
GEAR AGITATOR
DEVE ASSY
AGITATOR
Leg_Sec06_037FB

2.2.3.4 MOTOR ASSY DUP

Rotation of MOTOR ASSY DUP is transmitted as follows:
INVERTER ASSY DUP
MOTOR ASSY DUP MOTOR ASSY DUP INV
GEAR 30
GEAR 48H GEAR 48H
GEAR 36
GEAR 20/21H
GEAR 40/42 GEAR 40/42 GEAR 20/21H GEAR 30
GEAR 48H
GEAR 36
MOTOR ASSY DUP INV
GEAR 36
GEAR 36 GEAR 36 GEAR 36
GEAR 40/42
GEAR 48H
GEAR 36 GEAR 36 GEAR 30
MOTOR ASSY DUP
GEAR 40/42
GEAR 30 OW GEAR 30 ROLLER ASSY INVERTER
GEAR 36
INVERTER ASSY DUP GEAR 36
TRANSPORT ASSY DUP
ROLLER ASSY DUP OUT ROLLER ASSY DUP GEAR 30 OW
TRANSPORT ASSY DUP

Leg_Sec06_038FB
Figure 2-28. Drive Transmission Flow FRONT

Leg_Sec06_041FC

2.2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY FSR

Rotation of MOTOR ASSY FSR is transmitted as follows:
FUSER ASSY
MOTOR ASSY FSR (Fuser Motor) GEAR EXIT
GEAR-IDLER EXIT
GEAR 2ND DRIVE ASSY BTR ROLL ASSY FUSER

GEAR-IDLER
BELT ASSY GEAR 2ND
GEAR-IDLER GEAR-27
GEAR HR
MOTOR ASSY FSR
GEAR-IDLER EXIT GEAR HR 2ND BTR ASSY
DRIVE ASSY BTR
GEAR-28
GEAR EXIT ROLL ASSY FUSER MOT ASSY MICRO GEAR-27
MOT ASSY MICRO 2ND BTR ASSY
TRANSFER ASSY
EXIT ROLLER BELT ASSY GEAR-28
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_043EC
FUSER ASSY
CAM ASSY-2ND
TRANSFER ASSY
Leg_Sec06_039EB

2.2.3.6 MOTOR-PH
Rotation of MOTOR-PH is transmitted as follows:
PH ASSY
MOTOR-PH CLUTCH ASSY REGI GEAR 21/104
GEAR 43 MOTOR -PH
GEAR 21/104 GEAR 28/40
GEAR 43 GEAR PICK UP
GEAR 43 GEAR 43
CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
CLUTCH ASSY REGI CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI GEAR 28/40

FRONT
HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI MSI
Leg_Sec06_046EC
ROLL REGI METAL ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI

GEAR PICK UP

ROLL REGI RUBBER
ROLL ASSY MSI
PH ASSY
HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI
MSI
Leg_Sec06_040EB

2.2.4 Paper Feed

This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that make up the
paper feed section. The components are divided into four blocks as follows based on
the basic configuration.
MSI (Multi Sheet Inserter)
Registration & FUSER
500 Paper Feeder
Leg_06_004RA
Figure 2-34. Paper Feed Path Layout

2.2.4.1 MSI (Multi Sheet Inserter)

ROLL MSI
MAIN FUNCTIONS
GUIDE SIDE L/GUIDE ASSY SIDE R

GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R move crossways of the paper feed
direction, and true up the left and right edges of sheets of paper.
SOLENOID PICK UP
The SOLENOID PICK UP controls rotation of GEAR PICK UP. When the
Solenoid is excited, GEAR PICK UP is unlocked, and ROLL MSI rotates by drive
of the MOTOR-PH.
PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI
PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI is normally pressed down by the Cam attached to
the shaft. During paper feed, the shaft rotates, releasing the clamping action of the
cam, and the paper is pressed against the ROLL MSI by spring pressure.
SOLENOID PICK UP
ROLL MSI Leg_Sec06_048FB
Paper that is pressed down by the PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI is fed by the Figure 2-36. Main Components of MSI (2)
frictional force of the ROLL MSI.
SENSOR PAPER EMPTY
The SENSOR PAPER EMPTY detects the presence of paper. When the printer
runs out paper, the actuator of the sensor comes down by its own weight and
CAM
shields the sensor, and the no paper state is detected. (No paper state: Shielding the
sensor) ROLL MSI
SOLENOID PICK UP
CAM
SENSOR PAPER EMPTY

ROLL MSI
GUIDE SIDE L
Leg_Sec06_049FB
Figure 2-37. Operation of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI

GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI Leg_06_047RC
Figure 2-35. Main Components of MSI (1)

2.2.4.2 Registration & FUSER FUSER

Fuser Exit Sensor
MAIN FUNCTIONS

The drive from the MOTOR-PH is transmitted to the ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI,
and paper is fed to the registration section. Fuser In Sensor
SENSOR OHP
This reflective sensor detects whether the print media is plain paper or
transparencies. If the light emitted from the light emitter of the sensor is reflected Regi Clutch
by the media, the sensor judges that the media is plain paper.
SENSOR REGI Regi Sensor
This sensor detects that the leading edge of the paper has reached the Regi
Assy.(No paper state: Light enters the sensor)
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
The drive from the MOTOR-PH is transmitted to the ROLL-REGI METAL, and
paper is fed to the transfer section.
P/H Motor
MOTOR-PH
This DC motor drives the MSI and the Rolls in the registration section.
SENSOR FUSER IN
This reflective sensor detects that paper has come to just before the fusing section.
FUSER ASSY
This fixes the completed toner image that was transferred by the 2nd BTR on the
paper, and feeds the paper before and after fixing.
Fuser Exit Sensor (Inside the FUSER ASSY)
Pre Regi Clutch
This sensor detects that paper has been ejected from the Fuser.
OHP Sensor
(No paper state: Shielding the sensor)
Leg_06_050RA
Figure 2-38. Main Components of Registration & FUSER

ADJUSTING THE LEADING EDGE OF THE PAPER

ROLL-REGI METAL
If paper is fed up to the toner transfer section from the tray or cassette without
adjusting the alignment of the paper, the image sometimes cannot be transferred at the
correct position. In the registration section, the leading edge of the paper is aligned to
the correct position by the "Roll Loop" system.
The paper, which has passed through the ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI, is pressed against
the stopped ROLL-REGI METAL by the "Roll Loop" system to make the paper
curved. When the ROLL-REGI METAL is rotated with the paper curved, the paper can
be fed from the ROLL-REGI METAL without displacement.
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
Leg_Sec06_051FB
Figure 2-39. Adjusting the leading edge of the paper

2.2.4.3 500 Paper Feeder

500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500
MAIN FUNCTIONS GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500
GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
CONNECTOR (HARNESS-ASSY FEED1)
This is used for performing communications with the main unit and supplying
power to the Paper Feeder.
PWBA TRAY 500
Controls Motors and Sensors in the 500 Paper Feeder.
500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY
The Paper Cassette Tray can load 500 sheets of paper.
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 / GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 and GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 move crossways
of the paper feed direction, and true up the left and right edges of sheets of paper.
GUIDE END ASSY Leg_Sec06_052EB
GUIDE END ASSY
The GUIDE END ASSY moves parallel to the paper feed direction, and true up Figure 2-40. Main Components of 500 Paper Feeder (1)
the top and bottom edges of sheets.
SOLENOID FEED
The SOLENOID FEED controls rotation of the Feed Gear. When the SOLENOID
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
FEED turns ON, the Feed Gear is unlocked and Feed Roll rotates. The SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
SOLENOID FEED is repeatedly turned ON/OFF each time a sheet is fed to CONNECTOR SENSOR T/R
control the feeding timing. PWBA MOT ROLL ASSY TURN 500
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 PWBA TRAY 500

The PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 locks on the bottom side when the 500 PAPER
CASETTE ASSY is drawn out of the Paper Feeder. When the 500 PAPER
CASETTE ASSY is inserted into the Paper Feeder, the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM
is unlocked, and paper is pressed against the ROLL ASSY FEED 500 by the force
of the spring.
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
The MOTOR ASSY FEEDER drives the ROLL ASSY FEED 500 and ROLL
ASSY TURN 500.
HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
ROLL ASSY FEED 500
ROLL ASSY FEED 500
Paper that is pressed down by the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 is fed by the
SOLENOID FEED
frictional force of ROLL ASSY FEED 500. When the 500 PAPER CASETTE SENSOR NO PAPER
ASSY is drawn out, the nip with the HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 is released. Leg_Sec06_053EB
Figure 2-41. Main Components of 500 Paper Feeder (2)

ROLL ASSY TURN 500

Feeds the paper fed by the ROLL ASSY FEED 500 to the registration section.
SENSOR T/R
This sensor detects that paper is fed from the 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY.
(No paper state: Shielding the sensor)
SENSOR NO PAPER
The SENSOR NO PAPER detects the presence of paper. When the printer runs out
paper, the actuator of the sensor comes down by its own weight to shield the ROLL ASSY FEED 500
sensor, and the no paper state is detected. (No paper state: Shielding the sensor) HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR

SWITCH FEEDER DOOR detects whether the Tray door is opened or closed. SOLENOID FEED Leg_Sec06_054FB
LOCK MC TO FDR Figure 2-42. Operation of SOLENOID FEED

Turn the levers on the left and right to firmly lock the 500 Paper Feeder to the
main unit.
LOCK MC TO FDR
Leg_06_071RB
Figure 2-43. LOCK MC TO FDR

2.2.5 Xerographic
This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that consist of the
Xerographic.
The Xerographic is divided into the following four blocks based on the basic
configuration.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
Development
2nd BTR Development
2nd BTR
FUSER ASSY
ROS ASSY
Leg_06_003RA
Figure 2-44. Xerographic Structure

2.2.5.1 Main Functions
ROS ASSY
ROS ASSY
ROS ASSY (Raster Output Scanner Assembly) is the exposure unit that outputs Drum
the laser beam to make the electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. (From
here on, ROS ASSY is simply called "ROS.")
ROS consists of the components shown in Figure 2-45.
The PWBA LD (Laser Diode) converts the image data (electric signal), to
Mirror SOS
laser light ON/OFF signals.
PWBA LD constantly monitors the laser light intensity so that laser intensity PWBA LD
Window
stabilizes to the appropriate level when making the electrostatic latent image.
This is called "APC (Automatic Power Control".
Mirror
The Scanner Assy consists of a Scanner Motor that operates at a fixed speed
and a polygon mirror attached to the Motor's rotary shaft.
The laser beam emitted from the PWDA LD is irradiated on the polygon SOS Sensor
mirror. Lens COL
The polygon mirror has six reflecting mirror surfaces, and the angle of the PWBA SOS
Lens CYL
reflected laser beam changes by rotation of the Scanner Motor. This lets the
laser beam scan across on the Drum from side to side. The laser beam makes a Scanner Assy
Lens L1
single line on the Drum with one reflective mirror. Polygon Mirror Leg_Sec06_008FA
The laser beam reflected by the polygon mirror passes through the lens,
mirror and window to reach the drum surface. The lens functions to Figure 2-45. Main Functional Components of ROS
compensate for aberration, the mirror to ensure an optical path, and the
window to prevent the entry of foreign bodies into ROS.
The timing to start writing image data must synchronize exactly with the
beginning of laser scanning in order to properly form an electrostatic latent
image on the drum surface. When the SOS sensor on the PWBA SOS (Start
Of Scan) receives the laser beam, it converts the laser into an electric signal
(SOS signal) for detecting the initial position (start of scan reference point) for
scanning the various lines.

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Photoconductor Unit consists of the Belt, Belt Cleaner, Drum, Drum Cleaner, 1st BTR,
and Waste Toner Boxes for each cleaner. And ANTENNA ASSY, SENSOR TR-0,
SENSOR ASSY ADC, SENSOR IBT RETRACT, SENSOR HUM & TEMP, MOT
ASSY P/R, IBT Brush Motor, and IBT Cleaner Retract Motor are installed inside the
printer for control of Photoconductor Unit operation.
Photoconductor Unit
The toner images of each color developed on the drum surface are transferred
to the IBT Belt one color at a time from 1st BTR, and the full color toner
image is formed by overlaying the four colors. The full color toner image is
transferred to paper by positively charging the paper with the 2nd BTR.
Toner remaining on the Belt surface is collected in the Waste Toner Box by
the Cleaning Blade and brush in the Belt Cleaner.
The Drum is made of conductive material (aluminum cylinder) coated with a
photosensitive material which becomes insulating material in darkness and
becomes conductive when it is subjected to light. The Drum Cleaner consists
of a Cleaning Blade and Waste Toner Box, and scrapes off toner remaining on
the drum surface by the Cleaning Blade that contacts with the drum.The
Waste Toner Box contains an actuator for SENSOR TNER FULL. This
actuator operates as the amount of collected waste toner increases to block
light entering the sensor to detect a full toner state.
The 1st BTR is a conductive roller, and is charged positively by the HVPS.
The 1st BTR contacts the back side of the belt to positively charge it.
Specific data relating to Photoconductor Unit is stored in CRUM XERO.

IBT Brush Motor (DRIVE ASSY PRO) Cleaning Sheet

IBT Brush Motor drives the brush in the Belt Cleaner.
Cleaner Brush Cleaning Roll
IBT Cleaner Retract Motor (DRIVE ASSY PRO)
The IBT Cleaner Retract Motor drives the cam to make the Belt Cleaner to contact
with the IBT Belt.
SENSOR IBT RETRACT
The SENSOR IBT RETRACT detects the position of the cam for retracting the
Belt Cleaner.
MOT ASSY P/R
MOT ASSY P/R drives the Drum. The Motor is connected to the Drum via a
coupling. SENSOR IBT RETRACT
1ST BTR
SENSOR TR-0
ANTENNA ASSY
Sensor TR-0 detects the position of the Belt by reading the silver sticker on the
Belt surface outside the toner image formation area.
Belt
SENSOR ASSY ADC IBT Cleaner
Retract Motor
SENSOR ASSY ADC reads the toner patch densities on the Belt immediately
before secondary transfer, and converts the read densities to voltage values. These
voltage value are used for controlling toner density. IBT Brush Motor
SENSOR HUM & TEMP

SENSOR HUM & TEMP detects the temperature and humidity inside the printer,
Drum Cleaner SENSOR TR-0
and converts these to voltage values. These voltage value are used for controlling
toner density.
MOT ASSY P/R
SENSOR HUM & TEMP

SENSOR ASSY ADC
SENSOR TNER FULL
Drum Leg_06_056RC
Figure 2-46. Main Functional Components of Photoconductor Unit

SENSOR TNER FULL

SENSOR TNER FULL detects the full state of the Waste Toner Box. Toner
remaining on the drum is scraped off by the Cleaning Blade, and collected in the
Waste Toner Box. The Waste Toner Box is provided with an actuator for blocking
light entering the sensing element on the SENSOR TNER FULL. The actuator is
supported by a spring, and is designed to gradually fall by the weight of the toner.
When the actuator falls and blocks the SENSOR TNER FULL, the printer detects
that the Waste Toner Box is full.
Actuator
SENSOR TNER FULL Leg_Sec06_068FB
Figure 2-47. SENSOR TONER FULL Mechanism

DEVELOPMENT TNR CRU Developer

ANTENNA CTRG
The Rotary Developer consists of four (four colors) Toner Cartridges, ANTENNA
CTRG, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, and FRAME ASSY ROTARY. And Dispense
Clutch, MOT ASSY MAG, MOT ASSY ROT, and SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
are installed inside the printer for control of Rotary Developer operation. MOT ASSY MAG
Toner Cartridge
Toner Cartridge supplies toner and carrier. And it has a separate chamber for
collecting depleted carrier. This is called "Trickle Developing System".
MOT ASSY ROT
Specific data relating to the Toner Cartridge is stored on the ANTENNA
CTRG. Writing of data to the ANTENNA CTRG is performed by wireless
communications.
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Dispense Clutch
The HOUSING ASSY-DEVE is provided for each of the Y, M, C and K colors.
Each HOUSING ASSY-DEVE consists of a special Auger for stirring and
supplying Toner, a Magnet Roll for attracting magnetic carrier, forming the
development layer and supplying toner to the drum, and a Trimmer Blade for
making a uniform development layer on the Magnet Roll.
SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
The Frame Assy-Rotary has holes for inserting the bosses of the HOUSING Leg_06_058RA
ASSY-DEVE. To prevent inserting another color's by mistake, the location of the Figure 2-48. Main Components of Development
holes are different from each other.
M Leg_Sec06_066FA
Figure 2-49. Structure of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to prevent wrong insertion

Dispense Clutch (Inside the MOT ASSY MAG)

LATCH ROTARY
The Dispense Clutch is provided to transmit the drive of MOT ASSY MAG to
rotate the Augers for supplying toner.
MOT ASSY MAG
The MOT ASSY MAG rotates the Magnet Roll in the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
MOT ASSY ROT
Acutuator
The MOT ASSY ROT rotates the FRAME ASSY ROTARY that holds the
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
The SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI detects the position of the Rotary Front Cover
Developer to keep the Developer in the right position. The home position is about
10 degrees CW from the transfer position of the black toner Developer.
LATCH ROTARY
LATCH ROTARY is interlocked with movement of the Front Cover. When the
Front Cover is closed, LATCH ROTARY is pressed by the actuator on the Front
Cover to lock the Rotary Developer. When the Front Cover is opened, LATCH
ROTARY returns to the release position to unlock the Rotary Developer.
Leg_06_059RB
Figure 2-50. LATCH ROTARY

SECOND BTR
2ND BTR ASSY

The Second BTR (2ND BTR ASSY) is a conductive roll. It contacts the back of
paper (back of the side to be printed on) and a voltage is applied from the HVPS.
2nd BTR Retract Motor
Brings the BTR to contact the paper during 2nd transfer process, and moves the
BTR away from the paper after the transfer is finished. The motor drive rotates the
shaft and the eccentric cam attached on the shaft. The eccentric cam pushes the
lever for the BTR to bring it contact with the paper for transferring toner image on
the BTR to the paper. When the transferring is finished, the motor starts to rotate
again and the lever is returned to its original position by spring force, causing the
BTR to move away from the paper.
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
2ND BTR ASSY
The position of BTR is detected by the SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. The shaft MOT ASSY MICRO
with the cam for contacting/releasing BTR is provided with a Sensor actuator. The Leg_Sec06_070FB
non-contact state of BTR is detected by the actuator shielding the Sensor, and the
contact state of the BTR is detected when the Sensor is subjected to light. Figure 2-51. SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
Replacing the 2ND BTR is required when the life count (printed pages) exceeds
the prescribed value.

FUSER ASSY
FUSER ASSY
The FUSER ASSY fixes the completed toner image transferred on the paper by
heat and pressure. It also functions to feed paper before and after fixing, and feed Exit Roll
paper to the eject tray or Duplex by switching the gate inside the Fuser. Exit Sensor
The Fuser consists of the following parts:

Heat Roll
Belt
Heater Lamp
Exit Roll
Thermostat
Temp. Sensor
Exit Sensor
Fuser Belt Heat Roll
Thermostat Heater Lamp
Shuts off the circuit for the Heater Lamp when the temperature of the Heat Roll
exceeds a certain level.
Temp. Sensor
Temp. Sensor (Contact type/Non-contact type)
Non-contact type: Monitors the surface temperature of the Heat Roll and turns the
Thermostat
Heat Roll on and off according to the temperature.
Leg_06_060RB
Contact type : Monitors the surface temperature of the Heat Roll and shuts off
the power supply for the Heat Roll when an abnormal high Figure 2-52. Main Components of FUSER
temperature is detected.
Replacing the FUSER ASSY is required when the life count (printed pages)
exceeds the prescribed value.

2.2.5.2 Process control

To ensure a stable image quality, parameters relating to image generation need to be
1st BTR
corrected on a timely basis. Control of the entire print process including the correction
of parameters is called "process control".
TC (Toner Content) control
Toner patches for TC control are created on the Belt surface to measure the density SENSOR
by the SENSOR ASSY ADC. According to the measured result, the amount of ASSY ADC
BCR
toner supply, the amount of laser radiation, and the applied high voltage are Motor/
Clutch
controlled. The execution sequence of the TC control is given on the next page.
Laser
Power
Control
ROS ASSY LV/HVPS
Toner Dispense Control

Voltage/Current
Control
MCU PWB
Calculation of
Calculation of parameters for
compensation value creating ADC toner
patches
Temp. Toner Density

Life Counter Humidity
SENSOR
PWBA CRUM
HUM&TEMP
Leg_Sec06_064EB
Figure 2-53. Process control mechanism

Execution Sequence of TC control

1. Adjustment of SENSOR ASSY ADC
The SENSOR ASSY ADC has two LEDs, one for black and the other for color. To
read each color's patch density, the light emitted from the LED for black is
reflected directly to the Common light receiving element, and the light emitted
from the other LED for color does diffuse reflection and also received by the
element. The SENSOR ASSY ADC has a built-in solenoid which drives the
shutter of the detection window and the part for switching the optical path to the
reference plate.
2. Adjustment according to surrounding environment and deterioration of parts
Printed image quality is adversely affected by temperature and humidity that
change daily, and deterioration of the IBT Belt, drum and other parts. For this
reason, parameters are corrected by capturing temperature/humidity data from
SENSOR HUM & TEMP and printer usage data from CRUM.
3. Creation of toner patches
The output value of HVPS, laser light intensity value, and toner supply amount are
determined from the parameters calculated from various information sources, and Figure 2-54. Sensor ADC mechanism
four toner patches, one for each color, are created on the Belt surface.
4. Reading the toner patches
SENSOR ASSY ADC reads the density of the toner patches created on the Belt
surface, and compares the read values with ideal values. When there is a difference
between the read values and the ideal values, the parameters are recalculated and
toner patches are created again.When the printer judges that the toner patches
density is extremely low or high, it performs the following controls.
Admix control
When the patch density that is read by SENSOR ASSY ADC is extremely
low, the toner will be supplied into the Developer. This is called "Admix
control".
Sweep control
When the patch density that is read by SENSOR ASSY ADC is extremely
high, toner is transferred to the drum, and is scraped off in the Drum Cleaner
to forcibly discharge toner in the Developer. This is called "Sweep control".

5. Adjustment during a print job Control of Toner Cartridge

Toner in the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE is consumed as print jobs are processed. To 7. Near-End Detection
obtain consistent image quality during printing, toner must be supplied to the Counts the operating time of the Dispense Clutch that operates to supply toner
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE. The following control is performed to supply from the cartridges, and causes a Near-End warning when the counted time
appropriate amount of toner. exceeds the prescribed value.
PCDC (Pixel Count Dispense Control) 8. Detection of Empty status
The amount of toner that will be consumed is predicted from the count value The judgement of the Empty status of Toner Cartridges is made based on toner
of the image data, that is input from the controller, to control the toner supply
patch density values (read by ADC sensor). When toner patch density is extremely
amount to the Developer. The supply amount is controlled according to the
low, the printer executes forced supply of toner (Admix operation), and it judges
Toner Dispense time.
that the cartridge is empty if the density of toner patches created after the forced
6. Adjustment after end of printing supply is still low.
When a total of 20 or more sheets have been printed, the image quality
9. Reset of the Empty status
adjustments in 1) to 4) are repeated after completion of printing.
The printer judges that the empty Toner Cartridge is replaced with a new one when
the power is turned off and back on, and the cover is opened and then closed
Toner Cartridge
during the Empty status. Then the printer executes forced supply of toner from the
newly attached cartridge.
Dispense
MOT ASSY MAG
Clutch
Auger
(MCU PWB)
Developer Assy
ROS ASSY
Leg_Sec06_062FB
Figure 2-55. PCDC Mechanism

2.2.6 Electrical
This section explains and illustrates the main functional components making up the
Electrical system.
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
MAIN FUNCTIONS SWITCH-FUSER DOOR SWITCH 2BTR COVER

SWITCH ASSY TOP
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
PWBA MCU SWITCH-INLK FUSER
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
PWBA MCU performs communication with the printer controller, and controls the
parts to perform printing operations.
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
LV/HVPS supplies +24 VDC, + 5VDC and +3.3 VDC to each of the parts from
the AC power supply, and supplies high voltage to the parts for transferring and SWITCH-PH DOOR
discharging.
PWBA HVPS Main Board
PWBA HVPS supplies high voltage to IBT Cleaner, 2nd BTR, and Cleaning
Sheet.
PWBA HVPS
PWBA HVPS supplies high voltage to IBT Cleaner, 2nd BTR, and Cleaning
Sheet. PWBA FUSER CONT
PWBA HVPS
PWB ASSY ROT LV / HVPS

PWB ASSY ROT
PWB ASSY ROT creates the pulse for the motors according to input signal from PWBA CRUM
Leg_06_061RA
the PWBA MCU and supplies the pulse signal to the motors. Figure 2-56. Main Functional Components of Electrical
PWBA ESS
Converts print data transmitted via a network, USB, parallel port or etc., and
communicates with a host computer. The memory can be expanded up to 512 MB
with an optionally available additional memory.
OP PANEL
OP PANEL displays the printer status on the LCD or by LEDs. Printer operations
are performed by the buttons on OP PANEL.
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR detects whether the COVER FUSER is opened or
closed.

SWITCH-PH DOOR
LATCH LEVER
SWITCH-PH DOOR detects whether the CHUTE ASSY REAR is opened or
closed.
PWBA CRUM FUSER ASSY
This non-volatile memory saves printer information. (Non-Volatile Memory)
SWITCH 2BTR COVER
SWITCH 2BTR COVER detects whether the COVER-PR 2ND is opened or
closed.
SWITCH ASSY TOP
SWITCH ASSY TOP is a switch to cut the +24VDC power supply for driving
motors and other parts when the COVER TOP is opened. Detection of opening/
closing is performed by detecting a change in voltage caused +24 VDC being
conversed to +3.3 VDD by the +24 VDC dividing circuit in MCU.
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
SWITCH-INLK FUSER is a switch to cut the +24VDC power supply for driving
motors and other parts when the COVER FUSER is opened.
SWITCH-INLK FRONT FUSER LOCK SWITCH
Leg_Sec06_072EB
SWITCH-INLK FRONT is a switch to cut the +24VDC power supply for driving
motors and other parts when the COVER FRONT ASSY U is opened. Figure 2-57. FUSER LOCK SWITCH
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR detects whether the COVER FRONT ASSY is opened
or closed.
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
This printer is equipped with a FUSER LOCK SWITCH for detecting the
mounting state of the FUSER ASSY. When the FUSER ASSY is not locked or not
adequately locked by the latch lever, the FUSER LOCK SWITCH cuts the coil
power supply for the Fuser Lamp power supply relay inside PWBA FUSER
CONT. This causes the printer a service call error "E537 FUSER ASSY error" to
prevent the printer from operating.

2.2.7 Operating Modes

The printer has the following six operating modes:
WARM UP mode : The printer is warming up (until the printer is ready
for printing).
READY mode : The printer has finished the warm-up and is ready
for printing.
PRINTING mode : The printer is currently printing.
LIGHT SLEEP mode:FUSER is turned OFF to save power.ERROR mode:
DEEP SLEEP mode : In addition to the Fuser, +24VDC is also turned OFF to save
more power.
ERROR mode : The printer has detected an error.
The following are not defined as the ERROR mode.
• No paper
(when the printer detects there is no paper in the tray or cassette)
• No paper tray
(when the printer detects there is no paper cassette)
• Warnings relating to service life of consumables Figure 2-58. Operating Modes Overview

2.2.8 Flying-start printing

This printer improves performance when printing full-color images by performing
flying-start printing.
Sequence
1. The printer starts printing as soon as it finishes to receive Yellow data of one page.
2. While the Yellow image is being developed and transferred to the IBT Belt, the
next data, Magenta, is received.
3. While the Magenta image is being developed and transferred to the IBT Belt, the
next data, Cyan, is received.
4. While the Cyan image is being developed and transferred to the IBT Belt, the next
data, Black, is received.
5. When the Black image has been developed and transferred to the IBT Belt,
formation of the full color toner image is completed.

2.3 Scanner Operating Principles OTHERS
This section describes operating principles of the scanner and ADF of the AcuLaser Magnet sensor : Detects the open/close status of the document cover or
CX11/CX11F. the ADF. It is attached on the backside of the upper
case of the scanner unit. When the sensor detects that
the document cover or the ADF is opened while the
2.3.1 Scanner Mechanism Overview scanner is in standby mode, the scanner lamp is turned
on and the Carriage Unit moves to its home position.
The scanner is a flatbed scanner with 600 dpi optical resolution and supports up to A4
or Letter/Legal document size. The internal mechanism is broadly divided into two Carriage Lock Mechanism: Locks the Carriage Unit to protect it during
parts; Carriage Unit that includes the light source and CCD sensor, and Carriage Drive transportation. To lock the Carriage Unit, set the
Mechanism. sliding lock lever on the upper case of the scanner unit
to LOCK position.
CARRIAGE UNIT
C H E C K Make sure to unlock the Carriage Unit (set the sliding lock
CCD Sensor Board : Includes a Color CCD line sensor and a control circuit for P O IN T lever to unlock position) before turning the power on.
the sensor. When the product should be transported for some reason,
Light source : White cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL) move the Carriage Unit to the lock position using the control
panel “Printer Engine Restrictions” (p39) and then lock the
Inverter Board : Generates a voltage for the light source (Rises positive 24 unit with the sliding lock lever.
VDC, and converts it to AC Voltage).
Mirror/Lens : Leads the light reflected from document to the CCD sensor. CR Motor Home Sensor Timing Belt CR Guide Shaft (one-side support)
CARRIAGE DRIVE MECHANISM
CR Motor : A four-phase pulse motor with 96 poles. Driven and

controlled by the driver circuit which uses PWM (pulse-
width modulation) current control system.
Carriage Mechanism:Moves the Carriage Unit to the sub scanning direction by
driving of the CR motor on the Carriage Shaft which Flag for detecting
supports one side of the Carriage Unit. home position
Home sensor : A transparent sensor attached to the bottom of the Carriage Carriage Unit
Unit. Detects the carriage home position by detecting the
flag located near the home position in the lower case of the
scanner unit.
Figure 2-59. Key Components of the Scanner Mechanism
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Scanner Operating Principles 134

2.3.1.1 Electric Circuit

As the scanner mechanism is powered and controlled directly by the main controller, it
does not have its own control circuit.
The power supply and the control signals to the scanner unit from the main controller
are as follows.
Power Supply
+24VDC (to drive the CR Motor and power the Inverter Circuit)
+12VDC and +5VDC (for the CCD Sensor)
+3.3VDC (for the Home Sensor and the Magnet Sensor)
Control Signals
CCD Sensor drive control
CR Motor drive control
ADF drive control

2.3.2 ADF Mechanism Overview SENSORS

The ADF of this product is designed to feed original document to be scanned by the DOC Sensor : Detects whether document is loaded on the document
fixed CCD Sensor in the scanner unit and allows up to 50 sheets of document (when tray or not. The document should be loaded with its
the paper basic weight is 80g/m2) to be loaded and scanned automatically. The leading edge contacting with the guide for it, or the
documents are scanned in paper feed direction while they are fed by the ADF. The key sensor cannot detect the document.
mechanisms of the ADF are as follows.
AS Sensor : Detects that document is transported to the Separation
Roller after starting scanning operation.The sensor turns
PAPER FEED MECHANISM
ON when it detects the leading edge of the document,
ADF Motor : The four-phase pulse motor with 96 poles drives the paper and turns OFF when it detects the posterior end of the
feed mechanism that transports document loaded on the document. Scanning operation for the next document is
document tray to scanning section. started if the DOC Sensor is ON when the AS Sensor
becomes OFF.
Clutch : Switches on and off the Pick up Roller by transmitting or not
transmitting the ADF Motor drive. The clutch is turned on to RS Sensor : Detects whether document is on the Turning Roller or
transmit the motor drive to the Pick up Roller when the DOC not. Scanning document is started when the document is
sensor is ON at the point of starting scanning operation. transported by prescribed steps from when its leading
edge is detected by the RS Sensor.
Pick up Roller : Picks up document one by one and transports it to the next
mechanism.The roller lowers and contacts with document to ADF Cover Sensor : Detects whether the ADF cover is opened or closed. The
feed it by ADF Motor drive when scanning operation is sensor turns ON when the ADF Cover is opened and
started with the DOC sensor ON. When the leading edge of stops the ADF Motor and turns off the clutch.
the document is detected by the RS Sensor, the roller moves Document Width Sensor: Detects the positions of the side edge guides on the
upward to return to its standby position. document tray. The two Document Width Sensors,
Separation Roller : Located under the Pick up Roller to prevent multi-feed of located at the position different from each other, detects
documents. document size (width) by combination action of them as
follows.
Turning Roller : Transports document fed by the Separation Roller to the
scanning position. This roller turns at a speed according to Table 2-4. Document Size Detection by Two Document Width Sensors
the print resolution so that scanning in paper feed direction
Edge Guide Position B5 Sensor LT Sensor
can be performed properly.
Letter size OFF ON
Exit Roller : Transports document that has been scanned and transported
A4 size OFF OFF
by the Turning Roller to the eject tray. Also changes the
position of the document stopper lever inside the document B5 size ON OFF
tray.

A magnet is attached on the bottom surface of the ADF Unit. The Magnet Sensor
installed in the scanner unit detects the ADF open/close status by detecting the position Turning Roller Separation Roller
of the magnet.
ADF Close Status RS Sensor AS Sensor DOC Sensor
The sensor turns OFF upon detecting that the magnet is in close proximity to the
sensor.
Pick up Roller
ADF Open Status
The sensor turns ON upon detecting that the magnet moved away from the sensor.
When the sensor turns ON during the scanner is in standby mode, the lamp is turned on
and the Carriage Unit moves to its home position after scanner initialization operation. Document Stopper Lever
ADF Open Status: The product judges that scanning operation using the document
table will be performed.
Exit Roller
Carriage (Scanner)
Figure 2-60. Key Components of the ADF Mechanism

CHAPTER
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 Overview 3.1.2 Checking Installation Status

Before starting troubleshooting, make sure that the following conditions are all met.
For efficient troubleshooting, verify the condition of the trouble carefully using FIP
(Fault Isolation Procedures) with reference to Chapter7 “Wiring Connection Diagrams”
(p.584) and Chapter2 “OPERATING PRINCIPLES” (p.87).
1. The power supply voltage must be within the specification limits. Measure the
voltage at the wall socket.)
2. The POWER CORD must be free from damage, short circuit or broken, or
3.1.1 Procedure for troubleshooting miswiring in the POWER CORD.
Perform troubleshooting work according to the following flowchart. 3. The printer must be grounded properly.
Verify the condition 4. The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to too high or
of the trouble low temperature, too high or low humidity, or abrupt temperature change.
5. The printer should not be located near waterworks, near humidifiers, near heaters
or near flames, in a dusty atmosphere, or in a place where the printer can be
Preliminary Check
exposed to air blasts from an air conditioner.
6. The printer should not be located in a place where volatile or inflammable gases
Start are produced.
7. The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to direct
sunlight.
Chapter2 “OPERATING PRINCIPLES” (p.87)
Execute FIP 8. The printer must be located in a well-ventilated place.
Chapter7 “Wiring Connection Diagrams” (p.584)
9. The printer must be placed on a solid, stable and flat surface.
10. The paper used must conform to the specifications.
(Standard paper is recommended.)
Check if the trouble 11. There should be no errors in handling of the printer.
returns to normal
12. The Regular Replacement Parts must have been replaced every time their
respective specified number of sheets has been printed.
Preventative * Clean the Feed Roller. And check if there is any
maintenance other part which is likely to cause another error.
Finish
Figure 3-1. Procedure for troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING Overview 139

3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work 4. When touching any hot surfaces, take care not to burn yourself.
1. Be sure to unplug the POWER CORD before starting troubleshooting work except 5. Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from your body.
when turning power ON is needed. 6. When replacing the PWBA MCU in accordance with the FIP, be sure to perform
Never touch any live parts unnecessarily when the power is on. “MCU DATA Backup” and “MCU DATA Restore” operations to maintain the set
W A R N IN G
The power switch/inlet part of the LVPS is alive even when the of information specific to the subject engine.
power switch is turned OFF. Take care not to touch any live parts.
C A U T IO N Refer to “4.2.11.5 PWBA MCU” (p445) for all the details about the
PWBA MCU replacement.
2. If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed, and the interlock
and safety switches turned ON, be sure to disconnect the ROS ASSY connector (P/
J601), except when its connection is required.
C A U T IO N Extra caution is required when performing work with the scanner
W A R N IN G If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed,
or the ADF opened, as the product becomes unstable and may easily
and the interlock and safety switches turned ON, there is a danger
fall over.
of the laser beam being emitted from ROS ASSY. Be sure to
disconnect the ROS ASSY connector (P/J601), except when its
connection is required.
3. If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed, and the interlock
and safety switches turned ON, be careful of a high voltage from HVPS.
W A R N IN G If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed,
and the interlock and safety switches turned ON, never touch
HVPS and any other high voltage output part as a high voltage may
be output from HVPS.
TROUBLESHOOTING Overview 140

3.2 Errors/Warnings Display PRINTER-DEPENDENT ERROR
As this product is an all in one printer, it is necessary to figure out which function has Table 3-2. Printer-Dependent Error
caused the error or the warning displayed on the panel. This section explains principal Panel Message Description
errors and warnings by each mechanism and function. See references for details on
Service Req Eggg Engine related service request
errors and warnings. “3.4.4.2 List of Service Request” (p159)
Check Transparency “ Error list related to paper jam” (p156)
SYSTEM-DEPENDENT ERROR
Paper Jam WWWWW “ Error list related to paper jam” (p156)
Table 3-1. System-Dependent Error Irregular Density “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
Panel Message Description Remove Photoconductor ---
Service Req Cffff Controller related service request Install uuuu TnrCart “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
“3.4.4.2 List of Service Request” (p159) Wrong Toner “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
Optional RAM Error --- Toner Cart Error uuuu “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
Invalid N/W Module --- Install Photoconductor “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
Invalid PS3 --- Wrong Photoconductor “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
Invalid PCL --- Photoconductor Trouble “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
Service Req C2010 Fax uninstalled (for fax model only) Replace Toner uuuu “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
Service Req C2011 ADF uninstalled (for fax model only) (p.297) Replace Photoconductor “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
Service Req C2012 N3R Asic Error wwwww open “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
ROM writing error Failed to update the data Print Overrun ---
Fax Error Start up initialization could not be performed normally, Need more Memory ---
however, the product can recover from the error.
Invalid Data ---
Scanner Error Start up initialization could not be performed normally,
however, the product can recover from the error.
uuuu Toner Low “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
(Motor error, Scanner error) Worn Photoconductor “ Other errors and warnings” (p157)
Worn Fuser ---
TROUBLESHOOTING Errors/Warnings Display 141

SCANNER-DEPENDENT ERROR COPY MODE-DEPENDENT ERROR
Table 3-3. Scanner-Dependent Error Table 3-5. Copy mode-Dependent Error

Panel Message Description Panel Message Description
Scanner cover open error (p.296) Document Error For counterfeit prevention
PC connection failed • The computer is not connected directly to the
product.
• Required application has not been installed.
Net connection failed ---
ADF Jam (p.297)
Release Carriage Lock (p.296)
FAX-DEPENDENT ERROR
Table 3-4. Fax-Dependent Error

Panel Message Description
Fax error Fax unit failure. (p.300)
Set Document to ADF When Legal is selected by Fax mode (p.300)
Fax Communication Error An error occurred during transiting/receiving faxes.
(p.300)
No Report Print Info. (p.300)
Cannot Send when Receiving Fax cannot be transmit during Fax reception. (p.300)
Unable to Transmit Color Fax At the time of color Fax transmission, if the telephone
line is used, it decides that color transmission is
impossible. For this reason, transmitting does not
become "Cannot Send when Receiving".
Cannot Fax cause of Power Off Report Transmitting a fax is attempted during the product is
printing out a power off report. (p.300)
TROUBLESHOOTING Errors/Warnings Display 142

3.3 MFP Maintenance Mode 3.3.1 Self diagnosis

In self diagnosis mode, the product automatically makes the diagnosis of each part
To enter the MFP maintenance mode, hold down the [Color Start], [Up], [Down] and
(scanner, printer, fax, panel, and B unit) and displays the result on the panel.
[Right] buttons, and turn the printer on. There are two items in the MFP maintenance
Procedures and details on the diagnosis are described below.
mode; self-diagnosis and fax maintenance. Self diagnosis confirms error status, on the
other hand, fax maintenance provides maintenance for the fax unit.
PROCEDURES TO ACCESS THE SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE
Menu levels of the MFP maintenance mode is shown below.
1. Hold down the [Color Start], [Up], [Down], and [Right] buttons and turn the
printer on. When the screen shown below appears, select (highlight) "Self
Diagnosis" and press [Start] to enter the screen for selecting the part to be
diagnosed.
[MFP Maintenance Mode Initial Screen]
2. The [Up] and [Down] buttons allow you to select (highlight) the part to be
diagnosed, then press [Right] to start the self diagnosis.
Upward (downward) arrow on the left of the item indicates that there are more
items on the topside (downside) to be displayed. In this case, press the [Up] and
[Down] buttons to scroll the display.
[Self Diagnosis Initial Screen]
TROUBLESHOOTING MFP Maintenance Mode 143

DETAILS ON SELF DIAGNOSIS ITEMS 3.3.1.2 Scanner Self Diagnosis

The error that is currently happening in the scanner section and the status concerning
Details on self diagnosis classified by item are described below. the ADF is displayed on the panel. When you select "Scanner Unit" and press [Right],
Scanner : “3.3.1.2 Scanner Self Diagnosis” (p144) the result is displayed as shown below after "Running" is displayed for a while.
Diagnosed items and the descriptions are shown in Table 3-6.
Printer : “3.3.1.1 Printer Self Diagnosis” (p144)
Fax : “3.3.1.3 Fax Self Diagnosis” (p145)
Panel : “3.3.1.4 Panel Self Diagnosis” (p145)
B Unit : “3.3.1.5 B Unit Self Diagnosis” (p146)
Diagnosed as Normal Diagnosed as Abnormal When the ADF is not installed
3.3.1.1 Printer Self Diagnosis Note : Once displayed, press [Left] to return to the previous screen (Self Diagnosis initial
screen).
The error code of the engine related service call error that is currently happening in the When the ADF is not installed, the diagnosis for "ADF cover open", "ADF jam", and
printer section is displayed on the panel. The panel also displays if the RTC "ADF paper detection" are replaced with "-"(hyphen).
malfunction is emerging or not. For descriptions of the service request errors, refer to
Table 3-6. Scanner Self Diagnosis Items
“3.4.4.2 List of Service Request” (p159).
Displayed
When you select “Printer Unit” and press [Right], the result is shown as described Displayed Characters
Characters Description
(1 byte)
below after “Running” is displayed for a while. (1 byte)
Correct OK (Normal) Origin Correction
Displays engine related error code NG (Abnormal) (The difference between the actual origin position
detected when correcting it and the origin
position specified by spec is 2 mm or more.)
Warm up Same as above Warm up (Unable to warm up)
Motor Same as above Motor (motor driving failure)
Cover OPEN (Cover is open) ADF cover open (ADF cover is open)
Diagnosed as Normal Diagnosed as Abnormal Diagnosed as Normal CLOSE (Cover is
(Base Model) closed)
Note : Once displayed, press [Left] to return to the previous screen (Self Diagnosis initial Jam NONE (Undetected) ADF paper jam (ADF jam error occurred)
screen). ON (Detected)
As the base model is not equipped with the RTC, the diagnosis for the RTC is replaced
with “-” (hyphen). Paper NONE (No paper) ADF paper detection
ON (Paper present) (Paper is loaded on the ADF)
Note : The diagnoses for “ADF cover open”, “ADF jam”, and “ADF paper detection” are
performed every one second and the displayed results are updated each time the
diagnoses are made. As for “Origin correction”, “Warm up”, and “Motor”, the statuses
diagnosed during start-up operation are always displayed.

3.3.1.3 Fax Self Diagnosis Diagnosed button names are displayed as shown in the table below.
All the modules on the fax unit listed below are checked if they are operating normally Table 3-7. Button Names Displayed in Panel Self Diagnosis
and the results are displayed on the panel. When any abnormality is detected, “NG” is Button Name Displayed Button Name (2 byte)
displayed with an error code. For details on the error code, refer to “3.6.1
Copy COPY
Troubleshooting by Panel Message” (p300).
Fax FAX
Image memory Gate array
Scan SCAN
Modem Flash memory Setup SETUP
One Touch Dial A ONE TOUCH A
When you select “Fax Unit” and press [Right], the result is displayed as shown below
One Touch Dial B ONE TOUCH B
after “Running” is displayed for a while.
One Touch Dial C ONE TOUCH C
Advanced/Menu MENU
Reset RESET
Up UP
Numbers that indicate Down DOWN
the detected error
Diagnosed as Normal Diagnosed as Abnormal Left LEFT
Note : Once displayed, press [Left] to return to the previous screen (Self Diagnosis initial Right RIGHT
screen). Speed Dial SPEED DIAL
Pause/Redial REDIAL
3.3.1.4 Panel Self Diagnosis Cancel CANCEL
Operations for all the buttons on the control panel can be checked. Select the “Panel Asterisk *
Unit” and press the [Right] button. Within six seconds after the screen below is Hash #
displayed, press the button you wish to check. If the pressed button is working
Numeric keypad Numbers that correspond to the button
normally, the button name is displayed with 1-byte alpha numeric characters as shown
pressed
in Table 3-7.
B/W Start B&W START
Color start COLOR START
[Right] Button When the Button is Released

Diagnosed as Normal
Note : The button name is displayed while pressing the button, and disappears when the button
is released. If no button is pressed for more than six seconds, the screen automatically
returns to the previous screen (Self Diagnosis initial screen).

3.3.1.5 B Unit Self Diagnosis

B unit (ASIC for counterfeiting prevention) is checked if it is operating normally, and
the result is displayed on the panel.When you select “B Unit” and press [Right], the
diagnosed result; OK or NG will appear after “Running” is displayed for a whole.
Diagnosed as Normal Diagnosed as Abnormal
Note : Once displayed, press [Left] to return to the previous screen (Self Diagnosis initial
screen).

3.3.2 Fax Maintenance DETAILS ON FAX MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Fax Maintenance is provided for controlling memory including destination addresses
Details on each item in the Fax Maintenance menu are described in the following
and for checking if there are any problems with the fax unit. Procedures to access the
sections.
items of the Fax Maintenance are shown below.
Memory Clear : “3.3.2.1 Memory Clear” (p148)
PROCEDURES TO ACCESS THE FAX MAINTENANCE Memory Check : “3.3.2.2 Memory Check” (p149)
1. Hold down the [Color Start], [Up], [Down], and [Right] buttons and turn the Parameter Check : “3.3.2.3 Parameter Check” (p150)
printer on. Select (highlight) “Fax Maintenance” and press [Right] to enter the Fax Module Check : “3.3.2.4 Module Check” (p151)
Maintenance menu screen.
Signal Check : “3.3.2.5 Signal Check” (p152)
C A U T IO N Some of the functions provided in the Fax Maintenance menu

involve fax basic operation settings. Improper operation or setting
using the functions may cause fax malfunction.
Do not change the settings unless instructed to do so, or need for
doing it arises.
[MFP Maintenance Mode Initial Screen]
2. Select (Highlight) a target item in the Fax Maintenance menu, and press [Right] to
enter the menu screen of the selected item.
[Fax Maintenance Initial Screen]

3.3.2.1 Memory Clear

Address memory used for the speed dials and other information memory concerning fax transmission/reception can be cleared at once. Six items are provided and memory areas to
be cleared are preset by the items as shown in Table 3-8.
When you select “Memory Clear” and press [Right], the Memory Clear menu screen as shown below will be displayed. Select a target item and press [Right] to clear the memory
areas. Be sure to check which memory areas will be cleared by the selected item with reference to Table 3-8 before executing the operation.
Table 3-8. Memory Areas to be Cleared by Item in Memory Clear

Communication Report
Speed Dial
Memorized Unfinished
Item Group Dial System Error Internal Error
Panel Indication Sending Job Info System Counter System Parameter
(Memory Area Category) One Touch Dial History History
Print Data Info
Personal Number/Name
Receiving Job Info
ALL All area O O X O O O
Fax user User area O X X X X O
Fax system System area X O X O O O
Fax system counter Counter area X X O X X X
Fax error history Error area X X X O O X
Fax system parameter Parameter area X X X X X O
Note O : Cleared
X : Cannot be cleared
Example of Memory Clear Screen
Processing “All area” Clear Clearing “User area” When Error Occurs (Failed
Completed to clear “System area”)
Note : “OK” is displayed when the process is completed normally, “NG” is displayed with numbers that indicate the error when failed to complete the process. Once the process is over, press [Stop]
to return to the previous screen (Memory Clear menu screen).

3.3.2.2 Memory Check MEMORY CHECK: WRITE

Memory contents of the fax unit can be displayed (Read) on the panel and can be
changed (Write). When an address is input with the numeric keypad, current setting values in the address
are displayed beside “CURRENT”. When new setting values are entered beside
When you select “Memory Check” and press [Right], the screen as shown below will “NEW”, overwrite process is executed. “OK” is displayed when the process is
be displayed. Select (Highlight) either Read or Write and press [Right] to proceed to completed normally, “NG” is displayed with numbers that indicate the error when
the entry screen. failed to overwrite the specified memory area.
Memory Check: Example of the Write Screen
Numbers that indicate

Current Setting Values error contents
MEMORY CHECK: READ
When an address in the memory is input with the numeric keypad, 64-byte data is When Address is Entered Display of Current Setting When Failed to Read
retrieved from the specified address. If the data is read properly, last four digits of the Current Data
specified address and 4 byte of data set to the address are displayed in a line. When Enter new setting Numbers that indicate the error
failed to read the memory, “NG” is displayed with numbers that indicate the error.
Memory Check: Example of the Read Screen
When New Setting is Entered Overwriting Completed When Failed to Overwrite

Normally
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the Memory Write, the display returns to the
When Address is Entered Display of the Read Data When Failed to Read Data previous screen (Memory Write initial screen).
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the Memory Read, the display returns to the
previous screen (Memory Check initial screen).

3.3.2.3 Parameter Check PARAMETER CHECK: WRITE

Specifies main and sub codes of the system parameter for the fax unit, and reads/writes When main/sub codes of the parameter and a new setting are entered with the
the parameter values. numeric keypad, the overwriting process is started. “OK” is displayed when the
process is completed normally, “NG” is displayed with numbers that indicate the
When you select “Parameter Check” and press [Right], the screen as shown below will
error when failed to overwrite.
be displayed.Select (Highlight) either Read or Write and press [Right] to proceed to the
entry screen. Parameter Check: Example of the Write Screen
Enter new setting
PARAMETER CHECK: READ When Main/Sub Codes and When Overwriting When Failed to
New Setting is Entered Completed Overwrite
When the main and the sub codes of the parameter to be read are entered with the Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the parameter check (Write), the display
numeric keypad, the current setting of the parameter are displayed. “OK” and returns to the previous screen (Parameter Check initial screen).
readout data are displayed when the process is completed normally, “NG” is
displayed with numbers that indicate the error when failed to read the data.
Parameter Check: Example of the Read Screen
Numbers that
Current Setting indicate the error
When Main/Sub Codes Display of Current Setting When Failed to Read Data
are Entered
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the parameter check (Read), the display
returns to the previous screen (Parameter Check initial screen).

3.3.2.4 Module Check

Modules on the fax unit is checked individually or all at once if they are operating
normally, and the result is displayed on the panel.
When you select “Module Check” and press [Right], the screen as shown below will be
displayed. Select (Highlight) the module you wish to check and press [Right] to start
the diagnosis.
Example of the Module Check Screen
Numbers that indicate the error
Module Check in Progress Diagnosed as Normal Diagnosed as Abnormal
Note : Once the process is over, press [Stop] to return to the previous screen (Module Check
initial screen).

3.3.2.5 Signal Check Example of Signal Check Result Screen
C A U T IO N This function is intended for use in the particular purpose; filing

application for the use of the fax machine, machine test or license
test with a common carrier present.
When a Check Code and Signal Check in

Relay ON/OFF test and the signal transmission test of the fax unit are performed by Setting is Entered Progress
entering the check code and the parameter with the numeric keypad.
When you select “Signal Check” and press [Right], the screen as shown below will be
displayed. Select (Highlight) “Parameter” and press [Right] to proceed to the entry
screen. When the check is in progress, “Running” is displayed on the panel. “OK” is
displayed when the process is completed normally, “NG” is displayed with numbers
that indicate the error when failed to perform the process.
When the Check Result When the Check Result
is Normal is Abnormal
Note : For items other than Sub Code=103 (relay 1-2 setting) and Sub Code=104 (phone line
initialization), the process is continued in the fax unit until the [Stop] button is pressed.
Press the [Stop] button to cancel the process. Once the process is over, press [Stop]
button to return to the Fax Maintenance initial screen.

3.4 Printer 6. When, for example, “P/J1 ↔ P/J2” is indicated in FIP for the voltage
check, check for the all relating terminals between “P/J1” and “P/J2” with
reference to Chapter7 “Wiring Connection Diagrams” (p.584).
3.4.1 Notes on Using FIP
7. Taking “P/J1-2PIN ↔ P/J3-4PIN” as an example, the minus side “P/J3-
1. The troubleshooting method described here assumes that there is no
4PIN” is AG (Analog Ground), SG (Signal Ground), or RTN (Return).
malfunction in the printer controller (PWBA ESS). If you cannot fix a
Therefore it is possible to connect to another AG, SG, or RTN pin as the
problem even by following the troubleshooting procedure, replace the
minus side instead of “P/J3-4PIN”. Before doing so, check that each AG-
printer controller with a normal one and then follow the same procedure. If
to-AG, SG-to-SG, or RTN-to-RTN has continuity properly. Be careful not
you cannot recover the printer from the trouble even with the printer
to connect to a wrong pin since the level of AG, SG and RTN are different
controller replaced, replace the “Possible parts that caused the error”
from each other.
shown in FIP and related parts with new ones in order one by one, and
repeat operation checks. 8. When measuring the voltage, perform measurement with the
Photoconductor Unit, 2ND BTR ASSY, and paper cassette loaded, covers
2. Some normal parts such as MCU, LV/HVPS, FUSER ASSY, 2ND BTR
closed, and power ON.
ASSY may be required as FIP troubleshooting tools to identify the cause of
the trouble. So, you need to have those spares in advance. 9. All voltage values given in the FIP are approximate values. So actually
measured values should not be completely the same as those given in the
3. Be sure to unplug the POWER CORD before starting troubleshooting work
FIP.
except when turning power ON is needed. Never touch any live parts
unnecessarily with the power cord connected. 10. Note that FIP does not provide any description on removal of parts which
are supposed to be removed to remove the target part, and the procedures.
4. Conventions used to represent connectors are as follows:
“P/J12” = The connector (P/J12) in a connected state. 11. Any parts listed in “Possible parts that caused the error” in the FIP are
“P12” = The plug side in connector (P/J12) disconnected state. regarded as the source of the trouble and signifies that the parts or the
(except when the jack is directly mounted on the board) assemblies (HIGH ASSY) containing those parts should be replaced with
“J12” = The jack side in connector (P/J12) disconnected state. normal ones one by one, and checking should be repeated.
(except when the jack is directly mounted on the board)
12. In the FIP, the optional paper feeder of the printer is called “Tray1”.
5. When, for example, “P/J1-2PIN ↔ P/J3-4PIN” is indicated in FIP for the
13. FIP may contain descriptions that distinguish between certain
voltage check, set the plus side of a measuring tool to “2PIN” on “P/J1”
specifications. Be sure to follow such instructions properly to remedy the
and set the minus side of the tool to “4PIN” on “P/J3”.
problem.
TROUBLESHOOTING Printer 153

Power ON
TROUBLESHOOTING
When Deve Home Position
Sensor Error occurs:
Yes Error recovery processing
→ Go to “FIP-1.41” Error displayed?
(See “List of Errors and Warnings”)
No
When an ID Error occurs:

XERO → Go to “FIP-1.9”
Y Toner → Go to “FIP-1.13”
M Toner → Go to “FIP-1.17” Rotary operation check and When IBT CLN Fail occurs
Home Position correction
C Toner → Go to “FIP-1.21” → Go to “FIP-1.48”

K Toner → Go to “FIP-1.25” (8 secs)
MOT ASSY ROT operation*1
Fuser warm-up
(time out within 45 secs)
3.4.2 Warming-Up Flowchart at Power-ON
CRUM check and ADC TC target

density value correction*2(16 secs)
Heater red-hot
When Deve Home position IBT Brush Motor operation

Sensor Error occurs:
→ Go to “FIP-1.41”
Yes Fuser temperature

at Power ON lower than the Fuser
temperature threshold
When IBT CLN Fail occurs
value? → Go to “FIP-1.52”
No
Printer
Yes Detected value
of temperature sensor of a fixed
difference with value at previous
printing?
No
PLC sequence*3
(30 secs or more)
MOT ASSY ROT operation*1
Figure 3-2. Warming-up flowchart at power-on

BTR/IBT cleaning
(11 secs)
The following flowchart (outline) shows the printer’s warm-up operation, from power-on to when the printer is ready to print.
IBT Brush Motor operation
Total 37 to 840 seconds

(depending on ambient environment)
*1 : Rotary rotates 360º plus a little more during No End of cleaning
Home Position correction and 720º during and FUSER warm-up?
execution of the PLC sequence.
*2 : By ADC TC correction, the target density Yes

value of TC is being corrected according
to the developing machine drive time.
Ready (ready to print)
*3 : The PLC sequence creates and reads ADC Leg_Sec001_031FA
patches to adjust toner and image density.
154
Revision D
3.4.3 FIP 3.4.3.1 FIP Procedure

FIP is provided as the first step to identify the cause of trouble. FIP is a guide for Ask the operator about the conditions of the trouble.
proceeding with troubleshooting while checking error codes and for various other Was the operator operating the printer correctly?
symptoms of trouble. Y N
Teach the operator the right way.
Is an error code displayed on the panel?

Y N
Is the printer jammed?
Y N
Is it an image quality problem?
Y N
Is the printer making abnormal noise?
Y N
Perform troubleshooting with reference to

“7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams”
Fix the trouble with reference to

“3.4.6 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble” (p.291).
Fix the trouble with reference to

“3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble” (p.259).
Ask the operator again to verify the condition at the time of jamming, and
execute a print job in the same conditions. Is the printer jammed again?
Y N
Recheck the trouble condition, and execute preventive maintenance
by using “7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams” (p.584), doing proper
adjustment when disassembled, or according to various information.
Write the Jam code down.

Fix the trouble with reference to the FIP.
Have the F/W version of main controller and mechanical controller been updated?
Fix the trouble with reference to the FIP.

3.4.4 FIP by Message Display Table 3-9. List of Paper Jam Error
Panel Jammed
3.4.4.1 List of Errors and Warnings Message Location
Description See FIP
Jam LC, G The SENSOR T/R did not turn ON within the specified 26
ERROR LIST RELATED TO PAPER JAM (1) time from SOLENOID FEED - ON. (p.188)
Jam MP, E The SENSOR REGI did not turn ON within the 27
(2) specified time from SOLENOID PICK UP - ON. (p.191)
FUSER ASSY Jam E The SENSOR REGI did not turn ON within the 28
(3) specified time from SENSOR T/R - ON. (p.193)
EXIT SENSOR (Sensor in Fuser)
Jam E The SENSOR REGI did not turn OFF within the 29
(3)(4) specified time from CLUTCH ASSY REGI - ON. (p.196)
Jam E, F The Exit Sensor did not turn ON and SENSOR FUSER
30
(4)(5) IN turned OFF within the specified time from CLUTCH
㽷 ASSY REGI - ON. (p.198)
SENSOR FUSER IN
Jam C, E, F The Exit Sensor did not turn ON and SENSOR FUSER
㽶 (4)(5) IN turned ON within the specified time from CLUTCH
31
2ND BTR ASSY ASSY REGI - ON. (p.202)
CLUTCH ASSY REGI Check SENSOR OHP detected media other than OHP at the
㽵 Transparency (3) OHP setting or detected OHP at a setting other than
32
OHP. (p.206)
Jam E The SENSOR FUSER IN did not turn ON within the 33
(4) specified time from CLUTCH ASSY REGI - ON. (p.207)
SENSOR REGI Jam C Exit Sensor did not turn OFF within the specified time 34
SENSOR OHP
㽳㽴 (4)(5)(6) from SENSOR REGI - OFF.
(p.210)
SOLENOID PICK UP Jam LC, G SENSOR T/R was ON at Power ON or when I/L was
---
closed. (Static Jam)
㽲 SENSOR T/R Jam E SENSOR OHP was ON at Power ON or when I/L was
---
SOLENOID FEED
Jam E SENSOR REGI was ON at Power ON or when I/L was 35
---
closed. (Static Jam) (p.212)
Jam C, E, F SENSOR FUSER IN was ON at Power ON or when I/L
---
Leg_001_040FA was closed. (Static Jam)
Figure 3-3. Jammed Location Jam C Exit Sensor was ON at Power ON or when I/L was
---

OTHER ERRORS AND WARNINGS
Table 3-10. List of Errors and Warnings

Class Panel Message Error LED Description See FIP
Y Toner Low --- The toner supply time of the Yellow toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated. 64 (p.247)
M Toner Low --- The toner supply time of the Magenta toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated. 65 (p.248)
Warning
C Toner Low --- The toner supply time of the Cyan toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated. 66 (p.249)
K Toner Low --- The toner supply time of the Black toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated. 67 (p.250)
Worn Photoconductor --- SENSOR TNER FULL of the Waste Toner Box has detected a toner full state. The printer, however, can operated. 68 (p.251)
--- The number of drum rotations has exceeded the specified value. The printer, however, can be operated. 69 (p.252)
Install Y TnrCart ON The Yellow toner cartridge is not mounted. 1 (p.163)
Install M TnrCart ON The Magenta toner cartridge is not mounted. 2 (p.164)
Install C TnrCart ON The Cyan toner cartridge is not mounted. 3 (p.165)
Install K TnrCart ON The Black toner cartridge is not mounted. 4 (p.166)
Install Photocondctr ON The photoconductor unit is not mounted. 5 (p.167)
Photocondctr Trouble A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA ASSY (CRUM XERO). 6 (p.168)
Error
ON An error occurred when writing data to ANTENNA ASSY (CRUM XERO). 7 (p.169)
A photoconductor unit with a memory of different specification device is attached. 8 (p.170)
Wrong Photocondctr ON A drum cartridge of a different specification is attached. 9 (p.171)
TonerCart Error Y A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA CTRG (CRUM CTRIG). 10 (p.172)
ON An error occurred when writing data to ANTENNA CTRG (CRUM CTRIG). 11 (p.173)
A Yellow toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached. 12 (p.174)
Wrong Toner Y ON A Yellow toner cartridge of a different specification is attached. 13 (p.175)

Table 3-10. List of Errors and Warnings

Class Panel Message Error LED Description See FIP
TonerCart Error M A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA CTRG (CRUM CTRIG). 14 (p.176)
A Magenta toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached. 16 (p.178)
Wrong Toner M ON A Magenta toner cartridge of a different specification is attached. 17 (p.179)
TonerCart Error C A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA CTRG (CRUM CTRIG). 18 (p.180)
A Cyan toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached. 20 (p.182)
Wrong Toner C ON A Cyan toner cartridge of a different specification is attached. 21 (p.183)
TonerCart Error K A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA CTRG (CRUM CTRIG). 22 (p.184)
A Black toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached. 24 (p.186)
Wrong Toner K ON A Black toner cartridge of a different specification is attached. 25 (p.187)
Error
Irregular Density ON The Coverage for 500msec of the image exceeds the limit. 45 (p.225)
Replace Toner Y ON It is time to replace the Yellow toner cartridge. 53 (p.235)
Replace Toner M ON It is time to replace the Magenta toner cartridge. 54 (p.236)
Replace Toner C ON It is time to replace the Cyan toner cartridge. 55 (p.237)
Replace Toner K ON It is time to replace the Black toner cartridge. 56 (p.238)
Replace Photocondctr ON It is time to replace the photoconductor unit. 57 (p.239)
Blink The number of drum rotations has exceeded the specified value. 69 (p.252)
A Open ON COVER FRONT ASSY U is open. 58 (p.240)
E Open ON CHUTE ASSY-REAR is open. 59 (p.241)
F Open ON CHUTE ASSY-FSR is open. 60 (p.242)
C Open ON COVER FUSER is open. 61 (p.243)
G Open ON The Cover of Tray 1 is open. 62 (p.244)
B Open ON COVER TOP is open. 63 (p.245)

3.4.4.2 List of Service Request

Table 3-11. List of Service Request
Class Panel Message Description See FIP
Service Req E510 ROS Motor Failure
40 (p.218)
PWBA MCU could not receive signals output from SOS Sensor in ROS within the specified time.
Service Req E511 TR0 Failure
39 (p.216)
PWBA MCU could not receive signals output from SENSOR TR-0 (TR0 Sensor) at the specified timing.
Service Req E513 NVRAM Error
38 (p.215)
An error occurred in NVRAM on PWBA MCU.
Service Req E514 PAGE Timeout
37 (p.214)
The PAGEC/PAGE signal was not received within 60sec after transmitting PFA.
Engine Related (E)
Service Req E517 Communication Error Feeder

36 (p.213)
A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and Feeder.
Service Req E520 BTR 2 Advance Error
47 (p.227)
The 2nd BTR Retract Sensor does not turn ON within the specified time.
Service Req E521 BTR 2 Error
46 (p.226)
The input of 2nd BTR Retract Sensor does not change when 2nd BTR is initialized.
Service Req E524 Low Density
44 (p.223)
The output value of SENSOR ASSY ADC (ADC Sensor) is below the specified value.
Service Req E525 High Density
43 (p.221)
The output value of SENSOR ASSY ADC (ADC Sensor) exceeds the specified value.
Service Req E526 ADC Contamination
42 (p.220)
SENSOR ASSY ADC (ADC Sensor) error


Service Req E527 Deve Home Position Sensor Error
PWBA MCU could not receive signals output from Rotary Home Position Sensor within the specified time after rotation of Rotary 41 (p.219)
Developer.
Service Req E530 Humidity Sensor Error
50 (p.231)
When the Input from SENSOR HUM & TEMP is out of specification.
Service Req E533 Temp Sensor Error
49 (p.231)
SENSOR HUM & TEMP detected a temperature below -7°C or over 55°C.
Service Req E537 Fuser Fail
Engine Related (E)
• Control Thermistor detected a temperature exceeding the specified temperature.

Safety Thermistor detected a temperature exceeding the specified temperature.
• The Control Thermistor did not detect a Ready even though the specified time elapsed from Main Lamp ON at Warm Up.
• The Main Lamp continues to stay lit even after time specified for the Main Lamp elapsed after the Control Thermistor detected a 48 (p.229)
Ready.
• The Control Thermistor detected a temperature below the specified temperature even after the specified time elapsed from Main
Lamp ON at Warm Up.
• The latch lever of FUSER ASSY is set incorrectly.
Service Req E542 IBT CLN Fail
52 (p.234)
SENSOR IBT RETRACT cannot detect Advance/Retract of CAM ASSY-IBT CL.
Service Req E547 Feed Motor Failure
51 (p.232)
DRIVE ASSY FEED (Feed Motor) of the Feeder is not rotating at the specified speed.
Service Req E998 Engine Communication Error
70 (p.253)
A communication error between the controller and the PWBA MCU via the video I/F occurred


Service Req C0017 CPU error (undefined interruption)
Service Req C0081 CPU error (TLB modification exception)
Service Req C0082 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch])
Service Req C0083 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store])
Service Req C0084 CPU error (address error exception [Load/Fetch])
Service Req C0085 CPU error (address error exception [Store])
Service Req C0086 CPU error (bus error exception [Fetch])
Service Req C0087 CPU error (bus error exception [Load/Store])
Controller Related (C)
Service Req C0088 CPU error (SYSCALL exception)

Service Req C0089 CPU error (Break exception)
Service Req C0090 CPU error (reserving command exception) C1 (p.255)
Service Req C0091 CPU error (unused coprocessor exception)
Service Req C0092 CPU error (FPU exception)
Service Req C0093 CPU error (TLB exception)
Service Req C0094 CPU error (XTLB exception)
Service Req C0095 CPU error (cache exception)
Service Req C0096 CPU error (Trap exception)
Service Req C0097 CPU error (FPU exception)
Service Req C0098 CPU error (watch exception)
Service Req C0128 ~ 0254 CPU error (undefined trap)
Service Req C0255 CPU error (NMI exception)


Service Req C0256 CPU error (divide by 0)
Service Req C0257 CPU error (arithmetic overflow)
Service Req C0258 CPU error (break occurrence) C1 (p.255)
Service Req C0800 IPL error (controller defect)
Service Req C0998 Engine communication error (only when power-on)
Service Req C0999 Engine flash ROM has no program data
Service Req C1002 Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, etc.) C2 (p.256)
Service Req C1010 Verification error
Service Req C1020 RAM error (slot 0)
C3 (p.256)
Service Req C1021 RAM error (slot 1)
Service Req C1120 ROM checksum error (bit 0 to 7) (program)
C4 (p.257)
Controller Related (C)

Service Req C1200 EEPROM writing error
Service Req C1210 EEPROM writing times limit
Service Req C1400 Engine initialization error
Service Req C1500 CCNV hardware error C1 (p.255)
Service Req C1550 Initialization hardware error for SRAM for compression
Service Req C1600 Video series hardware error (including PWM IC calibration error)
Service Req C1610 Video series hardware error (VCNV error)
Service Req C1700 Built-in network board hardware error
C6 (p.258)
Service Req C1702 Network board is not installed
Service Req C1800 Illegal SPD
C1 (p.255)
Service Req C1999 Other hardware errors
Service Req C2000 Software error C5 (p.257)
Service Req C2010 Fax module is not installed C7 (p.258)
Service Req C2011 ADF unit is not installed C8 (p.258)
Service Req C2012 Image processing unit B ASIC error C9 (p.258)

3.4.4.3 Error Code FIP Step Check Yes No

3.4.4.3.1 Engine related error 7 ANTENNA CTRG operation check
Disconnect and then re-connect P/J415 on
Go to Step[8]. Go to Step[9].
FIP-1 PWBA MCU.

Does the error recur when the power is turned
Panel Message ON?
Install Y TnrCart 8 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step[9].

Disconnect the P/J415 from PWBA MCU.
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Possible parts that caused the error Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
Toner Cartridge Y HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y J415-1 ↔ J106-2
ANTENNA CTRG HARNESS ASSY MAIN J415-2 ↔ J106-1
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG PWBA MCU
9 Check after replacement of HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE Y
Go to Step[10]. End of procedure
Troubleshooting Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y. (p.423)

Step Check Yes No ON?
1 Model check of Toner Cartridge Y

Is a Toner Cartridge Y that complies with the
Go to Step[2]. Replace with a
Toner Cartridge 10 Check after replacement of ANTENNA
ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA CTRG
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
specifications attached? Y that complies Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or

with the ANTENNA CTRG. (p.418) or (p.420)
specifications.
2 Attachment check of Toner Cartridge Y
Is the Toner Cartridge Y attached correctly?
Go to Step[3]. After re-
attachment
ON?
Go to Step[3].
3 Does the error recur even if the power is

turned ON/OFF several times?
4 Attachment check of HOUSING ASSY-

DEVE Y
attachment
Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y attached Go to Step[5].
correctly?

6 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge Y Go to Step[7].

Replace Toner Cartridge Y.
End of procedure

ON?

FIP-2 Step Check Yes No
Panel Message 7 ANTENNA CTRG operation check

Install M TnrCart PWBA MCU.

Possible parts that caused the error ON?
Toner Cartridge M HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M 8 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step[9].
Repair broken or
shorted part.
ANTENNA CTRG HARNESS ASSY MAIN Do all of the wiring below have normal
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG PWBA MCU continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
Troubleshooting J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Step Check Yes No 9 Check after replacement of HOUSING

ASSY-DEVE M
1 Model check of Toner Cartridge M

Is a Toner Cartridge M that complies with the
Toner Cartridge
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M. (p.423)
specifications attached? M that complies
ON?
with the
specifications.
10 Check after replacement of ANTENNA
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
2 Attachment check of Toner Cartridge M

Is the Toner Cartridge M attached correctly?
attachment Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or
ANTENNA CTRG. (p.418) or (p.420)
Go to Step[3].
Go to Step[4]. End of procedure ON?

DEVE M
attachment
Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M attached Go to Step[5].
correctly?

6 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge M Go to Step[7].

Replace Toner Cartridge M.
End of procedure

ON?


Install C TnrCart PWBA MCU.

Toner Cartridge C HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C 8 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step[9].
Repair broken or
shorted part.
J415-1 ↔ J106-2

ASSY-DEVE C
1 Model check of Toner Cartridge C

Is a Toner Cartridge C that complies with the
Toner Cartridge
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C. (p.423)
specifications attached? C that complies
ON?
with the
specifications.
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
2 Attachment check of Toner Cartridge C

Is the Toner Cartridge C attached correctly?
Go to Step[3].

DEVE C
attachment
Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C attached Go to Step[5].
correctly?

6 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge C Go to Step[7].

Replace Toner Cartridge C.
End of procedure

ON?


Install K TnrCart PWBA MCU.

Toner Cartridge K HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K 8 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step[9].
Repair broken or
shorted part.
J415-1 ↔ J106-2

ASSY-DEVE K
1 Model check of Toner Cartridge K

Is a Toner Cartridge K that complies with the
Toner Cartridge
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K. (p.423)
specifications attached? K that complies
ON?
with the
specifications.
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
2 Attachment check of Toner Cartridge K

Is the Toner Cartridge K attached correctly?
Go to Step[3].

DEVE K
attachment
Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K attached Go to Step[5].
correctly?

6 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge K Go to Step[7].

Replace Toner Cartridge K.
End of procedure

ON?

Panel Message 5 Check after replacement of Photoconductor Go to Step [6].

Unit
End of procedure
Install Photocondctr Replace Photoconductor Unit.

Photoconductor Unit HARNESS-ASSY 6 Check after replacement of GUIDE CRU

ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
XERO Replace GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA

GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY PWBA MCU ASSY. (p.401) or (p.404)
Troubleshooting ON?
Step Check Yes No
1 Model check of Photoconductor Unit

Is a Photoconductor Unit that complies with the
Photoconductor
specifications attached? Unit that
complies with the
specifications.
2 Attachment check of Photoconductor Unit

Re-attach Photoconductor Unit.

ON?
3 ANTENNA CTRG operation check

Disconnect and the re-connect P/J416 on
PWBA MCU.
ON?
4 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY

XERO
Go to Step[5]. Replace
HARNESS-
Disconnect the P/J416 from PWBA MCU. ASSY XERO.
Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J416-4 ↔ J109-2
J416-5 ↔ J109-1

Panel Message 6 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY

XERO
Go to Step [7]. Replace
HARNESS-
Disconnect P/J416 from PWBA MCU. ASSY XERO.
Photocondctr Trouble
Possible parts that caused the error continuity.
J416-4 ↔ J109-2
Photoconductor Unit GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY J416-5 ↔ J109-1
HARNESS-ASSY XERO PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS 7 Check after replacement of GUIDE CRU
Go to Step [8]. End of procedure
Replace GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA

Troubleshooting ASSY. (p.401) or (p.404)

Go to Step [2]. Replace with a
Photoconductor 8 Power supply check to PWBA MCU
Are the following power voltages being
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [9].
specifications attached? Unit that supplied to PWBA MCU from LV/HVPS?

complies with the
J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
specifications.
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Does the error recur when the power is turned 9 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Disconnect P/J410 from PWBA MCU and P/ HVPS. (p.448)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
ON?
J502 from LV/HVPS.
3 Check after replacement of Photoconductor Go to Step [4].
Unit
End of procedure
continuity?
Replace Photoconductor Unit.
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
ON?
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
4 Check of ANTENNA ASSY
Is ANTENNA ASSY dirty and damaged?
Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [6].
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
ASSY, and then J410-5 ↔ J502-5
proceed to step J410-6 ↔ J502-6
[5]. J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
5 Does the error recur when the power is
turned ON?

Panel Message 6 Check after replacement of GUIDE CRU

Photocondctr Trouble Replace GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA

ASSY. (p.401) or (p.404)
Possible parts that caused the error Does the error recur when the power is turned
ON?
Photoconductor Unit GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA
ASSY 7 Power supply check to PWBA MCU
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [8].
HARNESS-ASSY XERO PWBA MCU supplied to PWBA MCU from LV/HVPS?

LV/HVPS J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
Troubleshooting J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Step Check Yes No 8 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Go to Step [2]. End of procedure J502 from LV/HVPS.
Does the error recur when the power is turned continuity?
ON? J410-1 ↔ J502-1

Unit
End of procedure J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
Replace Photoconductor Unit. J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Does the error recur when the power is turned J410-5 ↔ J502-5
ON?
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
3 Check of ANTENNA ASSY
Is ANTENNA ASSY dirty and damaged?
Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5]. J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
ASSY, and then
proceed to step
[4].

turned ON?

XERO
HARNESS-
Disconnect P/J416 from PWBA MCU. ASSY XERO.
continuity?
J416-4 ↔ J109-2
J416-5 ↔ J109-1

Panel Message 4 Power supply check to PWBA MCU

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [5].
Photocondctr Trouble supplied to PWBA MCU from LV/HVPS?

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
Possible parts that caused the error
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Photoconductor Unit PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN LV/HVPS 5 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
Troubleshooting
continuity?
Step Check Yes No
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Photoconductor
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
Unit that J410-3 ↔ J502-3
specifications attached?
complies with the J410-4 ↔ J502-4
specifications. J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
ON?

Unit
End of procedure

ON?

Panel Message 4 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/

Repair broken or
shorted part.
Wrong Photocondctr J502 from LV/HVPS.
Possible parts that caused the error continuity?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Photoconductor Unit PWBA MCU J410-2 ↔ J502-2
HARNESS ASSY MAIN LV/HVPS J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Troubleshooting
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
Step Check Yes No
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
Photoconductor
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
specifications attached? Unit that

complies with the
specifications.

Unit
End of procedure

ON?
3 Power supply check to PWBA MCU

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [4].
supplied to PWBA MCU from LV/HVPS?

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC

Panel Message 6 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step [7].

Disconnect P/J415 from PWBA MCU.
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error Y Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Toner Cartridge Y ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA
CTRG 7 Check after replacement of ANTENNA
HARNESS ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or

LV/HVPS ANTENNA CTRG. (p.418) or (p.420)
Troubleshooting ON?
Step Check Yes No 8 Power supply check to PWBA MCU

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [9].

Toner Cartridge
J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
specifications attached? Y that complies
with the J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
specifications. J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC

Re-attach Toner Cartridge Y.
9 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Does the error recur when the power is turned J502 from LV/HVPS.
ON? Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
3 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge Y Go to Step [4].
End of procedure
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
ON? J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
4 Check of ANTENNA CTRG
Is ANTENNA CTRG dirty and damaged?
Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [6].
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
CTRG, and then J410-6 ↔ J502-6
[5]. J410-8 ↔ J502-8

turned ON?

Panel Message 6 Check after replacement of ANTENNA

TonerCart Error Y Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or

ON?
CTRG 7 Power supply check to PWBA MCU
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [8].
HARNESS ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU supplied to PWBA MCU from LV/HVPS?
LV/HVPS J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
Repair broken or
shorted part.
ON? J410-1 ↔ J502-1

J410-3 ↔ J502-3
ON? J410-5 ↔ J502-5

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5]. J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
CTRG, and then
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
proceed to step
[4].

turned ON?
5 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step [6].

Repair broken or
shorted part.
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1


Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [5].
TonerCart Error Y supplied to PWBA MCU from LV/HVPS?

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Toner Cartridge Y PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN LV/HVPS 5 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
Troubleshooting
continuity?
Step Check Yes No
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Toner Cartridge
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
Y that complies J410-3 ↔ J502-3
with the J410-4 ↔ J502-4
specifications. J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
ON?

End of procedure

ON?


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Wrong Toner Y J502 from LV/HVPS.
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Toner Cartridge Y PWBA MCU J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Troubleshooting
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
Step Check Yes No
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
Toner Cartridge
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
specifications attached? Y that complies

with the
specifications.

End of procedure

ON?

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [4].

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC


Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error M Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Toner Cartridge M ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA CTRG
HARNESS ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU 7 Check after replacement of ANTENNA
LV/HVPS Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or

Troubleshooting Does the error recur when the power is turned
ON?
Step Check Yes No
8 Power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA Go to Step [9].
Toner Cartridge
MCU. (p.445)

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
with the
specifications. J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC
2 Attachment check of Toner Cartridge M Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
Re-attach Toner Cartridge M. 9 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
ON? J502 from LV/HVPS.
3 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge M Go to Step [4].
End of procedure
continuity?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
ON?
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [6].
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
[5]. J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
turned ON?


TonerCart Error M Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or

ON?
Toner Cartridge M ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [8].
LV/HVPS J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Re-attach Toner Cartridge M.
ON? J410-1 ↔ J502-1

J410-3 ↔ J502-3
ON? J410-5 ↔ J502-5

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5]. J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
CTRG, and then
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
proceed to step
[4].

turned ON?

Repair broken or
shorted part.
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1


Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error M J502 from LV/HVPS.
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Toner Cartridge M PWBA MCU J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Troubleshooting
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
Step Check Yes No
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
Toner Cartridge
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

with the
specifications.

Re-attach Toner Cartridge M.

ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [5].

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Wrong Toner M J502 from LV/HVPS.
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Toner Cartridge M PWBA MCU J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Troubleshooting
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
Step Check Yes No
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
Toner Cartridge
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

with the
specifications.

End of procedure

ON?

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [4].

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC


Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error C Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Toner Cartridge C ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA

LV/HVPS ANTENNA CTRG. (p.418) or (p.420)
Troubleshooting ON?
Step Check Yes No 8 Power supply check to PWBA MCU

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [9].

Toner Cartridge
J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
with the J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
specifications. J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC

Re-attach Toner Cartridge C.
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Does the error recur when the power is turned J502 from LV/HVPS.
ON? Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
3 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge C Go to Step [4].
End of procedure
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
ON? J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [6].
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
[5]. J410-8 ↔ J502-8

turned ON?


TonerCart Error C Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or

ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [8].
LV/HVPS J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
Step Check Yes No 8 Continuity check between PWBA MCU and Replace LV/
LV/HVPS of HARNESS ASSY MAIN HVPS. (p.448)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Go to Step [2]. End of procedure Disconnect P/J410 from PWBA MCU and P/
J502 from LV/HVPS.
Does the error recur when the power is turned Do all of the wiring below have normal
ON? continuity?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
End of procedure
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
ON? J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5].
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
proceed to step
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
[4].

turned ON?

Repair broken or
shorted part.
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1


Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error C J502 from LV/HVPS.
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Toner Cartridge C PWBA MCU J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Troubleshooting
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
Step Check Yes No
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
Toner Cartridge
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

with the
specifications.


ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [5].

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Wrong Toner C J502 from LV/HVPS.
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Toner Cartridge C PWBA MCU J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Troubleshooting
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
Step Check Yes No
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
Toner Cartridge
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

with the
specifications.

End of procedure

ON?

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [4].

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC


Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error K Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Toner Cartridge K ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA
HARNESS ASSY PWBA MCU Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or

MAIN
LV/HVPS Does the error recur when the power is turned
ON?
Troubleshooting
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [9].
Step Check Yes No
Toner Cartridge
J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
K that complies J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
with the J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC
specifications.
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Re-attach Toner Cartridge K.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
ON? continuity?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
3 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge K Go to Step [4].
End of procedure
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
ON? J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [6].
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
[5].

turned ON?


TonerCart Error K Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or

ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [8].
LV/HVPS J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
Repair broken or
shorted part.
ON? J410-1 ↔ J502-1

J410-3 ↔ J502-3
ON? J410-5 ↔ J502-5

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5]. J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
CTRG, and then
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
proceed to step
[4].

turned ON?

Repair broken or
shorted part.
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1


Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error K J502 from LV/HVPS.
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Toner Cartridge K PWBA MCU J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Troubleshooting
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
Step Check Yes No
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
Toner Cartridge
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

with the
specifications.


ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [5].

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Wrong Toner K J502 from LV/HVPS.
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Toner Cartridge K PWBA MCU J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Troubleshooting
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
Step Check Yes No
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
Toner Cartridge
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

with the
specifications.

End of procedure

ON?

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [4].

J410-1 ↔ J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 ↔ J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 ↔ J410-7/8: 24 VDC

Panel Message 5 Does the error recur when a test print is

made?
Jam LC, G
6 Operation check of SOLENOID FEED
Does SOLENOID FEED operate correctly?
Go to Step [12]. Go to Step [7].

Make a test print and confirm.
ROLL ASSY TURN 500 ROLL ASSY FEED 500 7 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED Go to Step [8].
MAIN
Replace
HARNESS-
HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 SOLENOID FEED ASSY FEED
Disconnect P/J437 from PWBA TRAY 500.
HARNESS ASSY MAIN DRIVE ASSY FEED Do all of the wiring below have normal MAIN.
PWBA TRAY 500 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 continuity?
ACTUATOR T/R SENSOR T/R J437-16 ↔ P610-2
J437-17 ↔ P610-1
HARNESS ASSY FEED 3 PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS CLUTCH ASSY FEED 8 Check after replacement of DRIVE ASSY
FEED
HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN DRIVE ASSY FEED Replace DRIVE ASSY FEED 250. (p.467)
Does the error recur when a test print is made?
Troubleshooting
Step Check Yes No

9 Check after replacement of PWBA TRAY 500 Go to Step [10].
Replace PWBA TRAY 500. (p.465)
End of procedure

1 Check of the paper Replace with
Is the paper loaded in the paper tray wrinkled or new, dry paper.
Go to Step [2].
torn? 10 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 Go to Step [11].

Disconnect P/J435 from PWBA TRAY CONT.
Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED 1.
2 Paper size setting check
Does the size of the paper in use match the size
Go to Step [4]. Change the paper
size setting, and
continuity? (p.471)
of the paper set on the control panel? proceed to step J435-2 ↔ P608-9
[3]. J435-3 ↔ P608-8
3 Does the error recur when a test print is

made?
Go to Step [4]. End of procedure J435-4 ↔ P608-7
11 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace PWBA Repair broken or

4 Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY Go to Step [5].
of Feeder section
Replace the
ROLL in
Disconnect P/J421 from PWBA MCU. MCU. (p.445) shorted part.
Open COVER-REAR 500 of Feeder. question.
continuity?
Are ROLL ASSY TURN 500, HOLDER ASSY J421-7 ↔ J608-4
RETARD 500, ROLL ASSY FEED 500 and
J421-8 ↔ J608-3
other parts attached correctly?
J421-9 ↔ J608-2
Also, do these parts rotate smoothly without
any dirt or damage?
Turn by hand to check.

Step Check Yes No Step Check Yes No
12 Operation check of ACTUATOR T/R

Does ACTUATOR T/R move smoothly
ACTUATOR 18 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 Go to Step[19].
Replace
HARNESS-
without any damage? Does it leave the sensing T/R. (p.490) Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY FEED 1.
area of Tray Path Sensor when there is paper? continuity? (p.471)
Does it enter the sensing area when there is no J435-6 ↔ P608-5
paper?
J435-5 ↔ P608-6
13 Operation check of SENSOR T/R
The voltage of P437-15 ↔ P437-14 on PWBA
19 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step [20]. Repair broken or
Disconnect P/J421 from PWBA MCU. shorted part.
TRAY CONT is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR T/
R enters the sensing area of SENSOR T/R, and Do all of the wiring below have normal
is 5 VDC when it leaves the sensing area? continuity?
J421-5 ↔ J608-6
14 5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR T/R Go to Step [15].
Remove COVER LEFT 500.
Go to Step [17].
J421-6 ↔ J608-5

TRAY 500 is 5 VDC?
20 5 VDC power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA
The voltage of P410-3 ↔ P410-4 on PWBA MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [21].
MCU is 5 VDC?
15 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED Go to Step [16]. Replace
MAIN
Disconnect P/J437 and P/J618 from PWBA
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TRAY CONT. MAIN. J502 from LV/HVPS.
Do all of the wiring below have normal Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity? continuity?
J437-13 ↔ J618-3 J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J437-14 ↔ J618-2 J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J437-15 ↔ J618-1
22 Operation check of CLUTCH ASSY FEED Go to Step [30].
Does CLUTCH ASSY FEED operate
Go to Step [23].
16 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY FEED 3 Replace

Disconnect P/J618. SENSOR
Repair broken or
shorted part. normally?
Do all of the wiring below have normal T/R. (p.491) Make a test print and confirm by the operating
continuity? noise.
P618-4 ↔ J120-3
P618-5 ↔ J120-2
23 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED Go to Step [24].
MAIN
Replace
HARNESS-
Disconnect P/J437 from PWBA TRAY CONT. ASSY FEED
P618-6 ↔ J120-1
Do all of the wiring below have normal MAIN.
17 5 VDC power supply check to PWBA TRAY Go to Step [9].
500
Go to Step [18].
continuity?
J437-6 ↔ P609-2
TRAY 500 is 5 VDC? J437-7 ↔ P609-1

24 Check of resistance value of CLUTCH ASSY Go to Step [25].

FEED
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY 29 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY
MAIN
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.448)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
The winding resistance between the terminals FEED. (p.470) Disconnect P/J410 from PWBA MCU and P/
of CLUTCH ASSY FEED is 144Ω ± 10% J502 from LV/HVPS.
(20°C)? Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
25 24 VDC power supply check to PWBA
TRAY 500
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
The voltage of P435-9/10 ↔ 435-7/8 on J410-6 ↔ J502-6
PWBA TRAY 500 is 24 VDC? J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
26 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 Go to Step [27].
Replace
HARNESS-
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY FEED 1. 30 Check of 24 VDC power supply to DRIVE
ASSY FEED
continuity? (p.471)
J435-7 ↔ P608-4 TRAY CONT is 24 VDC?
J435-8 ↔ P608-3
J435-9 ↔ P608-2 31 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED Go to Step [8].
MAIN
Replace
HARNESS-
J435-10 ↔ P608-1 Disconnect P/J437 from PWBA TRAY 500. ASSY FEED
Do all of the wiring below have normal MAIN.
Repair broken or
shorted part. continuity?
Do all of the wiring below have normal J437-5 ↔ CN1-1
continuity? J437-4 ↔ CN1-2
J421-1 ↔ J608-10 J437-2 ↔ CN1-4
J421-2 ↔ J608-9 J437-1 ↔ CN1-5
J421-3 ↔ J608-8
J421-4 ↔ J608-7

Disconnect the P/J410 from PWBA MCU. MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [29].
The voltage of P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8 P410-7/8

on PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?

Panel Message 5 Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY- Go to Step [6].
PRE REGI and ROLL-PINCH
Replace ROLL in
question.
Jam MP, E Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
Are ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI and ROLL-
Possible parts that caused the error PINCH attached correctly?
ROLL MSI HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI any dirt or damage?
CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI Turn by hand to check.
ROLL-PINCH
SENSOR REGI
ACTUATOR-REGI.
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
made?
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 PWBA MCU 7 Check of the paper position

Is the leading edge of the paper passing through
LV/HVPS MOTOR-PH PRE REGI ROLL?

HARNESS ASSY MAIN CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
8 Operation check of ACTUATOR-REGI
Does ACTUATOR-REGI move smoothly
ACTUATOR-
Troubleshooting REGI. (p.373)
without any damage? Does it enter the sensor
sensing area when there is paper? Does it leave
Step Check Yes No the sensor sensing area when there is no paper?
Go to Step [2].
9 Operation check of SENSOR REGI Go to Step [15]. Go to Step [10].
torn?
MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR REGI
size setting, and
enters the sensor sensing area, and is 5 VDC
when it leaves the sensing area?
of the paper set on the control panel? proceed to step
[3]. 10 5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR
REGI

made?
Go to Step [4]. End of procedure The voltage of P408-10 ↔ P408-11 on PWBA
MCU is 5 VDC?
4 Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY

of MSI section
Go to Step [5]. Replace ROLL
ASSY in 11 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step [12]. Replace
HARNESS-
Remove MSI. (p.342) question. ASSY P/H1.
Are ROLL MSI, HOLDER ASSY RETARD continuity?
MSI, CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE, and
J408-10 ↔ J603-3
J408-11 ↔ J603-2
any dirt or damage? J408-12 ↔ J603-1

12 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 Replace

Disconnect P/J603 and P/J102 from PWBA SENSOR REGI.
Replace
HARNESS- 18 24 VDC power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA
The voltage of P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8 on MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [19].
MCU. (p.374) ASSY P/H2. PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?

continuity. 19 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
P603-10 ↔ J102-3 J502 from LV/HVPS.
P603-11 ↔ J102-2 Do all of the wiring below have normal
P603-12 ↔ J102-1 continuity?
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
Go to Step [14].
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
MCU is 5 VDC? J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS. 20 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step [21].
Replace
HARNESS-
Do all of the wiring below have normal Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY P/H1.
J410-3 ↔ J502-3 J408-1 ↔ J603-12
J410-4 ↔ J502-4 J408-2 ↔ J603-11
15 24 VDC power supply check to P/H MOTOR Go to Step [16].

Go to Step [18].
21 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 Go to Step [22].
Disconnect P/J603.
Replace
HARNESS-
MCU is 24 VDC? Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY P/H2.

Replace
HARNESS-
continuity?
P603-1 ↔ P202-2
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY P/H1. P603-2 ↔ P202-1
continuity?
J409-1 ↔ P604-6 22 Check of resistance value of CLUTCH ASSY Go to Step [18].
PRE REGI
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY
J409-2 ↔ P604-5 Disconnect P/J202. PRE REGI.
J409-3 ↔ P604-4 The winding resistance between the terminals (p.376)
J409-4 ↔ P604-3 of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI is 144Ω ± 10%
J409-5 ↔ P604-2 (20°C)?
J409-6 ↔ P604-1
17 Check after replacement of MOTOR-PH

Replace MOTOR-PH. (p.375)
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure

Panel Message 5 Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY Go to Step [6].
of Feeder section
Replace ROLL
ASSY in
Open COVER-REAR 500 of Feeder. question.
Jam E
Are ROLL ASSY TURN 500, HOLDER ASSY
Possible parts that caused the error RETARD 500, ROLL ASSY FEED 500 and
ROLL ASSY TURN 500 HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 Also, do these parts rotate smoothly without
ROLL ASSY FEED 500 ROLL PINCH A any dirt or damage?
ROLL PINCH B ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
ROLL-PINCH ACTUATOR-REGI 6 Shape and operation check of ROLL PINCH Go to Step [7].
A and ROLL PINCH B of Tray1 Feeder
Replace ROLL
PINCH in
SENSOR REGI HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Open COVER-REAR 500. question.
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 PWBA MCU Are ROLL PINCH A and ROLL PINCH B
LV/HVPS MOTOR-PH attached correctly?
HARNESS ASSY MAIN CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI Also, do these parts rotate smoothly without
any dirt or damage?
Troubleshooting Turn by hand to check.
Step Check Yes No 7 Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY- Go to Step [8].
PRE REGI and ROLL-PINCH
Replace ROLL in
question.
Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
1 Check of Feeder attachment on printer
Remove the Feeder and re-attach, then made a
Are ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI and ROLL-
test print. PINCH attached correctly?
Does the error recur? Also, do these parts rotate smoothly without
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step [3].
torn?
made?
3 Paper size setting check Go to Step [5]. Change the paper

of the paper set on the control panel?
size setting, and
proceed to step
9 Check of paper position
[4]. PRE REGI ROLL?

made?
ACTUATOR-
without any damage? Does it enter the sensor REGI. (p.373)
sensing area when there is paper? Does it leave
the sensor sensing area when there is no paper?

11 Operation check of SENSOR REGI

17 24 VDC power supply check to P/H MOTOR Go to Step [18].
Go to Step [20].
MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR REGI MCU is 24 VDC?

enters the sensor sensing area, and is 5 VDC
when it leaves the sensing area? 18 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step [19].
Replace
HARNESS-
12 5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR

REGI
Go to Step [13]. Go to Step [15]. Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
ASSY P/H1.
The voltage of P408-10 ↔ P408-11 on PWBA J409-1 ↔ P604-6

MCU is 5 VDC?
J409-2 ↔ P604-5
Replace
HARNESS-
J409-3 ↔ P604-4
J409-4 ↔ P604-3
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY P/H1.
J409-5 ↔ P604-2
continuity?
J409-6 ↔ P604-1
J408-10 ↔ J603-3
J408-11 ↔ J603-2 19 Check after replacement of MOTOR-PH
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
J408-12 ↔ J603-1
14 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 Replace
Replace
SENSOR REGI. HARNESS- 20 24 VDC power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA Go to Step [21].
(p.374) ASSY P/H2. The voltage of P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8 on MCU. (p.445)
MCU.
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
continuity?
P603-10 ↔ J102-3
Repair broken or
shorted part.
P603-11 ↔ J102-2 J502 from LV/HVPS.
P603-12 ↔ J102-1 Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
Go to Step [16].
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
MCU is 5 VDC?
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
Repair broken or
shorted part.
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
J502 from LV/HVPS. 22 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step [23].

Replace
HARNESS-
continuity?
J410-3 ↔ J502-3 continuity?
J410-4 ↔ J502-4 J408-1 ↔ J603-12
J408-2 ↔ J603-11

Step Check Yes No

Disconnect P/J603.
Replace
HARNESS-
continuity?
P603-1 ↔ P202-2
P603-2 ↔ P202-1

PRE REGI
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY
Disconnect P/J202. PRE REGI.
The winding resistance between the terminals (p.376)
of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
is 144Ω ± 10% (20°C)?

Panel Message 5 Shape and operation check of ROLL-REGI Go to Step[6].

METAL and ROLL REGI RUBBER
Replace or re-
attach ROLL in
Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR. question.
Jam E
Are the ROLL-REGI and ROLL REGI
Possible parts that caused the error RUBBER attached correctly?
ROLL ASSY PRE-REGI ROLL-PINCH any dirt or damage?
ROLL-REGI METAL ROLL REGI RUBBER Turn by hand to check.
ACTUATOR-REGI
MOTOR-PH
SENSOR REGI
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
Go to Step[7]. Replace
ACTUATOR-
without any damage? Does ACTUATOR- REGI. (p.373)
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 PWBA MCU REGI enter the sensor sensing area when there
LV/HVPS HARNESS ASSY MAIN is paper? Does it leave the sensor sensing area
when there is no paper?
Troubleshooting
7 Operation check of SENSOR REGI
Step Check Yes No MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR REGI

1 Paper size check
Is the paper size compliant with the
Go to Step[2]. Use paper of size
compliant with
enters the sensing area of SENSOR REGI, and
is 5 VDC when it leaves the sensing area?
specifications? the
specifications. 8 24 VDC power supply check to MOTOR-PH Go to Step[9].
Go to Step[14].

Go to Step[4]. Change the paper
size setting, and
MCU is 24 VDC?

[3].
9 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step[10].
Replace
HARNESS-
MCU. ASSY P/H1.
made by dialog operations?
continuity?
4 Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY
PRE-REGI and ROLL-PINCH
Go to Step[5]. Replace or re-
attach ROLL in
J409-1 ↔ P604-6
question. J409-2 ↔ P604-5
J409-3 ↔ P604-4
Are ROLL ASSY PRE-REGI and ROLL-
PINCH attached correctly? J409-4 ↔ P604-3
Also, do these parts rotate smoothly without J409-5 ↔ P604-2
any dirt or damage? J409-6 ↔ P604-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure

ON?


REGI
Go to Step [17].
The voltage of P408-10 ↔ P408-11 on PWBA MCU is 5 VDC?

MCU is 5 VDC?
17 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/ Repair broken or

Replace
HARNESS-
J502 from LV/HVPS.
shorted part.
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY P/H1. Do all of the wiring below have normal
J408-10 ↔ J603-3 J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J408-11 ↔ J603-2 J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J408-12 ↔ J603-1
13 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 Replace SENSOR Replace

Disconnect the P/J603 from PWBA MCU. REGI. (p.374) HARNESS-
continuity?
P603-10 ↔ J102-3
P603-11 ↔ J102-2
P603-12 ↔ J102-1

Go to Step [15].
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?

Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

Panel Message 4 Paper check at Gate section inside FUSER

ASSY
Remove the
remaining paper
Go to Step [6].
Jam E, F and proceed to

W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down step [5].
Possible parts that caused the error before performing work.
FUSER ASSY ROLL-REGI METAL Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)

Is there any paper remaining at the Gate section
ROLL REGI RUBBER CLUTCH ASSY REGI
inside FUSER ASSY.
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
MOTOR-PH PWBA MCU 5 Does the error recur when the power is
turned ON?
2ND BTR ASSY SHAFT-CENT 2ND

FRAME ASSY BTR BEARING-BRUSH CAM
6 Shape and operation check of ROLL-REGI Go to Step [7].
METAL
Replace ROLL in
question.
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR FUSER IN Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
Is ROLL REGI RUBBER attached correctly?
HARNESS ASSY ADC HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS
CAM ASSY-2ND SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT any dirt or damage?
HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT ASSY MICRO Turn by hand to check.
EXIT SENSOR (Sensor in Fuser) MOT ASSY FSR
LV/HVPS HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
made?
Troubleshooting 8 Check of paper position

Is the leading edge of the paper stopping before
REGI-ROLL?
Step Check Yes No
9 Check of paper position Go to Step [17]. Go to Step [30].
Go to Step [2]. Has the leading edge of the paper passed
through REGI-ROLL, and stopped before Fuser
torn? Roll inside FUSER ASSY?

size setting, and 10 Operation check of CLUTCH ASSY REGI Go to Step [14].
Does CLUTCH ASSY REGI operate normally?
Go to Step [11].

Make a test print and confirm by the operating
[3].
noise.
made?
11 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step [12]. Replace
Disconnect the P/J408 from PWBA MCU. HARNESS-
continuity?
J408-3 ↔ J603-10
J408-4 ↔ J603-9


Disconnect P/J603.
Replace
HARNESS- 19 Operation check of SENSOR FUSER IN
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY P/H2. MCU is 5 VDC when white paper is brought to
continuity? the sensor sensing area, and is 0 VDC when
P603-3 ↔ P203-2 paper is removed?
P603-4 ↔ P203-1
FUSER IN

REGI
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY The voltage of P418-3 ↔ P418-1 on PWBA
REGI. (p.367) MCU is 5 VDC?
Disconnect P/J203.
The winding resistance between the terminals
of CLUTCH ASSY REGI is 144Ω ± 10%
21 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY ADC Go to Step [22].
Replace
HARNESS
(20°C)? MCU. ASSY ADC.
14 Check of 24 VDC power supply to MOTOR- Go to Step [15].
PH
Go to Step [36].
continuity?
The voltage of P409-6 ↔ P409-5 on PWBA J418-1 ↔ J620-3
MCU is 24 VDC? J418-2 ↔ J620-2
J418-3 ↔ J620-1
15 Continuity check HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step [16]. Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1. 22 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY 2BTR
SENS
Replace
SENSOR
Replace
HARNESS
continuity? Disconnect P/J620 from HARNESS ASSY FUSER IN. ASSY 2BTR
2BTR SENS. (p.382) SENS.
Is the continuity normal between all terminals
of J409 ↔ P604? Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
Replace MOTOR-PH.
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
P620-1 ↔ J111-3
P620-2 ↔ J111-2
ON? P620-3 ↔ J111-1
17 Shape and operation check of 2ND BTR

ASSY
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY and
Go to Step [18]. 23 Shape and operation check of CAM ASSY-
2ND
Go to Step [24]. Replace CAM
ASSY-2ND.
other relevant Does CAM ASSY-2ND move smoothly (p.389)
Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p.387)
parts. without any damage, and does it enter the
Is 2ND BTR ASSY damaged?
sensor sensing area?
Are the SHAFT-CENT 2ND, FRAME ASSY
BTR and BEARING-BRUSH CAM damaged?
Does any of them operate abnormally?

Unit
End of procedure


24 Operation check of SENSOR 2BTR

RETRACT
30 Operation check of EXIT SENSOR in
FUSER ASSY
Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p.387) The voltage of P417-8 ↔ P417-7 on PWBA
The voltage of P418-6 ↔ P418-5 on PWBA MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR enters the
MCU is 0 VDC when CAM ASSY-2ND enters sensing area of EXIT SENSOR, and is
the sensing area of SENSOR 2BTR 5 VDC when it leaves the sensing area?
RETRACT, and is 5 VDC when it leaves the
sensing area? 31 5 VDC power supply check to EXIT
SENSOR in FUSER ASSY

2BTR RETRACT
Go to Step [26]. Go to Step [39]. W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down
before performing work.
Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)
MCU is 5 VDC?
The voltage of connector J614A-7 ↔ J614A-6
26 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY ADC
Replace
SENSOR 2BTR
Replace
HARNESS
that connects FUSER ASSY on the printer is 5
VDC?
Do all of the wiring below have normal RETRACT. ASSY ADC.
continuity? (p.395) 32 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY Replace EXIT
FUSER SENS and HARNESS ASSY FUSER SENSOR.
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.428)
J418-4 ↔ J112-3 in FUSER ASSY
J418-5 ↔ J112-2
W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down
J418-6 ↔ J112-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Do all of the wiring below have normal Disconnect P/J619 and P/J110 in FUSER
continuity? ASSY.
J403-1 ↔ J600-3 Do all of the wiring below have normal
J403-3 ↔ J600-1 P619-1 ↔ J110-3
28 24 VDC power supply check to MOT ASSY Go to Step [29].

MICRO (2ND BTR Retract Motor)
Go to Step [36]. P619-2 ↔ J110-2
P619-3 ↔ J110-1
The voltage of P403-3 ↔ P403-2 on PWBA J619-3 ↔ P614A-7
MCU is 24 VDC? J619-2 ↔ P614A-8
29 Check after replacement of MOT ASSY

MICRO
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.448)
End of procedure J619-1 ↔ P614A-9
Replace MOT ASSY MICRO. (p.440)


33 Shape and operation check of FUSER ASSY Go to Step [34].

parts
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.428) 38 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MCU Go to Step [39].
C/L
Repair broken or
shorted part.
W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down
before performing work. before performing work.
Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428) Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)

Are the gears, FUSER ROLL, EXIT ROLL, Disconnect the P/J417 from PWBA MCU.
PINCH ROLL and other parts in FUSER ASSY Do all of the wiring below have normal
attached correctly? continuity?
Also, do these parts rotate smoothly without J417-6 ↔ J614A-7
any dirt or damage? J417-7 ↔ J614A-6
39 5 VDC power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA Go to Step [40].
FSR (Fuser Motor)
Go to Step [36]. The voltage of P410-3 ↔ P410-4 on PWBA
MCU is 5 VDC?
MCU. (p.445)

MCU is 24 VDC? 40 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
35 Check after replacement of MOT ASSY FSR Replace PWBA
Replace MOT ASSY FSR. (p.435) MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure J502 from LV/HVPS.
ON? J410-3 ↔ J502-3

Go to Step [37]. J410-4 ↔ J502-4
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?

Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

Panel Message 4 Paper check at Gate section inside FUSER

ASSY
Remove the
remaining paper
Go to Step [6].
Jam C, E, F and proceed to

W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down step [5].
Possible parts that caused the error before performing work.

FUSER ASSY ROLL-REGI METAL
ROLL REGI RUBBER CLUTCH ASSY REGI inside FUSER ASSY.
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
MOTOR-PH PWBA MCU 5 Does the error recur when the power is
turned ON?
2ND BTR ASSY SHAFT-CENT 2ND

FRAME ASSY BTR BEARING-BRUSH CAM
METAL
Replace ROLL in
question.
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR FUSER IN
CAM ASSY-2ND SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT any dirt or damage?
HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT ASSY MICRO Turn by hand to check.
LV/HVPS
MOT ASSY FSR
HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
made?
Troubleshooting 8 Check of paper position

Is the leading edge of the paper stopping before
REGI-ROLL?
Step Check Yes No
9 Check of paper position Go to Step [17]. Go to Step [30].

Go to Step [2]. Has the leading edge of the paper passed
through REGI-ROLL, and stopped before Fuser
torn? Roll inside FUSER ASSY?

size setting, and 10 Operation check of CLUTCH ASSY REGI Go to Step [14].
Go to Step [11].
of the paper set on the control panel? proceed to step Make a test print and confirm by the operating
[3]. noise.
made?
11 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step [12]. Replace
HARNESS-
continuity?
J408-3 ↔ J603-10
J408-4 ↔ J603-9


Disconnect P/J603.
Replace
HARNESS- 19 Operation check of SENSOR FUSER IN
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY P/H2. MCU is 5 VDC when white paper is brought to
continuity? the sensor sensing area, and is
P603-3 ↔ P203-2 0 VDC when paper is removed?
P603-4 ↔ P203-1
FUSER IN

REGI
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY The voltage of P418-3 ↔ P418-1 on PWBA
REGI. MCU is 5 VDC?
Disconnect P/J203.
Is the winding resistance between the terminals
(p.367)
Replace
HARNESS
(20°C)? MCU. ASSY ADC.
PH
Go to Step [36].
continuity?
MCU is 24 VDC? J418-2 ↔ J620-2
J418-3 ↔ J620-1
15 Continuity check HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step [16]. Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY P/H1. 22 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY 2BTR
SENS
Replace
SENSOR
Replace
HARNESS
continuity? Disconnect P/J620 from HARNESS ASSY FUSER IN. ASSY 2BTR
2BTR SENS. (p.382) SENS.
of J409 ↔ P604? Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
Replace MOTOR-PH.
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
P620-1 ↔ J111-3
P620-2 ↔ J111-2
ON? P620-3 ↔ J111-1
17 Shape and operation check of 2ND BTR

ASSY
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY and
Go to Step [18]. 23 Shape and operation check of CAM ASSY-
2ND
ASSY-2ND.
other relevant Does CAM ASSY-2ND move smoothly (p.389)
parts. without any damage, and does it enter the
Is 2ND BTR ASSY damaged?
Are SHAFT-CENT 2ND, FRAME ASSY BTR
and BEARING-BRUSH CAM damaged? Does
any of them operate abnormally?

Unit
End of procedure



RETRACT
30 Operation check of EXIT SENSOR in
FUSER ASSY
Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p.387) The voltage of P417-8 ↔ P417-7 on PWBA
The voltage of P418-6 ↔ P418-5 on PWBA MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR enters the
MCU is 0 VDC when CAM ASSY-2ND enters sensing area of EXIT SENSOR, and is 5 VDC
the sensing area of SENSOR 2BTR when it leaves the sensing area?
sensing area? 31 5 VDC power supply check to EXIT

2BTR RETRACT
Go to Step [26]. Go to Step [39]. W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down
MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace
SENSOR 2BTR
Replace
HARNESS
that connects FUSER ASSY on the printer is 5
VDC?
Do all of the wiring below have normal RETRACT. ASSY ADC.
continuity? (p.395) 32 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY Replace EXIT
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.428)
J418-4 ↔ J112-3 in FUSER ASSY
J418-5 ↔ J112-2
J418-6 ↔ J112-1 before performing work.
Repair broken or
shorted part. Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)
Do all of the wiring below have normal Disconnect P/J619 and P/J110 in FUSER
continuity? ASSY.
J403-1 ↔ J600-3 Do all of the wiring below have normal
J403-3 ↔ J600-1 P619-1 ↔ J110-3
P619-2 ↔ J110-2
MICRO (2ND BTR Retract Motor)
Go to Step [36].
P619-3 ↔ J110-1
The voltage of P403-3 ↔ P403-2 on PWBA J619-3 ↔ P614A-7
MCU is 24 VDC? J619-2 ↔ P614A-8
J619-1 ↔ P614A-9
MICRO
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.448)
End of procedure



parts
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.428) 38 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MCU Go to Step [39].
C/L
Repair broken or
shorted part.
W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down
before performing work. before performing work.
Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428) Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)

Are the gears, FUSER ROLL, EXIT ROLL, Disconnect the P/J417 from PWBA MCU.
PINCH ROLL and other parts in FUSER ASSY Do all of the wiring below have normal
attached correctly? continuity?
Also, do these parts rotate smoothly without J417-6 ↔ J614A-7
any dirt or damage? J417-7 ↔ J614A-6
FSR (Fuser Motor)
Go to Step [36]. The voltage of P410-3 ↔ P410-4 on PWBA
MCU is 5 VDC?
MCU. (p.445)

MCU is 24 VDC? 40 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
End of procedure J502 from LV/HVPS.
ON? J410-3 ↔ J502-3

Go to Step [37]. J410-4 ↔ J502-4
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?

Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

Panel Message 6 Power supply check to SENSOR OHP

Check Transparency The voltage of P408-9 ↔ P408-7 on PWBA

MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace
HARNESS-
SENSOR OHP HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 ASSY P/H1.
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 PWBA MCU continuity?
J408-8 ↔ J603-5
Troubleshooting
J408-9 ↔ J603-4
Step Check Yes No 8 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 Replace

Disconnect the P/J603 from PWBA MCU. SENSOR OHP.
Replace
HARNESS-
1 Check of transparency setting
Does the transparency in use match the
Go to Step [3]. Replace the
transparency in Do all of the wiring below have normal (p.372) ASSY P/H2.
use with a one continuity?
NVRAM setting (which type of transparency
(with or without white margin) is enabled or that matches the P603-7 ↔ J101-3
disabled.) NVRAM P603-8 ↔ J101-2
settings, or P603-9 ↔ J101-1
change the
NVRAM setting
and go to [2].
Go to Step [10].
MCU is 5 VDC?
2 Does the error recur when a test print is Go to Step[3]. End of procedure
made?
Repair broken or
shorted part.
3 Check of dirt and foreign bodies on surface
of SENSOR OHP
Clean to remove Go to Step [5].
any dirt or J502 from LV/HVPS.
Open COVER-P/H. foreign bodies, Do all of the wiring below have normal
and go to step continuity?
Are there any dirt or foreign bodies on the
SENSOR surface? [4]. J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
made?
5 Operation check of SENSOR OHP

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [6].
MCU is 5 VDC when white paper is brought to

the sensor sensing area (transparency must not
be used), and becomes 0 VDC when paper is
removed?

Panel Message 5 Does the error recur when a test print is

made?
Jam E
6 Check of paper position

REGI ROLL?
ROLL-REGI METAL ROLL REGI RUBBER 7 Shape and operation check of 2ND BTR
ASSY
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY and
Go to Step [8].
2ND BTR ASSY SHAFT-CENT 2ND Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p.387) other relevant
FRAME ASSY BTR BEARING-BRUSH CAM Is 2ND BTR ASSY damaged? parts.
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR FUSER IN Are SHAFT-CENT 2ND, FRAME ASSY BTR
and BEARING-BRUSH CAM damaged? Does
any of them operate abnormally?
CAM ASSY-2ND SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
PWBA MCU HARNESS ASSY MAIN 8 Check after replacement of Photoconductor Go to Step [9].
Unit
End of procedure
LV/HVPS MOT ASSY MICRO Replace Photoconductor Unit.

CLUTCH ASSY REGI HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Does the error recur when a test print is made?
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 MOTOR-PH
9 Operation check of SENSOR FUSER IN
Troubleshooting MCU is 5 VDC when white paper is brought to

the sensor sensing area, and becomes 0 VDC
Step Check Yes No when paper is removed?

Go to Step [2].
FUSER IN
torn? The voltage of P418-3 ↔ P418-1 on PWBA

MCU is 5 VDC?
size setting, and
proceed to step
Replace
HARNESS
[3]. MCU. ASSY ADC.
made?
continuity?
J418-1 ↔ J620-3
METAL
Replace ROLL in
question. J418-2 ↔ J620-2
Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR. J418-3 ↔ J620-1
Also, does this part rotate smoothly without any
dirt or damage?

12 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY 2BTR

SENS
Replace
SENSOR
Replace
HARNESS 18 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Disconnect P/J620 from HARNESS ASSY FUSER IN. ASSY 2BTR J502 from LV/HVPS.
2BTR SENS. (p.382) SENS. Do all of the wiring below have normal
Do all of the wiring below have normal continuity?
continuity? J410-3 ↔ J502-3
P620-1 ↔ J111-3 J410-4 ↔ J502-4
P620-2 ↔ J111-2
P620-3 ↔ J111-1 19 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step [20].
Repair broken or
shorted part.
13 Shape and operation check of CAM ASSY-

2ND
ASSY-2ND.
continuity?
Does CAM ASSY 2ND move smoothly (p.389) J403-1 ↔ J600-3
without any damage, and does it enter the J403-2 ↔ J600-2
J403-3 ↔ J600-1
RETRACT
20 24 VDC power supply check to MOT ASSY Go to Step [21]. Go to Step [22].
MICRO (2nd BTR Retract Motor)
The voltage of P418-6 ↔ P418-5 on PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
MCU is 0 VDC when Actuator of CAM ASSY-
2ND enters the sensing area of SENSOR 2BTR
MICRO
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
sensing area? Replace MOT ASSY MICRO. (p.440)

15 5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR Go to Step [16]. Go to Step [17].
2BTR RETRACT
Go to Step [23].
The voltage of P418-4 ↔ P418-5 on PWBA PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?

MCU is 5 VDC?

Replace
SENSOR 2BTR
Replace
HARNESS
J502 from LV/HVPS.
shorted part.
Do all of the wiring below have normal RETRACT. ASSY ADC. Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity? (p.395) continuity?
J418-4 ↔ J112-3 J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J418-5 ↔ J112-2 J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J418-6 ↔ J112-1 J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
Go to Step [18].
MCU is 5 VDC?

24 Operation check of CLUTCH ASSY REGI Go to Step [28].

Go to Step [25].
Replace
HARNESS-
Make a test print and confirm by the operating Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY P/H1.
noise. continuity?
J409-1 ↔ P604-6
Replace
HARNESS- J409-2 ↔ P604-5
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY P/H1. J409-3 ↔ P604-4
continuity? J409-4 ↔ P604-3
J408-3 ↔ J603-10 J409-5 ↔ P604-2
J408-4 ↔ J603-9 J409-6 ↔ P604-1

Disconnect P/J603.
Replace
HARNESS- 30 Check after replacement of MOTOR-PH
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY P/H2. Does the error recur when a test print is made?
continuity?
P603-3 ↔ P203-2
P603-4 ↔ P203-1

REGI
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY
Disconnect P/J203. REGI.
The winding resistance between the terminals (p.367)
(20°C)?

PH
Go to Step [22].

MCU is 24 VDC?

Panel Message 7 Operation check of EXIT SENSOR in

FUSER ASSY
Jam C The voltage of P417-8 ↔ P417-7 on PABW

MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR on EXIT
Possible parts that caused the error SENSOR is moved and entered the sensing area
of EXIT SENSOR (when there is no paper),
EXIT SENSOR (Sensor in Fuser) FUSER ASSY and is 5 VDC when the actuator leaves the
sensing area (when there is paper)?
HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS MOT ASSY FSR 8 5 VDC power supply check to EXIT
Go to Step [9]. Go to step [10]
Troubleshooting Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down

W A R N IN G

Step Check Yes No Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)
Go to Step [2].
on the printer (connected to FUSER ASSY) is 5
torn? VDC?

size setting, and
9 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY Replace EXIT
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.428)
proceed to step in FUSER ASSY
[3]. W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down

made?
Go to Step [4]. End of procedure before performing work.
4 Paper check at Gate section inside FUSER

ASSY
Remove the
paper, and go to
Go to Step [6]. Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)
Disconnect P/J619 and P/J110 in FUSER
[5]. ASSY.
before performing work. Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
P619-1 ↔ J110-3
P619-2 ↔ J110-2
inside FUSER ASSY. P619-3 ↔ J110-1
J619-3 ↔ P614A-7
made?
J619-2 ↔ P614A-8
J619-1 ↔ P614A-9
6 Shape and operation check of ACTUATOR Go to Step [7].
in EXIT SENSOR
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.428)
Does ACTUATOR move smoothly and enter
the sensing area of EXIT SENSOR?

10 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MCU Go to Step [11].

C/L
Repair broken or
shorted part. 14 24 VDC power supply check to MOT ASSY Go to Step [15].
FSR (Fuser Motor)
Go to Step [16].

MCU is 24 VDC?
End of procedure
Disconnect P/J417 from PWBA MCU. Does the error recur when a test print is made?
continuity?
Go to Step [17].
J417-6 ↔ J614A-7 PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?

J417-7 ↔ J614A-6
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Go to Step [12].
J502 from LV/HVPS.
MCU is 5 VDC? Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
Repair broken or
shorted part. J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J502 from LV/HVPS. J410-6 ↔ J502-6
Do all of the wiring below have normal J410-7 ↔ J502-7
continuity? J410-8 ↔ J502-8
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4

parts
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.428)

Are the gears, Fuser Roll, Exit Roll, Pinch Roll
and other parts in FUSER ASSY attached
correctly?
any dirt or damage?

FIP-35 Troubleshooting
Panel Message Step Check Yes No
Jam C 1 Check of error/status code

Specify the problem Sensor by the error/status
Remove the
remaining paper
Go to Step [3].
Jam LC, G code: and proceed to

Jam LC, G: Step [2].
Jam E
SENSOR T/R
Jam C, E, F Jam E:
SENSOR OHP
Jam E:
REGI
SENSOR T/R SENSOR OHP Jam C, E, F:
SENSOR REGI SENSOR FUSER IN SENSOR FUSER IN
EXIT SENSOR (Sensor in Fuser) Jam C:
Is there paper remaining on the problem
Sensor?

made?
3 Operation check (1) of problem Sensor

Does the ACTUATOR move smoothly without
Go to Step [4]. Re-attach or
replace the
any damage? actuator, or clean
Or, is the light emitter of the Sensor clean? the light emitter.
4 Operation check (2) of problem Sensor Replace PWBA

The voltage of the common line and signal line MCU. (p.445)
Replace the
problem Sensor.
to each Sensor on PWBA MCU is 0 VDC in a
sensor detecting state, or is 5 VDC in a sensor
non-sensing state?

Panel Message 5 Check after replacement of PWBA MCU

Replace PWBA MCU. (p.445)
Service Req E517 Does the error recur when the power is turned
ON?
Repair broken or
shorted part.
HARNESS ASSY MAIN HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
J502 from LV/HVPS.
HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 PWBA TRAY 500 Is the continuity normal between all terminals
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS of J410 ↔ J502?
Troubleshooting
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Feeder attachment on printer

Remove and re-attach Feeder.

ON?

Remove Feeder from the printer.
Repair broken or
shorted part.
of J421 ↔ J608 (connector on the printer to
connect Feeder)?

1 of Feeder
Replace
HARNESS-
Remove Feeder. ASSY FEED 1.
Disconnect P/J435 from PWBA TRAY 500. (p.471)
of J435 ↔ P608 (connector on Feeder to be
connected to the printer)?
4 Check after replacement of PWBA TRAY 500 Go to Step [5].

Replace PWBA TRAY 500. (p.465)
End of procedure

ON?

FIP-37
Panel Message
Service Req E514
FFC-ASSY ESS PWBA MCU

PWBA ESS
Troubleshooting
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of connection of FFC-ASSY ESS

Re-connect FFC-ASSY ESS of PWBA ESS to
PWBA MCU. Does the error recur when a test

print is made?
2 Check of connection of FFC-ASSY ESS

Is FFC-ASSY ESS damaged or broken?
Replace FFC-
ASSY ESS.
Go to Step [3].
(p.450)
3 Check after replacement of PWBA MCU

Replace PWBA
ESS. (p.450)
End of procedure

FIP-38
Panel Message
Service Req E513
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step Check Yes No

turned off and back on?
2 Does the error recur even when the power Go to Step [4].
is turned off and back on again?
Go to Step [3].
3 Does the error recur even after the power Go to Step[4].

has been switched several times?
End of
procedure*
4 Disconnect and re-connect all connectors

connected to PWBA MCU.
Does the error recur when the power is

turned ON?

Go to “FIP-71
Electrical Noise”.
End of procedure
Does the error recur when the power is (p.254)

turned ON?
NOTE: It is assumed to be due to external noise.

Proceed to “FIP-71 Electrical Noise” to check to be sure.
C A U T IO N If “NVRAM Error (Service Req E513)” occurs soon after replacing

the PWBA MCU, the installed PWBA MCU may be previously used
for another product.
Be sure to replace it with a new one.
Note that once the PWBA MCU is installed and the product is
turned on, the PWBA MCU cannot be used for another product
anymore.

Panel Message 6 Does the error recur when the power is

turned ON?
Service Req E511

7 Operation check of SENSOR TR-0
Remove Photoconductor Unit.
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [8].

MCU is 5 VDC when silver paper or other
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR TR-0 reflective object comes close to the sensing area
HARNESS-ASSY XERO MOTOR ASSY P/R of SENSOR TR-0, and is 0 VDC when the
object is released?
HARNESS ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS 8 Check of 5 VDC power supply to SENSOR
TR-0
Troubleshooting The voltage of P416-1 ↔ P416-3 on PWBA

MCU is 5 VDC?
Step Check Yes No
XERO
Replace
SENSOR TR-0.
Replace
HARNESS-
1 Check of Photoconductor Unit attachment
Disconnect the P/J416 from PWBA MCU. (p.400) ASSY XERO.
ON? continuity?
J416-1 ↔ J108-3
2 Operation check of Photoconductor Unit
Is the Drum of Photoconductor Unit rotating?
J416-2 ↔ J108-2
J416-3 ↔ J108-1
3 Check for dirt on silver seal on Belt in
Photoconductor Unit
Replace
Photoconductor
Go to Step [4].
10 Check after replacement of MOTOR ASSY Go to Step [11]. End of procedure
Unit. P/R
Replace MOTOR ASSY P/R. (p.439)
Turn gear of Photoconductor Unit until silver
seal attached to Belt can be seen. Does the error recur when the power is turned
ON?
Is silver seal dirty?
4 Check of SENSOR TR-0 (TR0 Sensor) Go to Step [5]. Re-attach 11 24 VDC power supply check to MOTOR
ASSY P/R
attachment the SENSOR TR-
0, and go to step Disconnect P/J201 from MOTOR ASSY P/R.
[5]. The voltage of J201-1 ↔ J201-2 is 24 VDC?
Is SENSOR TR-0 attached securely?
5 Check of dirt and foreign bodies on surface Clean to remove Go to Step [7]. 12 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace PWBA
Repair broken or
shorted part.
of SENSOR TR-0 any dirt or
Remove Photoconductor Unit. foreign bodies, Is the continuity normal between all terminals
and go to step of J403 ↔ J200?
SENSOR TR-0 surface? [6].

Step Check Yes No

Disconnect P/J502 from LV/HVPS. HVPS. (p.448)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
continuity?
J502-9 ↔ J201-1
J502-10 ↔ J201-2

Go to Step [15].
MCU is 5 VDC?

Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4

Panel Message 6 5 VDC power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA
Go to Step [7].
Service Req E510 MCU is 5 VDC?
Possible parts that caused the error 7 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
ROS ASSY HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS continuity?
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
Troubleshooting
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of ROS ASSY attachment

Re-attach ROS ASSY. (p.414)

ON?

Remove ROS ASSY. (p.414)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
of J407 ↔ J601?
3 5 VDC power supply check to ROS and

PWB SOS

MCU is 5 VDC?


ON?
5 Check after replacement of ROS ASSY

Replace ROS ASSY. (p.414)
Go to FIP-1 81
Electrical noise.
End of procedure

ON?

Panel Message 6 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN

Replace
SENSOR
Repair broken or
shorted part.
ROTARY
Service Req E527 Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity? HOME POSI.
Possible parts that caused the error (p.422)
J413-5 ↔ J105-3
J413-6 ↔ J105-2
MOTOR ASSY MAG SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
J413-7 ↔ J105-1
LV/HVPS 7 5 VDC power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA
The voltage of J410-3 ↔ J410-4 on PWBA MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [8].
MCU is 5 VDC?
Troubleshooting
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Step Check Yes No
J502 from LV/HVPS.
1 Check of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY and
MOTOR ASSY MAG attachment
Go to Step [2]. Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
continuity?
Are FRAME ASSY-ROTARY and MOTOR
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
ASSY MAG attached correctly?
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
2 Rotation check of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY Go to Step [3].
and MOTOR ASSY MAG
Remove any
items that hinder
Do FRAME ASSY-ROTARY and MOTOR rotation.
ASSY MAG rotate smoothly?
3 Check of SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI Go to Step [4].

attachment
Re-attach, and go
to step [4].
Is SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI attached
correctly?
4 Operation check of SENSOR ROTARY

HOME POSI
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [5].

MCU is 0 VDC when FRAME ASSY
ROTARY enters the sensing area, and is 5
VDC when it leaves the sensing area?

ROTARY HOME POSI

MCU is 5 VDC?

Panel Message 6 Check after replacement of SENSOR ASSY Go to Step [7].

ADC
End of procedure
Service Req E526 Replace SENSOR ASSY ADC. (p.392)

SENSOR ASSY ADC HARNESS ASSY ADC 7 Power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA
Are each of the power voltages being supplied MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [8].
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS to the following terminals on PWBA MCU

from LV/HVPS?
Troubleshooting P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
Step Check Yes No
P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC
of SENSOR ASSY ADC
any dirt or 8 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/ Repair broken or
foreign bodies, Disconnect P/J410 from PWBA MCU and P/ HVPS. (p.448) shorted part.
and go to step J502 from LV/HVPS.
SENSOR ASSY ADC surface?
[2]. Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
2 Check of SENSOR ASSY ADC attachment
Is SENSOR ASSY ADC attached correctly?
to step [3]. J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
turned ON?
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
4 5 VDC and 24 VDC power supply check to
SENSOR ASSY ADC
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
MCU is 24 VDC? J410-7 ↔ J502-7
And the voltage of P422-8 ↔ P422-4 is 5 J410-8 ↔ J502-8
VDC?

Replace
HARNESS
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY ADC.
continuity?
J422-8 ↔ J431-1
J422-4 ↔ J431-5
J422-2 ↔ J431-7


Unit
End of procedure
Service Req E525 Replace Photoconductor Unit.

Photoconductor Unit SENSOR ASSY ADC 6 5 VDC and 24 VDC power supply check to
SENSOR ASSY ADC
Toner Cartridge K Toner Cartridge Y The voltage of P422-2 ↔ P422-4 on PWBA

Toner Cartridge M Toner Cartridge C MCU is 24 VDC?
And the voltage of P422-8 ↔ P422-4 is 5
HARNESS ASSY ADC SENSOR HUM & TEMP
VDC?
HARNESS ASSY MAIN ROS ASSY
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS 7 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY ADC Go to Step [8].
Replace
HARNESS
Troubleshooting
continuity?
J422-8 ↔ J431-1
Step Check Yes No
J422-4 ↔ J431-5
1 Check of connection between
Photoconductor Unit and CONDUCTOR
Clean, and go to
Step [2].
Go to Step [2].
J422-2 ↔ J431-7
attached to frame
8 Check after replacement of SENSOR ASSY Go to Step [9].
ADC
End of procedure
Is the contact surface of Photoconductor Unit Replace SENSOR ASSY ADC. (p.392)
and CONDUCTOR attached to the frame Does the error recur when the power is turned
deformed or are there foreign objects on the ON?
surface?
9 Check of 5 VDC power supply to SENSOR Go to Step [10]. Go to Step [14].

of SENSOR ASSY ADC
Clean, and go to
Step [3].
Go to Step [4]. ASSY HUM & TEMP
Are there any dirt or foreign bodies on the MCU is 5 VDC?
SENSOR ASSY ADC surface?
10 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step [11]. Repair broken or

turned ON?
Go to Step [4]. End of procedure Disconnect P/J413 from PWBA MCU.
shorted part.
4 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge Go to Step [5].

Replace Toner Cartridge of each color.
End of procedure continuity?
J413-1 ↔ J104-4
ON? J413-3 ↔ J104-2
J413-4 ↔ J104-1

Step Check Yes No
11 Check after replacement of SENSOR HUM Go to Step [12].

& TEMP
End of procedure
Replace SENSOR HUM & TEMP. (p.441)

ON?


ON?

Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.448)
End of procedure

ON?
14 Power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA

Go to Step [15].
to the following terminals on PWBA MCU

from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC

Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8


Unit
End of procedure
Service Req E524 Replace Photoconductor Unit.

Photoconductor Unit SENSOR ASSY ADC 6 5 VDC and 24 VDC power supply check to
SENSOR ASSY ADC
Toner Cartridge K Toner Cartridge Y The voltage of P422-2 ↔ P422-4 on PWBA

Toner Cartridge M Toner Cartridge C MCU is 24 VDC?
And the voltage of P422-8 ↔ P422-4 is 5
HARNESS ASSY ADC SENSOR HUM & TEMP
VDC?
HARNESS ASSY MAIN ROS ASSY
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS 7 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY ADC Go to Step [8].
Replace
HARNESS
Troubleshooting
continuity?
J422-8 ↔ J431-1
Step Check Yes No
J422-4 ↔ J431-5
1 Check of connection between
Photoconductor Unit and CONDUCTOR
Clean, and go to
Step [2].
Go to Step [2].
J422-2 ↔ J431-7
attached to frame
Is the contact surface of Photoconductor Unit
ADC
End of procedure
and CONDUCTOR attached to the frame Replace SENSOR ASSY ADC. (p.392)
deformed or are there foreign objects on the Does the error recur when the power is turned
surface? ON?

of SENSOR ASSY ADC
Clean, and go to
Step [3].
Go to Step [4].
HUM & TEMP
Are there any dirt or foreign bodies on the The voltage of P413-4 ↔ P413-2 on PWBA
SENSOR ASSY ADC surface? MCU is 5 VDC?

turned ON?
Repair broken or
shorted part.

Replace Toner Cartridge of each color.
End of procedure Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
ON? J413-2 ↔ J104-3
J413-3 ↔ J104-2
J413-4 ↔ J104-1

Step Check Yes No
11 Check after replacement of SENSOR HUM Go to Step [12].

& TEMP
End of procedure

ON?


ON?

Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.448)
End of procedure

ON?

Go to Step [15].

from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC

Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

Panel Message 6 Check after replacement of PWBA MCU

Irregular Density Does the error recur when the power is turned
ON?
Replace Toner Cartridge K/Y/M/C.
End of procedure
SENSOR ASSY ADC Photoconductor Unit

PWBA MCU Toner Cartridge K ON?
Toner Cartridge Y Toner Cartridge M
Toner Cartridge C ROS ASSY 8 Check after replacement of ROS ASSY
LV/HVPS Does the error recur when the power is turned

ON?
Troubleshooting
9 Check after replacement of LV/HVPS
Replace LV/HVPS. (p.448)
Go to “FIP-71
Electrical Noise”.
End of procedure
Step Check Yes No (p.254)

of SENSOR ASSY ADC
any dirt or
ON?
Are there any dirt or foreign bodies on the foreign bodies,

SENSOR ASSY ADC surface? and go to step
[2].
2 Check of SENSOR ASSY ADC attachment

Is SENSOR ASSY ADC attached correctly?
to step [3].

turned ON?

ADC
End of procedure
Replace SENSOR ASSY ADC. (p.392)

ON?

Unit
End of procedure

ON?

Panel Message 7 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY ADC Go to Step [8].

Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
continuity?
J418-4 ↔ J112-3
J418-5 ↔ J112-2
HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT ASSY MICRO
J418-6 ↔ J112-1
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT HARNESS ASSY ADC
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS 8 Check after replacement of SENSOR 2BTR Go to Step [9].
RETRACT
End of procedure
Replace SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.

Troubleshooting
Does the error recur when restarting the
printer?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of 2ND BTR ASSY attachment Go to Step [2]. Re-attach, and go 9 Check after replacement of PWBA MCU
Is 2ND BTR ASSY attached correctly? to step [2].

Does the error recur when restarting the
2 Does the error recur when restarting the
printer?
Go to Step [3]. End of procedure printer?
10 Power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA Go to Step [11].

Repair broken or
shorted part.
Do all of the wiring below have normal from LV/HVPS?
continuity? P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3VDC
J403-1 ↔ J600-3 P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5VDC
J403-2 ↔ J600-2 P410-5/6 ↔P410-7/8: 24VDC
J403-3 ↔ J600-1

Go to Step [10]. Are each of the power voltages being supplied HVPS. (p.448)
shorted part.
The voltage of P403-3 ↔ P403-2 on PWBA from LV/HVPS?

MCU is 24 VDC? J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
MICRO
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
Replace MOT ASSY MICRO. (p.440) J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Does the error recur when restarting the J410-5 ↔ J502-5
printer? J410-6 ↔ J502-6

2BTR RETRACT.
Go to Step [7]. Go to Step [10]. J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
MCU is 5 VDC?

Panel Message 7 5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR

2BTR RETRACT
Service Req E520 The voltage of P418-4 ↔ P418-5 on PWBA

MCU is 5 VDC?
Replace
HARNESS
HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT ASSY MICRO ASSY ADC.
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT HARNESS ASSY ADC continuity?
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS J418-4 ↔ J112-3
J418-5 ↔ J112-2
Step Check Yes No 9 Check after replacement of SENSOR 2BTR Go to Step [10].
RETRACT
End of procedure
1 Check of DRIVE ASSY BTR attachment

Is the DRIVE ASSY BTR attached correctly?
to step [2].
Replace SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p.395)
2 Check of 2ND BTR ASSY attachment

Is 2ND BTR ASSY attached correctly?
to step [3]. 10 Check after replacement of PWBA MCU Go to Step [12]. End of procedure

made?
Go to Step [4]. End of procedure Does the error recur when a test print is made?

Repair broken or
shorted part.
continuity?
J403-1 ↔ J600-3
J403-2 ↔ J600-2
J403-3 ↔ J600-1

Go to Step [11].

MCU is 24 VDC?

MICRO


Step Check Yes No

Go to Step [12].

from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC

Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8

Panel Message 4 Operation Check of the HARNESS ASSY

MAIN
Go to Step [5]. Repair broken or
shorted part.
continuity?
Possible parts that caused the error J410-10 ↔ J1-1
J410-9 ↔ J128-1
FUSER ASSY HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L J1-3 ↔ J128-2
FFC-ASSY LV/MCU HARNESS ASSY AC
PWBA FUSER CONT LV/HVPS 5 Check after replacement of the FUSER
ASSY
HARNESS ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU Replace FUSER ASSY. (p.428)

FUSER LOCK SWITCH
ON?
Troubleshooting
6 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MCU Go to Step [7].
C/L
Replace
HARNESS
Step Check Yes No ASSY MCU
W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down C/L.
1 Check of FUSER ASSY attachment
Is the FUSER ASSY attached correctly to the
to step [2].
printer? Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)

In particular, is the connector connected firmly Is the continuity normal between all terminals
to the printer? of J614A ↔ J417 and J614 ↔ J3?
Is the connector latched normally?
7 Continuity check of FFC-ASSY LV/MCU Go to Step [8]. Replace FFC-
turned ON?
Go to Step [3]. End of procedure Disconnect P/J401 from PWBA MCU and P/
J500 from LV/HVPS.
ASSY LV/MCU.
3 Operation Check of the FUSER LOCK

SWITCH
Go to Step [4]. Replace FUSER
LOCK SWITCH
continuity?
Disconnect P/J128 from the FUSER LOCK P401-21 ↔ J500-2
SWITCH P401-22 ↔ J500-1
Is there continuity on P128-1↔ P128-2 when
FUSER LOCK SWITCH is pressed, and does 8 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY AC
Disconnect P/J503 from LV/HVPS and P/J2
HARNESS
the continuity stop when FUSER LOCK
from PWBA FUSER CONT. ASSY AC.
SWITCH is released?
continuity?
J503-5 ↔ J2-5
J503-6 ↔ J2-6

Step Check Yes No
9 Check after replacement of PWBA FUSER Go to Step [10].

CONT
End of procedure
Replace PWBA FUSER CONT. (p.452)

Does the error occur when the power is turned
ON?


ON?
11 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace PWBA

Disconnect P/J1 from PWBA FUSER CONT, MCU. (p.445)
Replace
HARNESS
and P/J410 from PWBA MCU. ASSY MAIN
continuity?
P/J1-1 ↔ P/J410-10
P/J1-3 ↔ P/J410-9

FIP-49 FIP-50
Panel Message Panel Message

Service Req E533 Service Req E530
Possible parts that caused the error Possible parts that caused the error
SENSOR HUM & TEMP HARNESS ASSY MAIN HARNESS ASSY MAIN SENSOR HUM & TEMP
PWBA MCU PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
1 Temperature check of printer installation site

Has the ambient temperature where the printer
Ask the customer Go to Step [2].
to improve the 1 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step [2].
Repair broken or
shorted part.
is installed fallen to -7°C or below or reached or installation Is the continuity normal between all terminals
risen to 55°C or more. environment for of J413 ↔ J104?
the printer.
2 Check of SENSOR HUM & TEMP Go to Step [3]. Replace 2 Check after replacement of SENSOR HUM Replace PWBA
& TEMP MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
thermistor resistance value SENSOR HUM

Disconnect P/J413 from PWBA MCU. & TEMP.
The resistance value of P104-4 ↔ P104-3 is (p.441)
ON?
10k Ω ± 1k Ω (approx. 20°C)?
3 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace PWBA

Repair broken or
shorted part.
of J413 ↔ J104?

Panel Message 6 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 Go to Step [7].

Replace PWBA
TRAY 500.
Service Req E547 Do all of the wiring below have normal (p.465)
continuity?
J435-10 ↔ P608-1 (connector on Feeder to
be connected to the printer)
HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN DRIVE ASSY FEED J435-9 ↔ P608-2
PWBA TRAY 500 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 J435-8 ↔ P608-3
HARNESS ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU J435-7 ↔ P608-4
LV/HVPS
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Troubleshooting Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
Step Check Yes No J421-1 ↔ J608-10 (connector on the printer
1 Check of DRIVE ASSY FEED attachment

Is DRIVE ASSY FEED attached correctly?
to step [2].
to connect Feeder)
J421-2 ↔ J608-9
J421-3 ↔ J608-8
MAIN
Replace
HARNESS- J421-4 ↔ J608-7
Disconnect P/J437 from PWBA TRAY CONT. ASSY FEED
Do all of the wiring below have normal MAIN. 8 24 VDC power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA
Go to Step [9].
continuity? PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?

J437-1 ↔ CN1-5
J437-2 ↔ CN1-4 9 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
J437-4 ↔ CN1-2 J502 from LV/HVPS.
J437-5 ↔ CN1-1 Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
3 24 VDC power supply check to DRIVE
ASSY FEED
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
FEED DRV is 24 VDC? J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
4 Check of FEED MOTOR START signal
Replace DRIVE
ASSY FEED.
Go to Step [10].
FEED DRV is xx VDC when FEED MOTOR (p.467) 10 5 VDC power supply check to PWBA TRAY Replace PWBA
500 TRAY 500.
Go to Step [11].
START signal is ON? The voltage of P435-6 ↔ P435-5 on PWBA (p.465)
5 24 VDC power supply check to PWBA

TRAY 500
Replace PWBA
TRAY 500.
Go to Step [6]. TRAY CONT is 5 VDC?
The voltage of P435-9/10 ↔ P435-7/8 on (p.465)

PWBA TRAY 500 is 24 VDC?

Step Check Yes No
11 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 Go to Step [12].

Replace
HARNESS-
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY FEED 1.
continuity? (p.471)
J435-6 ↔ P608-5 (connector on Feeder to be
connected to the printer)
J435-5 ↔ P608-6

Repair broken or
shorted part.
continuity?
J421-5 ↔ J608-6 (connector on the printer to
connect Feeder)
J421-6 ↔ J608-5

Go to Step [14].
MCU is 5 VDC?

Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4

Panel Message 6 Check after replacement of SENSOR IBT

RETRACT
Service Req E542 Replace SENSOR IBT RETRACT. (p.396)

DRIVE ASSY PRO SENSOR IBT RETRACT

LV/HVPS 8 Power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA
Go to Step [9].

Troubleshooting
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
Step Check Yes No
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
1 Check of connection of DRIVE ASSY PRO Go to Step [2].
(IBT Cleaner Retract Motor)
Re-connect the
connector.
P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Is connector P/J414 connected firmly to PWBA

MCU?
Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
2 24 VDC power supply check to DRIVE
ASSY PRO (IBT Cleaner Retract Motor)
continuity?
MCU 2 is 4 VDC? J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
3 Check after replacement of DRIVE ASSY
PRO
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
Replace DRIVE ASSY PRO. (p.434) J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Does the error recur when a test print is made? J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
4 5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR IBT Go to Step [5].
RETRACT
Go to Step [8].
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
MCU is 5 VDC?

Replace
HARNESS
Do all of the wiring below have normal ASSY MAIN.
continuity?
J415-3 ↔ J107-3
J415-4 ↔ J107-2
J415-5 ↔ J107-1


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace Toner Y Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure

Troubleshooting
ON?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Toner Cartridge Y attachment

Is Toner Cartridge Y attached correctly?
to step [2].

turned ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5].
CTRG, and then

proceed to step
[5].
5 Operation check of ANTENNA CTRG

Disconnect the P/J415 from PWBA MCU and
reconnect it.
ON?


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace Toner M Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Toner Cartridge M ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure

Troubleshooting
ON?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Toner Cartridge M attachment

Is Toner Cartridge M attached correctly?
to step [2].

turned ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5].
CTRG, and then

proceed to step
[5].

reconnect it.
ON?


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace Toner C Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure

Troubleshooting
ON?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Toner Cartridge C attachment

Is Toner Cartridge C attached correctly?
to step [2].

turned ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5].
CTRG, and then

proceed to step
[5].

reconnect it.
ON?


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace Toner K Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure

Troubleshooting
ON?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Toner Cartridge K attachment

Is Toner Cartridge K attached correctly?
to step [2].

turned ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5].
CTRG, and then

proceed to step
[5].

reconnect it.
ON?


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace Photocondctr continuity?
J413-10 ↔ J617-3
J413-11 ↔ J617-2
J413-12 ↔ J617-1
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR TNER FULL
HARNESS ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU 7 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY TNR
FULL
Replace Repair broken or
SENSOR TNER shorted part.
LV/HVPS Disconnect P/J617. FULL. (p.413)
Troubleshooting continuity?
P617-1 ↔ J126-3
Step Check Yes No
P617-2 ↔ J126-2
Is Photoconductor Unit attached correctly?
to step [2].
P617-3 ↔ J126-1
turned ON?
MCU is 5 VDC?
MCU. (p.445)

Unit
End of procedure
Disconnect P/J410 from PWBA MCU and P/ HVPS. (p.448) shorted part.
Replace Photoconductor Unit. J502 from LV/HVPS.
Does the error occur when the power is turned Do all of the wiring below have normal
ON? continuity?
4 Operation check of SENSOR TNER FULL Replace PWBA

(Toner Full Sensor) MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [5]. J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
MCU is 0 VDC when the sensor sensing area is
blocked, and is 5 VDC when the sensing area is
not blocked?

TNER FULL

MCU is 5 VDC?


Repair broken or
shorted part.
A Open continuity?
J415-10 ↔ J125-2
J415-11 ↔ J125-1
COVER FRONT ASSY U SWITCH-FRONT DOOR 6 Power supply check to PWBA MCU
Is the specified DC voltage being supplied to
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [7].
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS the following terminals on PWBA MCU?

P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
Troubleshooting
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
Step Check Yes No P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC
1 Check of open/close state of COVER Go to Step [3]. Close the cover. 7 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Is COVER FRONT ASSY U closed? Go to Step [2].
J502 from LV/HVPS.
turned ON?
continuity?
3 Shape check of COVER FRONT ASSY U
Is the actuator of COVER FRONT ASSY U
Replace COVER Go to Step [4].
FRONT
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
that presses SWITCH-FRONT DOOR ASSY U. (p.331)
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
deformed or damaged?
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
Actuator J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
4 Operation check of SWITCH-FRONT DOOR Go to Step [5].

Disconnect SWITCH-FRONT DOOR P/J125.
Replace
SWITCH-
Is there continuity on P125-1 ↔ P125-2 when FRONT DOOR.
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR is pressed, and does (p.338)
the continuity stop when SWITCH-FRONT
DOOR is released?

Panel Message 4 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 Replace

Disconnect P/J603. SWITCH-PH
Replace
HARNESS-
DOOR. (p.377) ASSY P/H2.
E Open Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
P603-5 ↔ J100-2
P603-6 ↔ J100-1
CHUTE ASSY-REAR SWITCH-PH DOOR
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 5 Power supply check to PWBA MCU
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [6].
PWBA MCU HARNESS ASSY MAIN the following terminals on PWBA MCU?
LV/HVPS P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
Troubleshooting P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Repair broken or
shorted part.
1 Shape check of CHUTE ASSY-REAR
Is the actuator of CHUTE ASSY-REAR that
Replace CHUTE Go to Step [2].
ASSY-REAR.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
presses SWITCH I/L CAB (P/H Cover Switch) (p.363) continuity?
damaged?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
Actuator J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
2 Operation check of SWITCH-PH DOOR
Disconnect the P/J408 from the PWBA MCU.
Is there continuity on J408-5 ↔ J408-6 when

SWITCH-I/L CAB is pressed, and does the
continuity stop when the switch is released?

Replace
HARNESS-
continuity?
J408-5 ↔ J603-8
J408-6 ↔ J603-7

Panel Message 4 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY 2BTR Replace

SW SWITCH 2BTR
Replace
HARNESS
F Open Disconnect the P/J418 from the PWBA MCU. COVER. (p.391) ASSY 2BTR
Do all of the wiring below have normal SW.
P621-1 ↔ J113-2
CHUTE ASSY-FSR SWITCH 2BTR COVER P621-2 ↔ J113-1
HARNESS ASSY ADC HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS 5 Power supply check to PWBA MCU
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [6].
the following terminals on PWBA MCU?

Troubleshooting P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
Step Check Yes No
P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC
1 Shape check of CHUTE ASSY-FSR
Is the actuator of CHUTE ASSY-FSR that
ASSY-FSR. 6 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/ Repair broken or
(p.379) Disconnect P/J410 from PWBA MCU and P/ HVPS. (p.448) shorted part.
presses SWITCH 2BTR COVER damaged?
J502 from LV/HVPS.
Actuator Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
2 Operation check of SWITCH 2BTR COVER Go to Step [5].
Go to Step [3]. J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
Is there continuity on J418-7 ↔ J418-8 when J410-8 ↔ J502-8
SWITCH 2BTR COVER is pressed, and does
the continuity stop when the switch is released?

Replace
HARNESS
continuity?
J418-7 ↔ J621-2
J418-8 ↔ J621-1


Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [7].
C Open the following terminals on PWBA MCU?

P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC
COVER FUSER SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS 7 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/
Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
Troubleshooting
continuity?
Step Check Yes No
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
1 Check of open/close state of COVER
Is COVER FUSER closed?
Go to Step [3]. Close the cover.
Go to Step [2].
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
turned ON?
Go to Step [3]. End of procedure J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
3 Shape check of COVER FUSER Replace COVER Go to Step [4].
Is the actuator of COVER FUSER that presses FUSER. (p.324)
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR deformed or
J410-8 ↔ J502-8
damaged?
Actuator
4 Operation check of SWITCH-FUSER DOOR Go to Step [5].

Disconnect SWITCH-FUSER DOOR P/J114.
Replace
SWITCH-
Is there continuity on P114-1 ↔ P114-2 when FUSER DOOR.
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR is pressed, and does (p.336)

Repair broken or
shorted part.
continuity?
J403-11 ↔ J114-2
J403-12 ↔ J114-1

Panel Message 4 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 Go to Step [5].

Replace
HARNESS-
ASSY FEED 1.
G Open Is the continuity normal between all terminals
of J435 ↔ P608 (connector on Feeder to be (p.471)
Possible parts that caused the error connected to the printer)?
CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 SWITCH FEEDER DOOR 5 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step [6].
Repair broken or
shorted part.
HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 Is the continuity normal between all terminals
HARNESS ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU of J421 ↔ J608 (connector on the printer to
connect Feeder)?
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting 6 Power supply check to PWBA MCU

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [7].

Step Check Yes No P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
1 Shape check of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
Is the actuator of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 that
FDR ASSY 500. P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC
presses SWITCH FEEDER DOOR damaged? (p.463)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Actuator
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
2 Operation check of SWITCH FEEDER DOOR Go to Step [4].

Disconnect P/J437 from PWBA TRAY 500.
Go to Step [3]. J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
Is there continuity on J437-8 ↔ J437-9 when J410-6 ↔ J502-6
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR is pressed, and does J410-7 ↔ J502-7
the continuity stop when the switch is released? J410-8 ↔ J502-8
3 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED
MAIN
Replace
SWITCH
Replace
HARNESS-
Disconnect P/J437 from PWBA TRAY 500. FEEDER DOOR. ASSY FEED
Do all of the wiring below have normal (p.473) MAIN.
continuity?
J437-8 ↔ J121-2
J437-9 ↔ J121-1

Panel Message 4 Shape check of COVER FRONT ASSY U

Is the actuator of COVER FRONT ASSY U
FRONT
B Open that presses SWITCH-INLK FRONT deformed ASSY U. (p.331)
or damaged?
Actuator
COVER TOP COVER FRONT ASSY U
COVER FUSER SWITCH ASSY TOP
SWITCH-INLK FRONT SWITCH-INLK FUSER
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
5 Shape check of COVER FUSER Replace COVER
Is the actuator of COVER FUSER that presses FUSER. (p.324)
Go to Step [6].
Step Check Yes No SWITCH-INLK FUSER deformed or

damaged?
1 Check of open/close state of COVER
Are all the COVER TOP, COVER FRONT
Go to Step [3]. Close the cover.
Go to Step [2].
ASSY U, and COVER FUSER closed? Actuator

turned ON?
3 Shape check of COVER TOP

Is the actuator of COVER TOP that presses
ASSY TOP.
SWITCH ASSY TOP deformed or damaged? (p.321)
Actuator 6 Operation check of SWITCH ASSY TOP

Disconnect P/J116 from SWITCH ASSY TOP.
SWITCH ASSY
Is there continuity on P116-1 ↔ P116-3 when TOP. (p.327)
SWITCH ASSY TOP is pressed, and does the
continuity stop when the switch is released?
7 Operation check of SWITCH-INLK FRONT Go to Step [8].

Disconnect P/J115 from SWITCH-INLK
Replace
SWITCH-INLK
FRONT. FRONT. (p.338)
Is there continuity on P115-1 ↔ P115-3 when
SWITCH-INLK FRONT is pressed, and does

Step Check Yes No
8 Operation check of SWITCH-INLK FUSER Go to Step [9].

Disconnect P/J117 from SWITCH-INLK
Replace
SWITCH-INLK
FUSER. FUSER. (p.341)
Is there continuity on P117-1 ↔ P117-3 when
SWITCH-INLK FUSER is pressed, and does

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [10].

P410-1 ↔ P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 ↔ P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 ↔ P410-7/8: 24 VDC

Repair broken or
shorted part.
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 ↔ J502-1
J410-2 ↔ J502-2
J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
J410-5 ↔ J502-5
J410-6 ↔ J502-6
J410-7 ↔ J502-7
J410-8 ↔ J502-8


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Y Toner Low Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Toner Cartridge Y ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
HARNESS ASSY MAIN ANTENNA CTRG 7 Check after replacement of ANTENNA
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
PWBA MCU Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or

ON?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Toner Cartridge Y attachment

Is Toner Cartridge Y attached correctly?
to step [2].

turned ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5].
CTRG, and then

proceed to step
[5].


ON?


Repair broken or
shorted part.
M Toner Low Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Toner Cartridge M ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure

ON?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Toner Cartridge M attachment

Is Toner Cartridge M attached correctly?
to step [2].

turned ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5].
CTRG, and then

proceed to step
[5].

reconnect it.
ON?


Repair broken or
shorted part.
C Toner Low Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Toner Cartridge C ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure

ON?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Toner Cartridge C attachment

Is Toner Cartridge C attached correctly?
to step [2].

turned ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5].
CTRG, and then

proceed to step
[5].


ON?


Repair broken or
shorted part.
K Toner Low Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 ↔ J106-2
J415-2 ↔ J106-1
Toner Cartridge K ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure

ON?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Toner Cartridge K attachment

Is Toner Cartridge K attached correctly?
to step [2].

turned ON?

End of procedure

ON?

Clean
ANTENNA
Go to Step [5].
CTRG, and then

proceed to step
[5].

reconnect it.
ON?


Repair broken or
shorted part.
Worn Photoconductor continuity.
J413-10 ↔ J617-3
J413-11 ↔ J617-2
J413-12 ↔ J617-1
Photoconductor Unit SENSOR TNER FULL
HARNESS ASSY MAIN HARNESS-ASSY TNER FULL 7 Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY TNR
FULL
Replace Repair broken or
SENSOR TNER shorted part.
PWBA MCU LV/HVPS Disconnect P/J617. FULL. (p.413)
Troubleshooting continuity?
P617-1 ↔ J126-3
Step Check Yes No
P617-2 ↔ J126-2
to step [2].
P617-3 ↔ J126-1
turned ON?
MCU is 5 VDC?
MCU. (p.445)

Unit
End of procedure
Disconnect P/J410 from PWBA MCU and P/ HVPS. (p.448) shorted part.
Replace Photoconductor Unit. J502 from LV/HVPS.
Does the error occur when the power is turned Do all of the wiring below have normal
ON? continuity?
4 Operation check of SONSOR TNER FULL Replace PWBA

(Toner Full Sensor) MCU. (p.445)
Go to Step [5]. J410-3 ↔ J502-3
J410-4 ↔ J502-4
MCU is 0 VDC when the sensor sensing area is
blocked, and is 5 VDC when the sensing area is
not blocked?

TNER FULL

MCU is 5 VDC?

Panel Message 5 Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY

XERO
HARNESS-
Disconnect the J416 from PWBA MCU. ASSY XERO.
Worn Photoconductor
J416-4 ↔ J109-2
Photoconductor Unit GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY J416-5 ↔ J109-1
HARNESS-ASSY XERO PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS 6 Check after replacement of GUIDE CRU
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of procedure
Replace GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA

Troubleshooting ASSY. (p.401) or (p.404)

to step [2].

turned ON?

Unit
End of procedure

ON?


ON?

FIP-70
Panel Message
Service Req E998
FFC-ASSY ESS PWBA MCU

BOARD ASSY., MAIN
Troubleshooting
Step Check Yes No
1 Check if the firmware version of the PWBA

MCU
Go to Step [2]. Update the
firmware.
Check the firmware version of the PWBA
MCU.
Is the version latest?
2 Check if the firmware version of the printer

controller
Go to Step [3]. Update the
firmware.
Check the firmware version of the printer
controller
Is the version latest?
3 Continuity check of FFC-ASSY ESS

1. Disconnect the P/J400 on the PWBA
Go to Step [4]. Replace the
FFC-ASSY
MCU. ESS.
2. Disconnect the CN601 on the BOARD
ASSY., MAIN
3. Check each wiring for continuity.
Do all of the wiring have continuity?
4 Replacement of the BOARD ASSY., MAIN

Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN.
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
End of
procedure
Does the error occur?

FIP-71 ELECTRICAL NOISE Step Check Yes No
Possible parts that caused the error 5 Check of grounding of boards

Are all screws fastening PWBA MCU and LV/
Go to Step [6]. Tighten the
screws.
HVPS to the frame tightened firmly?
Photoconductor Unit HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD Also, are all screws fastening the PWBA
FUSER ASSY PWBA MCU TRAY 500 of Feeder to the frame tightened
firmly?
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
6 Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY Go to Step [7]. End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of external noise

Are there any other electrical apparatus (e. g.
Go to Step [2]. End of procedure Replace FUSER. (p.428)
Does the electrical noise problem still continue
generators, wireless transmitters, or equipment after replacement?
that use motors) within 3 m of the printer?
Either turn the other electrical apparatus OFF,
or reposition the printer at least 6 m away from
Replace all
related parts.
End of procedure
other electrical apparatus. Does the electrical noise problem still continue
Does the electrical noise problem still after replacement?
continue?
2 Check of AC ground
Is the AC power outlet wired and grounded
Go to Step [3]. Ask the customer
to repair the AC
correctly? power outlet.

Unit
End of procedure
Replace DRU ASSY.

Does the electrical noise problem still continue
after replacement?
4 Check of contact between Photoconductor

Unit and HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD
HOUSING
Remove Photoconductor Unit. ASSY-GUIDE
Is the contact surface of Photoconductor Unit AD.
and CONDUCTOR attached to HOUSING
ASSY-GUIDE AD deformed or are there
foreign objects on the surface?

3.4.4.3.2 Controller related error Possible parts that caused the error
Since a controller-related service call error may occur due to the PWBA ESS
C H E C K
P O IN T print data structure sent by the host/application, make operation Troubleshooting
check while simultaneously changing the operating environment,
print data, etc. Step Check Yes No
1 External noise
1. Check the surrounding of the printer for
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
End of procedure
FIP-C1 electrical equipment. (p.450)

2. Disconnect all cables connected to the
Panel Message printer, except the AC cable, and make
operation check.
Service Req C0017 Service Req C0097 Does the error occur?
Service Req C0081 Service Req C0098
Service Req C0082 Service Req C0128-0254
Service Req C0096

FIP-C2 FIP-C3
Service Req C0999 Service Req C1121 Service Req C1020 Service Req C1021
Service Req C1120 PWBA ESS RAM-DIMM
Possible parts that caused the error Troubleshooting
PWBA ESS Standard ROM-DIMM Step Check Yes No
Troubleshooting 1 Check of RAM-DIMM

1. Check whether the installed RAM-DIMM is
To Step [2] End of procedure
the specified one and is securely connected.

Step Check Yes No (Remove it once and reinstall it again.)
1 Check of Standard ROM-DIMM
1. Check whether the installed ROM-DIMM is
To Step [2] End of procedure Does the error occur?
the specified one and is securely connected. 2 Replace the RAM-DIMM

1. Replace the Standard RAM-DIMM.
(Remove it once and reinstall it again.)
Does the error occur? Does the error occur?
2 Replace the Standard ROM-DIMM To Step [3] End of procedure 3 External noise
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
End of procedure
1. Replace the Standard ROM-DIMM.
electrical equipment. (p.450)
3 External noise
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
End of procedure printer, except the AC cable, and make
operation check.
electrical equipment. (p.450)
printer, except the AC cable, and make
operation check.

FIP-C4 FIP-C5

Service Req C2000
PWBA ESS
PWBA ESS
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Step Check Yes No
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of host PC To Step [2] End of procedure
1 Check of EEPROM
Initialize the EEPROM. Refer to “Initialization
To Step [2] End of procedure Restart the host PC.
of EEPROM” (p.77)
Does the error occur? 2 Check of Printer Driver
Reinstall the Printer Driver.
2 External noise
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
End of procedure Does the error occur?
electrical equipment. (p.450) 3 External noise

Replace the
PWBA ESS.
End of procedure
2. Disconnect all cables connected to the (p.450)

electrical equipment.
operation check. 2. Disconnect all cables connected to the
operation check.

FIP-C6 FIP-C8

Service Req C2011
ADF unit
Network Board
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Step Check Yes No
Step Check Yes No
1 Continuity check between the ADF unit and
1 Check if the network board is installed

correctively
Replace the
network board.
End of procedure scanner unit
Connect the ADF connector to the scanner unit
--- ---
1. Remove the network board from the correctively.

controller board.
2. Reinstall the network board correctively.
Dose the error occur?
FIP-C9
Panel Message
FIP-C7 Service Req C2012
Panel Message Possible parts that caused the error
Service Req C2010 PWBA ESS
Possible parts that caused the error Troubleshooting
Fax module Step Check Yes No

Troubleshooting
1 Restart the printer
Turn the printer off and back on the power.
Replace the
PWBA ESS. ---
Step Check Yes No Dose the error occur?
1 Check if the fax module is installed

correctively
Replace the fax
module.
End of procedure
1. Remove the fax board from the controller

board.
2. Reinstall the fax board correctively.
Dose the error occur?

3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble

Perform troubleshooting for print quality troubles following the flow chart below.
START
Make a sample test print
No
Is there an applicable FIP?
Yes
Perform the appropriate troubleshooting Replace Photoconductor Unit and

FUSER ASSY in that order
No No
Trouble restored? Trouble restored?
Yes Yes
END END
Leg_Sec001_001FA
Figure 3-4. Printing-quality troubleshooting Entry Chart
The printing-quality troubleshooting described here is based on a condition that the

printer controller has no problems.
However, making a test print with only the engine side, allows you to find out roughly
which side (controller side or engine side) is causing the trouble, except for cases that
cannot be checked by the test print.
Test print with the engine alone is normal → Printer controller trouble
Test print on engine alone is abnormal → Printer engine trouble
If the probable cause is “printer controller trouble,” replace with a normal printer
controller and interface cable, and check.
If the trouble recurs after replacing with the normal parts, check on the host side, and
use the printer quality FIPs to perform efficient troubleshooting.

3.4.5.1 Engine Test Print

To check the IOT operation, it is possible to print PWBA MCU built-in sample
continuously without being routed through the controller. If the problem does not occur
on the PWBA MCU built-in sample, the cause of the problem may be controller.
PRINTING METHOD
PWBA MCU
C A U T IO N The test print cannot be made if an engine-related error has
occurred.
1. Remove the COVER ASSY LH. (p.334)
W A R N IN G Never touch the energized or driving part when performing the

following procedure.
2. Set paper into MSI and turn the power on.

3. In Ready mode, short-circuit the pad for test print on the PWBA MCU with
a small screwdriver or a similar tool. The pad is located at upper right of
the interface connector .
W A R N IN G When short-circuiting the pad, be careful not to contact the other

elements by hand or tool. Leg_002_003RB
Figure 3-5. The Pad for Test Print
C A U T IO N 1 sheet of test print is printed out by 1 time of short-circuiting.

As for Ready mode, refer to “2.2.7 Operating Modes” (p.132)

TEST PRINT PATTERN
400 dot line 1 dot line

(400dpi)
127 dot
508 dot
(400dpi)
Figure 3-6. Test Print Pattern

3.4.5.2 Print Quality-related FIP Table Table 3-12. Print Quality-related FIP Table
To reliably judge and understand the details of trouble, and perform the correct remedy Symptom See FIP
efficiently when printing quality-related trouble occurs, make a test print, and use the Printing is Faint (Weak Tones) FIP-P1
FIP tables corresponding to the phenomena.
Blank Print FIP-P2
When trouble cannot be restored by the printing quality-related FIP, check again using Solid Black Print FIP-P3
the FIP, and then replace all parts indicated in the “ESS and possible parts that caused
Vertical White Bands or Lines FIP-P4
the error” one by one to check the parts and perform troubleshooting.
Horizontal White Bands or Lines FIP-P5
The printing quality-related FIPs describe typical troubles as below.
Vertical Black Lines FIP-P6
Horizontal Black Lines FIP-P7
Image is Partially Not Printed FIP-P8
Toner Smudges FIP-P9
Residual Image FIP-P10
Dark or Dirty Background FIP-P11
Skew Print FIP-P12
Print Paper Damage FIP-P13
Image Not Fixed FIP-P14
Color Shift FIP-P15
Uneven Density/Thin-Spot FIP-P16
Entirely Faint FIP-P17
Entirely Fogged in Black FIP-P18
Entirely Thin FIP-P19
Uneven Density in Horizontal Direction FIP-P20
Vertical White Lines (Location of the lines are same between Y, M, C and K) FIP-P21
Vertical White Lines (Locations of the lines are different between Y, M, C and K) FIP-P22
Horizontal Lines FIP-P23
Stain FIP-P24
Colored Dots at 150mm Pitch FIP-P25
Vertical Two Lustered Streaks on the Center of OHP FIP-P26
5mm-width Horizontal Bands at 84.5mm Intervals FIP-P27

3.4.5.3 Uniformly Spaced Print Troubles (bands, smudges, etc.)

When horizontal stripes and spots appear at fixed intervals, it is highly possible that a
specific roll has caused the trouble. If this happens, you might be able to easily solve
the problem by measuring the interval between the stripes or spots on a test print, and
checking the relationship between the pitches shown in the table below (note that the
pitch does not necessarily match the perimeter of the roller).
Part (Roller) Name Outside Diameter Pitch (mm)

FUSER FUSER ASSY EXIT ROLL φ15.6 49.1
PINCH ROLL φ8.0 25.1
H/R φ26.2 84.5
BELT φ30.1 94.5
XERO CRU Photoconductor Unit DRUM φ47.0 147.7
BCR φ12.0 37.7
1st BTR φ10.0 31.4
BUR φ15.7 49.3
IDLE ROLL φ11.8 36.9
CNL BRUCH φ19.0 24.1
TRANSFER 2ND BTR ASSY 2nd BTR φ16.3 51.1
DEVE HOUSING ASSY- MAG ROLL φ16.0 24.9
DEVE AUGGER SUPPLY φ17.0 38.1
AUGGER ADMIX φ17.0 38.1
PR MOTER MOT ASSY P/R - - 7.5

3.4.5.4 Printing quality-related FIP Step Check Yes No
FIP-P1 Printing is Faint (Weak Tones) 4 Check of toner cartridge attachment

Re-attach the toner cartridge, and make a test
End of procedure Go to Step [5].
print of the problem image.

Problems Is the image printed normally?
Overall density of image is too weak. 5 Check of 2ND BTR ASSY
Go to Step [6]. Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY.
ESS and possible parts that caused the error (p.387)
Is 2ND BTR ASSY normal without any dirt,
Photoconductor Unit damage or wear?
ROS ASSY
Toner Cartridge Y 6 Check of contact between Photoconductor
Unit and frame
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [7].
Toner Cartridge M Are the contacts of Photoconductor Unit and

Toner Cartridge C HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD dirty or
Toner Cartridge K deformed?

2ND BTR ASSY
HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD
7 Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of procedure Go to Step [8].
Unit
MOT ASSY MAG Replace Photoconductor Unit.
PWBA ESS Make a test print of the problem image.
PWBA MCU Is the image printed normally?

LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
8 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge End of procedure Go to Step [9].
Replace Toner Cartridge Y/M/C/K.
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION Make a test print of the problem image.
Is the image printed normally?
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter. 9 Check after replacement of PWBA MCU
Step Check Yes No Make a test print of the problem image.
1 Check of Paper
Load new, dry recommended paper, and
End of procedure Go to Step [2]. Is the image printed normally?
execute a test print. 10 Check after replacement of ROS ASSY

Is the image printed normally? Make a test print of the problem image.
2 Check of laser beam path Remove

Are there any obstructions between ROS ASSY obstacles.
Go to Step [3]. Is the image printed normally?
and Photoconductor Unit? 11 Check after replacement of the MOT ASSY End of procedure Go to Step [12].
MAG
3 Check of ROS window
Is ROS window dirty?
Clean the ROS
window with
Go to Step [4]. Replace MOT ASSY MAG. (p.436)
Make a test print of the problem image.
CLEANER
ASSY.

Step Check Yes No
12 Check of image primary transfer process

Is the toner image on the drum transferred
Go to Step [13]. Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.448)
normally to IBT BELT?
Execute a test print, turn the power OFF when
you think that the primary transfer process is in
progress during printing, and check the toner
image on IBT BELT.
13 Check of image secondary transfer process

Is the toner image on IBT BELT transferred
Replace “ESS and Replace LV/
possible parts that HVPS. (p.448)
normally to the paper? caused the error”.
you think that the image transfer process is in
progress during printing, and check the paper.

FIP-P2 Blank Print Step Check Yes No
Problems
4 Check of toner cartridge attachment
Re-attach the toner cartridge, and make a test
print of the problem image.

Completely blank pages are printed.
ESS and possible parts that caused the error
Photoconductor Unit
5 Check of 2ND BTR ASSY
BTR ASSY.
ROS ASSY Is 2ND BTR ASSY normal without any dirt, (p.387)
Toner Cartridge Y damage or wear?

Toner Cartridge M
Toner Cartridge C
Unit and frame
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [7].
Toner Cartridge K Are the contacts of Photoconductor Unit and

2ND BTR ASSY HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD dirty or
deformed?
MOTOR ASSY MAG 7 Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of procedure Go to Step [8].
Unit
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION 8 Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge End of procedure Go to step [9]
Replace Toner Cartridge Y/M/C/K.
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the Make a test print of the problem image.
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter. Is the image printed normally?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of laser beam path Remove

Are there any obstructions between ROS ASSY obstacles.
Go to Step [2].
and Photoconductor Unit? Is the image printed normally?
2 Is ROS window completely covered by

obstacles, or is it dirty?
Remove
obstacles, and
Go to Step [3].
clean ROS Make a test print of the problem image.

window with Is the image printed normally?
CLEANER
ASSY. 11 Check after replacement of MOT ASSY
MAG
3 Check connection of ROS ASSY connector

Is the connector firmly connected to ROS
Go to Step [4]. Connect the
connector.
Replace MOT ASSY MAG. (p.436)
ASSY? Is the image printed normally?

Step Check Yes No

HVPS. (p.448)
image on IBT BELT.

HVPS. (p.448)
normally to the paper?
14 Check after replacement of ESS

Replace ESS.
End of procedure Replace “ESS
and possible parts
Make a test print of the problem image. that caused the
error”.

FIP-P3 Solid Black Print
Problems
Completely black pages are printed.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
2ND BTR ASSY
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter.
Step Check Yes No
1 Check connection of ROS ASSY connector

connector.
ASSY?

Unit and frame
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [3].
Are the contacts of Photoconductor Unit and

HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD dirty or
deformed?
3 Cover the entire window of ROS ASSY and Replace LV/

execute a test print. HVPS. (p.448)
Go to Step [4].
Is the print completely black?
4 Cover half of the window of ROS ASSY and Go to Step [5].

execute a test print.
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.445)
Is the print, half white and half black?

End of procedure Replace “ESS and
possible parts that
Make a test print of the problem image. caused the error”.

FIP-P4 Vertical White Bands or Lines Step Check Yes No
Problems
4 Check of ROS window
Is ROS window dirty?
Clean the ROS
window with
Go to Step [5].
CLEANER
Vertical (along the paper feed direction) white ASSY.
bands or lines appear almost all over the
printout. Some bands or lines are extremely 5 Check of 2ND BTR ASSY
BTR ASSY
faint and some are completely white (blank)
Is 2ND BTR ASSY normal without any dirt, (p.387)
missing the part of the image which should be
damage or wear?
printed.
ESS and possible parts that caused the error 6 Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of procedure Go to Step [7].
Unit
ROS ASSY Replace Photoconductor Unit.
Photoconductor Unit Make a test print of the problem image.
2ND BTR ASSY Is the image printed normally?
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU Make a test print of the problem image.

LV/HVPS Is the image printed normally?
8 Check of Heat Roll and Pressure Roll Replace FUSER Replace “ESS
ASSY. (p.428) and possible parts
W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down that caused the
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter. before performing work. error”.
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Paper
Turn the Gear by hand, and inspect Heat Roll
and Pressure Roll.
execute a test print of the problem image.
Are Heat Roll and Pressure Roll scratched or
Is the image printed normally? dirty and damaged?
2 Check of the paper feed path Remove
Are there any dirt or obstacles on the paper feed obstacles.
Go to Step [3].
path from feeding section to the ejecting

section?
3 Check of laser beam path

Are there any obstructions between ROS
Remove
obstacles.
Go to Step [4].
ASSY and Photoconductor Unit?

FIP-P5 Horizontal White Bands or Lines Step Check Yes No
Problems
4 Connection check of ROS ASSY connector
connector.
Horizontal (vertical to the paper feed ASSY?
direction) white bands or lines appear almost
all over the printout. Some bands or lines are
BTR ASSY.
extremely faint and some are completely white Is 2ND BTR ASSY normal without any dirt, (p.387)
(blank) missing the part of the image which damage or wear?
should be printed.
Unit
ROS ASSY Make a test print of the problem image.
Photoconductor Unit
PWBA MCU 7 Check after replacement of ROS ASSY
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS 8 Check after replacement of PWBA MCU
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the Is the image printed normally?
Step Check Yes No

HVPS. (p.448)
normally to IBT BELT? Also, are there any
1 Check of Paper
horizontal white bands?
execute a test print of the problem image. Execute a test print, turn the power OFF when
2 Check of Rollers on the paper feed path
Are Rollers on the paper feed path normal
Go to Step [4]. After cleaning or
replacing the
image on IBT BELT.
without any dirt, damage or wear? relevant Rollers,

go to step [3].
3 Execution of a test print


Step Check Yes No

HVPS. (p.448)
11 Check of Heat Roll and Pressure Roll Replace FUSER Replace “ESS and
ASSY. (p.428) possible parts that
W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down caused the error”.

and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?

FIP-P6 Vertical Black Lines Step Check Yes No
Problems
End of
procedure
Go to Step [6].
Vertical (along the paper feed direction) black Make a test print of the problem image.
lines appear on printout. Is the image printed normally?
ESS and possible parts that caused the error 6 Check after replacement of PWBA MCU
2ND BTR ASSY Make a test print of the problem image.

Photoconductor Unit Is the image printed normally?
ROS ASSY
PWBA MCU 7 Check of Heat Roll and Pressure Roll Replace FUSER Replace “ESS and
FUSER ASSY W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down caused the error”.
PWBA ESS
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the and Pressure Roll.
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter. Are Heat Roll and Pressure Roll scratched or
dirty and damaged?
Step Check Yes No

Go to Step [3]. After cleaning or
replacing the
without any dirt, damage or wear? relevant Rollers,
go to step [2].


BTR ASSY
damage or wear?

Unit

FIP-P7 Horizontal Black Lines Step Check Yes No
Problems
Horizontal (vertical to the paper feed Make a test print of the problem image.
direction) black lines appear on printout. Is the image printed normally?
ESS and possible parts that caused the error 6 Check of image primary transfer process
HVPS. (p.448)
ROS ASSY normally to IBT BELT?
2ND BTR ASSY Execute a test print, turn the power OFF when
Photoconductor Unit you think that the primary transfer process is in
LV/HVPS progress during printing, and check the toner
image on IBT BELT.
FUSER ASSY
HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD 7 Check of image secondary transfer process
HVPS. (p.448)
PWBA MCU
PWBA ESS
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the progress during printing, and check the paper.
8 Check of Heat Roll and Pressure Roll Replace FUSER Replace “ESS and
Step Check Yes No W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down caused the error”.
connector.
ASSY? Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)
Unit and frame
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to step [3]
and Pressure Roll.
Are the contacts of Photoconductor Unit and Are Heat Roll and Pressure Roll scratched or
HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD dirty or dirty and damaged?
deformed?

BTR ASSY
damage or wear?

Unit

FIP-P8 Image is Partially Not Printed Step Check Yes No
Problems
HVPS. (p.448)
Some areas of the printed image are missing or
extremely faint.
ESS and possible parts that caused the error progress during printing, and check the toner
image on IBT BELT.
2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit 5 Check of image secondary transfer process
HVPS. (p.448)
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
PWBA MCU you think that the image transfer process is in
ROS ASSY progress during printing, and check the paper.
PWBA ESS
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION 6 Check of Heat Roll and Pressure Roll Replace FUSER Go to Step [7].
ASSY. (p.428)
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter. Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)
Step Check Yes No Turn the Gear by hand, and inspect Heat Roll
and Pressure Roll.
1 Check of Paper
dirty and damaged?
Is the image printed normally? 7 Check after replacement of PWBA MCU
possible parts that
BTR ASSY
(p.387) Is the image printed normally?

Is 2ND BTR ASSY normal without any dirt,
damage or wear?

Unit

FIP-P9 Toner Smudges Step Check Yes No
Problems
Unit
Toner smudges appear randomly over the
entire surface of the paper.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit Make a test print of the problem image.

HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD Is the image printed normally?
2ND BTR ASSY
PWBA MCU 7 Check after replacement of LV/HVPS
LV/HVPS Make a test print of the problem image.

FUSER ASSY Is the image printed normally?
PWBA ESS
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION 8 Check of Heat Roll and Pressure Roll Replace FUSER Replace “ESS and
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the before performing work.
Step Check Yes No Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)

Go to Step [2]. After cleaning
and replacing the
and Pressure Roll.
relevant Rollers, Are Heat Roll and Pressure Roll scratched or
without any dirt, damage or wear?
go to step [2]. dirty and damaged?

connector.
ASSY?

Unit and frame
Clean or
replace relevant
Go to Step [4].
Are the contacts of Photoconductor Unit and parts.

deformed?

BTR ASSY.
damage or wear?

FIP-P10 Residual Image Step Check Yes No
Problems
Unit
A ghost image appears on the printout. An
image of the previous page or part of the
currently printing page lap over like a ghost. Is the image printed normally?
ESS and possible parts that caused the error 5 Check of 2ND BTR ASSY
BTR ASSY.
Photoconductor Unit Is 2ND BTR ASSY normal without any dirt, (p.387)
HOUSING ASSY- GUIDE AD damage or wear?
2ND BTR ASSY
FUSER ASSY 6 Check of Heat Roll and Pressure Roll Replace FUSER Replace “ESS and
ROS ASSY before performing work.
MOT ASSY MAG
PWBA ESS Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.428)
PWBA MCU Turn the Gear by hand, and inspect Heat Roll
LV/HVPS and Pressure Roll.
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION Are Heat Roll and Pressure Roll scratched or
dirty and damaged?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of repeated printing

Check the residual image
Is the customer printing lots of the same

images?
2 Check of the residual image.

Print out 30 pages of various images.
(Advise the
Did any residual images appear? customer not to
print same image
in large quantities
at a time.)

Unit and frame
Clean or replace
relevant parts.$
Go to Step [4].

deformed?

FIP-P11 Dark or Dirty Background Step Check Yes No
Problems
of SENSOR ASSY ADC
any dirt or
Are there any dirt or foreign bodies on the foreign bodies,
The entire page or part of the page is dirtied SENSOR ASSY ADC surface? and go to step
with toner. It appears as extremely light gray [5].
dirt.
ROS ASSY Is the image printed normally?

Photoconductor Unit
SENSOR ASSY ADC
6 Check after replacement of SENSOR ASSY End of procedure Go to Step [7].
ADC
LV/HVPS Replace SENSOR ASSY ADC. (p.392)
HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD Make a test print of the problem image.

PWBA MCU
FUSER ASSY
possible parts that
PWBA ESS
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION Is the image printed normally?
Step Check Yes No

connector.
ASSY?

Unit and frame
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [3].

deformed?
3 Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of

Unit procedure
Go to Step [4].


FIP-P12 Skew Print Step Check Yes No
Problems
4 Check the Rollers on the paper feed path for Go to Step [5].
damage and wear, and check attachment.
Clean and re-
attach, or replace
Are Rollers on the paper feed path normal the Roller in
The printed image is not parallel to both sides without any dirt, damage or wear? question, and go
of the paper. to Step [5].
Also, are those Rollers attached correctly?
5 Check of Photoconductor Unit attachment
to step [6].
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500
Photoconductor Unit

FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS 7 Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of procedure Replace “ESS and
Unit possible parts that
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION Replace Photoconductor Unit. caused the error”.
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the Is the image printed normally?
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of printer installation surface

Is the printer installed on level surface?
Go to Step [2]. Correct the
inappropriate
Also, are the printer's feet attached correctly? installation.
2 Check of paper feed

Remove the Paper Cassette, and load paper
correctly.
Attach the Paper Cassette correctly into the
printer.
3 Operation check of PLATE ASSY

BOTTOM 500 in the Paper Cassette
Go to Step [4]. Re-attach
PLATE ASSY
Remove the Paper Cassette. BOTTOM.
Does the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 in the (p.457)
Paper Cassette rise up correctly without any
inclination on the left or right sides?

FIP-P13 Print Paper Damage Step Check Yes No
Problems
4 Attachment check of FUSER ASSY
Is FUSER ASSY attached correctly?
Go to Step [5]. Re-attach.
Is the printed out paper wrinkled, folded or

frayed?
5 Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY End of procedure Replace “ESS and
possible parts that
ESS and possible parts that caused the error before performing work.
FUSER ASSY
Replace FUSER ASSY. (p.428)
2ND BTR ASSY
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
PWBA ESS
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Paper

2 Check of paper feed path Remove dirt and Go to Step [3].

Are there any dirt or obstacles on the paper feed obstacles.
path from the paper feed tray to the output
section?
3 Check of all Rollers on the paper feed path

Are all Rollers on the paper feed path normal
Go to Step [4]. Clean the
relevant Rollers.
without any dirt, damage or wear?

FIP-P14 Image Not Fixed Step Check Yes No
Problems
4 Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY End of procedure Go to Step [5].
The printed image is not sufficiently fixed to before performing work.
the paper. The image is easily removed by
rubbing it with your fingers. Replace FUSER ASSY. (p.428)
ESS and possible parts that caused the error Make a test print of the problem image.
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS 5 Check after replacement of PWBA MCU
possible parts that
PWBA MCU caused the error”.
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of Paper

2 Check of print setup mode

Is the printer set to a Transfer Voltage suited to
Go to Step [3]. Adjust the
Transfer Voltage.
the type of paper in use?
3 Check of Heat Roll and Pressure Roll Replace FUSER Go to Step [4].
ASSY. (p.428)

and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?

FIP-P15 Color Shift
Problems
The printed Yellow or Black image does not
accurately overlap the Cyan or Magenta
image, and is out of position.
SENSOR TR-0
Photoconductor Unit
MOT ASSY P/R
PWBA ESS
Step Check Yes No
1 Check of SENSOR TR-0 attachment

Is SENSOR TR-0 attached correctly?
to step [3].

Unit
3 Check after replacement of MOT ASSY P/R End of procedure Go to Step [4].
Replace MOT ASSY P/R. (p.439)
4 Check after replacement of PWBA ESS

Replace PWBA ESS. (p.450)
possible parts that
Is the image printed normally? caused the error”.

Connecting location of the connectors

FIP-P16 Uneven Density/Thin-Spot
Problems
Uneven density/thin-spots appear on entire
surface. This occurs due to disconnection of
connector (D) from LV/HVPS.
ESS and possible parts that caused the error D
WIRE ASSY BTR
LV/HVPS
P/J512
(1BTR)
Step Check Yes No
1 Check the connectors for LV/HVPS.

Make sure that the connector (P/J504) on LV/
possible parts that
HVPS and the connector (P/J512) on 1st BTR caused the error”.
are connected properly.
Print the problem image. Or, execute the test
print.
Was the trouble fixed?


FIP-P17 Entirely Faint
Problems
The color over the entire surface is faint. This
occurs due to disconnection of connector (C)
from LV/HVPS.
ESS and possible parts that caused the error C
WIRE ASSY DEVE
LV/HVPS
P/J510
(DEVE)
Step Check Yes No

possible parts that
HVPS and the connector (P/J510) on DEVE are caused the error”.
connected properly.
print.


FIP-P18 Entirely Fogged in Black
Problems
All of the four colors are printed all over the
page resulting in completely black printout.
This occurs due to disconnection of connector
(A) from LV/HVPS.
A
WIRE ASSY BCR
LV/HVPS
P/J514
(BCR)
Step Check Yes No

possible parts that
HVPS and connector (P/J514) on BCR are caused the error”.
connected properly.
print.


FIP-P19 Entirely Thin
T2
Problems (2BTR)
Strong faintness occurs on entire surface. This
occurs due to disconnection of connector
(F) from PWBA HVPS.
WIRE ASSY 2BTR
PWBA HVPS
Step Check Yes No
1 Check connector of PWBA HVPS.

Check connection of connector (P/J505) of
possible parts that
PWBA. Also, make sure that 2ND BTR ASSY caused the error”.
that contacts with T2 shown in the figure left is
correctly attached.
print.
F


FIP-P20 Uneven Density in Horizontal Direction
Problems
Uneven density in the horizontal direction in
high-density color areas (color is faint in a
stripe pattern) is occurring. This occurs due to
disconnection of connector (G) from PWBA
HVPS.
WIRE ASSY IBT
PWBA HVPS
P/J513
(IBT)
Step Check Yes No
1 Check the connectors for PWBA HVPS.

Make sure that the connector (P/J506) on
possible parts that
PWBA and the connector (P/J513) on IBT are caused the error”.
connected properly.
print. G

FIP-P21 Vertical White Lines Step Check Yes No

(Location of the lines are same between Y, M, C and K)
Unit.
Replace the Photoconductor Unit.
Print the problem image, or execute a test print.

Replace the ROS ASSY
possible parts that
Print the problem image, or execute a test print. caused the error”.
Problems
Vertical white lines appear on each of C, M and Y printout printed in solid 30%
half tone, and the location of the lines are same between the three printouts.
It is caused by dirt on the ROS ASSY window, dust or foreign material inside the
ROS ASSY, or a scratch on the Photoconductor drum.
1. Photoconductor Unit
2. ROS ASSY
Step Check Yes No
1 Clean the ROS ASSY window.

Clean ti using ROS-CLEANER.


FIP-P22 Vertical White Lines FIP-P23 Horizontal Lines

(Locations of the lines are different between Y, M, C and K)
Problems
Problems Horizontal lines appear on the same position every time a color print is made. On a
Vertical white lines appear on each of C, M and Y printout printed in solid 30% B/W print, the position is different from a color print. It is caused by dirt on the
half tone, and the location of the lines are different between the three printouts. Photoconductor Unit.
ESS and possible parts that caused the error ESS and possible parts that caused the error
1. HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (Y, M, C, K) 1. Photoconductor Unit
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter. paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter.
1 Check of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE

Replace the corresponding HOUSING ASSY-
End of procedure Replace "ESS and
possible parts that
1 Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of procedure Replace "ESS and
Unit. possible parts that
DEVE. caused the error". Replace the Photoconductor Unit. caused the error".
Print the problem image, or execute a test print. Print the problem image, or execute a test print.
Was the trouble fixed? Was the trouble fixed?

FIP-P24 Stain FIP-P25 Colored Dots at 150mm Pitch
Problems Problems
Stains appear on the same position every time a color print is made. Colored dots appear spacing 150mm between them.
The position changes when a B/W print is made. On a color printout, all the Y, M, C and K colored dots appear in a line and
It is caused by dirt on the Photoconductor Unit. position of them shift by page.
It is caused by a scratch on the Photoconductor Unit.
1. Photoconductor Unit ESS and possible parts that caused the error
1. Photoconductor Unit
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter. Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the
Step Check Yes No
Step Check Yes No
1 Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of procedure Replace "ESS and
Replace the Photoconductor Unit. caused the error". 1 Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of procedure Replace "ESS and
Print the problem image, or execute a test print. Replace the Photoconductor Unit. caused the error".
Was the trouble fixed? Print the problem image, or execute a test print.

FIP-P26 Vertical Two Lustered Streaks on the Center of OHP FIP-P27 5mm-width Horizontal Bands at 84.5mm Intervals
Problems Problems
On a printed transparency two vertical white lines appear on a printed When the product has not been used for a month or longer, 5mm-width lustered
transparency. vertical bands appear especially when printing a high resolution image on a
It is caused by Kick Roll failure in the FUSER ASSY. jurisprudence or coated paper.
ESS and possible parts that caused the error NOTE: Do not replace the FUSER ASSY immediately.
1. FUSER ASSY The symptom may disappear as the printer is used for while.
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the ESS and possible parts that caused the error
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter. 1. FUSER ASSY
Step Check Yes No Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the
1 Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY. End of procedure Replace "ESS and
possible parts that
W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down caused the error". Step Check Yes No
1 Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY. End of procedure Replace "ESS and
possible parts that
Replace the FUSER ASSY. W A R N IN G Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down caused the error".
Print the problem image, or execute a test print. before performing work.
Replace the FUSER ASSY.

3.4.6 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble

3.4.6.1 Abnormal noise-related troubleshooting entry chart

3.4.6.2 Abnormal Noise-related FIP Step Check Yes No
FIP-N1 At Power On 9 Is abnormal noise being generated from

ROLL REGI RUBBER in FRAME ASSY-
Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY-
Go to Step [10].
PH that is driven by MOTOR-PH? REGI.

10 Is abnormal noise being generated from Clean or replace
ROLL MSI that is driven by MOTOR-PH? ROLL MSI.
MOT ASSY ROT FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
MOT ASSY MICRO 2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit MOT ASSY P/R
FRAME ASSY-PH ROLL MSI
Troubleshooting
Step Check Yes No
1 Is abnormal noise being generated by MOT Replace MOT

ASSY ROT? ASSY ROT.
Go to Step [2].
2 Is abnormal noise being generated by

FRAME ASSY-ROTARY that is driven by
Clean or replace Go to Step [3].
FRAME ASSY-
MOT ASSY ROT? ROTARY.

ASSY MICRO? ASSY MICRO.
Go to Step [4].
4 Is abnormal noise being generated by 2ND

BTR ASSY that is driven by MOT ASSY
Clean or replace
2ND BTR
Go to Step [5].
MICRO? ASSY.

ASSY P/R? ASSY P/R.
Go to Step [6].
6 Is abnormal noise being generated from

inside Photoconductor Unit?
Replace
Photoconductor
Go to Step [7].
Unit.

MOTOR-PH inside FRAME ASSY-PH?
Replace FRAME
ASSY-PH.
Go to Step [8].

ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI in FRAME ASSY- ROLL ASSY-
Go to Step [9].
PH that is driven by MOTOR-PH? PRE REGI.

FIP-N2 At Standby
MOT ASY FSR FUSER ASSY

2ND BTR ASSY
Troubleshooting
Step Check Yes No

MOT ASSY FSR?
Replace MOT
ASSY FSR.
Go to Step [2].
(It rotates when the temperature of FUSER

ASSY reaches the specified value)

FUSER ROLL in FUSER ASSY that is
Clean or replace
FUSER ROLL.
Go to Step [3].
driven by MOT ASSY FSR?
3 Is abnormal noise being generated from 2ND Clean or replace

BTR ASSY that is driven by MOT ASSY 2ND BTR
FSR? ASSY.

FIP-N3 At Printing (One Side) Step Check Yes No
Possible parts that caused the error 7 Is abnormal noise being generated from Clean or replace
ROLL MSI that is driven by MOTOR-PH? ROLL MSI.
Go to Step [8].
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION FRAME ASSY-PH 8 Is abnormal noise being generated from
GEAR ASSY DRIVE that is driven by
Replace FRAME Go to Step [9].
ASSY-PH.
ROLL MSI MOT ASY FSR MOTOR-PH?
FUSER ASSY 2ND BTR ASSY 9 Is abnormal noise being generated from
MOT ASSY FSR?
Replace MOT
ASSY FSR.
Go to Step [10].
MOT ASSY P/R Photoconductor Unit
MOT ASSY MAG HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K 10 Is abnormal noise being generated by
FUSER ROLL in FUSER ASSY that is
Replace FUSER Go to Step [11].
ASSY.
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M driven by MOT ASSY FSR?
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C MOT ASSY ROT
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY MOT ASSY MICRO
11 Is abnormal noise being generated from 2ND Clean or replace
BTR ASSY that is driven by MOT ASSY 2ND BTR
Go to Step [12].
FSR? ASSY.
FRAME ASSY-2ND ROS ASSY
Troubleshooting
12 Is abnormal noise being generated by EXIT Clean or replace
ROLL in FUSER ASSY that is driven by FUSER ASSY.
Go to Step [13].
MOT ASSY FSR?

Step Check Yes No
ASSY P/R? ASSY P/R.
Go to Step [14].
1 Is abnormal noise being generated from Replace 500 Go to Step [2].

DRIVE ASSY FEED in 500 FEEDER ASSY FEEDER ASSY
OPTION? OPTION.
inside Photoconductor Unit?
Replace
Photoconductor
Go to Step [15].
Unit.
2 Is abnormal noise being generated from Clean or replace Go to Step [3].
ROLL ASSY TURN 500 that is driven by ROLL ASSY
DRIVE ASSY FEED in 500 FEEDER ASSY TURN 500.
ASSY MAG? ASSY MAG.
Go to Step [16].
OPTION?
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K, HOUSING
Replace
HOUSING
Go to Step [17].

ROLL ASSY FEED 500 that is driven by
Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY
Go to Step [4].
ASSY-DEVE Y, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE ASSY-DEVE K,
DRIVE ASSY FEED in 500 FEEDER ASSY FEED 500. M, or HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C that are HOUSING
OPTION? driven by MOT ASSY MAG? ASSY-DEVE Y,
HOUSING
MOTOR-PH inside FRAME ASSY-PH?
Replace FRAME Go to Step [5].
ASSY-PH.
ASSY-DEVE M,
or HOUSING
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI in FRAME ASSY- ROLL ASSY-
Go to Step [6]. ASSY-DEVE C.
PH that is driven by MOTOR-PH? PRE REGI. 17 Is abnormal noise being generated by MOT Replace MOT
ASSY ROT? ASSY ROT.
Go to Step [18].

ROLL REGI RUBBER in FRAME ASSY-
Clean or replace
ROLL REGI
Go to Step [7].
18 Is abnormal noise being generated by Replace FRAME Go to Step [19].
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY that is driven by ASSY-
PH that is driven by MOTOR-PH? RUBBER.
MOT ASSY ROT? ROTARY.

Step Check Yes No

ASSY MICRO? ASSY MICRO.
Go to Step [20].
20 Is abnormal noise being generated by Replace FRAME Go to Step [21].

FRAME ASSY-2ND that is driven by MOT ASSY-2ND.
ASSY MICRO?
21 Is abnormal noise being generated by ROS

ASSY?
Replace ROS
ASSY.

3.5 Scanner/ADF Section FIP-2
This section explains about troubleshooting concerning scanner/ADF sections by Panel Message
dividing them into two categories; error messages and surface phenomena.
Cover Open Error
3.5.1 FIP by Message Display
1. ADF cover
Table 3-13. List of Scanner/ADF Section Errors
Panel Message Description FIP 2. Cover open sensor
Release Carriage Lock The carriage does not move to the predefined Troubleshooting
position when turning on the scanner or performing 1 (p.296)
initialization to start scanning. Step Point to be checked Yes No
Cover Open Error 2 (p.296)
ADF Jam Paper loaded in the ADF could not be fed properly. 3 (p.297)
1 Is the ADF cover of the ADF
section open?
Close the cover and
follow the description
Go to Step [2].
displayed on the panel.

Service Req C2011 The ADF is not installed (Fax model only). 4 (p.297)
FIP-1
2 If the error still occurs even after
closing the cover, start the “MFP
maintenance mode” and perform

“Self Diagnose” - “Scanner”. Does
Panel Message opening/closing the cover change
Release Carriage Lock the status (OPEN/CLOSE)
indicated beside the “Cover:”?
1. Carriage Lock Lever for transportation

3 Is the ADF cover protrusion
(designed to activate the Cover
Replace the ADF cover Replace the Cover Open
(p.505) sensor incorporated in
Open sensor) damaged? the ADF unit.
Troubleshooting
Step Point to be checked Yes No
1 Is the Carriage Unit in the scanner

still locked by the Carriage Lock
Move the lever to
“unlock” position and
Go to Step [2].
Lever? follow the description

2 Is the Carriage Lock Lever in the Move the lever to

“lock” position despite the carriage “unlock” position and
is not in the position to be locked? follow the description
TROUBLESHOOTING Scanner/ADF Section 296

FIP-3 FIP-4

ADF Jam Service Req C2011
Possible parts that caused the error Possible parts that caused the error
1. Edge guide 1. The cable that connects ADF unit to the scanner main unit.
2. Pick-up roller 2. FFC cable
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Step Point to be checked Yes No Step Point to be checked Yes No
1 Is the document skewed because the Place the edge guide in

edge guide is not set along the paper the right position.
Go to Step [2].
1 Is the cable that connects ADF unit Connect the cable
to the scanner main unit correctly.
Go to Step [2].
correctly? disconnected?
2 Is the document nonstandard? If possible, place the

document not in the
Go to Step [3].
2 Is the FFC cable disconnected from Connect the cable
CN704 connector on the main correctly.
ADF but on the board?
document glass directly
and start scanning.
3 Are there any paper dust, labels, or Remove the foreign

foreign materials in the paper path? materials.
Go to Step [4].
4 Is there any accumulation of paper Clean the roller surface

dust on the Pick-up roller surface of (wipe the roller surface
Go to Step [5].
the ADF? with soft cloth wrung

out of water).
5 Does the paper slip when being

transferred because the Pick-up
Replace the Pick-up
roller (p.517)
roller of the ADF is worn out?

3.5.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms SCANNER/ADF SECTION DOES NOT OPERATE

This section explains about troubleshooting for typical troubles relating to the scanner/ Possible parts that caused the error
ADF sections.
1. HP detection plate
Table 3-14. Troubleshooting for Scanner/ADF by Symptom
2. Carriage motor
Trouble Description Remedy
Operation failure Scanner/ADF section does not (p.298) Troubleshooting
operate Start the “MFP Maintenance mode”, and perform “Self diagnosis” -
Image is not scanned Vertical bands appear when Clean the reflecting light receiving “Scanner” to see if there are any problems with the listed items below.
correctly scanning the document on the window on the carriage removing
document glass. dust or any foreign material on it. If Step Point to be checked Remedy
(vertical=carriage scanning the foreign materials are inside the
direction) carriage and cannot be removed, 1 Warm up operation
failure
The possible cause of this error may be fluorescent lamp trouble
and the steps below should be followed.
replace the carriage itself. Is “NG” displayed 1. Confirm if CN702 connector on the main board is connected
Vertical bands (paper feeding Clean the ADF scanning window beside “Warm up:”? properly (reconnect the cable as necessary).
direction) appear when scanning located beside the document table 2. Confirm if the FFC cable is connected to the CCD sensor
the document using the ADF. and remove dust or any foreign board on the carriage unit properly (reconnect the cable as
material on it. If the foreign necessary).
materials are inside the carriage and
cannot be removed, replace the
carriage itself.
2 Origin correction
failure
The possible cause of this error may be home position detection
trouble and the steps below should be followed.
Is “NG” displayed 1. Confirm if there are any problems with the HP detection board
Black dots and white dots appear Clean the document glass surface beside “Correct:”? that is mounted on the HP side of the scanner unit lower case
when scanning the document on the (both front and back side) and
(displacement, damage), and replace the HP detection board if a
document glass. remove the foreign materials.
defect is found.
Image is not copied Image failure as shown below Check the panel settings below and 2. Confirm if the cable is connected to the HP sensor board on the
correctly occurs change them according to the paper carriage unit properly (reconnect the cable as necessary).
• Too light or dark characteristics.
3. Confirm if CN701 connector on the main board is connected
(too much density) • Document type properly (reconnect the cable as necessary)*.
• Odd colors • Density
• Dark/Too bright • Contrast 3 Scanner carriage The possible cause of this error may be carriage motor operation
motor driving failure trouble and the steps below should be followed.
• Letters and figures cannot be • R/G/B Is “NG” displayed 1. Confirm if the timing belt is strained correctly as well as the
copied clearly Refer to “1.2.2.5 Consumables/ beside “Motor:”? carriage moves smoothly (Fix them as necessary)
Periodic Replacement Unit” (p37) 2. Confirm if CN703 connector on the main board is connected
properly (reconnect the cable as necessary).
3. Confirm if there are any problems with the carriage motor
(replace the motor if a defect is found) Motor coil resistance
value: 10.9Ω ± 7% (10.1-11.7 Ω).

Note *: If CN701 connection failure occurs, “NG” is displayed for “Motor:”. (Due to the
connection failure, the carriage motor does not operate, and the carriage cannot
move and failed to detect its home position during HP seek operation. As a result, the
malfunction is judged as motor failure.)

3.6 Fax Function
3.6.1 Troubleshooting by Panel Message

Table 3-15. Fax Error Messages and the Remedies
Error Message Description Remedy
Fax Error Fax unit failure Reboot the product to check if the error recurs. If the error recurs, the fax unit is faulty and servicing
• An error occurs while performing R/W check of SDRAM at power-on is required.
• Failed to write into Flash Memory for fax unit.
• An error occurs while performing SUM check of Flash Memory at
power-on
• Detects an error in MODEM of fax unit
Fax Communication This message is displayed when the product failed to send/receive a fax Check the followings for any problem and perform corrective actions if required.
Error normally for some reason. • Connection status of the telephone line
• Current Fax Settings in Setup Mode
If the error still occurs frequently even after checking and performing corrective actions for the above
items, reboot the product in "Maintenance mode" with reference to “3.6.4.2 Log Information”
(p307), and print "Activity Report" or "Fax Setting List". Check the error code printed on the report
or list. See Section “7.7.2 Error List” (p690) for the information on the error, and perform
corresponding corrective actions.
Set Document to ADF This error occurs if paper size is set to "Legal" when sending a fax with Check the condition of the ADF Unit, or load the document on the ADF and resume the sending
the ADF is in the conditions listed below. Because feeding/scanning the operation.If the error occurs even when the ADF unit condition and paper setting are correct, it may
"Legal" size is available only with the ADF due to the specification. be caused by sensor failure. Check the following sensors and replace them if necessary.
• No document is loaded on the ADF • ADF COVER Sensor
• The ADF is open • ADF Sensor
• The ADF Cover is open • DOC Sensor
Report Print Error When one of the following items in "Printing Report" menu, which is ---
activated by pressing [Advanced] button in fax mode, is executed, the
message is displayed if no corresponding information exist.
• Speed Dial List
• Memory Job Info
Cannot Send when This message is displayed when attempting to send a fax during receiving Send the fax after the receiving job is finished.
Receiving a fax is in progress.
Cannot Fax cause of This message is displayed if an unprinted power-off report exists when Wait for the power-off report to be printed out and then resume the sending operation.
Power Off Report attempting to send a fax.
C H E C K
P O IN T
If the power is turned off with unprinted data stored in the memory, a power-off report is
printed out automatically the next time the power is turned on.
TROUBLESHOOTING Fax Function 300

3.6.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms Communication errors occur

Communication errors occur frequently regardless of recipient or destination
This section describes troubleshooting for fax function troubles by symptom.
Dialing is not performed Check Point Corrective Action
The product does not start to dial by pressing [Color Start] or [B/W Start] after
specifying the recipient.
1 Check the GND connection status.
Check if the product is properly grounded
Correct the GND connection properly.
(GND connection).
Check Point Corrective Action
2 Check the signal output level. Reboot the product in MFP Maintenance
mode, and change the settings using the
1 Check the setting of phone line type Correct the setting.
Check the setting of [Fax Settings] - [Basic • “PBX” (Private Branch Exchange):
Check if changing the following system
parameter setting works. [Fax Maintenance] - [Parameter Check]-
COM_TX_ATT_LEVEL (300-006) [Parameter write] function.
Settings] - [Line type] in Setup mode. Accesses to public line via private
-10dBm (default) => XX
branch exchange
Changing the following parameter settings
• “PSTN” (Public Switched Telephone
also may work.
Network): Accesses to public line
COM_TX_CABLE_EQU (310-056)
directly
COM_RX_CABLE_EQU (310-057)
2 Check the setting of dial type Correct the dial type setting.
Check the setting of [Fax Settings] - [Basic • “Tone”: Push-button (digital phone
Settings] - [Dial type] in Setup mode. signal) Communication errors occur with a specific recipient or destination.
• “10 pps” or “20 pps”: Dial pulse (analog
phone signal) Check Point Corrective Action
1 Collect information on the

communication errors.
Report the collected information to the
predetermined contact point to be analyzed.
Cannot receive a fax See “3.6.4.1 MFP Maintenance Tool”
1. Print an Activity Report using [Printing
The product does not receive faxes at all. Report] menu (In fax mode, press (p305)
[Advanced] button to access the menu).
Check Point Corrective Action 2. Get the backup data (retrieve it using
Fax Maintenance Tool).
1 Check the setting of reception mode.
Check the setting of [Fax Settings] -
Change the setting to “auto switch” or “fax
only”.
[Reception Settings] - [Reception mode] in
Setup mode if it is set to “phone only”.
2 Check the ring frequency setting.

When using PBX, check if the minimum/
Reboot the product in MFP Maintenance
mode, and change the settings using the
maximum setting values for ring frequency [Fax Maintenance] - [Parameter Check]-
is appropriate. [Parameter write] function.
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MIN (300-015) LIN_RING_CYCLE_MIN:
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MAX (300-016) 14 mx (default) => XX
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MAX:
100 ms (default) => XX

Fax function operation is unstable.
Check Point Corrective Action
1 Unstable operation of fax function may be

caused by improper system parameter
Initialize the system parameter settings. Be
sure to follow the procedure given below
settings (they might have been overwritten not to erase the user-defined information.
incorrectly). 1. Backup the information set by the user
using the Fax Maintenance Tool.
2. Initialize the system parameter settings
using the menu in the MFP Maintenance
mode.
3. Download the backup copy of the user
information.

3.6.3 Other Troubles and the Remedies

Table 3-16. List of Troubles and Remedies
Trouble Symptom Possible Cause Check Point Remedy
Dialing troubles using The product does not start dialing. The dial tone setting is not appropriate. Check the PBX setup and system Change the corresponding system
PBX system The product fails to dial despite the fact The parameter settings for pulse dialing (Make parameter setting of the product. parameter settings according to the
there is no trouble on the receiving end. time/Break time) to be recognized by a PBX are (To see the system parameter setting, PBX setup.
not appropriate. execute “Read backup data” using the
Fax Maintenance Tool.)
The parameter settings for tone dialing (Tone time)
to be recognized by a PBX are not appropriate.
The product does not receive a fax. The parameter settings relating to Ring (frequency,
cadence, etc.) are not appropriate.
The product cannot achieve high-speed It is attributed to the PBX characteristic.
communication.
Communication errors and incorrect Occurrence of a specific tone at regular intervals
printing of faxes occur frequently. by the PBX causes the symptom.
Communication errors Communication errors and incorrect It is attributed to the line quality. Call the recipient to check the line (Use another communication
with overseas recipient printing of faxes occur frequently. (echo, noise) quality. method)
The fax-signal level is too low. Get the communication protocols log Change the corresponding system
and analyze it. parameter settings.
Transmitting troubles Cannot establish the communication with The protocols do not meet the ITU-T standard. Get the communication protocols log Change the corresponding system
from other fax the product. Occurrence of a particular tone and analyze it. parameter settings.
machines to the product
Multiple pages cannot be transmitted at a The protocols do not meet the ITU-T standard.
time (one page only)
A complex fax, such as one with many The protocols do not meet the ITU-T standard.
graphics, cannot be transmitted.
Troubles depend on Cannot establish the communication. The recipient is using a signal analyzer, coder, or Get the communication protocols log Change the corresponding system
environment any other special devices to receive a fax. and analyze it. parameter settings.
configurations Abnormal operation occurs when receiving A phone/fax auto switch device is used.
faxes and dialing.
Troubles depend on the Abnormal operation occurs when receiving Too many devices are parallel-connected. Check the connection status. Correct the improper connection
installation status faxes and dialing. method.
Accessing to phone line cannot be made. The interior wiring is not correct (improper
connection).
The product gets disconnected upon starting The LINE/TEL is connected reversely.
to receive a fax.

Table 3-16. List of Troubles and Remedies

Trouble Symptom Possible Cause Check Point Remedy
Troubles depend on the When receiving a fax from a certain fax The sending fax machine has trouble to feed the Confirm the condition of the sending Ask the sender to fix the trouble.
printer/scanner section machine, one page of the fax is always documents. fax machine.
divided into two or more pages. (miss-feed, skew-feed)
The document scanning range of the sending fax
machine is too wide.
Number of lines/page setting of the sending fax
machine exceeds a standard level due to additional
header.
Regular-sized one page transmitted from The product has trouble to feed the documents. Check the scanner and ADF if they If any problems are found, fix them.
the product is divided into two or more (miss-feed, skew-feed) operate normally.
pages on the receiving fax machine.

3.6.4 Collecting Error Information When fax troubles especially due to environment configuration occur, get the error
information using [Trouble Info Collection] function to provide it to the analyzing
The AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F has functions to monitor fax jobs and store detailed job department. For details on the tool, refer to “5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data”
and error histories that are important to analyze fax-relating troubles. The stored (p554). The table below shows the information that can be obtained using the function.
information can be printed out in a variety of forms using the menu function and can be
retrieved using a special tool. According to the facing trouble, select the functions to be Table 3-17. List of Information Obtained by the Tool
used to get enough information to analyze the trouble. Info Name Description
System error history Date and time of error occurrence and the error codes (Hex).
3.6.4.1 MFP Maintenance Tool
Internal error history Date and time of error occurrence and the error codes (Hex).
The MFP Maintenance Tool allows fax-relating user-established data stored on the System parameter settings Prints out a list of current system parameter settings.
product to be retrieved and stored into a computer and rewritten into the product. The
Communication jobs Fax jobs stored in the backup data (up to 54 jobs) are sorted by
intended purpose of the tool is to backup the user data in case of product failure which the parameter and printed out as a list.
requires a replacement unit.
Counter Prints out a list of counter label names and counter settings
TOOL FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW SW version The current S/W version installed on the fax unit is displayed.
[User data] Menu

Downloads the user data into a computer.
Retrieves the user-established setups and data stored on the product and writes
them into a computer.
Uploads the user data into the product (fax unit).
Rewrites the user data into the product.
[Trouble Info Collection] Menu
Retrieves a backup data.
This function is intended to collect error information on the product. The error
information can be retrieved and stored into a computer as a file.

TROUBLE INFO COLLECTION (OBTAINING BACKUP DATA)

PROCEDURE
1. Click on the “Trouble Info Collection” tab and click the [Start] button.
2. Specify the destination to save and enter a name for the file.
3. When retrieving the backup data is finished, a message notifying the completion of
the task is displayed. :
A backup data file is stored on the specified destination when the process is completed
normally. :
Specify the
destination to save
and file name
Repeats number of
times same as the
number of fax jobs
Figure 3-7. Trouble Info Collection Screen
Figure 3-8. Backup Data

3.6.4.2 Log Information Table 3-18. Contents of the Fax Setting List (in fax mode)
Detailed information about troubles on transmitting/receiving faxes also can be NO. Item
obtained by the following method. 1 Line Type
2 Dial Mode
FAX SETTING LIST 3 Personal Number
4 Personal Name
In fax mode, press the [Advanced] button to enter the “Printing Report” menu. Select
5 Speaker Volume
the “Fax Setting List” in the menu and execute it. Current fax settings for the items
6 Country
indicated in Table 3-18 are listed and printed out.
7 Auto Redialing Times
The product (fax unit) can be started up in “Maintenance Mode” by changing a certain 8 Sender Record
parameter setting. If the above operation is performed in “Maintenance Mode”, the 9 Answering Mode
following items are added to the “Fax Setting List”. See “3.6.4.3 System Parameter
10 Ring Response Time
Settings” (p311) on how to change the parameter setting.
11 Activity Report
Job Counter Information 12 Transmission Report
Total counts of transmitted pages 13 Multi. Trans. Report
Total counts of received pages 14 Software Version
Fax
Total counts of transmitted pages in G3 mode (successful jobs) Modem
Total counts of transmitted pages in G3 mode (Unsuccessful jobs)
Total counts of received pages in G3 mode (successful jobs)
Total counts of received pages in G3 mode (Unsuccessful jobs)
System Error History
Number of error occurrences
Date and time of error occurrence
Error code

The product can be started up in [Maintenance Mode] by changing the parameter

setting as follows.
The system parameter: SYS_MACHINE_MODE

Maintenance code (Main-Sub): 300-028
Setting value: 0 = Normal mode (default)
1 = Maintenance mode

Note : The Job Counter and the Error History are added in the Maintenance Mode.
Fax Setting List
Fax/Report Settings
Line Type PSTN
Dial Mode 10PPS
Personal Number 0XXXXXXXXX
Personal Name EPSON
Speaker Volume 1
Country Japan
Auto Redialing Times 5times
Sender Record ON
Answering Mode Fax Only
Ring Response Time 10sec.
DRPD Normal
Activity Report Never Output
Transmission Report OFF
Multi Trans. Report only when an error occurs
Software Version
FAX Ver. 0003 (BOOT1)
Ver. 0004 (BOOT2)
Ver. 0003 (User)
Modem 5K6E6E01
Corresp. Counter
Total Pages Sent 12443
Total Pages Received 3456
G3 Pages Sent (OK) 780
G3 Pages Rcvd (OK) 23
G3 Pages Sent (Prblm) 3
G3 Pages Rcvd (Prblm) 0
Error History
No Time Occurred Error Code
1 03/05/04 10:33 006-350
2 03/05/05 21:09 006-350
3 03/05/05 23:45 006-350
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 3-9. Sample of Fax Setting List

PROTOCOL MONITOR LIST

Protocol Monitor
Changing a certain system parameter setting is required to print the Protocol Monitor
List. Date/Time : 03/05/06 11:33
Personal Number : 0XXXXXXXXX
Personal Name : EPSON
When a fax transmitting/receiving job is performed with the list printing enabled,
Transmission Information
control protocols (ITU-T.30 protocols) used for the jobs are monitored and printed out Start Time Destination Station TtlTime Pages Mode Result Comm. Contents
for every job.Verifying the protocols (signals, commands) printed on the list enables to 05/03 11:36 0XXXXXXXXX 1’45” 1/1 SG3 0000
analyze an error occurrence timing and status.

Software Version
FAX Ver.0003 (BOOT1)
The contents of the list are as follows. Ver.0003 (BOOT2)
Ver.0003 (User)
Common header Modem 5K6E6E01
Fax job result information Trace Data

LAPTIME LOCAL REMOTE FCF FIF
00”2 ANSam →
Software version 01”0 CSI → 40 30323632383531323136
01:6 DIS → 80 xxxxxxxx
Trace data 04”8 ← TSI 43 xxxxxxxx
05”1 ← DCS 83 xxxxxxxx
06”4 ← TCF
Lap time 07”4 CFR → 84 xxxxxxxx
08”4 ← PIN
Transmitted signal names :
10”0 ← PPS. NULL
:
BF00
: :
Direction (transmitting or receiving) : :
: :
Received signal names :
1’44’59”2
:
←DCN
FCF (Facsimile Control Field)

FIF (Facsimile Information Field)
The [Protocol Monitor List] can be printed out by changing the parameter setting as
follows.
The system parameter: REP_PROTOCOL_OUT

Maintenance code (Main-Sub): 330-001
Setting value: 0 = Not print (default)
1 = Only when an error occurs
2 = Print always
Figure 3-10. Sample of Protocol Monitor List

3.6.4.3 System Parameter Settings 5. Enter the “Maintenance Code”; Main code and Sub code of the target parameter in
the entry screen as shown in Step 3..
When changing system parameter settings is required to print “Fax Setting List” or
“Protocol Monitor List” as described on the previous section, and when changing the 6. Confirm the setting values for the target system parameter, and enter a proper
settings is required for troubleshooting as indicated in “3.6.2 Troubleshooting by value beside the “VALUE (HEX):”.
Symptoms” (p301) and “3.6.3 Other Troubles and the Remedies” (p303), follow the
procedure given below. 7. After confirming “OK” is displayed beside the “Result:”, turn the product off.
8. Reboot the product and perform required operations.
C A U T IO N Some of the system parameter settings are restricted according
to the regulations or standards of the country or region. To
SETTING EXAMPLE
prevent those settings from being changed by mistake,
changing system parameter settings that are not described in
When changing “Tone level” to fix frequent communication errors (“Communication
this manual is prohibited.
errors occur” (p.301)).
Be sure to observe the specified setting range for the system
parameter. Setting a value out of the range is not guaranteed.
If a malfunction of the fax operation occurs due to the
improper setting, the system parameter should be initialized. Corresponding parameter name: COM_TX_ATT_LEVEL
See “3.3.2.1 Memory Clear” (p148) Maintenance Code: MAIN = 300
SUB = 006
Setting value: 5 through 15
STEP (Default = 10)
1. Start up the product in “MFP Maintenance Mode”.

See “3.3 MFP Maintenance Mode” (p143)
2. Select “Fax Maintenance”.
See “3.3.2 Fax Maintenance” (p147)
3. Select “Parameter Check” and execute “Write data”.
See “3.3.2.3 Parameter Check” (p150)
MAIN
SUB
4. See “7.7.1 List of System Parameter” (p666) to find a target system parameter
name (label).

CHAPTER
4
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
4.1 Overview 4.1.1 Precautions

The precautions below (WARNING and CAUTION), must always be followed during
This section describes procedures for disassembling the main components of the
disassembly and assembly.
product. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be
reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure. Disconnect the power cable before disassembling or assembling
W A R N IN G
Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are described the printer. If you need to work on the printer with power
under the heading “WARNING”. applied, strictly follow the instructions in this manual.
Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid
“CAUTION” signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to injury from sharp metal edges.
equipment. To protect sensitive microprocessors and circuitry, use static
discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps, when
Important tips for procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”. accessing internal components.
If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure, the Never replace the fuse on the Power Supply Board in any
correct procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”. circumstances.
Be aware that letting the laser beam get into your eye directly
Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described under could result in loss of vision.
the heading “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED”. Never open any cover on which a Warning Label for Laser
Beam is attached.
When you have to remove any units or parts that are not described in this chapter, refer Use extreme caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone
to the exploded diagrams in the appendix. around you with a clear understanding of hazardous nature of
the laser beam.
The Fuser unit and other high-temperature parts remain at
hazardous temperature for a certain period of time even after
stop of operation and turning off of the power. To prevent
suffering a burn, be sure to wait after power turning off until
the temperature of the parts cool down to a safe level, and then
start working on the printer.
To avoid dust explosion or ignition, never bring any
consumables close to flame or throw them into fire.
When developer or oil stuck to your skin or clothes, wipe it off
with a dry cloth carefully and wash it off with water
immediately.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Overview 313

W A R N IN G Be careful not to let the developer or toner get into your eye or W A R N IN G Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or
mouth, and not to inhale it. And also care should be taken for adjusting the printer.
people around you to prevent them from the same thing. Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
(Spread a sheet of paper inside and around the printer to Make the specified adjustments when you disassemble the
prevent soiling.) printer. (Refer to Chapter5 for details.)
Since there are many different screws, use them in correct
positions. Be extremely careful of the difference between the
screws for resin and those for sheet metal. If the screw for resin
is mistaken for the screw for sheet metal, its threads will be
broken, leading to a crushed screw hole or trouble.
Do not pick up the split toner with a vacuum cleaner (for home
use). To do so may cause the sucked toner particles to catch fire
by sparks of the electric contacts. If the toner has split on the
floor, etc., clean it with a broom or wipe it with a cloth
moistened with neural detergent. If it is necessary to clean a lot
of split toner with a cleaner, use a cleaner exclusively designed
for toner.
Leg_Sec001_014EA

4.1.2 Before you start work Turn the printer OFF, and disconnect the power cord before starting work.
Before disassembling the printer, remove Photoconductor Unit.
This chapter describes the procedures for removing and attaching the main parts of the
printer with the printer broken down into 12 main components according to the parts Before performing work around FUSER ASSY, allow the FUSER ASSY and its
list. surrounding area to sufficiently cool down.
Take sufficient care during work as exerting unnecessary force may damage parts
Disassembly/Reassembly
Category or cause them to malfunction.
Reference Page (Section No.)
COVER p.321 (4.2.2) Avoid staticky places such as on a carpet when servicing.
MSI p.342 (4.2.3) Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from the human body, whenever
PH ASSY p.362 (4.2.4) possible. When must work without an antistatic wrist band or any other goods for
TRANSFER p.379 (4.2.5) static protection, touch metallic portion of the printer connected to the earth before
getting started.
XERO p.400 (4.2.6)
ROS p.414 (4.2.7) After work is finished, use CLEANER ASSY to clean the window of ROS ASSY.
DEVE p.417 (4.2.8)
FUSER p.428 (4.2.9)
DRIVE p.433 (4.2.10)
ELECTRICAL p.441 (4.2.11)
500 PAPER CASSETTE & 500 PAPER FEEDER p.455 (4.2.12)
SCANNER p.494 (4.3)
C A U T IO N When performing work on parts controlled as spare parts

which the disassembling procedures are not given in this
manual, fully observe how they are attached before starting
work.
In principle, options must already have been removed before
starting work. However, if there is no need to remove them, it is
allowed to service with them attached.

4.1.3 List of Screws

Many types of screws are used on this printer. Do not mistakenly attach them at the wrong positions. Pay special attention when handling screws for plastic and screws for metal
plates. If you mix up these screws, screw holes will be damaged. Screw threads also will be damaged, which may cause further trouble.
C A U T IO N Positions inscribed with the letter “T” on the frame indicate screws
for plastic.
Printer Section
Table 4-1. List of screws (Printer)

No. Type Application Shape How to Recognize Screw Type Cautions
1 For plastic Plastic • Silver colored This is a self-tapping screw. It threads the screw hole, so
Screw • Screw threads are rougher than metal plate take care not to screw it diagonally.
Silver tapping Rough TYPE
Part, Plastic • Screw tip is fine.
etc.
Screw • With flange take care not to screw it diagonally
Silver tapping with flange Rough • Screw threads are rougher than metal plate
Part, Plastic TYPE
etc.
• Screw tip is fine.
Screw • With washer take care not to screw it diagonally
Silver tapping with washer • Screw threads are rougher than metal plate
Rough
Part, Plastic TYPE
etc.
• Screw tip is fine.
4 For metal plate Screw Metal • Silver colored This is a self-tapping screw. It threads the screw hole, so
Silver tapping with flange plate • With flange take care not to screw it diagonally
• Screw tip is slightly fine.
Part, Metal
etc. plate

Table 4-1. List of screws (Printer)

No. Type Application Shape How to Recognize Screw Type Cautions
5 For metal plate Screw Metal • Silver colored
Silver tapping with flange plate • With flange
• Uniform screw diameter
Part, Metal
etc. plate

Silver plate • Uniform screw diameter
Part, Metal
etc. plate

Silver with external toothed washer plate • With external toothed washer
• Uniform screw diameter
Part, Metal
etc. plate
Scanner Section
Table 4-2. List of screws (Scanner, ADF)
No. Type No. Type No. Type
1 M3x6mm, S-type, A-head 6 M3x8mm, S-type, B-head 11 M2x10mm, G-type, P-head
2 M3x8mm, P-type, A-head 7 M3x6mm, G-type, C-head, 12 M3x12mm, P-type, P-head
W/spring washer, W/ø5 flat washer
3 M3x8mm, S-type, A-head 8 M3x10mm, B-type, F-head 13 M1.7x6mm, B-Type, F-head
4 M3x8mm, P-type, B-head 9 M2x8mm, B-type, P-head
5 M3x10mm, P-type, B-head 10 M3x6mm, B-type, P-head
4.1.4 Tools
Use only specified tools to avoid damaging the printer.
Name Commercial Availability Code Name Commercial Availability Code

Phillips screwdriver No.1 Available B743800100 Cutting pliers Available B740400100
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Available B743800500 Tweezers Available ---
Slotted screwdriver Available B743000100 E-Ring holder Available ---

4.1.5 Conventions used in descriptions of procedures Sections in procedures described as “In the case of the … specification” refer to
work to be performed on printers of a specific specification. (Work is not to be
Expressions relating to directions in procedures are defined as follows: performed on printers that do not fall under this specification.)
FRONT : Front direction facing the front side of the printer Screws in illustrations are to be loosened and removed using a Phillips screwdriver
REAR : Rear direction facing the front side of the printer unless otherwise specified.
LEFT : Left direction facing the front side of the printer Black arrows in illustrations indicate that the part should be moved in the indicated
direction.
RIGHT : Right direction facing the front side of the printer When black arrows are given a consecutive number, this indicates that they should
be moved in the indicated order.
For details on positions of connectors (P/J), refer to “APPENDIX” (p577)
LEFT
REAR
RIGHT
FRONT
Leg_Sec03_001RA
Figure 4-1. Definition of Printer Orientation

4.2 Printer
.
7)
4.2.1 SCANNER
REMOVAL
5)
1. Remove the accordion shaped rubber covers (HINGE COVER L, HINGE COVER 4)
R) from the left and right hinge sections.
2. Remove the COVER ASSY LH. (p334)
3. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the COVER LEG
LH OUTER to the main unit, and remove the COVER LEG LH OUTER from the
main unit together with the HINGE COVER L. 8)
4. Disconnect the five connectors (CN701 to CN705) on the PWBA ESS.

HINGE
5. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm) that secures the WIRE GROUND of COVER L
Black Tape 7)
the SCANNER.
6. Release the harnesses of the SCANNER from the clamp. 2)-1
7. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the SPRING SC
FFC to the main unit, and remove the SPRING SC FFC from the main unit.
2)-2 2)-1
8. Remove the five screws (silver-with flange-8mm x 4, silver-no flange-8mm x 1)
6)-2
that secure the SCANNER to the main unit.
6)-1
9. Lift the SCANNER straight above the main unit to remove the SCANNER from 6)-2 CN705 CN704 CN702
6)-1
the main unit.
CN701
NOTE CN704(12 pin) CN703
C A U T IO N Be careful not to damage the cable by getting it stuck or hitting it in/ FERRITE CORE
against the components inside the printer when pulling out the cable CN701(14 pin)
3)
from the printer main unit to remove the scanner.
CN702(13 pin)
Leg_03_600RD
Figure 4-2. Removal of SCANNER
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Printer 319

REINSTALLATION
1. Install the SCANNER on the main unit.

2. Secure the SCANNER to the main unit with five screws (silver-with flange-8mm x 4,
silver-no flange-8mm x 1).
3. Secure the SPRING SC FFC to the main unit with the two screws (silver, with flange,
8 mm).
C A U T IO N When securing the two SPRING SC FFCs, make sure that the part
of the SCANNER harnesses with black tape are located between the
two SPRING SC FFCs.
4. Secure the harnesses of the SCANNER with the clamp.

5. Secure the WIRE GROUND of the SCANNER with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
6. Connect the five connectors (CN701 to CN705) to the PWBA ESS.
C H E C K When reassembling the AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F (fax model),

P O IN T removing the fax module in advance make it easier to connect
CN701, CN702, and CN704 to the PWBA ESS.
C A U T IO N The CN701, CN702, and CN704 FFCs are resemble each other
in shape as their pin numbers are so close; 14, 13, and 12
respectively. Be careful not to connect them wrongly.
When reassembling the AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F (fax model),
make sure to put CN701 (14-pin) and CN702 (13-pin) FFCs
through the FERRITE CORE.
7. Secure the COVER LEG LH OUTER with the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm)
to the main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
8. Attach the COVER ASSY LH.(p334)
9. Attach the accordion shaped rubber covers (HINGE COVER L, HINGE COVER
R) to the left and right hinge sections.

4.2.2 COVER
4.2.2.1 COVER ASSY TOP 9)
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p334)

2. Remove COVER ASSY RH. (p339)
3. Remove Fuser ASSY. (p428)
4. Loosen the two screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening the COVER LEG RH
OUTER to the main unit. 8)
8)
5. Remove COVER LEG RH OUTER from the main unit.
6. Slide COVER LEG LH INNER upward and remove it. 6)
7. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm), and remove the STOPPER PLATE. 4)
8. Remove the 2 E-rings fastening the COVER ASSY TOP to the main unit.
9. Open COVER ASSY TOP and slide it to the right to remove it.
5)
4)
7)
Leg_Sec03_002RC
Figure 4-3. Removal of COVER ASSY TOP

REINSTALLATION
1. Attach COVER ASSY TOP to the main unit with the COVER ASSY TOP opened.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, use the outer of the two
grooves located on the stud.
2. Secure STOPPER PLATE to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm).
3. Fasten COVER ASSY TOP with the 2 E-rings.
4. Fit COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit.
5. Secure COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
6. Fit COVER LEG LH OUTER to the main unit.
7. Secure COVER SIDE LH ASSY to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
8 mm).
8. Install Fuser ASSY. (p428)
9. Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p339)

4.2.2.2 TRAY EXTENSION, COVER TRAY 3)-2

3)-1
3)-1
REMOVAL
1. Draw out COVER TRAY until it comes to a stop.

2. Open COVER ASSY TOP.
3. Unhook the hook fastening COVER TRAY to COVER ASSY TOP, and remove
COVER TRAY together with TRAY EXTENSION.
4. Open TRAY EXTENSION.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to damage the
TRAY EXTENSION boss. 2)
5. Bend the TRAY EXTENSION boss with a small screw driver or similar tool, and
draw out and remove the TRAY EXTENSION boss from the hole on COVER
TRAY.
REINSTALLATION Leg_Sec03_003EC
Figure 4-4. Removal of TRAY EXTENSION and COVER TRAY (1)
TRAY EXTENSION boss. 5)-2
1. With TRAY EXTENSION opened, insert the boss on one side of the TRAY
EXTENSION into the hole on COVER TRAY, and attach the TRAY
4)
EXTENSION boss on the other side into the hole on COVER TRAY while
bending down the TRAY EXTENSION boss.
5)-1
2. Close TRAY EXTENSION.
3. Align COVER TRAY with the attachment position on COVER ASSY TOP, and
attach COVER TRAY together with TRAY EXTENSION.
Leg_Sec03_501EB
4. Close COVER ASSY TOP. Figure 4-5. Removal of TRAY EXTENSION and COVER TRAY (2)
5. Push in COVER TRAY gently until it comes to a stop.

4.2.2.3 COVER FUSER
REMOVAL
1. Open COVER FUSER.

2)-1
2. Bow COVER FUSER to pull out its right and left convex potions, and remove the 1)
COVER FUSER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the right and left convex potions of the COVER FUSER. 2)-2
2. Close COVER FUSER.
LEFT
Protrusion
Leg_Sec03_005EB
Figure 4-6. Removal of COVER FUSER

4.2.2.4 COVER TOP SIDE L
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p334) 3)

2. Remove Fuser ASSY. (p428)
3. Slide COVER LEG RH INNER upward and remove it.
4. Loosen the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening the COVER LEG LH
INNER to the main unit.
C A U T IO N The screw fastening the COVER TOP SIDE L is designed not to 4)

come loose from the COVER TOP SIDE L.
5)
5. Remove COVER TOP SIDE L together with the COVER FUSER GUIDE from
the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on the COVER TOP SIDE L with the boss on the main unit.
2. Fasten COVER TOP SIDE L to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
3. Fit COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit.
4. Secure COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit with the screw (silver, with Leg_Sec03_502RC
flange, 8mm). Figure 4-7. Removal of COVER TOP SIDE L
5. Install Fuser ASSY. (p428)
6. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334)

4.2.2.5 COVER TOP SIDE R

4)
REMOVAL
1. Open the COVER FUSER. (p324) 3)

2. Open the COVER ASSY TOP.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening the COVER TOP SIDE R
to the main unit.
4. Remove the COVER TOP SIDE R from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on the COVER TOP SIDE R with the boss on the main unit.
2. Fasten COVER TOP SIDE R to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
3. Close COVER ASSY TOP.
4. Close COVER FUSER. (p334)
Leg_Sec03_503EA
Figure 4-8. Removal of COVER TOP SIDE R

4.2.2.6 SWITCH ASSY TOP
REMOVAL

2. Unclamp the two clamps fastening the harness of SWITCH ASSY TOP, and
Intermediate
remove the harness.
connector (Blue)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, leave the intermediate

connector (blue) on the harness side.
4)
3. Disconnect connector (P/J116, blue) of SWITCH ASSY TOP.

4. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH ASSY TOP to
the main unit.
3)
5. Remove SWITCH ASSY TOP from the main unit. 2)
(Blue)
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on SWITCH ASSY TOP with the boss on the main unit, and
attach.
2. Fasten SWITCH ASSY TOP to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8 Leg_03_006EC
mm). Figure 4-9. Removal of SWITCH ASSY TOP

3. Connect connector (P/J116, blue) of SWITCH ASSY TOP.
4. Clamp the harness of SWITCH ASSY TOP with the two clamps.
Table 4-3. Symptoms when the connector is loose

Error Caused by Connector
Connector No. Panel Indication Symptom
Disconnection
Printing is not
P/J116 B Open ---
possible.

4.2.2.7 SWITCH ASSY FRONT Table 4-4. Symptoms when the connector is loose
REMOVAL Connector No. Panel Indication Symptom
Disconnection
1. Remove COVER ASSY RH. (p339) Printing is not

P/J115 B Open ---
possible.
2. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of SWITCH ASSY FRONT and remove
Printing is not
the harness. P/J116 B Open ---
possible.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH ASSY FRONT
to the main unit.
4. Remove SWITCH ASSY FRONT from the main unit.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, leave the intermediate Intermediate

connector (white) on the harness side. connector (White)
4)
5. Disconnect connector (P/J115, white) and connector (P/J125) from SWITCH 5)

ASSY FRONT.
3)
2)
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J115, white) and connector (P/J125) to SWITCH ASSY

FRONT.
5) (White)
2. Match the hole on SWITCH ASSY FRONT with the boss on the main unit.
3. Fasten SWITCH ASSY FRONT to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
Leg_03_504ED
4. Fasten the harness of SWITCH ASSY FRONT with the clamp.
Figure 4-10. Removal of SWITCH ASSY FRONT

4.2.2.8 COVER RH, SLIDE BAR, COVER ROS WINDOW
REMOVAL

2. Unhook the four hooks fastening GUIDE BAR to COVER RH, and remove
GUIDE BAR.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening COVER ROS
WINDOW to SLIDE BAR. 5)
4. Slide COVER ROS WINDOW along the rib of COVER RH, and remove COVER
ROS WINDOW from the protrusion on COVER RH. 2)
5. Remove SLIDE BAR from COVER RH.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SLIDE BAR at the attachment position on the rear side of COVER RH.
4) 2)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, be sure to insert the top and 3)
bottom of COVER ROS WINDOW inside the protrusions on
COVER RH.
2. Match COVER ROS WINDOW with the attachment position on the rear of
COVER RH, slide COVER ROS WINDOW along the ribs on COVER RH, and
attach COVER ROS WINDOW to SLIDE BAR.
3. Fasten COVER ROS WINDOW to SLIDE BAR with the screw (silver, with
flange, tapping, 8 mm).
4. Match the holes on GUIDE BAR with the boss of COVER RH, attach GUIDE
BAR, and fasten by the four hooks.
C A U T IO N After performing the above work, move SLIDE BAR to make sure
that COVER ROS WINDOW can be opened/closed smoothly.
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_007EA
Figure 4-11. Removal of COVER RH, SLIDE BAR and COVER ROS WINDOW

4.2.2.9 COVER MSI
REMOVAL

2. Slide COVER MSI in a slightly open state to the right to remove from the main
unit.
2)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on COVER MSI with the boss on the main unit with COVER MSI
in a slightly open state, and slide COVER MSI to the left to attach.
2)-2
Leg_Sec03_008EA
Figure 4-12. Removal of COVER MSI

4.2.2.10 COVER FRONT L, COVER FRONT ASSY U
REMOVAL

2. Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p334) 5)-1
3. Remove COVER MSI. (p330)
4. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER FRONT L to
the main unit.
5. Slide COVER FRONT L to the right, unhook the two hooks on the rear of COVER
FRONT L from the holes on the main unit, and remove COVER FRONT L
together with COVER FRONT ASSY U.
When performing the following work, take care not to damage the 4)
C A U T IO N
COVER FRONT ASSY U boss.
4)
5)-2 4) Leg_Sec03_009RB
6. Press the bosses on the left and right of COVER FRONT ASSY U by inserting a Figure 4-13. Removal of COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U (1)
screwdriver, and draw out from the holes on COVER FRONT L to remove
COVER FRONT ASSY U from COVER FRONT L.
6)-1
6)-2
Leg_Sec03_010EB
Figure 4-14. Removal of COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U (2)

REINSTALLATION
COVER FRONT ASSY U boss.
1. Match the boss on COVER FRONT ASSY U with the holes on COVER FRONT
L while bending down COVER FRONT ASSY U, and attach COVER FRONT
ASSY U to COVER FRONT L.
2. Match the two hooks on the rear of COVER FRONT L with the holes on the main
unit, and attach COVER FRONT L together with COVER FRONT ASSY U.
3. Fasten COVER FRONT L to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
4. Attach COVER MSI. (p330)

4.2.2.11 OP PANEL (CONTROL, PANEL) 4)-2
REMOVAL 3)

2. Open COVER FRONT ASSY U. 3)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to remove OP

4)-1 3)
PANEL too far as it is connected by a harness.
3. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening OP PANEL to the main
unit.
4)-1
4. Remove the protrusions on the left and right of OP PANEL from COVER RH and
COVER LH while pushing them outward, and slightly remove OP PANEL from
the main unit.
5. Disconnect connector CN1 and the terminal connected to OP PANEL to remove
OP PANEL.
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care to prevent the

harness from being caught between the main unit and OP PANEL.
Leg_Sec03_184RB
Figure 4-15. Removal of OP PANEL
1. Connect connector CN1 and the terminal to OP PANEL.
2. While extending COVER RH and COVER LH each to the left and right, put the
protrusions on the left and right of OP PANEL inside COVER RH and COVER
LH, and attach OP PANEL to the main unit.
3. Fasten OP PANEL to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
4. Close COVER FRONT ASSY U.

4.2.2.12 COVER ASSY LH
REMOVAL

5) 6)
2. Open COVER FRONT ASSY U.
3. Open COVER MSI.
4. Remove COVER ESS. (p335) 5)
5. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening the COVER ASSY LH
to the main unit.
6. Lift up the COVER ASSY LH, and unhook the 4 hooks on the rear of the COVER
ASSY LH from the holes on the main unit, and remove the COVER ASSY LH.
5)
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, firmly insert the protrusion

on the front side of the COVER ASSY LH into the indent on the 3)
COVER FRONT L.
5)
Protrusion
1. Match the 4 hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY LH with the holes on the
main unit while inserting the protrusion on the front side of the COVER ASSY LH 5)
into the concave portion on the COVER FRONT L, and attach the COVER ASSY
LH.
2. Fasten the COVER ASSY LH to the main unit with the 5 screws (silver, with CAUTION
flange, 8 mm). Leg_Sec03_011RC
Figure 4-16. Removal of COVER ASSY LH
3. Attach COVER ESS. (p335)
4. Close COVER MSI.
5. Close COVER FRONT ASSY U.

4.2.2.13 COVER ESS
REMOVAL
1. Loosen the screw fastening COVER ESS to the main unit. 1)

2. Remove COVER ESS from the main unit.
EINSTALLATION
2)
1. Match the two protrusions on the bottom side of COVER ESS with the holes on
COVER LH, and attach COVER ESS.
2. Fasten COVER ESS to the main unit with the screw.
Leg_Sec03_188RA
Figure 4-17. Removal of COVER ESS

4.2.2.14 SWITCH ASSY FUSER, SWITCH-FUSER DOOR 7. Secure the COVER LEG LH OUTER with the two screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm) to the main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
REMOVAL 8. Close the COVER FUSER.
3. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) that secure the COVER LEG
LH OUTER to the main unit, and remove the COVER LEG LH OUTER from the Error Caused by Connector
Disconnection
main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
Printing is not
4. Unclamp clamp fastening the harness of SWITCH ASSY FUSER and remove the P/J114 C Open ---
possible.
harness.
Printing is not
P/J117 C Open ---
5. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH ASSY FUSER possible.
to the main unit.
6. Remove SWITCH ASSY FUSER from the main unit.

connector on the harness side. 3)-1
7. Disconnect the connector (P/J117, blue) from the SWITCH ASSY FUSER. 7)
8. Unhook the two hooks fastening the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR to BRACKET SW 3)-1
FUSER, and remove the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR.
3)-2
9. Disconnect the connector (P/J114) from the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR. 7)
9)
EINSTALLATION
1. Connect the connector (P/J114) to the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR. 5)
8)-2 6)
2. Match the hooks on the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR with the attachment position,
and attach to the BRACKET SW FUSER.
3. Connect the connector (P/J117, blue) to the SWITCH ASSY FUSER. 8)-1
4. Match the hole on the SWITCH ASSY FUSER with the boss on the main unit.
5. Fasten the SWITCH ASSY FUSER to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
6. Fasten the harness of the SWITCH ASSY FUSER with the clamp. Leg_Sec03_012RB
Figure 4-18. Removal of SWITCH ASSY FUSER and SWITCH-FUSER DOOR

4.2.2.15 COVER INNER TOP
REMOVAL
1. Remove OP PANEL. (p333)

2)
2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening COVER INNER TOP
to the main unit. 3) 2)
3. Remove COVER INNER TOP from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on COVER INNER TOP with the boss on the main unit.
2. Fasten COVER INNER TOP to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 6 mm).
3. Attach OP PANEL. (p333)
Leg_Sec03_187EB
Figure 4-19. Removal of COVER INNER TOP

4.2.2.16 SWITCH-FRONT DOOR, SWITCH-INLK FRONT 5)-1
REMOVAL
C H E C K SWITCH-FRONT DOOR and SWITCH-INLK FRONT can each

P O IN T be removed separately.

2. Remove SWITCH ASSY FRONT. (p328)
3. Remove the screw (gold, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH-INLK FRONT to BRACKET
INLK FRONT.
4. Remove SWITCH-INLK FRONT from BRACKET INLK FRONT.
5. Unhook the two hooks fastening SWITCH-FRONT DOOR to BRACKET INLK 5)-2
FRONT, and remove SWITCH-FRONT DOOR.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hooks on SWITCH-FRONT DOOR with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET INLK FRONT.
2. Match the hole on SWITCH-INLK FRONT with the boss on BRACKET INLK
FRONT.
3) 4)
3. Fasten SWITCH-INLK FRONT to BRACKET INLK FRONT with the screw
(gold, 8 mm).
4. Attach SWITCH ASSY FRONT. (p328)
Leg_Sec03_505EB
Figure 4-20. Removal of SWITCH-FRONT DOOR and SWITCH-INLK FRONT

4.2.2.17 COVER ASSY RH
REMOVAL
5)-2
2. Open COVER FRONT ASSY U.
5)-1
3. Open COVER MSI.
4. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening the COVER ASSY RH 4)
to the main unit.
5. Lift up the COVER ASSY RH, and unhook the 4 hooks on the rear of the COVER
ASSY RH from the holes on the main unit, and remove the COVER ASSY RH.
4)
REINSTALLATION
3)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, be sure to insert the 4)
protrusion on the front side of the COVER ASSY RH into the
concave portion on the COVER FRONT L. 4)
Protrusion
1. While inserting the protrusion on the COVER ASSY RH into the concave portion
on the COVER FRONT L, place the "A" section of the COVER ASSY RH under
the COVER FRONT L as shown in Figure 4-21, and attach the COVER ASSY RH
CAUTION
to the COVER FRONT L with four tabs.
Section A
2. Secure the COVER ASSY RH with the four screws (silver, with flange, 8mm).
3. Close COVER MSI. Leg_Sec03_185RB
4. Close COVER FRONT ASSY U. Figure 4-21. Removal of COVER ASSY RH

4.2.2.18 COVER INNER LOW
REMOVAL

4. Remove COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p331)
5. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER INNER L to
the main unit.
6. Unhook the hook on the rear of COVER INNER L from the hole on the main unit,
and remove COVER INNER L.
5)
REINSTALLATION
6)
1. Match the hook on the rear of COVER INNER L with the hole on the main unit, 5)
and attach COVER INNER L.
Leg_Sec03_186RB
2. Fasten COVER INNER L to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm). Figure 4-22. Removal of COVER INNER LOW
3. Attach COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p331)


4.2.2.19 SWITCH-INLK FUSER
REMOVAL

2. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the COVER LEG 4)
LH OUTER to the main unit, and remove the COVER LEG LH OUTER from the
main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
3. Remove SWITCH ASSY FUSER. (p336)
4. Remove the screw (silver, 8 mm) that secures the SWITCH-INLK FUSER to the
BRACKET SW FUSER.
5. Remove the SWITCH-INLK FUSER from the BRACKET SW FUSER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the SWITCH-INLK FUSER to the BRACKET SW FUSER matching the

boss on the BRACKET SW FUSER with the hole of the SWITCH-INLK FUSER.
2. Secure the SWITCH-INLK FUSER to the BRACKET SW FUSER with the screw
(silver, 8 mm). Leg_Sec03_506RA
3. Attach SWITCH ASSY FUSER. (p336) Figure 4-23. Removal of SWITCH-INLK FUSER
4. Secure the COVER LEG LH OUTER with the two screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm) to the main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.

4.2.3 MSI
4.2.3.1 MSI ASSY 6)
6)
C A U T IO N Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step of

reinstallation.
7)
7)
REMOVAL
9)
9)
10)-1 9)
CAUTION

5. Remove FRAME ASSY-PH. (p365)
6. Disconnect connector (P/J408) and connector (P/J409) from PWBA MCU.
7. Unclamp the two clamps on CHASSIS ESS, and disconnect the harness from
10)-2 9)
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1.
9)
8. When a 500-sheet Cassette Unit is installed, turn the LOCK MC TO FDR that is 9)
attached to the unit 90 degrees as shown in Figure 4-24 to unlock the unit from the
main unit.
9. Remove the 6 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening MSI ASSY to
the main unit. LOCK MC TO FDR

cable tie that bundles the harness of HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 8) Unlock Lock
from being caught on the holes, etc. on the main unit.
Leg_Sec03_042EC
When performing the following work, take care to prevent the
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from being sandwiched between the Figure 4-24. Removal of MSI ASSY
main unit and MSI ASSY.
10. Draw out MSI ASSY slightly toward you, lift up MSI ASSY slightly to avoid TIE
PLATE under the main unit, gently draw out MSI ASSY forward again and draw
out HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from the hole on the main unit to remove MSI ASSY.

REINSTALLATION Table 4-6. Symptoms when the connector is loose

Disconnection
cable tie that bundles the harness of HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 Printing is not
P/J408 E Open ---
from being caught on the holes, etc. on the main unit. possible.
When performing the following work, take care to prevent the Printing is not
P/J409 Service Req E547 Feeder Motor error
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from being sandwiched between the possible.
main unit and MSI ASSY.
1. Gently insert HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 along the left side of MSI ASSY together
with MSI ASSY from the front of the main unit.
2. Insert MSI ASSY about halfway with the front of MSI ASSY lifted slightly to
avoid TIE PLATE under the main unit, and then bring out the connector of
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from the hole on the main unit.
3. After matching MSI ASSY to the main unit attachment position, gently pull [2)-1]
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from the outside to take up any slack inside the main
unit. [2)-2]
4. Fasten MSI ASSY to the main unit with the 6 screws (silver, with flange, tapping,
8 mm).
5. When a 500-sheet Cassette Unit is installed, turn the LOCK MC TO FDR 90
degrees to the opposite side of the arrow shown in Figure 4-24 to secure the 500-
sheet Cassette Unit to the main unit. [3)]
6. Connect connector (P/J408) and connector (P/J409) to PWBA MCU.

[1)]
7. Fasten the harness of HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 with the two clamps on CHASSIS CAUTION
ESS.
8. Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p365)
Leg_Sec03_507EC
Figure 4-25. Reinstallation of MSI ASSY

4.2.3.2 ROLL ASSY MSI

11) 11)
REMOVAL 10) 10)

9) 9)
3. Remove COVER MSI. (p330) 12)

6. Remove MSI ASSY. (p342)
7. Remove SOLENOID PICK UP. (p357)
D cut surface
When performing the following work, work can be performed more CHECK POINT
C H E C K
P O IN T easily by turning ROLL ASSY MSI in the direction of the arrow to
release CAM PICK UP MSI and to set PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI to a raised state. 8)
8. Remove the left and right SPRING-N/F MSI hooked on the left and right
BEARING MSI from MSI ASSY.
9. Remove the E-rings fastening the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI on SHAFT
8)
ASSY MSI from MSI ASSY.
10. Match the notch of CAM PICK UP MSI with the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY
MSI, and slide the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI to the inside.
11. Match the notch of BEARING MSI with the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY Oval
side
MSI, and slide the left and right BEARING MSIs to the inside from the left and
right holes of MSI ASSY.
CAUTION Semi-
12. Temporarily slide ROLL ASSY MSI to the left, and draw out the shaft of ROLL circular
ASSY MSI from the right-side bearing of MSI ASSY to remove ROLL ASSY CAUTION side CAUTION
MSI. Leg_Sec03_054FB
Figure 4-26. Removal of ROLL ASSY MSI

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, pay attention to the
attachment direction of SPRING-N/F MSI.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, attach with the retainer of he oval side of the attachment section of SPRING-N/F MSI is
PAPER GUIDE facing down. attached to BEARING MSI.
The semi-circular side of the attachment section of SPRING-N/
F MSI is attached to PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI.
1. Insert the left side of the shaft on ROLL ASSY MSI into the left-side bearing of 5. Attach SPRING-N/F MSI to the left and right BEARING MSI.
MSI ASSY, and then slide ROLL ASSY MSI to the right and attach ROLL ASSY 6. Attach SOLENOID PICK UP. (p357)
MSI.
7. Attach MSI ASSY. (p342)
2. Match the notch of left and right BEARING MSI on ROLL ASSY MSI with the
positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI, and insert BEARING MSI into the left and
right bearings of MSI ASSY to fasten ROLL ASSY MSI in place. 9. Attach COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p331)
3. Match the notch of the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI on ROLL ASSY MSI 10. Attach COVER MSI. (p330)
with the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI, and slide the left and right CAM 11. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334)
PICK UP MSI to the outside.
C A U T IO N The notch of CAM PICK UP MSI must be properly matched with

the positioning pin of ROLL ASSY MSI.
4. Fasten the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI to SHAFT ASSY MSI with E-rings
C H E C K When performing the following work, work can be performed more

P O IN T easily by turning ROLL ASSY MSI in the direction of the arrow to
release CAM PICK UP MSI and to set PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI to a raised state.

4.2.3.3 ROLL MSI

2)-1
REMOVAL Arrow

2. Unhook the hook on the right-side CORE fastening SHAFT ASSY MSI, and slide
to the right.
3. Slide ROLL MSI to the right, and draw out the attachment groove of ROLL MSI
from the pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI to remove ROLL MSI from SHAFT ASSY 3)
MSI.
REINSTALLATION
2)-2
C A U T IO N Pay attention to the attachment orientation of ROLL MSI. (Attach

with the direction of the arrows indicated on ROLL MSI aligned
with the directions in the illustration.)
1. Place the U cut section of ROLL MSI on SHAFT ASSY MSI and slide to the left,
and insert the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI into the notch of ROLL
ASSY to attach ROLL ASSY to SHAFT ASSY MSI.
2. Slide the right-side CORE to the left, and fasten the CORE hook to the groove on
SHAFT ASSY MSI.
Leg_Sec03_043EA
Figure 4-27. Removal of ROLL MSI

4.2.3.4 CHUTE MSI
REMOVAL

2. Bend down CHUTE MSI, and draw out the right-side boss on CHUTE MSI from
the right-side hole on MSI ASSY to remove CHUTE MSI.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the left-side boss on CHUTE MSI into the left-side hole of MSI ASSY, then
bend down CHUTE MSI, insert the right-side boss of CHUTE MSI, and attach
2)-1
CHUTE MSI.
2)-2
RIGHT
Leg_Sec03_044EB
Figure 4-28. Removal of CHUTE MSI

4.2.3.5 GUIDE SIDE L, GUIDE ASSY SIDE R

2)-2
2)-1
REMOVAL
1. Open COVER MSI. 2)-1

3)
2. Unhook the hooks fastening the holes at the center of GUIDE SIDE COVER and
the hooks at the left and right of GUIDE SIDE COVER from the holes on FRAME
ASSY BOTTOM, and remove GUIDE SIDE COVER.
3. Remove GEAR MANUAL from FRAME ASSY BOTTOM. 2)-1
4. Slide GUIDE SIDE L to the right, remove the protrusion on GUIDE SIDE L from
the attachment section of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and remove GUIDE SIDE L.
5. Slide the lever of GUIDE ASSY SIDE R to the left, remove the protrusion of
GUIDE ASSY SIDE R from the attachment section of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM,
and remove GUIDE ASSY SIDE R.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the protrusion of GUIDE ASSY SIDE R with the attachment section of Leg_Sec03_045EA
FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, insert the tension section of GUIDE ASSY SIDE R Figure 4-29. Removal of GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R (1)
into the groove of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and slide the lever of GUIDE ASSY
SIDE R to attach.
4)
2. Match the protrusion of GUIDE SIDE L with the attachment section of FRAME
ASSY BOTTOM, insert the tension section of GUIDE ASSY SIDE L into the
groove of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and slide GUIDE ASSY SIDE L to the left
to attach.
3. Open GUIDE ASSY SIDE R and GUIDE ASSY SIDE L as far as possible, and 5)-1
attach GEAR MANUAL to FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
4. Attach GUIDE SIDE COVER to FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, fasten the hooks on 5)-2
the left and right of GUIDE SIDE COVER, and fasten the hole at the center of
GUIDE SIDE COVER by the hook on FRAME ASSY BOTTOM to attach
GUIDE SIDE COVER.
5. Close COVER MSI.
Leg_Sec03_046EA
Figure 4-30. Removal of GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R (2)

4.2.3.6 PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI

reinstallation.
11)-1
10)-2
REMOVAL

10)-1
4. Remove COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p331) 9)
5. Remove FRAME ASSY-PH. (p365) 11)-2
7. Remove SOLENOID PICK UP. (p357)
8. Remove ROLL ASSY MSI. (p344)
9. Remove the holes on PLATE BOTTOM 2 from the boss on PLATE BOTTOM
ASSY MSI while extending the attachment sections on the left and right of 9)
PLATE BOTTOM 2.
CHECK POINT
10. Lift up PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI, and remove the holes on the left and right
of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI from the left and right shafts of MSI ASSY. [2)]
11. Remove the right side of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI from the right-side notch
of MSI ASSY, and remove PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI.
Leg_Sec03_047FA
Figure 4-31. Removal of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI

REINSTALLATION
1. Match the left side of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI with the attachment position
on the left side of MSI ASSY, and insert the right side of PLATE BOTTOM
ASSY MSI from the notch on the right side of MSI ASSY.

P O IN T easily by slightly lifting up the rear of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI.
2. Insert the left and right holes of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI into the shafts on
the left and right of MSI ASSY, and attach PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI.
3. Insert the holes of PLATE BOTTOM 2 into the boss on PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI to attach while extending the left and right attachment sections of PLATE
BOTTOM 2.
4. Attach ROLL ASSY MSI. (p344)
5. Attach SOLENOID PICK UP. (p357)

4.2.3.7 HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI
REMOVAL

2. Remove CHUTE MSI. (p347)
3. Unhook the hooks of the PAPER GUIDEs on the left and right sides fastened to
SHAFT ASSY MSI, slide each PAPER GUIDE to the outside, and remove
CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE.
4. Unhook the hooks of CORE on the left and right sides fastening SHAFT ASSY
MSI, and slide each to the outside.
5. Remove ROLL MSI. (p346)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to lose SPRING
RETARD MSI.
4)-1
6. Remove HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI from FRAME ASSY BOTTOM while
bending down the boss on both sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI.
3)-1 3)-2
4)-2
4)-2
3)-1
4)-1
3)-2
Leg_Sec03_508EB
Figure 4-32. Removal of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI (1)

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When SPRING RETARD MSI has come off from HOLDER ASSY
RETARD MSI, attach SPRING RETARD MSI to the boss on
HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI, and then perform the following
work.
1. Match SPRING RETARD MSI attached to HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI with
the spring bearing of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and attach the bosses on both
sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI to FRAME ASSY BOTTOM while
bending down the bosses.
C A U T IO N SPRING RETARD MSI must be properly matched with the boss on

the spring bearing of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
2. Attach ROLL MSI. (p346)

3. Slide each of the left- and right-side COREs to the inside, and fasten the CORE
hook to the groove on SHAFT ASSY MSI. 6)
4. Slide each of the PAPER GUIDEs on the left and right sides to inside, attach
CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE, and fasten the hooks on the PAPER GUIDEs to
the grooves on the SHAFT ASSY MSI.
5. Attach CHUTE MSI. (p347)
CAUTION
C A U T IO N Make sure to install the FRAME ASSY-PH correctly by referring

the caution described in the “REINSTALLATION” of the “4.2.4.4
FRAME ASSY-PH” (p.365).
Leg_Sec03_048EB
Figure 4-33. Removal of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI (2)

4.2.3.8 PLATE ASSY RETARD

reinstallation.
REMOVAL

2. Remove CHUTE MSI. (p347)
3. Remove ROLL MSI. (p346)
4. Remove HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI. (p351) Bend down PLATE ASSY
RETARD, remove the holes on the left and right from the boss on FRAME ASSY
BOTTOM, and remove PLATE ASSY RETARD.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, do not fold or bend PLATE

5)-1
ASSY RETARD.
5)-2
5. Bend down PLATE ASSY RETARD, remove the holes on the left and right from
the boss on FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and remove PLATE ASSY RETARD.
Leg_Sec03_049EA
Figure 4-34. Removal of PLATE ASSY RETARD

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, do not fold or bend PLATE

ASSY RETARD.
1. Match the left and right U grooves of PLATE ASSY RETARD with the bosses on
the front of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
2. Turn the bosses aligned with the U-grooves as the fulcrum while bending down
PLATE ASSY RETARD, insert the bosses on the rear side of FRAME ASSY
BOTTOM into the left and right holes of PLATE ASSY RETARD, and attach
PLATE ASSY RETARD.
3. Attach HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI. (p351)
4. Attach ROLL MSI. (p346)
5. Attach CHUTE MSI. (p347)
6. Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p365) [1)]
[2)-1]
[2)-1]
[2)-2]
Leg_Sec03_509EA
Figure 4-35. Reinstallation of PLATE ASSY RETARD

4.2.3.9 OIL DAMPER
REMOVAL

7)-1
7. Unhook the hook on GEAR PICK UP fastened to SHAFT ASSY MSI from MSI
9)
ASSY, and remove GEAR PICK UP.
8. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening DAMPER
BRACKET to the MSI ASSY. 8)
7)-2
9. Remove OIL DAMPER together with DAMPER BRACKET from MSI ASSY.
10. Remove OIL DAMPER from DAMPER BRACKET.
8)
10)
Leg_Sec03_200FA
Figure 4-36. Removal of OIL DAMPER

REINSTALLATION

attachment direction of OIL DAMPER.
1. Match the hole on OIL DAMPER with the boss on DAMPER BRACKET, and
attach OIL DAMPER to DAMPER BRACKET.
2. Match the hole on DAMPER BRACKET with the boss on MSI ASSY, and attach
OIL DAMPER together with DAMPER BRACKET.
3. Fasten DAMPER BRACKET to MSI ASSY with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
tapping, 8 mm).
4. Attach GEAR PICK UP to SHAFT ASSY MSI, and fasten the hook on GEAR
PICK UP to the groove on SHAFT ASSY MSI.

4.2.3.10 SOLENOID PICK UP
REMOVAL

7. Unhook the hook on GEAR PICK UP fastened to SHAFT ASSY MSI from MSI 7)-1
ASSY, and remove GEAR PICK UP.
10)
connector on the harness side. 9)
8)
7)-2
8. Disconnect connector (P/J605) from SOLENOID PICK UP, and remove the
harness from the groove on MSI ASSY.
9. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8mm) fastening SOLENOID PICK UP to MSI
ASSY. [3)]
10. Remove SOLENOID PICK UP from MSI ASSY.
Groove
Notch
Leg_Sec03_050FA
Figure 4-37. Removal of SOLENOID PICK UP

REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on SOLENOID PICK UP with the boss on MSI ASSY, and attach
SOLENOID PICK UP.
2. Fasten SOLENOID PICK UP to MSI ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping,
8mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J605) to SOLENOID PICK UP, and route the harness in the
notch and groove on MSI ASSY.
4. Attach GEAR PICK UP to SHAFT ASSY MSI while pulling the lever on
SOLENOID PICK UP, and fasten the hook on GEAR PICK UP to the groove on
SHAFT ASSY MSI.

4.2.3.11 SENSOR PAPER EMPTY
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER ASSY RH. (p339) 7)-1

3. Remove COVER MSI. (p330) 7)-2
7. Unhook the three hooks on SENSOR PAPER EMPTY fastened to FRAME ASSY
BOTTOM using a small screwdriver or similar tool, and turn ACTUATOR
EMPTY to remove SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
8. Disconnect connector (P/J103) from SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J103) to SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.

2. Turn ACTUATOR EMPTY to align the three hooks on SENSOR PAPER
EMPTY to the attachment position, and attach SENSOR PAPER EMPTY to
FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
4. Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p365) 7)-3
5. Attach COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p331) 8)

7. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334) Leg_Sec03_051FA
8. Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p339) Figure 4-38. Removal of SENSOR PAPER EMPTY

4.2.3.12 ACTUATOR EMPTY 11. Remove the groove on the left-side shaft on ACTUATOR EMPTY from the hook
on MSI ASSY, and draw out the right-side shaft on ACTUATOR EMPTY from
Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step of the hole on MSI ASSY.
C A U T IO N
reinstallation. 12. Slide ACTUATOR EMPTY to the left, slide the shaft of ACTUATOR EMPTY
along the notch of MSI ASSY, and remove ACTUATOR EMPTY.
REMOVAL
9)
10)

7. Remove GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R. (p348)
C H E C K When performing the following work, connectors need not be

P O IN T disconnected from SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
8. Remove SENSOR PAPER EMPTY. (p359)

9. Remove the holes on PLATE BOTTOM 2 from the boss on PLATE BOTTOM
ASSY MSI while extending the attachment sections on the left and right of
PLATE BOTTOM 2.
10. Turn PLATE BOTTOM 2, remove the bosses on the left and right of PLATE
BOTTOM 2 from the notches of MSI ASSY, and remove PLATE BOTTOM 2.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to fold Leg_Sec03_052FB
ACTUATOR EMPTY. Figure 4-39. Removal of ACTUATOR EMPTY (1)

REINSTALLATION
11)-1
1. Slide the actuator of ACTUATOR EMPTY into the clearance of MSI ASSY, slide 11)-2
the shaft on ACTUATOR EMPTY along the notch on MSI ASSY, and attach
ACTUATOR EMPTY.
[2)]
2. Insert the right-side shaft of ACTUATOR EMPTY into the hole on MSI ASSY,
and fasten the groove on the left-side shaft of ACTUATOR EMPTY to the hook
on MSI ASSY.
CAUTION
C A U T IO N Make sure that ACTUATOR EMPTY is firmly fastened to the
hook.
3. Insert the left and right bosses into the notch on MSI ASSY with PLATE
BOTTOM 2 raised 90°, and attach PLATE BOTTOM 2.
4. Insert the holes of PLATE BOTTOM 2 into the boss on PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI while extending the left and right attachment sections of PLATE BOTTOM 12)
2.
5. Attach SENSOR PAPER EMPTY. (p359)
6. Attach GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R. (p348)
Leg_Sec03_053FB
Figure 4-40. Removal of ACTUATOR EMPTY (2)

4.2.4 PH ASSY
4.2.4.1 COVER-PH 2)-1 2)-1
REMOVAL 1)
1. Open COVER-PH.
2. Unhook the hooks on both the left and right sides fastening COVER-PH to
CHUTE ASSY-REAR, and remove COVER-PH.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the two hooks under COVER-PH with CHUTE ASSY-REAR, attach
COVER-PH, and fasten with the hooks on both the left and right sides.
2. Close COVER-PH.
2)-2
Leg_Sec03_142EA
Figure 4-41. Removal of COVER-PH

4.2.4.2 CHUTE ASSY-REAR

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER-PH. (p362)

2. Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
C A U T IO N Be careful not to damage the boss on the CHUTE ASSY-REAR

when performing the next procedure. 4)-2
3. Press the attaching portion on the right side of the CHUTE ASSY-REAR inward
with a flat-blade screwdriver or a similar tool, and remove the boss on the
attaching portion from the hole on the FRAME-PH to remove the CHUTE ASSY-
REAR.
REINSTALLATION
4)-1 [1)]
C A U T IO N Be careful not to damage the boss on the CHUTE ASSY-REAR
when performing the next procedure.
1. After inserting the boss on the left side of the CHUTE ASSY-REAR into the hole Leg_Sec03_055EA
on the left side of the FRAME-PH, insert the right boss on the CHUTE ASSY- Figure 4-42. Removal of CHUTE ASSY-REAR
REAR into the hole on the right side of the FRAME-PH by sliding the right boss
from the obliquely upward.
2. Close CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
3. Attach COVER-PH. (p362)

4.2.4.3 CHUTE-REAR UP, CHUTE-REAR LOW

2)

3)-2
reinstallation.
2)
REMOVAL
1. Remove CHUTE ASSY-REAR. (p363)

2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE-
REAR LOW to CHUTE-REAR UP.
3. Remove the concave portion on CHUTE-REAR LOW from the protrusion on
CHUTE-REAR UP, and remove CHUTE-REAR LOW from CHUTE-REAR UP.
REINSTALLATION
[1)]
1. Match the hole on CHUTE-REAR LOW with the boss on CHUTE-REAR UP, and
3)-1
insert the protrusion on CHUTE-REAR UP into the concave portion on CHUTE-
REAR LOW to attach.
C A U T IO N The protrusion on CHUTE REAR UP must be inserted firmly into CAUTION

the concave portion on CHUTE-REAR LOW. Leg_Sec03_056FA
Figure 4-43. Removal of CHUTE-REAR UP and CHUTE-REAR LOW
2. Fasten CHUTE-REAR LOW to CHUTE-REAR UP with the 2 screws (silver, with

3. Attach CHUTE ASSY-REAR. (p363)

4.2.4.4 FRAME ASSY-PH 2)

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER-PH. (p362)

2. Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR. 3)
3. Remove the four screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the FRAME 3)
ASSY-PH to the main unit. 3)

3)
C A U T IO N Be careful not to pull the FRAME ASSY-PH too much when

removing it as it is connected with harnesses.
5. Place the FRAME ASSY-PH a little away from the main unit together with the
CHUTE ASSY-REAR. 5)
6. Disconnect P/J603 and P/J604 connectors and remove the FRAME ASSY-PH
together with the CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
7) 6)
Leg_Sec03_057EA
Figure 4-44. Removal of FRAME ASSY-PH

REINSTALLATION

2. Connect P/J603 and P/J604 connectors with the FRAME ASSY-PH open 90
degrees as shown in the figure.
C A U T IO N When performing the following procedure, be careful not to let the

harness caught between the main unit and the FRAME ASSY-PH.
[2)]
3. Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR. [4)-2]
4. While pushing down the film part of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI, match
FRAME ASSY-PH with the attachment position of the main unit.
[4)-1] Leg_03_510EB
C A U T IO N Make sure to confirm that the film part of the HOLDER ASSY
RETARD MSI is located lateral to the FRAME ASSY-PH after
installing the FRAME ASSY-PH to the main unit. If the film part
gets through the inside of the FRAME ASSY-PH, a paper jam is
occurred by blocking a paper feeding path. (See Figure 4-46)
5. Fasten FRAME ASSY-PH to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange,
8 mm).
6. Close CHUTE ASSY-REAR. Figure 4-45. Reinstallation of FRAME ASSY-PH
7. Attach COVER-PH. (p362)

OK NG
Film part HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI
Figure 4-46. Check point after installing FRAME ASSY-PH

4.2.4.5 CLUTCH ASSY REGI [3)-2]

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
[3)-1]
2. Remove MOTOR-PH. (p375)
3. Remove DRIVE ASSY-PH. (p378)
4)
When performing the following work, leave the intermediate 6)

C A U T IO N
connector on the harness side.
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J203) from CLUTCH ASSY REGI, and remove the 5)
harness of CLUTCH ASSY REGI from the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH.
5. Remove the E-ring fastening CLUTCH ASSY REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH.
6. Remove CLUTCH ASSY REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH.
REINSTALLATION
Leg_Sec03_058FA
1. Match the hole position of CLUTCH ASSY REGI with the D cut surface on the Figure 4-47. Removal of CLUTCH ASSY REGI
shaft of ROLL-REGI METAL, and attach CLUTCH ASSY REGI so that the
protrusion of FRAME ASSY-PH enters the concave portion on CLUTCH ASSY
REGI.
2. Fasten CLUTCH ASSY REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH with the E-ring.
3. Route the harness of CLUTCH ASSY REGI in the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH,
and connect the connector (P/J203) to CLUTCH ASSY REGI.
4. Attach DRIVE ASSY-PH. (p378)
5. Attach MOTOR-PH. (p375)

4.2.4.6 ROLL-REGI METAL 7)
REMOVAL 8)

4. Remove CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p367) 6)
5. Remove the two E-rings fastening GEAR-REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove the two GEAR-REGIs.
6) 5)-1
6. Remove the left and right BEARING METALs fastening ROLL-REGI METAL
from FRAME ASSY-PH.
8. Temporarily slide ROLL-REGI METAL to the left, draw out the shaft on ROLL- 5)-2
REGI METAL from the right-side bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove
ROLL-REGI METAL.
Leg_Sec03_059FB
Figure 4-48. Removal of ROLL-REGI METAL
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the shaft left side on ROLL-REGI METAL into the left-side bearing on
FRAME ASSY-PH, and slide ROLL-REGI METAL to the right to attach.
3. Match the double D cut surface of BEARING METAL with the left and right
bearings of FRAME ASSY-PH, attach BEARING METAL, and fasten ROLL-
REGI METAL.
4. Attach GEAR-REGI to the right side of the shaft on ROLL-REGI METAL and the
right side of the shaft on ROLL REGI RUBBER, and fasten with the E-ring.
5. Attach CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p367)

4.2.4.7 ROLL REGI RUBBER
REMOVAL

8)
4. Remove CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p367)
5. Remove the E-ring fastening GEAR-REGI on ROLL REGI RUBBER from
(BLACK)
FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove GEAR-REGI.
7)-2
6. Remove the right-side BEARING RUBBER and SPRING-REGI R (METAL)
D cut surface
fastening ROLL REGI RUBBER from FRAME ASSY-PH.
7. Remove the E-ring fastening ROLL REGI RUBBER from FRAME ASSY-PH, (METAL)
and BEARING RUBBER and SPRING-REGI L (BLACK) on the left side. 7)-1
8. Temporarily slide ROLL REGI RUBBER to the left, draw out the shaft on ROLL
6)-2
REGI RUBBER from the right-side bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove
ROLL REGI RUBBER.
6)-1
5)-2 Leg_Sec03_060FB
5)-1 RIGHT
Figure 4-49. Removal of ROLL REGI RUBBER

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N Attach ROLL REGI RUBBER to FRAME ASSY-PH so that the D

cut surface of the shaft comes to the right side.
1. Insert the shaft left side on ROLL REGI RUBBER into the left-side bearing on
FRAME ASSY-PH, and slide ROLL REGI RUBBER to the right to attach.
2. Fasten ROLL REGI RUBBER to FRAME ASSY-PH by the left and right
BEARING RUBBER.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to attach

SPRING-REGI R (METAL) and SPRING-REGI L (BLACK) to
the wrong side (not to confuse left and right).
3. Attach SPRING-REGI R (METAL) to the boss on the right-side BEARING

RUBBER and the boss on the right-side bearing of FRAME ASSY-PH fastening
ROLL REGI RUBBER.
4. Attach SPRING-REGI L (BLACK) to the boss on the left-side BEARING
RUBBER and the boss on the left-side bearing of FRAME ASSY-PH fastening
ROLL REGI RUBBER.
C A U T IO N Make sure that SPRING-REGI R (METAL) and SPRING-REGI L

(BLACK) are inserted in the boss on the left and right BEARING
RUBBER and the bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH.
5. Attach GEAR-REGI to the right side of the shaft on ROLL REGI RUBBER, and
fasten with the two E-rings on the left and right of the shaft.
6. Attach CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p367)

4.2.4.8 ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI 6. Attach DRIVE ASSY-PH. (p378)

REMOVAL
7)
D cut surface
8)
4. Remove CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI. (p376)
5. Remove the E-rings fastening the right side of the shaft on ROLL ASSY-PRE
REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH. 6)
6. Remove the left and right BEARING METALs fastening ROLL ASSY-PRE
REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH.
8. Temporarily slide ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI to the left, draw out the shaft on 6)
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI from the right-side bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI. 5)
REINSTALLATION
Leg_Sec03_061FB
C A U T IO N Attach ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH so that the Figure 4-50. Removal of ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
D cut surface of the shaft comes to the left side.
1. Insert the shaft left side on ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI into the left-side bearing on
FRAME ASSY-PH, and slide ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI to the right to attach.
3. Match the double D cut surface of BEARING METAL with the left and right
bearings of FRAME ASSY-PH, attach BEARING METAL, and fasten ROLL
ASSY-PRE REGI.
4. Fasten the shaft right side of ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI with an E-ring.
5. Attach CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI. (p376)

4.2.4.9 SENSOR OHP 2) 5)

3)
6)
REMOVAL

2. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening BRACKET-
SENSOR OHP to FRAME ASSY-PH.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to remove

FRAME ASSY-PH and BRACKET-SENSOR OHP too far as they
are connected by harnesses.
3. Remove BRACKET-SENSOR OHP together with SENSOR OHP from FRAME

ASSY-PH.
4. Disconnect connector (P/J101) from SENSOR OHP.
5. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening SENSOR OHP to
BRACKET-SENSOR OHP.
4)
6. Remove SENSOR OHP from BRACKET-SENSOR OHP. Leg_Sec03_062FA
Figure 4-51. Removal of SENSOR OHP
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on SENSOR OHP with the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR OHP,
and attach SENSOR OHP to BRACKET-SENSOR OHP.
2. Fasten SENSOR OHP to BRACKET-SENSOR OHP with the screw (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J101) to SENSOR OHP.
4. Match the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR OHP with the boss on FRAME ASSY-
PH, and attach BRACKET-SENSOR OHP together with SENSOR OHP.
5. Fasten BRACKET-SENSOR OHP to FRAME ASSY-PH with the screw (silver,
with flange, tapping, 8 mm).

4.2.4.10 ACTUATOR-REGI CAUTION

2)

reinstallation. 3)
4)
REMOVAL

2. Remove the left-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI from the hook on FRAME
ASSY-PH.
3. Draw out the right-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI from the hole on FRAME
ASSY-PH, and remove ACTUATOR-REGI together with SPRING-ACTUATOR.
4. Remove SPRING-ACTUATOR from ACTUATOR-REGI.
[3)]
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPRING-ACTUATOR to ACTUATOR-REGI.

2. Insert the right-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI into the hole on FRAME ASSY-
PH, and hook SPRING-ACTUATOR onto the notch on FRAME ASSY-PH. Leg_Sec03_064FA
Figure 4-52. Removal of ACTUATOR-REGI
C A U T IO N SPRING-ACTUATOR must be hooked firmly on ACTUATOR-
REGI and FRAME ASSY-PH.
3. Fasten the left-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI by the hook on FRAME ASSY-

PH.

4.2.4.11 SENSOR REGI

4)-3
REMOVAL

2. Remove MOTOR-PH. (p375) 5)
4. Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH, down 4)-1
ACTUATOR-REGI with your fingers press and remove SENSOR REGI.
5. Disconnect connector (P/J102) from SENSOR REGI.
4)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J102) to SENSOR REGI.

2. Press down ACTUATOR-REGI with your fingers, match the hooks on SENSOR
REGI with the attachment position, and attach to FRAME ASSY-PH.
Leg_Sec03_065FB
3. Attach DRIVE ASSY-PH. (p378) Figure 4-53. Removal of SENSOR REGI

4.2.4.12 MOTOR-PH 5)
REMOVAL

Front side
2. Unhook the two hooks fastening COVER-HARNESS to FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove COVER-HARNESS. 3)
3. Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH, and remove the harness of MOTOR-
PH from the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening MOTOR-PH to
FRAME ASSY-PH. 4)
4)
5. Remove MOTOR-PH from FRAME ASSY-PH. 3)
2)-1
2)-2
REINSTALLATION
2)-1

attachment direction of MOTOR-PH.
Leg_Sec03_066FB
1. Attach MOTOR-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH with the harness of MOTOR-PH Figure 4-54. Removal of MOTOR-PH
facing the front.
2. Fasten MOTOR-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
6 mm).
3. Route the harness of MOTOR-PH in the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH, and fasten
with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH.
4. Match the boss and protrusion of COVER-HARNESS with the hole on FRAME
ASSY-PH, attach and fasten with the 2 hooks.

4.2.4.13 CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI 4. Route the harness of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI in the groove on FRAME
ASSY-PH, and connect the connector (P/J202) to CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI.
C A U T IO N Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step of 5. Attach DRIVE ASSY-PH. (p378)
reinstallation.
REMOVAL

C A U T IO N When performing the following work, do not disconnect the relay

connectors. [4)]
4)
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J202) from CLUTCH ASSY REGI, and remove the
harness of CLUTCH ASSY REGI from the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH. 6)
5. Remove the E-rings fastening CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH.
6. Remove CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove the
harness of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI from the hole on FRAME ASSY-PH. 5)
REINSTALLATION
Leg_Sec03_067FA
1. Insert the harness of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI into the hole on FRAME ASSY- Figure 4-55. Removal of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
PH.
2. Match the hole position of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI with the D cut surface on
the shaft of ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI, and attach CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI so
that the protrusion on FRAME ASSY-PH enters the concave portion on CLUTCH
ASSY PRE REGI.
3. Fasten CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH with an E-ring.

4.2.4.14 SWITCH-PH DOOR
REMOVAL

2. Disconnect connector (P/J100) from SWITCH-PH DOOR.
4)-1
4. Unhook the two hooks fastening SWITCH-PH DOOR to FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove SWITCH-PH DOOR.
REINSTALLATION
2)
4)-2
2. Match the hooks on SWITCH-PH DOOR with the attachment position, and attach 3)
to FRAME ASSY-PH.
3. Connect connector (P/J100) to SWITCH-PH DOOR. Leg_Sec03_068FC
4. Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p365) Figure 4-56. Removal of SWITCH-PH DOOR

4.2.4.15 DRIVE ASSY-PH
REMOVAL CLUTCH ASSY REGI

5)

3. Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH, and remove the harness.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening DRIVE
ASSY-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH.
5. Remove DRIVE ASSY-PH from FRAME ASSY-PH.
3)
4) 4)
REINSTALLATION Leg_Sec03_069FA

C A U T IO N When performing the following work, make sure that the gears on
CLUTCH ASSY REGI and CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI are Figure 4-57. Removal of DRIVE ASSY-PH
correctly engaged.
1. Match the hole on DRIVE ASSY-PH with the boss on FRAME ASSY-PH, and
attach DRIVE ASSY-PH.
2. Fasten DRIVE ASSY-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH with the 2 screws (silver, with
3. Fasten the harness with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH.

4.2.5 TRANSFER
4.2.5.1 CHUTE ASSY-FSR, COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
REMOVAL
1)
CHUTE ASSY-FSR
2)-2
1. Open CHUTE ASSY-FSR.

CHUTE ASSY-FSR too far as it is connected by a harness. 3)
2)-1 2)-1
2. Press the hinge on CHUTE ASSY-FSR to the inside with a flat-blade screwdriver
or a similar tool, and remove CHUTE ASSY-FSR from the main unit.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, leave the intermediate Protrusion Protrusion
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J620) from CHUTE ASSY-FSR connected to the

Leg_Sec03_511RA
main unit.
Figure 4-58. Removal of CHUTE ASSY-FSR

C H E C K When HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW need not be removed in the

P O IN T following procedure, COVER ASSY-RR 2ND can be removed 6)-1
without removing COVER ASSY LH by disconnecting connector
(P/J113) from SWITCH 2BTR COVER instead of connector (P/
J621).
COVER ASSY-RR 2ND

5)
5. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND, and remove
the harness.

7) 6)-2
6. Disconnect connector (P/J621) connected to the main unit, and insert the 7)
connector inside through the hole on the main unit. 8)
7. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER ASSY-RR
2ND to the main unit.
8. Remove COVER ASSY-RR 2ND from the main unit.
CHECK POINT
Leg_Sec03_143RB
Figure 4-59. Removal of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND

REINSTALLATION
COVER ASSY-RR 2ND

harness from being sandwiched between the main unit and COVER
ASSY-RR 2ND.
1. Lead out the connector of the harness of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND from the hole on
the main unit.
2. Match the boss on COVER ASSY-RR 2ND with the hole on the main unit, and
attach COVER ASSY-RR 2ND.
3. Lead out the relay connector connected to the connector on CHUTE ASSY-FSR to
the outside from the left-side notch on COVER ASSY-RR 2ND.
4. Fasten COVER ASSY-RR 2ND to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
5. Connect connector (P/J621) on the harness of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND to the
main unit, and fasten the harness by the clamp.
CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after replacing both the

R E Q U IR E D CHUTE ASSY FSR and the FRAME ASSY 2ND with new ones at a
time.
Refer to Section “6.3.1.2 Lublication” (p564).
6. Attach the connector (P/J620) on CHUTE ASSY-FSR connected to the main unit,
and insert the connector into the main unit from the left-side notch on COVER
ASSY-RR 2ND.
7. Fit the U groove on the both the left- and right-side hinges of CHUTE ASSY-FSR
into the shaft on CAM ASSY-2ND, and attach CHUTE ASSY-FSR to the main
unit.
8. Close CHUTE ASSY-FSR.

4.2.5.2 SENSOR FUSER IN
REMOVAL 2)
3) 2)
1. Remove CHUTE ASSY-FSR. (p379)
5)
2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm) fastening DIODE
FUSER to CHUTE ASSY-FSR. 4)
3. Remove DIODE FUSER from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.

4. Remove the screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE-FSR
and PLATE DIS 2ND to CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
5. Remove PLATE DIS 2ND from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
6. Remove CHUTE-FSR from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
6)
7. Disconnect connector (P/J111) from SENSOR FUSER IN.
8. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm) fastening SENSOR FUSER IN to
CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
9. Remove SENSOR FUSER IN from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
8) 9)
7)
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_144FB
Figure 4-61. Removal of SENSOR FUSER IN (1)
Leg_Sec03_145FA
Figure 4-60. Removal of SENSOR FUSER IN (2)

REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on SENSOR FUSER IN with the hole on CHUTE ASSY-FSR, and
attach SENSOR FUSER IN.
2. Fasten SENSOR FUSER IN to CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the screw (silver,
tapping, 6 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J111) to SENSOR FUSER IN.
4. Insert the three protrusions on CHUTE-FSR into the holes on CHUTE ASSY-
FSR, match the holes on CHUTE-FSR with the boss on CHUTE ASSY-FSR, and
attach CHUTE-FSR.
5. Attach PLATE DIS 2ND to CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
6. Tighten and fasten both CHUTE-FSR and the right side of PLATE DIS 2ND to
CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm).

attachment direction of DIODE FUSER.
Attach so that the white painted side of DIODE FUSER is on the
side where DIODE FUSER is screwed together with CHUTE-FSR.
7. Match DIODE FUSER with the concave portion on CHUTE ASSY-FSR, and
attach.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, the terminal on DIODE

FUSER must be attached between the washer and the plate.
8. Fasten the right-side terminal of DIODE FUSER to CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the
screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm).
9. Fasten both the left-side terminal of DIODE FUSER and the left side of PLATE
DIS 2ND to CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8
mm).
10. Attach CHUTE ASSY-FSR. (p379)

4.2.5.3 FRAME ASSY-2ND

reinstallation.
REMOVAL

2. Remove CHUTE ASSY-FSR and COVER ASSY-RR 2ND. (p379)
3. Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p387)
4. Remove PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p397)
5. Remove CAM ASSY-2ND. (p389)
6. Remove SPRING-2ND fastening both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY-
2ND to the main unit. 6)
6)
CAUTION CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_146RB
Figure 4-62. Removal of FRAME ASSY-2ND (1)

7. Remove the E-ring fastening the right-side shaft on FRAME ASSY-2ND to the 7)-2
main unit, and slide BEARING-BRUSH CAM to the left.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to drop or lose
BEARING-BRUSH CAM. 7)-1
8. Temporarily slide FRAME ASSY-2ND to the right, and draw out the shaft on
FRAME ASSY-2ND from the left-side bearing on the main unit, and remove
FRAME ASSY-2ND together with BEARING-BRUSH CAM.
9. Remove BEARING-BRUSH CAM from FRAME ASSY-2ND.
9)
9)
8)
[3)]
[1)]
Leg_Sec03_147RB
Figure 4-63. Removal of FRAME ASSY-2ND (2)

REINSTALLATION
A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after replacing both the

R E Q U IR E D CHUTE ASSY FSR and the FRAME ASSY 2ND with new ones at a
time.
1. Attach BEARING-BRUSH CAM to the left-side bearing on the main unit.

2. Attach BEARING-BRUSH CAM to the right-side shaft on FRAME ASSY-2ND.
3. Insert the right-side shaft on FRAME ASSY-2ND into the right-side bearing on
the main unit, slide FRAME ASSY-2ND to the left, insert the flange of GEAR 27
on FRAME ASSY-2ND as far as possible into the gear of DRIVE ASSY BTR,
and attach FRAME ASSY-2ND.
4. Insert the right-side BEARING-BRUSH CAM on FRAME ASSY-2ND into the
right-side bearing on the main unit, and fasten with an E-ring.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, firmly hook SPRING-2ND

onto the concave portion on FRAME ASSY-2ND.
(Refer to Figure 4-63)
5. Fasten both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY-2ND to the main unit with
SPRING-2ND.
6. Attach CAM ASSY-2ND. (p389)
7. Attach PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p397)
8. Attach 2ND BTR ASSY. (p387)
9. Attach CHUTE ASSY-FSR and COVER ASSY-RR 2ND. (p379)

4.2.5.4 2ND BTR ASSY
C A U T IO N Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands.
3) CAUTION
REMOVAL
3)
2. Remove Photoconductor Unit.
4)-2
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, press LATCH ROTARY on
LATCH ASSY ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME ASSY-
ROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to prevent 4)-3
it from contacting MAG ROLL.
4)-1
3. Turn the levers on both the left and right sides of 2ND BTR ASSY towards you,
and unlock the lever lock from FRAME ASSY-2ND.
4. Hold the lever on 2ND BTR ASSY, draw out the right side of 2ND BTR ASSY
from FRAME ASSY-2ND, and then draw out the left side to remove 2ND BTR
ASSY from the main unit.
Leg_Sec03_070RB
Figure 4-64. Removal of 2ND BTR ASSY

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, press LATCH ROTARY

on LATCH ASSY ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME
ASSY-ROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
to prevent it from contacting MAG ROLL.
When performing the following work, the right-side shaft on
2ND BTR ASSY must be inserted into the bottom side of the
terminal on PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
1. Insert the left-side gear on 2ND BTR ASSY into the main unit, and then fit the left
and right bearings on 2ND BTR ASSY into FRAME ASSY-2ND to attach 2ND
BTR ASSY.
C A U T IO N After attaching 2ND BTR ASSY, make sure that the levers on both
the left and right sides move smoothly up and down.
2. Turn the levers on both the left and right sides of 2ND BTR ASSY down, and
make FRAME ASSY-2ND lock the lever.
3. Attach Photoconductor Unit.
C A U T IO N When replaced 2ND BTR ASSY with a new one, clear the life
counter to zero. (Refer to “6.4.1.1Maintenance Menu Items” (p566))

4.2.5.5 CAM ASSY-2ND 8. Remove BEARING from CAM ASSY-2ND.
REMOVAL 6)-2 7)-1 7)-1

6)-1 CHECK POINT CHECK POINT
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, there is no need to remove

WIRE ASSY 2BTR from PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
4. Remove PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p397)

SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT from BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO.
8)
5. Remove SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p395)

7)-2
8)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to drop or lose
CAUTION
BEARING.
RIGHT
CAUTION
6. Remove the E-ring fastening the right-side shaft on CAM ASSY-2ND to the main
unit, and slide BEARING to the left.
Leg_Sec03_148RB
When performing the following work, work can be performed more Figure 4-65. Removal of CAM ASSY-2ND
C H E C K
P O IN T easily by pressing FRAME ASSY-2ND in the direction of the arrow,
and releasing FRAME ASSY-2ND from the cam on CAM ASSY-
2ND.
7. Temporarily slide CAM ASSY-2ND to the right, and draw out the shaft on CAM
ASSY-2ND from the left-side bearing on the main unit, and remove CAM ASSY-
2ND together with BEARING.

REINSTALLATION
1. Attach BEARING to the left-side bearing on the main unit.

2. Attach BEARING to the right-side bearing on CAM ASSY-2ND.

P O IN T easily by pressing FRAME ASSY-2ND in the direction of the arrow,
and releasing FRAME ASSY-2ND from the cam on CAM ASSY-
2ND. (Refer to Figure 4-65)
3. Insert the right-side bearing on CAM ASSY-2ND into the right-side bearing on
the main unit, slide CAM ASSY-2ND to the left, and attach CAM ASSY-2ND
together with BEARING.
4. Insert the right-side BEARING on CAM ASSY-2ND into the right-side bearing
on the main unit, and fasten with an E-ring.
C A U T IO N Make sure that the cam on CAM ASSY-2ND is matched with the
cam receptacle on FRAME ASSY-2ND. (Refer to Figure 4-65)
5. Remove SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p395)

6. Attach PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p397)

4.2.5.6 SWITCH 2BTR COVER 3)

5)-1
REMOVAL 2)

2. Disconnect the connector (P/J113) from SWITCH 2BTR COVER. 5)-2
3. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND to

4)
COVER-RR 2ND.
4. Remove BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND from COVER-RR 2ND together with
SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
5. Unhook the two hooks fastening SWITCH 2BTR COVER to BRACKET-
SWITCH 2ND, and remove SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
REINSTALLATION
Leg_Sec03_071FA
1. Match the hooks on SWITCH 2BTR COVER with the attachment position, and Figure 4-66. Removal of SWITCH 2BTR COVER
attach to BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND.
2. Match the hole on BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND with the boss on COVER-RR 2ND,
and attach together with SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
3. Fasten BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND to COVER-RR 2ND with the screw (silver,
tapping, 6 mm).
4. Connect the connector (P/J113) to SWITCH 2BTR COVER.

4.2.5.7 SENSOR ASSY ADC
REMOVAL

2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm) fastening SENSOR
ASSY ADC to the main unit.
4)

SENSOR ASSY ADC too far as it is connected by a harness. 2)
3)
2)
3. Remove SENSOR ASSY ADC from the main unit.

4. Disconnect connector (P/J431) from SENSOR ASSY ADC.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J431) to SENSOR ASSY ADC.

2. Match the boss on SENSOR ASSY ADC with the hole on the main unit, and
attach SENSOR ASSY ADC.
3. Fasten SENSOR ASSY ADC to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
washer, tapping, 8 mm).
Leg_Sec03_072RB
Figure 4-67. Removal of SENSOR ASSY ADC

4.2.5.8 HOLDER-ADC 2ND

14)

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
13)
1. Remove COVER ASSY RH.(p339) 13)
2. Remove COVER FUSER. (p324)

4. Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p387) 11)
5. Remove PLATE BIAS-2ND.(p397)
6. Remove SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p395) 11)
7. Remove CAM ASSY-2ND. (p389) 12)
8. Remove SPRING-2ND fastening both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY-
2ND to the main unit. (p384)
9. Remove FUSER ASSY. (p428)
10. Disconnect connector (P/J431) from SENSOR ASSY ADC.
11. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the HOLDER-ADC 10)
2ND to the main unit.
12. Remove the HOLDER-ADC 2ND from the main unit together with the SENSOR ASSY
ADC.
[3)]
13. Remove the two screws (silver with washer, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the SENSOR
ASSY ADC to the HOLDER-ADC 2ND.
14. Remove the SENSOR ASSY ADC from the HOLDER-ADC 2ND.
Leg_Sec03_512RA
Figure 4-68. Removal of HOLDER-ADC 2ND

REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the SENSOR ASSY ADC to the HOLDER-ADC 2ND matching the
boss on the SENSOR ASSY ADC with the hole on the HOLDER-ADC 2ND.
2. Secure the SENSOR ASSY ADC to the HOLDER-ADC 2ND with the two
screws (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm).
3. Route the harness on the HOLDER-ADC 2ND as shown in Figure 4-67, and
attach the HOLDER-ADC 2ND to the main unit together with the SENSOR
ASSY ADC matching the protrusion of the HOLDER-ADC 2ND with the hole
on the main unit.
4. Secure the HOLDER-ADC 2ND to the main unit with the two screws (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
5. Connect P/J431 to the SENSOR ASSY ADC.
6. Attach FUSER ASSY. (p428)
7. Fasten both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY-2ND to the main unit with
SPRING-2ND. (p384)
8. Attach CAM ASSY-2ND. (p389)
9. Attach SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p395)
10. Attach PLATE BIAS-2ND. (p397)
13. Attach COVER FUSER. (p324)

4.2.5.9 SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
REMOVAL

2. Disconnect connector (P/J112) from SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening BRACKET-SENSOR
PHOTO to the main unit. 5)-2
2)
4. Remove BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO from the main unit together with
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. 4)
5. Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT to BRACKET-
SENSOR PHOTO, and remove SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
3)
5)-1
REINSTALLATION
CAUTION
1. Match the hooks on SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO.
2. Match the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO with the boss on the main unit,
and attach BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO together with SENSOR 2BTR
Leg_Sec03_073RB
RETRACT.
3. Fasten BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO to the main unit with the screw (silver, with Figure 4-69. Removal of SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
flange, 8mm).
4. Connect connector (P/J112) to SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
C A U T IO N The shutter of CAM ASSY-2ND must be inserted inside the sensor

on SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.

4.2.5.10 SENSOR IBT RETRACT 6)-1 4)
REMOVAL
5)
2. Remove COVER INNER TOP. (p337) 6)-2
3)
3. Disconnect connector (P/J107) from SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
4. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET-SENSOR
CLN to the main unit.
5. Remove BRACKET-SENSOR CLN from the main unit together with SENSOR
IBT RETRACT.
6. Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR IBT RETRACT to BRACKET-
SENSOR CLN, and remove SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hooks on SENSOR IBT RETRACT with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET-SENSOR CLN.
2. Match the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR CLN with the boss on the main unit, and
attach BRACKET-SENSOR CLN together with SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
C A U T IO N The shutter of CAM ASSY-IBT CL must be inserted inside the

sensor on SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
3. Fasten BRACKET-SENSOR CLN to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 6 mm).
4. Connect connector (P/J107) to SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
5. Attach COVER INNER TOP. (p337)
CAUTION
6. Attach OP PANEL. (p333)
Leg_Sec03_074FA
Figure 4-70. Removal of SENSOR IBT RETRACT

4.2.5.11 PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY

E ring
SHAFT-CENT 2ND
REMOVAL

4)
4)
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening PLATE BIAS-
2ND ASSY to the main unit.

PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY too far as it is connected by WIRE ASSY
2BTR.
7)
5. Unclamp the clamp fastening WIRE ASSY 2BTR, and slightly release PLATE 6)
BIAS-2ND ASSY from the main unit.
5)-2
6. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm) fastening the terminal of WIRE ASSY
2BTR to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
5)-1
7. Remove WIRE ASSY 2BTR from PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY, and remove
PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
Leg_Sec03_150RB
Figure 4-71. Removal of PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY

REINSTALLATION
1. Attach WIRE ASSY 2BTR to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.

2. Fasten the terminal of WIRE ASSY 2BTR to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY with the
screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm).
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, route WIRE ASSY 2BTR

connected to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY so that it does not come into
contact with CAM ASSY-2ND.
C H E C K When the E-ring on FRAME ASSY-2ND is contacting the PLATE

P O IN T BIAS-2ND ASSY and is difficult to attach, turn SHAFT-CENT
2ND to facilitate attachment.
3. Match the boss on PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY with the hole on the main unit, and
attach PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
4. Fasten PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, tapping, 6 mm), and fasten WIRE ASSY 2BTR with the clamp.

4.2.5.12 CAM ASSY-IBT CL

C A U T IO N The shutter of CAM ASSY-IBT CL must be inserted inside the
REMOVAL sensor on SENSOR IBT RETRACT.

2. Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p334) 5. Attach PWBA MCU. (p445)
3. Remove OP PANEL. (p333) 6. Attach COVER INNER TOP. (p337)
4. Remove COVER INNER TOP. (p337) 7. Attach OP PANEL. (p333)
5. Remove PWBA MCU. (p445) 8. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334)
SENSOR IBT RETRACT from BRACKET-SENSOR CLN. 9)
6. Remove SENSOR IBT RETRACT. (p396)

7. Remove the left and right E-rings fastening CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the main unit.
8. Remove the left and right BEARING-BRUSH CAMs fastening CAM ASSY-IBT
CL to the main unit.
9. Temporarily slide CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the left, and draw out the shaft of CAM
ASSY-IBT CL from the right-side bearing on the main unit to remove CAM
7)
ASSY-IBT CL.
8)
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the shaft left side of CAM ASSY-IBT CL into the left-side bearing of the
7)
main unit, slide CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the right, and attach CAM ASSY-IBT CL. 8)
2. Fasten CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the main unit by the left and right BEARING-
BRUSH CAMs.
3. Fasten CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the main unit by the left and right E-rings.
4. Attach SENSOR IBT RETRACT. (p396) Leg_Sec03_075EB
Figure 4-72. Removal of CAM ASSY-IBT CL

4.2.6 XERO
4.2.6.1 SENSOR TR-0
REMOVAL
5)
1. Open COVER ASSY TOP. 3)
4)
2. Remove Photoconductor Unit.
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 10mm) fastening SENSOR TR-0 to
PLATE-TR-0.
4. Remove SENSOR TR-0 from PLATE-TR-0.
5. Disconnect connector (P/J108) from SENSOR TR-0.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J108) to SENSOR TR-0.
2. Match the hole on SENSOR TR-0 with the boss on PLATE-TR-0, and attach
SENSOR TR-0.
3. Fasten SENSOR TR-0 to PLATE-TR-0 with the screw (silver, with flange,
10mm).
4. Attach Photoconductor Unit.
Leg_Sec03_076EA
Figure 4-73. Removal of SENSOR TR-0

4.2.6.2 GUIDE CRU ASSY D 6)

7)
REMOVAL
1. Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p387) 6)

3. Remove PWBA MCU. (p445)
C H E C K When performing the following work, connectors need not be

P O IN T disconnected from PWBA ESS.
4. Remove CHASSIS ASSY ESS. (p453)

6. Remove FUSER LOCK SWITCH. (p430)
7. Remove SENSOR TR-0. (p400)
8. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening PLATE-TR-0
to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
9. Remove PLATE-TR-0 from GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
Leg_Sec03_077RA
Figure 4-74. Removal of GUIDE CRU ASSY D (1)

10. Unclamp the clamp fastening HARNESS-ASSY XERO on the left side of the
10)
main unit.
11. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening GUIDE CRU
ASSY D to the main unit.
12. Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY D from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert HARNESS-ASSY XERO into the hole on the left side of the main unit, and
match the boss on GUIDE CRU ASSY D into the hole on the main unit to attach
GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
2. Fasten GUIDE CRU ASSY D to the main unit with the 5 screws (silver, with
flange, tapping, 6 mm). MOT ASSY P/R
3. Fasten HARNESS-ASSY XERO on the left side of the main unit with the clamp.
4. Attach PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. 9)
5. Fasten PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with
the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm).
C A U T IO N Lightly open/close COVER ASSY TOP, and check operation of the 9)

coupling on MOT ASSY P/R. 9)
9)
9)
8)
6. Attach SENSOR TR-0. (p400)
7. Attach FUSER LOCK SWITCH. (p430)
9. Attach CHASSIS ASSY ESS. (p453)
10. Attach PWBA MCU. (p445)
11. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334) Leg_Sec03_078RC
12. Attach 2ND BTR ASSY. (p387) Figure 4-75. Removal of GUIDE CRU ASSY D (2)

4.2.6.3 LATCH ASSY D 6. Attach SENSOR TR-0. (p400)

REMOVAL
1. Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p387) 9. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334)
2. Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p334) 10. Attach 2ND BTR ASSY. (p387)

6. Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p401)
7. Remove ANTENNA ASSY. (p404)
8)
8. Unhook SPRING-TORSION D from the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
9. Slightly rotate LATCH ASSY D together with SPRING-TORSION D in the
direction of the arrow so that they escape the notch on GUIDE CRU ASSY D to
remove.
10. Remove SPRING-TORSION D from LATCH ASSY D.
10)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPRING-TORSION D to LATCH ASSY D. 9)

2. Attach LATCH ASSY D to GUIDE CRU ASSY D together with SPRING-
TORSION D, and insert the bottom front side of LATCH ASSY D into the notch
on GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
3. Hook SPRING-TORSION D onto the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
C A U T IO N SPRING-TORSION D must be firmly attached onto the hooks on

LATCH ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
CAUTION
4. Attach ANTENNA ASSY. (p404) Leg_Sec03_201FA
5. Attach GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p401) Figure 4-76. Removal of LATCH ASSY D

4.2.6.4 ANTENNA ASSY
REMOVAL

3. Remove PWBA MCU. (p445) 8)-2
7. Unhook the hook fastening ARM-COUPLING to GUIDE CRU ASSY D, and
remove ARM-COUPLING from the shaft on GUIDE CRU ASSY D together with
SPRING-TORSION ARM.
8. Turn ARM-COUPLING 90°, and remove ARM-COUPLING.
8)-1
7)
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_079FB
Figure 4-77. Removal of ANTENNA ASSY (1)

C A U T IO N When unhooking the hook fastening ANTENNA ASSY, take care 9)-1
not to damage the hook.
9. Unhook the hook fastening ANTENNA ASSY to GUIDE CRU ASSY D, and
remove ANTENNA ASSY.
10. Disconnect connector (P/J109) from ANTENNA ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J109) to ANTENNA ASSY.

2. Match the boss on GUIDE CRU ASSY D with the hole on ANTENNA ASSY,
attach ANTENNA ASSY, and fasten with a hook.
3. Attach SPRING-TORSION ARM to ARM-COUPLING, and insert the shaft on
LINK-COUPLING into the long oblong hole on ARM-COUPLING.
4. Turn ARM-COUPLING 90°, attach ARM-COUPLING to the shaft on GUIDE
CRU ASSY D, fasten with a hook, and hook SPRING-TORSION ARM onto the 10)
notch of GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
C A U T IO N SPRING-TORSION ARM must be firmly hooked onto the shaft of

ARM-COUPLING and LATCH ASSY D.
9)-2 Leg_Sec03_080FA
Figure 4-78. Removal of ANTENNA ASSY (2)

5. Attach GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p401)

4.2.6.5 GUIDE CRU ASSY AD 6) 7)
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER ASSY RH. (p339) 6)

4. Remove BCR CLN XERO ASSY. (p412)
6. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening PLATE-TR-0
to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
7. Remove PLATE-TR-0 from GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
Leg_Sec03_081RA
Figure 4-79. Removal of GUIDE CRU ASSY AD (1)

8. Remove WIRE ASSY BTR, WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY BCR from 13. Remove the 7 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening GUIDE CRU
GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. ASSY AD to the main unit.
9. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening WIRE ASSY 14. Draw out the protrusion on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD from the hole on the main
DTN to GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. unit, and remove GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
10. Remove WIRE ASSY DTN from GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. 14)
11. Remove SPRING-LATCH hooked onto the main unit and the stud of GUIDE
CRU ASSY AD.
12. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening both PLATE-
ASSY GND and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD to the main unit, and remove PLATE-
ASSY GND.
10) 13)
13)
13)
13)
9) 8) 13) 12)-2
12)-1
8) 13)
11) 13)
8)
Leg_Sec03_082RB
Leg_Sec03_083RB


Connector Error Caused by Connector
1. Match the protrusion and boss on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with the hole on the Panel Indication Symptom
No. Disconnection
main unit, and attach GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. A (508) Ready Entirely Fogged in Black FIP-P18
2. Fasten GUIDE CRU ASSY AD to the main unit with the 7 screws (silver, with Uneven Density/Thin-
D (504) Ready FIP-P16
flange, tapping, 6 mm). Spot
3. Attach PLATE-ASSY GND to the main unit, and tighten together with GUIDE G (506) Ready Normal printing ---
CRU ASSY AD with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm).

P O IN T easily with LEVER-LATCH PR on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD closed.
4. Attach SPRING-LATCH onto the main unit and the stud on GUIDE CRU ASSY
AD.
5. Attach WIRE ASSY DTN to GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
6. Fasten WIRE ASSY DTN to GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with the screw (silver, with
7. Attach WIRE ASSY BTR, WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY BCR to GUIDE
CRU ASSY AD.
8. Attach PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
9. Fasten PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with
the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm).
11. Attach BCR CLN XERO ASSY. (p412)

4.2.6.6 LEVER-LATCH PR
REMOVAL

7)
6. Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. (p406)
7. Turn LEVER-LATCH PR in the direction of the arrow, match the notch on
LEVER-LATCH PR with the protrusion on the boss of GUIDE CRU ASSY AD,
and remove LEVER-LATCH PR.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the notch on LEVER-LATCH PR with the protrusion on the boss of

GUIDE CRU ASSY AD, and attach LEVER-LATCH PR.
2. Attach GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. (p406)
Leg_Sec03_202FA
Figure 4-82. Removal of LEVER-LATCH PR

4.2.6.7 CAP-PLATE PR, PLATE-ASSY PR 9. Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p339)
REMOVAL
9)-2
3. Remove FRAME ASSY-PH. (p365) 9)-1

7. Remove LEVER-LATCH PR. (p409)
8. Turn PLATE-ASSY PR in the direction of the arrow, match the notch on PLATE-
ASSY PR with the protrusion on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD, and remove PLATE-
ASSY PR together with CAP-PLATE PR.
9. Unhook the hook on CAP-PLATE PR, and remove CAP-PLATE PR from
PLATE-ASSY PR.
REINSTALLATION
8)
attachment direction of CAP-PLATE PR.
1. Attach CAP-PLATE PR to PLATE-ASSY PR.

2. Match the notch on PLATE-ASSY PR with the protrusion on GUIDE CRU ASSY
AD, and attach PLATE-ASSY PR together with CAP-PLATE PR.
3. Attach LEVER-LATCH PR. (p409)
7. Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p365) Leg_Sec03_203FA
8. Attach 2ND BTR ASSY. (p387) Figure 4-83. Removal of CAP-PLATE PR and PLATE-ASSY PR

4.2.6.8 LATCH ASSY AD
REMOVAL

7. Unhook SPRING-TORSION AD from the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
8. Remove LATCH ASSY AD together with SPRING-TORSION AD from GUIDE
CRU ASSY AD.
9. Remove SPRING-TORSION AD from LATCH ASSY AD.
8)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPRING-TORSION AD to LATCH ASSY AD. 7)
2. Attach LATCH ASSY AD together with SPRING-TORSION AD to GUIDE CRU 9)

ASSY AD.
3. Hook SPRING-TORSION AD onto the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
C A U T IO N SPRING-TORSION AD must be firmly attached onto the hooks on

LATCH ASSY AD and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
(Do not attach SPRING-TORSION AD in the reverse direction)

CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_204FA
Figure 4-84. Removal of LATCH ASSY AD
4.2.6.9 BCR CLN XERO ASSY 3. Take out the harness of BCR CLN XERO ASSY to the outside from the hole on
the right side of the main unit, and connect connector (P/L617) for BCR CLN
REMOVAL XERO ASSY to the harness.
4. Fasten the harness on BCR CLN XERO ASSY with the clamp on the right side of
the main unit.
3. Disconnect connector (P/J617) from BCR CLN XERO ASSY on the right side of
the main unit. 6. Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p339)
4. Unclamp the clamp on the right side of the main unit, and move the harness on 6)
BCR CLN XERO ASSY to inside the main unit from the hole on the right side of
5)
the main unit. 5)

LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME ASSY-
ROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to prevent
contact with MAG ROLL.
5. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BCR CLN XERO
ASSY to the main unit. 4)
6. Remove BCR CLN XERO ASSY from the main unit.
4)
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on BCR CLN XERO ASSY with the hole on the main unit, and
attach BCR CLN XERO ASSY.
3)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, press LATCH ROTARY on Leg_Sec03_084EB

LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME ASSY- Figure 4-85. Removal of BCR CLN XERO ASSY
2. Fasten BCR CLN XERO ASSY to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 6 mm).

4.2.6.10 SENSOR TNER FULL
REMOVAL

2. Disconnect connector (P/J126) from SENSOR TNER FULL.
3. Unhook the two hooks fastening SENSOR TNER FULL to the main unit, and
remove SENSOR TNER FULL.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hook on SENSOR TNER FULL with the attachment position, and
attach to the main unit.
2. Connect connector (P/J126) to SENSOR TNER FULL.
3. Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p365) 2)
3)-1
3)-1
3)-2
Leg_Sec03_183EB
Figure 4-86. Removal of SENSOR TNER FULL

4.2.7 ROS
4.2.7.1 ROS ASSY
9)
REMOVAL 9) 8)

FRONT REAR
5. Remove COVER INNER LOWOW. (p340)
6. Remove FRAME ASSY-PH.(p365)
7. Remove CLEANER ASSY. (p416)
8. Disconnect P/J601 and P/J602 connectors of the ROS ASSY.
C A U T IO N When performing the subsequent procedures, be sure to perform

the followings to avoid touching the MAG ROLL; Unlock the
LATCH ROTARY of the LATCH ASSY-ROTARY and turn the
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY with your hand to move the Housing
ASSY-DEVE.
9. Remove the five screws (silver, with flange, 10 mm) that secure the ROS ASSY to
the main unit.
10. Lift the ROS ASSY a little to remove the boss of the assy. from the hole of the
main unit, and remove the ROS ASSY toward rear of the main unit.
10)
Leg_Sec03_086RC
Figure 4-87. Removal of ROS ASSY

REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on ROS ASSY with the hole on the main unit, and attach ROS
ASSY.

LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME ASSY-
2. Fasten ROS ASSY to the main unit with the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 10mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J601) and connector (P/J602) to ROS ASSY.
4. Attach CLEANER ASSY. (p416)
6. Attach COVER INNER L. (p340)

4.2.7.2 CLEANER ASSY
REMOVAL

2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 10mm) fastening GUIDE-ROS CLN to
the main unit.
3. Remove GUIDE-ROS CLN from the main unit.
4. Remove CLEANER ASSY from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
4)
1. Align CLEANER ASSY with the rails on the main unit, and insert.
2. Match the boss on GUIDE-ROS CLN with the hole on the main unit, and attach.
3)
3. Fasten GUIDE-ROS CLN to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
10mm).
2)
2)
Leg_Sec03_087RA
Figure 4-88. Removal of CLEANER ASSY

4.2.8 DEVE 4)-1
4.2.8.1 LATCH ASSY-ROTARY
REMOVAL

2. Remove LV/HVPS. (p448)
3. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening LATCH
ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit.
4. Unhook the three hooks fastening LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit, and
CAUTION
remove LATCH ASSY-ROTARY.
3)
REINSTALLATION 3)
C A U T IO N Pay attention to the levers and springs inside LATCH ASSY- 3)

ROTARY as they easily come loose.
When a part on LATCH ASSY-ROTARY comes off, referring to
the assembly drawing, assemble the part, and attach LATCH
ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit.
1. Match the hook on LATCH ASSY-ROTARY with the attachment position, and 4)-2
2. Fasten LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with
3. Attach LV/HVPS. (p448)
Leg_Sec03_088RA
Figure 4-89. Removal of LATCH ASSY-ROTARY

4.2.8.2 ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER ASSY RH. (p339) [3)]
2. Remove ANTENNA CTRG. (p420)

3. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening ANTENNA
ASSY-CTRG to the main unit.
4. Press the boss fastening ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG to the main unit, and remove
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG.
3)
4)-2
REINSTALLATION
3)
1. Remove the toner cartridge overlaying the attachment position of ANTENNA
ASSY-CTRG.
2. Match the boss on ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG with the attachment position, and
3. Press ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG from the inside of the main unit (hole on FRAME
ASSY-ROTARY), and firmly insert the boss on ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG into
the hole on the main unit.
4. Fasten ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with 4)-1 4)-1
5. Attach ANTENNA CTRG. (p420)
Leg_Sec03_089RA
Figure 4-90. Removal of ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG

7. Attach the ET Cartridges.
C A U T IO N When installing the ET Cartridge, be careful not to sandwich the

LEVER LATCH between the cartridge and the main unit as shown
in the left figure below. Install the ET cartridges correctly as shown
in the right figure below.
Figure 4-91. LEVER LATCH Position
C A U T IO N Be sure to clean the ROS ASSY window with the CLEANER ASSY
after installing the ET Cartridges.

4.2.8.3 ANTENNA CTRG
REMOVAL

2. Disconnect connector (P/J106) from ANTENNA CTRG.
3. Unhook the hook fastening ANTENNA CTRG to ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG, and
remove ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG with the hole on ANTENNA CTRG,
attach ANTENNA CTRG, and fasten with a hook.
2. Connect connector (P/J106) to ANTENNA CTRG.
2)
3)-2
3)-1
Leg_Sec03_091EC
Figure 4-92. Removal of ANTENNA CTRG

4.2.8.4 HOLDER ASSY-BIAS
REMOVAL

2. Remove WIRE ASSY DEVE connected to HOLDER ASSY-BIAS.
3. Unhook the hook on HOLDER ASSY-BIAS from the main unit, and slide down,
match the protrusion on HOLDER ASSY-BIAS with the notch on the main unit,
and remove HOLDER ASSY-BIAS.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the protrusion on HOLDER ASSY-BIAS with the notch of the attachment 3)-2
hole on the main unit, and attach, and slide HOLDER ASSY-BIAS upwards and
fasten with a hook. 2)
2. Attach WIRE ASSY DEVE to HOLDER ASSY-BIAS.

3)-1
Leg_Sec03_092RA
Figure 4-93. Removal of HOLDER ASSY-BIAS

4.2.8.5 SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
REMOVAL

3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET SENSOR to
the main unit.
4. Remove BRACKET SENSOR from the main unit together with SENSOR
ROTARY HOME POSI.
5. Disconnect connector (P/J105) from SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
6. Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI to
BRACKET SENSOR, and remove SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
REINSTALLATION
6)-1 6)-2
1. Match the hooks on SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI with the attachment
position, and attach to BRACKET SENSOR. 4)
2. Connect connector (P/J105) to SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
3. Match the hole on BRACKET SENSOR with the boss on the main unit, and attach
BRACKET SENSOR together with SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
4. Fasten BRACKET SENSOR to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 6
3)
mm).
5)
Leg_Sec03_093RA
Figure 4-94. Removal of SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI

4.2.8.6 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y,

HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C
REMOVAL
C A U T IO N When removing the Toner Cartridge, put several sheets of copy

paper on COVER FRONT ASSY U and other parts to prevent
them from getting dirty.
Before removing HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, be sure to wipe off
any residual toner on it.
When wiping off the residual toner on HOUSING ASSY-
DEVE, take care to prevent any toner from static cling to the
sensors on HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
W A R N IN G Do not vacuum off spilled toner using an usual vacuum cleaner

because there is a possibility of taking fire.
9)-1
9)-2
1. Remove the Toner Cartridge.
3. Remove COVER ASSY TOP. (p321)
9. Press LATCH ROTARY on LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to release the latch, turn
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to a
position where is easy to work. Leg_Sec03_094EB
Figure 4-95. Removal of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (1)

C A U T IO N After moving HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, make sure that FRAME
ASSY-ROTARY is firmly locked by LATCH ROTARY.

10. Unhook the hook on PIVOT AD fastening the right side of HOUSING ASSY-
DEVE to FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, and remove PIVOT AD. 10)-2
11. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8mm) fastening PIVOT ASSY
fastening the left side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, 11)-2
and remove PIVOT ASSY.
11)-1 10)-1
12. Lift up the right side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, remove the gear on the left side
of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE from the gear on FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, and
remove HOUSING ASSY-DEVE. 12)
Thin
CAUTION
Thick
CHECK POINT
Leg_Sec03_095RB
Figure 4-96. Removal of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (2)

REINSTALLATION 9. Attach COVER ASSY TOP. (p321)

C A U T IO N Holes are provided in the protrusion portion on FRAME ASSY- 11. Attach the Toner Cartridge.
ROTARY for preventing mis-insertion of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
The attachment positions of each color of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
C A U T IO N When installing the ET Cartridge, be careful not to sandwich the
is indicated as K, Y, M, and C on FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
LEVER LATCH between the cartridge and the main unit as shown
1. Match the gear on the left side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE of the same color as in the left figure below. Install the ET cartridges correctly as shown
in the right figure below.
the indicated color on FRAME ASSY-ROTARY with the gear on FRAME ASSY-
ROTARY, and attach HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
C A U T IO N The spring under both sides of the bottom of HOUSING ASSY-

DEVE must be placed firmly on the spring receptacle of
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
A spring having a thick right side and a thin left side is used as
the spring under HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
2. Match the hole on HOUSING ASSY-DEVE with the attachment hole on the left
side of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, insert the shaft on PIVOT ASSY, and fasten
the left side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE with the screw (silver, with flange,
tapping, 8 mm).
Figure 4-97. LEVER LATCH Position
3. Match the hole on HOUSING ASSY-DEVE with the attachment hole on the right
side of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, insert the shaft of PIVOT AD, and fasten the
hook on PIVOT AD to attach HOUSING ASSY-DEVE. C A U T IO N Be sure to clean the ROS ASSY window with the CLEANER
ASSY after installing the ET Cartridges.
Be sure to reset the life counter of the Housing ASSY-DEVE
C A U T IO N Removed PIVOT ADs should not be re-used; only new PIVOT ADs
after replacing it with a new one.
in the KIT should be used.
(See “6.4.1.1 Maintenance Menu Items” (p566))


4.2.8.7 FRAME ASSY-ROTARY

18)
REMOVAL
22)
22)
22)
4. Remove COVER ASSY TOP. (p321)
28)
8. Remove COVER INNER TOP. (p337)
9. Remove PWBA MCU. (p445) 28)
12. Remove DRIVE ASSY PRO. (p434)
27)
13. Remove MOT ASSY MAG. (p436)
14. Remove LATCH ASSY-ROTARY. (p417)
15. Remove SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI. (p422) 25) 26)
16. Remove FRAME ASSY-PH. (p365) 25)
19. Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p401) 26)
24)
24)
21. Remove HOUSING ASSY-DEVE. (p423)
22. Remove the three screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the BRACKET
ASSY 2ND GEAR to the main unit.
Leg_Sec03_096RA
Figure 4-98. Removal of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY

23. Remove the BRACKET ASSY 2ND GEAR and the GEAR 2ND from the main 10. Attach GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p401)
unit.
24. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the SHAFT ASSY-
ROTARY to the right side of the main unit.
25. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the SHAFT ASSY-
ROTARY to the left side of the main unit. 14. Attach SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI. (p422)
26. Remove the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY from the both sides of the main unit. 15. Attach LATCH ASSY-ROTARY.(p417)
16. Attach MOT ASSY MAG. (p436)
C A U T IO N When performing the following procedure, be careful not to lose the 17. Attach DRIVE ASSY PRO. (p434)
BEARING BALL as it may come off.
27. Remove the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY upward together with the BEARING 20. Attach PWBA MCU. (p445)
BALL.
28. Remove the BEARING BALL from the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the BEARING BALL to the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
25. Attach COVER ASSY TOP. (p321)
2. Attach the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit placing its gear side to the
left. 26. Attach FUSER ASSY. (p428)
3. Attach the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit inserting its shaft into the 27. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334)
hole of the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY (both right and left). 28. Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p339)
4. Secure the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY attached to the left side of the main unit with
the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
5. Secure the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY attached to the right side of the main unit
with the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
6. Attach the BRACKET ASSY 2ND GEAR and the GEAR 2ND to the main unit.
7. Secure the BRACKET ASSY 2ND GEAR to the main unit with the three screws
(silver, with flange, 6 mm).
8. Attach HOUSING ASSY-DEVE. (p423)

4.2.9 FUSER
COVER FUSER GUIDE
4.2.9.1 FUSER ASSY
COVER TOP
C A U T IO N Be extremely careful not to burn your hand when handling the SIDE L
FUSER section.
Hook
2)
3)-1
REMOVAL
FUSER ASSY 3)-1

2. Release the COVER TOP SIDE L from the hook of the COVER FUSER GUIDE,
and turn the COVER FUSER GUIDE 90 degrees in the direction of the arrow.
3. Move the levers on both sides of the FUSER ASSY upward to unlock and remove
the FUSER ASSY. 3)-2
Actuator
4. Pull out the shaft of the Actuator with the Chute of the FUSER ASSY opened, and
remove the Actuator together with the Spring.
5. Remove the Spring from the Actuator.
Figure 4-99. Removal of FUSER ASSY

REINSTALLATION
Actuator
5)
1. Attach the Spring to the Actuator.
2. Insert the shaft of the Actuator with the Chute of the FUSER ASSY opened, and
attach the Actuator together with the Spring.
FUSER ASSY
4)-1
3. Attach the FUSER ASSY to the main unit matching the connector and boss of the
FUSER ASSY with the connector and the hole of the main unit, and push the 4)-2
levers on the both sides of the FUSER ASSY to secure it to the main unit.
4. Return the COVER FUSER GUIDE to its original position, and secure the
COVER TOP SIDE L with the hook of the COVER FUSER GUIDE.
5. Close COVER FUSER.
C A U T IO N Be sure to reset the life counter of the FUSER ASSY after replacing
it with a new one.
(See “ 6.4.1.1 Maintenance Menu Items ” (p566))
Leg_Sec03_160EA
Figure 4-100. NIP Release Lever Fixing Parts

4.2.9.2 FUSER LOCK SWITCH
REMOVAL

5)-1

4)
4. Disconnect the connector (P/J128, blue) from FUSER LOCK SWITCH.

5. Unclamp the two clamps fastening the harness on FUSER LOCK SWITCH to
remove the harness, and put the connector of FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the
inside the main unit from the hole on the main unit. 6)
5)-1
C A U T IO N When performing the following, take care not to damage FUSER
LOCK SWITCH by falling or dropping it.
7)
6. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening FUSER LOCK 5)-2
SWITCH to the main unit.
7. Slide FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the right, unhook the hook on FUSER LOCK
SWITCH from the hole on the main unit, and remove FUSER LOCK SWITCH.
Leg_Sec03_519RB
Figure 4-101. Removal of FUSER LOCK SWITCH

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When performing the following, take care not to damage FUSER

LOCK SWITCH by falling or dropping it.
1. Match the protrusion and hook on FUSER LOCK SWITCH with the hole on the
main unit, slide FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the left, and attach FUSER LOCK
SWITCH.
2. Putting your hand beneath FUSER LOCK SWITCH to prevent it from dropping,
fasten FUSER LOCK SWITCH with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6
mm).
3. Bring out the connector on FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the outside from the hole
on the main unit.
4. Attach the connector (P/J128, blue) to FUSER LOCK SWITCH, and fasten the
harness on FUSER LOCK SWITCH with the two clamps.

4.2.9.3 HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
REMOVAL
7)-2 7)-1
4. Disconnect the connector (black-and-white) from PWBA FUSER CONT.
5. Disconnect connector (P417) from PWBA MCU. 6)-2
6. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET-RIZ to the
main unit, remove the harness from the clamp, and remove BRACKET-RIZ from
the main unit.
5)
7. Draw out HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L from BRACKET-RIZ while pressing the
claw on HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L.
C A U T IO N The claw on HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L is easily broken. Take

care not to press it too much.
6)-1
REINSTALLATION
6)-2 4)
1. Insert the claw on HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L into the hole on BRACKET-RIZ
to attach.
2. Fasten BRACKET-RIZ to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6
mm), and fasten each harness with the clamps.
3. Attach the harness (yellow) to the connector (P417) on PWBA MCU. Leg_Sec03_520RB
4. Connect the harness (black-and-white) to PWBA FUSER CONT. Figure 4-102. Removal of HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L

4.2.10 DRIVE
4.2.10.1 DRIVE ASSY BTR
REMOVAL

8)
8. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6mm) fastening DRIVE ASSY BTR to 9) 8)
the main unit.
9. Remove DRIVE ASSY BTR from the main unit.
Leg_Sec03_098RB
REINSTALLATION
Figure 4-103. Removal of DRIVE ASSY BTR
1. Match the shaft on DRIVE ASSY BTR with the hole on the main unit, and attach
DRIVE ASSY BTR.
2. Fasten DRIVE ASSY BTR to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
6mm).
4. Attach GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p401)

4.2.10.2 DRIVE ASSY PRO 7)

5)
REMOVAL

6)
3. Remove COVER INNER TOP. (p337)
6)
4. Disconnect connector (P/J411,P/J414) from the PWBA MCU. 6)
5. Unclamp the harness on DRIVE ASSY PRO on the left side of the main unit from
the clamp. If the harness is difficult to remove, remove PWBA MCU. (p445)
6. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening DRIVE ASSY PRO to
the main unit.
7. Remove DRIVE ASSY PRO from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Inset the motor section and harness on DRIVE ASSY PRO into the hole on the
main unit, match the hole on DRIVE ASSY PRO with the boss on the main unit,
and attach DRIVE ASSY PRO.
2. Fasten DRIVE ASSY PRO to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange,
6 mm).
3. Fasten the harness on DRIVE ASSY PRO with the clamp on the left side of the
main unit.
4. Connect connector (P/J411,P/J414) to the PWBA MCU.
6. Attach OP PANEL. (p333) Leg_Sec03_099EA
7. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334) Figure 4-104. Removal of DRIVE ASSY PRO

4.2.10.3 MOT ASSY FSR

2)
REMOVAL

2. Disconnect connector (P/J404) from the PWBA MCU.
3. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness on MOT ASSY FSR and remove the
harness.
3)
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 4mm) fastening MOT ASSY FSR to the
main unit.
5. Remove MOT ASSY FSR from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach MOT ASSY FSR to the main unit.

2. Fasten MOT ASSY FSR to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
4mm). 5)
3. Connect the (P/J404) to the PWBA MCU.
4. Fasten the harness of MOT ASSY FSR with the clamp.
5. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334) 4)
4)

Panel Indication Symptom Leg_Sec03_100RA
No. Disconnection
Paper Jam at 2nd BTR Figure 4-105. Removal of MOT ASSY FSR
P/J404 Ready → Jam E, F ---
section

4.2.10.4 MOT ASSY MAG
REMOVAL
C H E C K When performing the following work, the connector of PWBA ESS 3)

P O IN T does not need to be removed.
3)

3. Disconnect connector (P/J405) and connector (P/J406) from PWBA MCU. 4)
4. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 10 mm) fastening MOT ASSY MAG to 4)
the main unit.
5. Remove MOT ASSY MAG from the main unit.
4)
5)
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on MOT ASSY MAG with the hole on the main unit, and attach.
2. Fasten MOT ASSY MAG to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with flange,
10 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J405) and connector (P/J406) to PWBA MCU.
Leg_Sec03_102RA
4. Attach CHASSIS ASSY ESS. (p453) Figure 4-106. Removal of MOT ASSY MAG

Panel Indication Symptom
No. Disconnection
P/J405 Ready Entirely Faint FIP-P17
P/J406 Ready Normal printing ---

4.2.10.5 MOT ASSY ROT CAUTION

REMOVAL
FFC-ASSY
1. Remove COVER ASSY RH. (p339) ESS
2. Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p334) WIRE ASSY

3. Remove COVER MSI. (p330) BTR
4. Remove COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p331) WIRE ASSY
DEVE 6)
6. Unclamp the clamp fastening WIRE ASSY DEVE, and remove WIRE ASSY
DEVE.
7. Disconnect connector (P/J433) from PWB ASSY ROT.
8. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening MOT ASSY ROT to
the main unit.
9. Remove MOT ASSY ROT from the main unit.
FFC-ASSY
ESS
9)
8)
8) 7)
8)
8)
Leg_Sec03_101EB
Figure 4-107. Removal of MOT ASSY ROT

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When doing the following work, take care so that WIRE ASSY
DEVE, WIRE ASSY BTR, and FFC-ASSY ESS are not sandwiched
between the main unit and MOT ASSY ROT.
1. Match the boss on MOT ASSY ROT with the hole on the main unit, and attach.
2. Fasten MOT ASSY ROT to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6
mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J433) to PWB ASSY ROT.
4. Fasten WIRE ASSY DEVE with the clamp.

No. Disconnection
P/J433 Service Req E527 All LEDs flash ---

4.2.10.6 MOT ASSY P/R

reinstallation.
[1)-1]
2)
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector (P/J200) and connector (P/J201) from MOT ASSY P/R. 3)
3. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 10 mm) fastening MOT ASSY P/R to
3)
the main unit.
4. Remove MOT ASSY P/R from the main unit. 3) [1)-2]
3)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach MOT ASSY P/R to the main unit while lightly pressing LINK-
COUPLING.
2. Fasten MOT ASSY P/R to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 10
mm).
C A U T IO N Lightly open/close COVER ASSY TOP, and check operation of the

coupling on MOT ASSY P/R.
Leg_Sec03_103RC
Figure 4-108. Removal of MOT ASSY P/R
3. Attach connector (P/J200) and connector (P/J201) to MOT ASSY P/R.


4.2.10.7 MOT ASSY MICRO
REMOVAL

2. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness on MOT ASSY MICRO.
3. Disconnect connector (P/J600) from MOT ASSY MICRO.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 4mm) fastening MOT ASSY MICRO to 3)
the main unit.
5. Remove MOT ASSY MICRO from the main unit.
5)
REINSTALLATION
4)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, pay attention to the 4)

attachment direction of MOT ASSY MICRO. 2)
1. Attach MOT ASSY MICRO to the main unit with the harness on MOT ASSY
MICRO facing the rear side.
2. Fasten MOT ASSY MICRO to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
4mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J600) to MOT ASSY MICRO.
4. Fasten the harness on MOT ASSY MICRO with the clamp.
5. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334) Leg_Sec03_104RB
Figure 4-109. Removal of MOT ASSY MICRO

4.2.11 ELECTRICAL
4.2.11.1 SENSOR HUM & TEMP
REMOVAL

3)
2. Disconnect connector (P/J104) from SENSOR HUM & TEMP.
4)
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening SENSOR HUM 2)
& TEMP to the main unit.
4. Remove SENSOR HUM & TEMP from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SENSOR HUM & TEMP to the main unit.

2. Fasten SENSOR HUM & TEMP to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
3. Connect the connector (P/J104) to SENSOR HUM & TEMP.
4. Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p339) Leg_Sec03_107EA
Figure 4-110. Removal of SENSOR HUM & TEMP

No. Disconnection
P/J104 Service Req E533 All LEDs flash Sensor HUM & TEMP error

4.2.11.2 PWBA HVPS 8. Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p339)

C A U T IO N Avoid staticky places such as on a carpet especially when removing
or inserting a Board. Before starting work with the Board, make Connector Error Caused by Connector
sure to touch metallic portion of the printer connected to the earth No. Disconnection
to let your body come out free of static electricity. P/J516 Ready Entirely Faint FIP-P17
F (505) Ready Entirely Thin FIP-P19
REMOVAL G (506) Ready Normal printing ---
H (507) Ready Normal printing ---
5. Remove COVER INNER L. (p340)
6. Disconnect connector (P/J516) from PWBA HVPS, and remove WIRE ASSY
2BTR, WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY DTN (white).
7. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWBA HVPS to the
main unit. 8)
8. Remove PWBA HVPS from the main unit. 7)

7)
REINSTALLATION 7)
6)
1. Attach PWBA HVPS to the main unit. 7) 6)
2. Fasten PWBA HVPS to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 6)
6)
mm).
Leg_Sec03_105EB
3. Connect connector (P/J516) to PWBA HVPS, and attach WIRE ASSY 2BTR, Figure 4-111. Removal of PWBA HVPS
WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY DTN (white).
4. Attach COVER INNER L. (p340)

4.2.11.3 PWB ASSY ROT Table 4-13. Symptoms when the connector is loose
Avoid staticky places such as on a carpet especially when removing Panel Indication Symptom
C A U T IO N No. Disconnection
or inserting a Board. Before starting work with the Board, make P/J430 Service Req E527 All LEDs flash ---
sure to touch metallic portion of the printer connected to the earth
to let your body come out free of static electricity.
REMOVAL

5. Disconnect connector (P/J430), connector (P/J432) and connector (P/J433) from
PWB ASSY ROT.
6. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWB ASSY ROT to
the main unit.
7)
7. Remove PWB ASSY ROT from the main unit.
6)
REINSTALLATION 6)
1. Attach PWB ASSY ROT to the main unit. 6)
2. Fasten PWB ASSY ROT to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 6) 5)
mm). Leg_Sec03_106FA
3. Connect connector (P/J430), connector (P/J432) and connector (P/J433) to PWB Figure 4-112. Removal of PWB ASSY ROT
ASSY ROT.

4.2.11.4 PWBA CRUM 7. Attach COVER MSI. (p330)

C A U T IO N When the printer is turned on after replacing either the PWBA
MCU or the PWBA CRUM, the information that specific to each
printer unit is automatically stored on a memory of replaced circuit
board. Due to this reason, the board becomes unique to specific Do not replace both PWBA CRUM and PWBA MCU at a time.
C A U T IO N
printer unit, and the board is no longer usable on another printer (Replace one of them first and turn the product ON and OFF, and
unit. Do not reuse the board that previously installed on another then replace the other one if both of them should be replaced.)
printer unit.
REMOVAL

6. Remove MOT ASSY ROT. (p437)
7. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening PWBA CRUM to the main
unit.
7)
8. Disconnect connector (P/J429) from PWBA CRUM.
9. Remove PWBA CRUM from the main unit.
9) 8)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach PWBA CRUM to the main unit.

2. Connect connector (P/J429) to PWBA CRUM.
3. Fasten PWBA CRUM to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping,
8mm).
4. Attach MOT ASSY ROT. (p437) Leg_Sec03_108FA
Figure 4-113. Removal of PWBA CRUM

4.2.11.5 PWBA MCU

or inserting a Board. Before starting work with the Board, make
When using the old PWBA MCU 4)

3)
REMOVAL
3)
2. Disconnect all connectors from the PWBA MCU.
3. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6mm) fastening PWBA MCU to the
3)
main unit.
4. Remove PWBA MCU from the main unit.
403 404 417 418 422 416
414
405 415
REINSTALLATION 408
409 412
421
411
1. Attach PWBA MCU to the main unit.
406 407 410 420
413
2. Fasten PWBA MCU to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm). (Unused)
3. Connect all connectors to the PWBA MCU. 2) 400 401

Leg_Sec03_110RB
Figure 4-114. Removal of PWBA MCU

When replacing PWBA MCU with a new one REMOVAL

The life information of the replacement parts, correction parameters, etc. are stored in
1. To enter the maintenance mode, while holding down the [Left( )], [Up( )],
EEPROM on the MCU board (PWBA MCU). The EEPROM was mounted in IC
socket of the MCU board on previous models, whereas the EEPROM of this product is [Down( )] and [Right( )] buttons, turn the printer on.
soldered directly on the MCU board and it is quite difficult to replace it. Therefore, 2. Execute the "MCU DATA BackUp" in the maintenance menu to temporarily store
when the PWBA MCU is replaced with a new one, the data in the EEPROM must be the data stored in the old EEPROM on PWBA MCU.
backed-up and re-stored to the EEPROM on the new MCU board.
C A U T IO N When printer is in the following condition, [MCU DATA

C A U T IO N When the printer is turned on after replacing either the PWBA BackUp] and [MCU DATA Restore] cannot be executed.
MCU or the PWBA CRUM, the information that specific to each During power-save mode
printer unit is automatically stored on a memory of replaced
During warming up
circuit board. Due to this reason, the board becomes unique to
During printing
specific printer unit, and the board is no longer usable on
During adjustment
another printer unit. Do not reuse the board that previously
installed on another printer unit. Once the backup has started, do not turn the printer's power off
When replacing the PWBA MCU, verify that the version of until the engine stops.
firmware on new PWBA MCU matches the version of previous 3. Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p334)
PWBA MCU. If not, be sure to make them matches each other
by either upgrading or downgrading the firmware. Make sure to 4. Disconnect all connectors from the PWBA MCU.
execute [MCU Data Restore] in the MAINTENANCE menu only 5. Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6mm) fastening PWBA MCU to the
after matching the firmware version. main unit.
6. Remove PWBA MCU from the main unit.


1. Attach PWBA MCU to the main unit. Panel Indication Symptom
No. Disconnection
2. Fasten PWBA MCU to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm). P/J412 Service Req E513 All LEDs flash NVM error
P/J413 Service Req E533 All LEDs flash Sensor HUM & TEMP error
3. Connect all connectors to the PWBA MCU.
Ready → Service Req
4. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p334) P/J414 All LEDs flash ---
E542
5. To enter the maintenance mode, while holding down the [Left( )], [Up( )], The display does not
P/J415 EPSON ---
[Down( )] and [Right( )] buttons, turn the printer on. change from "EPSON"
6. Execute the “MCU DATA Restore” in the maintenance menu to write the data P/J416 Install Photocondctr Printing is not possible. Photocondctr error
onto a new PWBA MCU. P/J417 Service Req E537 All LEDs flash Fuser error
P/J418 F Open Printing is not possible. ---
C A U T IO N Once the restoring has started, do not turn the printer's power off The main unit prints
until the engine stops. P/J421 Ready normally. 500-sheet Paper Feeder error
Do not replace both PWBA CRUM and PWBA MCU at a time. Cassette is not recognized.
(Replace one of them first and turn the product ON and OFF, and P/J422 Service Req E526 All LEDs flash ---
then replace the other one if both of them should be replaced.)

No. Disconnection
P/J400 Service Req C0998 Printing is not possible. ---
Ready → Service Req
P/J401 Printing is not possible. Fuser error
E537
P/J403 C Open Printing is not possible. The Cover Fuser is open.
P/J404 Ready Æ Jam E, F Paper Jam at 2nd BTR ---
P/J405 Ready Entirely Faint ---
Ready Æ Service Req
P/J407 All LEDs light ROS Motor error
E510
P/J408 E Open Printing is not possible. ---
P/J409 Service Req E547 Printing is not possible. Feeder Motor error
P/J410 Service Req C0998 Printing is not possible. ---

4.2.11.6 LV/HVPS
2) 515 502 501

500
510
to let your body come out free of static electricity. D
(1BTR)
REMOVAL
A
1. Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p334) (BCR)
2. Disconnect all connectors from the LV/HVPS. C

(DEVE)
503
3. Remove the 6 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening LV/HVPS to the main (Blue)
unit.
4. Remove the top part of LV/HVPS from the protrusion of the bracket attached to
the main unit while taking out the front side of LV/HVPS from between the main
unit and COVER FRONT L, and remove LV/HVPS. 4)-1
3)
REINSTALLATION 3)
3)
1. Put the top part of LV/HVPS inside the protrusion of the bracket while inserting
the front side of LV/HVPS in between the main unit frame and COVER FRONT L
to attach LV/HVPS.
2. Fasten LV/HVPS to the main unit with the 6 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm). 3) 4)-2
3. Connect all connectors to the LV/HVPS. 3)
3) Leg_03_111RC
Figure 4-115. Removal of LV/HVPS


No. Disconnection
Ready → Service
P/J500 All LEDs flash ---
Req E537
P/J501 --- Printing is not possible. ---
P/J502 Service Req C0998 All LEDs light ---
P/J503 --- Printed light and faint ---
Release Carriage
P/J510 Printed light and faint ---
Lock
P/J515 Ready Entirely Faint FIP-P17
A (508) Ready Entirely Fogged in Black FIP-P18
C (509) Ready Entirely Faint FIP-P17
Uneven Density/Thin-
D (504) Ready FIP-P16
Spot

4.2.11.7 PWBA ESS (BOARD ASSY., MAIN)

REMOVAL
6)
The following Step 2 to 4 are for the AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F (fax 4) 3)

C A U T IO N
model). The AcuLaser CX11/CX21 (base model) does not have 6)
4)
PWBA FAX, and four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) are
attached instead of the four SPACERs. Remove the four screws 7) 6) 2)
6) 4) 2)
when disassembling the base model. 6) CN410
4) 2)
2. Remove the four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA FAX to 6)
the PWBA ESS. 2)
3. Disconnect the connector from the PWBA ESS and remove the PWBA FAX. CN705 CN502 CN704 CN702 CN405
4. Remove the four SPACERs on the PWBA ESS.

5. Disconnect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS. CN701
CN703
6. Remove the four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA ESS to
the CHASSIS ESS, and remove the three screws that secure the connectors for the
interface.
CN602
7. Remove the PWBA ESS taking out the interface connector from the hole on the
CHASSIS ESS. CN501 CN601
5)
CAUTION
CN704(12 pin)
FERRITE CORE
CN701(14 pin)
CN702(13 pin)
Leg_03_109RC
Figure 4-116. Removal of PWBA ESS


1. Put the interface connector of the PWBA ESS into the hole of the CHASSIS ESS, Panel Indication Symptom
No. Disconnection
and attach the PWBA ESS. CN405 --- --- ---
2. Secure the PWBA ESS to the CHASSIS ESS with the four screws (silver, with CN501 --- --- ---
flange, 6 mm) and secure the interface connector with the three screws. Release Carriage
CN502 Printing is not possible. ---
3. Connect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS. Lock
CN601 Service Req C0998 All LEDs light ---
The CN701, CN702, and CN704 FFCs are resemble each other CN602 Ready Blank Print FIP-P2
C A U T IO N
in shape as their pin numbers are so close; 14, 13, and 12 CN701
Release Carriage
Printing is not possible. ---
respectively. Be careful not to connect them wrongly. Lock
When reassembling the AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F (fax model), CN702 Ready → Printing Printing is not possible. ---
make sure to put CN701 (14-pin) and CN702 (13-pin) FFCs Release Carriage
through the FERRITE CORE as shown in the figure. The CN703 Printing is not possible. ---
Lock
following Step 4 to 6 are for the AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F (fax
Printing is performed
model). Service Req C0998 →
CN704 normally except the ---
The AcuLaser CX11/CX21 (base model) does not have PWBA Ready
ADF is not recognized.
FAX, and four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) are attached
Printing is performed
instead of the four SPACERs. Attach the four screws when CN705 Ready normally except the ---
reassembling the base model. ADF is not recognized.
4. Attach the four SPACERs to the PWBA ESS.
5. Connect the PWBA FAX to CN410 on the PWBA ESS.
6. Secure the PWBA FAX to the SPACER with the four screws (silver, with flange,
6 mm).

4.2.11.8 PWBA FUSER CONT Table 4-17. Symptoms when the connector is loose
Avoid staticky places such as on a carpet especially when removing Panel Indication Symptom
or inserting a Board. Before starting work with the Board, make Ready → Service Req
sure to touch metallic portion of the printer connected to the earth P/J1 All LEDs flash ---
E537
REMOVAL

3. Disconnect all connectors from the PWBA FUSER CONT.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening PWBA FUSER CONT
to the main unit.
5. Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm) fastening PWBA
FUSER CONT to the main unit.
6. Remove PWBA FUSER CONT from the main unit.
3)
3) 4)
REINSTALLATION 6)
3)
1. Match the boss and protrusion on PWBA FUSER CONT with the hole on the main
unit, and attach PWBA FUSER CONT. 4)
5)
2. Fasten PWBA FUSER CONT to the main unit with the screw (silver, with external
toothed washer, 5 mm).
3. Fasten PWBA FUSER CONT to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 8mm). Leg_Sec03_113FB
Figure 4-117. Removal of PWBA FUSER CONT
4. Connect all connectors to the PWBA FUSER CONT.

4.2.11.9 CHASSIS ASSY ESS (REFERENCE ONLY) 4)

REMOVAL

2. Disconnect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS. 6)
5)
3. Pull out the disconnected connectors through the hole on the CHASSIS ESS.
4. Release the harnesses from the clamp on the CHASSIS ASSY ESS.
5)
5)
5. Remove the five screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the CHASSIS
ASSY ESS to the main unit. [1] 5)
6. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secures the HARNESS ASSY 7)
PANEL.
5)
7. Remove the CHASSIS ASSY ESS from the main unit.
CAUTION
CN704(12 pin) CN705 CN502 CN704 CN702 CN405
CN701(14 pin)
CN701
CN702(13 pin) CN703
FERRITE CORE
CN602
CN501 CN601
2)
Leg_03_114RC
Figure 4-118. Removal of CHASSIS ASSY ESS

REINSTALLATION

harness from being sandwiched between the main unit and
CHASSIS ESS.
1. Attach the CHASSIS ASSY ESS to the main unit matching the protrusion of the
CHASSIS ASSY ESS with the hole of the main unit.
2. Secure the HARNESS ASSY PANEL with the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm).
3. Secure the CHASSIS ASSY ESS with the five screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
4. Put the connectors inside through the hole on the CHASSIS ESS.
5. Connect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS.
C A U T IO N The CN701, CN702, and CN704 FFCs are resemble each other
in shape as their pin numbers are so close; 14, 13, and 12
respectively. Be careful not to connect them wrongly.
When reassembling the AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F (fax model),
make sure to put CN701 (14-pin) and CN702 (13-pin) FFCs
through the FERRITE CORE as shown in the figure.
6. Secure the harnesses with the clamp on the CHASSIS ASSY ESS.

No. Disconnection
CN405 --- --- ---
CN501 --- --- ---
CN601 Service Req C0998 All LEDs light ---
CN602 Ready Blank Print FIP-P2

4.2.12 500 PAPER CASSETTE & 500 PAPER FEEDER

4.2.12.1 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY
REMOVAL
1. Draw out 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY until it comes to a stop, then slightly lift
up the front side, and remove 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY from 500 PAPER
FEEDER.
REINSTALLATION
1)
1. Insert the front side of 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY into 500 PAPER FEEDER
with the front side of 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY slightly lifted up, then hold
it horizontal and insert it all the way seated in 500 PAPER FEEDER.
Leg_Sec03_013EA
Figure 4-119. Removal of 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY

4.2.12.2 GUIDE END ASSY

3)
C A U T IO N Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step during

attachment.
REMOVAL
1. Remove 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p455)

2. Remove PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p457)
[2)]
3. Slide GUIDE END ASSY to the rear, match the 4 protrusions on GUIDE END
ASSY with the notches on CASSETTE 500, and lift up to remove.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the 4 protrusions on GUIDE END ASSY with the notches on CASSETTE
500, and attach.
2. Slide GUIDE END ASSY to the front, and insert the protrusion on GUIDE END
ASSY into the groove on PAPER SLIDE 500.
3. Attach PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p457)
Leg_Sec03_014EA
4. Attach 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p455)
Figure 4-120. Removal of GUIDE END ASSY

4.2.12.3 PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500

3)-1
REMOVAL

2. Slide LOCK LIFT R and LOCK LIFT L, and unlock the locks.
3. Unhook the hooks on ROLL LINK fastened to the shaft of PLATE ASSY
BOTTOM 500 on both the left and right sides, and remove ROLL LINK, LOCK
LIFT R and LOCK LIFT L. 3)-2
4. Remove the 4 screws (silver, tapping, 6 mm) (2 each on left and right) fastening
the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPER 500s to 500 PAPER CASSETTE
ASSY.
3)-2
5. Remove the protrusion on PLATE ROLL STOPPER from the hole on 500 PAPER
CASSETTE ASSY, and remove the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPERs.
6. Press the two hooks on CASSETTE 500, and release the front side of PLATE 3)-1
ASSY BOTTOM 500.
7. Remove the protrusion of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 from the indent on
PAPER SLIDE 500.
8. Draw out the shaft on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 from the oblong hole on
CASSETTE 500 while pushing the side of CASSETTE 500 outward, and remove 2) 2)
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500.
Leg_Sec03_015EA
Figure 4-121. Removal of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 (1)

REINSTALLATION
1. Match the boss on the rear of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 with SPRING NF.
6)
7)
C A U T IO N Make sure that the boss on the rear of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 6)
500 is inserted into SPRING NF.
2. Insert the shaft on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 into the oblong hole on
CASSETTE 500 while pushing the side of CASSETTE 500 outward, and attach
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500.
3. Fasten the front side of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 with the two hooks on
CASSETTE 500 while inserting the protrusion on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 8)-2
into the concave portion on PAPER SLIDE 500.
C A U T IO N The protrusion on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 must be inserted

into the concave portion on PAPER SLIDE 500.
8)-1
4. Match the protrusion on PLATE ROLL STOPPER with the hole on 500 PAPER
CASSETTE ASSY, and attach the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPERs.
5. Fasten the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPERs to 500 PAPER CASSETTE 4)
ASSY with the 4 screws (silver, tapping, 6 mm) (2 each on left and right). 4)
6. Attach LOCK LIFT R, LOCK LIFT L and ROLL LINK to the bearing on PLATE 5)
ASSY BOTTOM 500 on both the left and right sides, and fasten the hook on
ROLL LINK to the groove on the shaft of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. 8)-1
7. Press PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 to lock LOCK LIFT R and LOCK LIFT L. 4)
5) 4)
Leg_Sec03_016EA
Figure 4-122. Removal of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 (2)

4.2.12.4 GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500ÅAGUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 3)-1

4)
REMOVAL 3)-2

2. Remove PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p457) 5)
3. Unhook the hook on CASSETTE 500 fastening PINION 12, and remove PINION
12.
4. Slide GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 to the right, match the 3 protrusions on
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 with the notches on CASSETTE 500, and lift up to
remove.
5. Slide GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 to the left, match the 3 protrusions on GUIDE
PAPER R ASSY 500 with the notches on CASSETTE 500, and lift up to remove.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the 3 protrusions on GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 with the notches on
CASSETTE 500, and attach.
2. Match the 3 protrusions on GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 with the notches on
CASSETTE 500, and attach.
3. Set GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 and GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 to their
maximum open states, attach PINION 12 to CASSETTE 500, and fasten with the
hooks.
4. Attach PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p462)
Leg_Sec03_515EA
Figure 4-123. Removal of GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 and GUIDE PAPER R
ASSY 500

4.2.12.5 COVER FRONT CST 500

3)-1
REMOVAL

2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening COVER
FRONT CST 500 to 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY.
3. Unhook the hook on the base of COVER FRONT CST 500 using a small
screwdriver or a similar tool, pull down COVER FRONT CST 500 towards you to
release the three protrusions on the rear of COVER FRONT CST 500 from the
hole on the 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY, and remove COVER FRONT CST
500.
2)
REINSTALLATION 3)-2
2)
1. Match the three protrusions on the rear of COVER FRONT CST 500 with the hole
on 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY, attach COVER FRONT CST 500, and fasten
the hook on the base of COVER FRONT CST 500.
2. Fasten COVER FRONT CST 500 to 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY with the 2
screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm).
3)-3
Leg_Sec03_018EA
Figure 4-124. Removal of COVER FRONT CST 500

4.2.12.6 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY)
REMOVAL

2. Turn LOCK MC TO FDR on both the left and right sides CW by 90° to unlock
from the main unit.
3. Holding the pitted area on the lower side of both the left and right sides of the main
unit, lift up the main unit, and remove from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, the lengthwise direction of

the oval shape (section that enters the attachment hole on the main 3)
unit) on the top of LOCK MC TO FDR must be facing left and
right.
1. Match the attachment holes on the main unit with the three bosses on 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and attach the main unit to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2. Turn LOCK MC TO FDR on both the left and right sides CCW by 90° to lock with
the main unit.
2)
Unlock Lock
Leg_Sec03_019RA
Figure 4-125. Removal of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY

4.2.12.7 COVER LEFT 500
REMOVAL

2. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER LEFT 500 to
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3. Remove COVER LEFT 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY while pulling the
rear side of COVER LEFT 500 outward.
3)-1
2)
REINSTALLATION 2)
1. Match the boss on COVER LEFT 500 with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY while inserting the metal plate section of the frame at the front and rear of
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY into the clearance between the rib sections on the
front and rear of COVER LEFT 500, and attach COVER LEFT 500.
2. Fasten COVER LEFT 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws
(silver, with flange, 8 mm). 2)
3)-2
2)
2)
Leg_Sec03_020EA
Figure 4-126. Removal of COVER LEFT 500

4.2.12.8 CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
REMOVAL
boss on CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.

2. Remove COVER RIGHT 500. (p464)
3. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE FDR
ASSY 500.
4. Open CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
3)
5. Press the attachment section on the right side of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 with
your finger to bend down, draw out the boss on the right side from the hole on 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and remove CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
5)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. With CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 slightly open, insert the boss on the left side into
the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, then attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 to
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY while bending down the boss on the right side. 5)-1
Leg_Sec03_021EA
2. Close CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
Figure 4-127. Removal of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
3. Fasten CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8
mm).
4. Attach COVER RIGHT 500. (p464)

4.2.12.9 COVER RIGHT 500
REMOVAL

2. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER RIGHT 500 to
3. Remove COVER RIGHT 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2)
REINSTALLATION
2)
1. Match the boss on COVER RIGHT 500 with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY while inserting the metal plate section of the frame at the front and rear of
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY into the clearance between the rib sections on the
front and rear of COVER RIGHT 500, and attach COVER RIGHT 500. 2)
2. Fasten COVER RIGHT 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws
2)
(silver, with flange, 8 mm). 2) 3)
3. Attach 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p455)
Leg_Sec03_022EA
Figure 4-128. Removal of COVER RIGHT 500

4.2.12.10 PWBA TRAY 500

REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER LEFT 500. (p462)

2. Disconnect connector (P/J435), connector (P/J436) and connector (P/J437) from
PWBA TRAY 500.
3. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWBA TRAY 500 to
4. Remove PWBA TRAY 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3)
4)
3)
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the notch at the bottom right of PWBA TRAY 500 with the protrusion on 3)
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY to attach.
2. Fasten PWBA TRAY 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 3 screws
3. Connect connector (P/J435), connector (P/J436) and connector (P/J437) to PWBA
TRAY 500.
Leg_Sec03_030EA
4. Attach COVER LEFT 500. (p462) Figure 4-129. Removal of PWBA TRAY 500
No. Disconnection
The main unit prints
The 500-sheet Cassette
P/J435 Ready normally. 500-sheet
cannot be recognized.
Cassette is not recognized.
P/J437 G Open Printing is not possible. ---

4.2.12.11 PWBA MOT

REMOVAL

2. Disconnect connector (P/J440) and connector (P/J446) from PWBA MOT.
3. Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWBA MOT to 500 4)
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
4. Remove PWBA MOT from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3)
3)
REINSTALLATION
3)
1. Match the notch at the bottom right of PWBA MOT with the protrusion on 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY to attach.
2. Fasten PWBA MOT to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 3 screws (silver,
with flange, 6 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J440) and connector (P/J446) to PWBA MOT.
Leg_Sec03_029EA
4. Attach COVER LEFT 500. (p462)
Figure 4-130. Removal of PWBA MOT

No. Disconnection
Ready → Paper Jam
CN1 Paper Jam ---
LC, G
Ready → Paper Jam Printing is not possible.
CN2 ---
LC, G

4.2.12.12 DRIVE ASSY FEED Table 4-21. Symptoms when the connector is loose
REMOVAL Panel Indication Symptom
No. Disconnection
1. Remove the COVER LEFT 500. (p462) Ready → Paper Jam

CN2 Paper Jam ---
LC, G
2. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY FEED. (p470) Does not perform paper No paper is loaded in the 500-
P/J610 Paper Jam LC, G
feeding sheet Cassette

connector of the connector (P/J610) on SOLENOID FEED on the
harness side.
5)-1
3. Disconnect connector (P/J446) from PWBA MOT and connector (P/J610) from
SOLENOID FEED.
C A U T IO N The screws to be removed in the following work are those fastening

the four corners (marked by) on DRIVE ASSY FEED. Other
screws must not be removed.
4)
4. Remove the 4 screws (silver, 6 mm) fastening DRIVE ASSY FEED to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
4) 4)
5. Remove the protrusion on the top right of DRIVE ASSY FEED from 500 PAPER
5)-2
FEEDER ASSY, and remove DRIVE ASSY FEED.
4)
3)
REINSTALLATION
1. Hook the protrusion on the top right of DRIVE ASSY FEED onto the notch on
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and match the hole on DRIVE ASSY FEED with
the boss on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY to attach.
2. Fasten DRIVE ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 4 screws
(silver, 6 mm).
CAUTION
3. Connect connector (P/J446) to PWBA MOT and connector (P/J610) to Leg_Sec03_023EA
SOLENOID FEED. Figure 4-131. Removal of DRIVE ASSY FEED

4. Attach CLUTCH ASSY FEED. (p470)

4.2.12.13 SOLENOID FEED
REMOVAL

2. Remove CLUTCH ASSY FEED. (p470)
3. Remove DRIVE ASSY FEED. (p467)
4. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) fastening SOLENOID FEED to DRIVE ASSY
FEED.
3)
5. Remove SOLENOID FEED from DRIVE ASSY FEED.
REINSTALLATION
4)
1. Match the hole on SOLENOID FEED with the boss on DRIVE ASSY FEED.
2. Fasten SOLENOID FEED to DRIVE ASSY FEED with the screw (silver, 6 mm).
5) Leg_Sec03_024FA
3. Attach DRIVE ASSY FEED. (p467)
Figure 4-132. Removal of SOLENOID FEED

4.2.12.14 MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
REMOVAL

2. Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY FEED, and remove the harness on MOTOR
ASSY FEEDER.
5)
3. Disconnect connector (P/J446) from PWBA MOT.
4. Remove the 2 screws (silver, 6 mm) fastening MOTOR ASSY FEEDER to
DRIVE ASSY FEED.
5. Remove MOTOR ASSY FEEDER from DRIVE ASSY FEED. 4)
2)
4)
REINSTALLATION
3)

attachment direction of MOTOR ASSY FEEDER.
1. Attach MOTOR ASSY FEEDER to DRIVE ASSY FEED with the harness of
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER facing up. Leg_Sec03_516EA
2. Fasten MOTOR ASSY FEEDER to DRIVE ASSY FEED with the 2 screws Figure 4-133. Removal of MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
(silver, 6 mm).
3. Connect connector (P/J446) to PWBA MOT.
4. Fasten the harness on MOTOR ASSY FEEDER with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY
FEED.

No. Disconnection
Ready → Paper Jam
CN2 Paper Jam ---
LC, G

4.2.12.15 CLUTCH ASSY FEED
REMOVAL

2. Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY FEED, and remove the harness on 5)
CLUTCH ASSY FEED.
3. Disconnect connector (P/J609) from CLUTCH ASSY FEED.
4. Remove the KL ring fastening CLUTCH ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY. 4)
5. Remove CLUTCH ASSY FEED from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION 2)
1. Match the hole position of CLUTCH ASSY FEED with the D cut surface on the
shaft of ROLL ASSY TURN 500, and attach CLUTCH ASSY FEED so that the 3)
protrusion of DRIVE ASSY FEED enters the concave portion on CLUTCH ASSY
FEED.
2. Fasten CLUTCH ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the KL ring.
3. Connect connector (P/J609) to CLUTCH ASSY FEED.
4. Fasten the harness on CLUTCH ASSY FEED with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY
Leg_Sec03_025EA
FEED.
Figure 4-134. Removal of CLUTCH ASSY FEED
Table 4-23. Symptoms when the connector is Loose

No. Disconnection
No paper is loaded in the 500-
P/J609 Ready → Paper Jam E Paper Jam
sheet Cassette

4.2.12.16 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 5)-1
REMOVAL 5)-2
1. Remove 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p461)

3. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1.
4. Disconnect connector (P/J435) from PWBA-TRAY 500.
5. Unhook the 2 hooks fastening HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and remove HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1. 3)
3)
REINSTALLATION
1. Pass the connector (P/J43) on HARNESS-ASSY FEED through the hole on 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2. Attach HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and fasten
with the hook.
3. Connect connector (P/J435) to PWBA-TRAY 500.
4. Fasten the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 with the clamp. 4)
Leg_Sec03_026FA
6. Attach 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p461) Figure 4-135. Removal of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1

No. Disconnection
Printing using the 500-
sheet Cassette cannot be The 500-sheet Cassette
P/J435 Ready
made. The main unit cannot be recognized.
prints normally.

4.2.12.17 ROLL ASSY TURN 500 6. Attach DRIVE ASSY FEED. (p467)
REMOVAL
1. Remove CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p463)
2. Remove COVER LEFT 500. (p462) 10. Attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p463)
6. Remove HOUSING ASSY FEED. (p485)
7. Remove CHUTE ASSY 500. (p475)
8. Remove the E-rings fastening both sides of the shaft on ROLL ASSY TURN 500
from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9. Remove the left and right BEARING FEEDs fastening ROLL ASSY TURN 500 8)
from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. 9)
10. Temporarily slide ROLL ASSY TURN 500 to the left, and draw out the shaft of
ROLL ASSY TURN 500 from the right-side bearing on 500 PAPER FEEDER 8)
ASSY to remove ROLL ASSY TURN 500. 9)
10)
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the shaft left side on ROLL ASSY TURN 500 into the left-side bearing on
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and slide ROLL ASSY TURN to the right to attach. Leg_Sec03_027EA
Figure 4-136. Removal of ROLL ASSY TURN 500
2. Match the double D cut surface of BEARING FEED with the left and right
bearings of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, attach BEARING FEED, and fasten
ROLL ASSY TURN 500.
3. Fasten the shafts on both sides on ROLL ASSY TURN to 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY with the E-rings.
4. Attach CHUTE ASSY 500. (p475)
5. Attach HOUSING ASSY FEED. (p485)

4.2.12.18 SWITCH FEEDER DOOR Table 4-25. Symptoms when the connector is loose
Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step during Panel Indication Symptom
attachment. Printing using the 500-
sheet Cassette cannot be 500-sheet Cassette Rear
P/J121 G Open
made. The main unit Cover is opened
prints normally.
REMOVAL [3)]
5)-1
3. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY.
4. Remove CAP FEEDER from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
5. Unhook the 2 hooks fastening SWITCH FEEDER DOOR to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and remove SWITCH FEEDER DOOR.
6. Disconnect connector (P/J121) from SWITCH FEEDER DOOR.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J121) to SWITCH FEEDER DOOR.

2. Match the hook on SWITCH FEEDER DOOR with the attachment position, and
6)
attach to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3. Pull the harness of the connector on SWITCH FEEDER DOOR from the outside
of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and take up any slack from the harness on the
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR side.
4. Match the boss on CAP FEEDER with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, 4)
5)-2 3)
and attach CAP FEEDER.
Leg_Sec03_028FA
5. Fasten CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw (silver,
Figure 4-137. Removal of SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
tapping, 8 mm).
7. Attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p463)

4.2.12.19 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2
REMOVAL
1. Remove 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p461)

3. Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2.
4. Disconnect connector (P/J436) from PWBA-TRAY 500.
5. Unhook the 2 hooks fastening HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and remove HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2.
REINSTALLATION 3)
1. Attach HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and fasten 5)-2
3)
with the hook.
4)
2. Connect connector (P/J436) to PWBA-TRAY 500.
3. Fasten the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 with the clamp.
5. Attach 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p461) 5)-1
Leg_Sec03_031FA
Figure 4-138. Removal of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2

4.2.12.20 CHUTE ASSY 500
REMOVAL

8)
8. Remove the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE ASSY 500 to 500 8)
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET MAG R to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY. 10)
10. Remove BRACKET MAG R from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9)
11. Remove the right-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 from the bearing on GUIDE
CST R.
12. Remove the left-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 from the bearing on GUIDE
CST L, and remove CHUTE ASSY 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
Leg_Sec03_041EA
Figure 4-139. Removal of CHUTE ASSY 500 (1)

REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the left-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 into the bearing on GUIDE CST L.
2. Insert the right-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 into the bearing on GUIDE CST
R, and attach CHUTE ASSY 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3. Match the hole on BRACKET MAG R with the boss on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY while inserting BRACKET MAG R into the notch on 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and attach BRACKET MAG R.
4. Fasten BRACKET MAG R to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw (silver,
6 mm).
5. Fasten CHUTE ASSY 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 2 screws
(silver, tapping, 8 mm).
9. Attach COVER LEFT 500. (p462) 12)
11)
11. Attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p463) Leg_Sec03_517EA
12. Attach 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p455) Figure 4-140. Removal of CHUTE ASSY 500 (2)

4.2.12.21 HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
REMOVAL

10)-1
5. Remove CLUTCH ASSY FEED. (p470) 10)-1
9)-3
10)-2
9)-1
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to damage
the LEVER 500 boss.
When performing the following work, take care not to lose 9)-2 9)-1
SPRING LEVER 500.
9. Remove LEVER 500 and SPRING LEVER 500 from CHUTE ASSY 500 while
bending down the bosses on both sides of LEVER 500.

the HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 boss.
When performing the following work, take care not to lose
SPRING RETARD. CAUTION CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_038FA
10. Remove HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 from CHUTE ASSY 500 while bending Figure 4-141. Removal of HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
down the bosses on both sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500.

REINSTALLATION
boss of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500.
1. Match SPRING RETARD with the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500, and attach
HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 to CHUTE ASSY 500 while bending down the
bosses on both sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500.
C A U T IO N Make sure that SPRING RETARD is in the boss on HOLDER

ASSY RETARD 500 and the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500.
When performing the following work, take care not to damage
the boss of LEVER 500.
When performing the following work, pay attention to the
attachment direction of LEVER 500.
2. Attach LEVER 500 to CHUTE ASSY 500 while attaching SPRING LEVER 500
to the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500 and bending down the bosses on both sides of
LEVER 500.
C A U T IO N Make sure that SPRING LEVER 500 is in the boss on LEVER

500 and the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500.
The protrusion on LEVER 500 must be firmly inserted into the
concave portion on the bottom of HOLDER ASSY RETARD
500.

4.2.12.22 FILM ASSY FDR
REMOVAL
1. Open CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.

2. Remove the 4 screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening FILM ASSY FDR to
CHUTE ASSY 500.
3. Remove FILM ASSY FDR from CHUTE ASSY 500.
1)
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole on FILM ASSY FDR with the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500, and
attach FILM ASSY FDR while inserting the film base on FILM ASSY FDR to the
inside of CHUTE ASSY 500.
2. Fasten FILM ASSY FDR to CHUTE ASSY 500 with the 4 screws (silver, tapping,
8 mm).
3. Close CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. 3)
2)
Leg_Sec03_205FB
Figure 4-142. Removal of FILM ASSY FDR

4.2.12.23 STOPPER CST R 4. Attach HOUSING ASSY FEED. (p485)

REMOVAL
2. Remove CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p463) 8. Attach COVER RIGHT 500. (p464)
3. Remove COVER RIGHT 500. (p464) 9. Attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p463)
4. Remove COVER LEFT 500. (p462) 10. Attach 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p455)
9. Remove GUIDE CST R. (p481)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to lose SPG
LOCK CST LL.
10. Remove STOPPER CST R and SPG LOCK CST LL from GUIDE CST R.
10)-2
REINSTALLATION
10)-1
1. Attach SPG LOCK CST LL to the boss on STOPPER CST R, and attach
STOPPER CST R to GUIDE CST R.
Leg_Sec03_181FA
C A U T IO N Make sure that SPG LOCK CST LL is inserted into the boss on Figure 4-143. Removal of STOPPER CST R
STOPPER CST R and the boss on GUIDE CST R.
2. Attach GUIDE CST R. (p481)


4.2.12.24 GUIDE CST R 8. Attach COVER LEFT 500. (p462)

REMOVAL
9)
9. Remove the 5 screws (silver, tapping, 6mm) fastening GUIDE CST R to 500 9)
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
10. Remove GUIDE CST R from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY together with SPG 9) 9)
LOCK CST LL and STOPPER CST R.
11. Remove STOPPER CST R. (p480) 10)
9)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach STOPPER CST R. (p480)

Leg_Sec03_039EA
2. Match the boss on the GUIDE CST R with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER
Figure 4-144. Removal of GUIDE CST R
ASSY, and attach GUIDE CST R.
3. Fasten GUIDE CST R to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws (silver,
tapping, 6mm).

4.2.12.25 GUIDE CST L
REMOVAL

10) 9)
11)
8. Remove CHUTE ASSY 500. (p475) 11)
9. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY.
11)
10. Remove CAP FEEDER from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. 12)
11)
11. Remove the 5 screws (silver, tapping, 6mm) fastening GUIDE CST L to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY. 11)
12. To remove GUIDE CST L from SWITCH FEEDER DOOR, slide GUIDE CST L
slightly to the right, and remove GUIDE CST L from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY
together with SPG LOCK CST LL and STOPPER CST L.
13. Remove STOPPER CST L. (p484)
Leg_Sec03_040EA
Figure 4-145. Removal of GUIDE CST L

REINSTALLATION
1. Attach STOPPER CST L. (p484)

2. Match the boss on GUIDE CST L with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY
while inserting SWITCH FEEDER DOOR into the hole on the rear of GUIDE
CST L, and attach GUIDE CST L.
3. Fasten GUIDE CST L to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws (silver,
tapping, 6mm).
4. Match the boss on CAP FEEDER with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY,
and attach CAP FEEDER.
5. Fasten CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).

4.2.12.26 STOPPER CST L 5. Attach DRIVE ASSY FEED. (p467)

REMOVAL
2. Remove CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p463) 9. Attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p463)
3. Remove COVER RIGHT 500. (p464) 10. Attach 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p455)
9. Remove GUIDE CST L. (p482)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to lose SPG
LOCK CST LL.
10. Remove STOPPER CST L from GUIDE CST L.

10)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPG LOCK CST LL to the boss on STOPPER CST L, and attach 10)-1
STOPPER CST L to GUIDE CST L. Leg_Sec03_182FA
Figure 4-146. Removal of STOPPER CST L
C A U T IO N Make sure that the boss of STOPPER CST and that of GUIDE CST
L are inserted into SPG LOCK CST LL.
2. Attach GUIDE CST L. (p482)


4.2.12.27 HOUSING ASSY FEED 6)
REMOVAL
1. Remove 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p455) 9)-1 9)-1

5)-1
5)-2
5. Unhook the hook on GEAR FEED fastened to the shaft on HOUSING ASSY
FEED, and remove GEAR FEED.
6. Disconnect connector (P/J618) from HOUSING ASSY FEED.
7. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening HOUSING ASSY FEED
to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
8. Insert both hands from the front side of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, pull the 2
levers on HOUSING ASSY FEED towards you, and remove the boss on
HOUSING ASSY FEED from the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9. Slide HOUSING ASSY FEED to the front side, unhook the 4 hooks at the top
fastened to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, remove the hole on HOUSING ASSY
FEED from the protrusion at the front side of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and ROLL ASSY
push down HOUSING ASSY FEED to remove. 9)-2 TURN 500
CAUTION
ACTUATOR
7) T/R
8)-2 8)-2
8)-1 8)-1
Leg_Sec03_032EB
Figure 4-147. Removal of HOUSING ASSY FEED

REINSTALLATION

ACTUATOR T/R attached to HOUSING ASSY FEED. Also, make
sure that ACTUATOR T/R locates at the position above ROLL
ASSY TURN 500.
1. Match the 4 hooks on HOUSING ASSY FEED with the attachment positions, and
attach to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2. Slide HOUSING ASSY FEED to the rear side, insert the boss on HOUSING
ASSY FEED into the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and insert the
protrusion on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY into the hole at the front side of
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
3. Fasten HOUSING ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw
4. Connect connector (P/J618) to HOUSING ASSY FEED.
5. Attach GEAR FEED to the shaft on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and fasten the hook
on GEAR FEED to the groove on the shaft of HOUSING ASSY FEED.

No. Disconnection
Printing using the 500-
sheet Cassette cannot be No paper is loaded in the 500-
P/J618 Ready → Paper Out
made. The main unit sheet Cassette
prints normally.

4.2.12.28 SENSOR NO PAPER 6. Attach DRIVE ASSY FEED. (p467)

REMOVAL
6)
4. Remove DRIVE ASSY FEED. (p467) 6)
7)
6. Remove the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening COVER FEED to
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
7. Remove COVER FEED from HOUSING ASSY FEED.
8. Unhook the 3 hooks fastening SENSOR NO PAPER to HOUSING ASSY FEED,
and remove SENSOR NO PAPER.
9. Disconnect connector (P/J119) from SENSOR NO PAPER.
REINSTALLATION

positional relationship between SENSOR NO PAPER and 8)-1
ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST.
1. Connect connector (P/J119) to SENSOR NO PAPER.

2. Match the hook on SENSOR NO PAPER with the attachment position while
inserting ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST into the sensor on SENSOR NO PAPER,
and attach to HOUSING ASSY FEED.
3. Attach COVER FEED to HOUSING ASSY FEED.
9)
8)-2
4. Fasten COVER FEED to HOUSING ASSY FEED with the 2 screws (silver, CAUTION
tapping, 8 mm).
Leg_Sec03_033FA
5. Attach HOUSING ASSY FEED. (p485) Figure 4-148. Removal of SENSOR NO PAPER

4.2.12.29 ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST 7)
REMOVAL
7)
2. Remove COVER LEFT 500. (p462) 8)

6. Unhook the 3 hooks fastening CAP ACTUATOR to HOUSING ASSY FEED, and
remove CAP ACTUATOR.
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
9. Draw out the shaft of ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST from the hook on HOUSING
ASSY FEED, slide along the notch on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and remove
6)-1
6)-2
9)-1 9)-2
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_034FA
Figure 4-150. Removal of ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST (2)
Leg_Sec03_206FA
Figure 4-149. Removal of ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST (1)

REINSTALLATION

positional relationship between SENSOR NO PAPER and
1. Insert the shaft on ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST from the notch on HOUSING
ASSY FEED.
2. Fit the shaft on ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST onto the hook on HOUSING
ASSY FEED while inserting ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST into the sensor on
SENSOR NO PAPER, and attach.
4. Fasten COVER FEED to HOUSING ASSY FEED with the 2 screws (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).
5. Match the hole on CAP ACTUATOR with the boss on HOUSING ASSY FEED,
and attach CAP ACTUATOR.

4.2.12.30 ACTUATOR T/R 9)
REMOVAL
1. Remove 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p455) 7)

8)
6. Remove ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p492)
7. Remove SPRING ACTUATOR from the notch on HOUSING ASSY FEED.
8. Draw out the shaft on ACTUATOR T/R from the hook on HOUSING ASSY
FEED, and remove ACTUATOR T/R together with SPRING ACTUATOR.
9. Remove SPRING ACTUATOR from ACTUATOR T/R.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach SPRING ACTUATOR to ACTUATOR T/R.

2. Fit the shaft on ACTUATOR T/R into the hook on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and
attach ACTUATOR T/R together with SPRING ACTUATOR.
3. Hook SPRING ACTUATOR onto the notch on HOUSING ASSY FEED.
C A U T IO N SPRING ACTUATOR must be firmly hooked onto the notch on

ACTUATOR T/R and HOUSING ASSY FEED.
4. Attach ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p492)

CAUTION Leg_Sec03_035FA
Figure 4-151. Removal of ACTUATOR T/R

4.2.12.31 SENSOR T/R

9)-1
REMOVAL

6. Remove ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p492) 8) 9)-2
7. Remove ACTUATOR T/R. (p490)

8. Disconnect connector (P/J120) from SENSOR T/R.
9. Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR T/R to HOUSING ASSY FEED, and
remove SENSOR T/R.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hooks on SENSOR T/R with the attachment positions, and attach to
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
2. Connect connector (P/J120) to SENSOR T/R.
Leg_Sec03_036FA
3. Attach ACTUATOR T/R. (p490) Figure 4-152. Removal of SENSOR T/R
4. Attach ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p492)

4.2.12.32 ROLL ASSY FEED 500 6)
REMOVAL
6)
7)
9)
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
8. Remove the E-rings fastening both sides of SHAFT FEED from HOUSING ASSY 8)-1 8)-2
FEED, and remove the left and right BEARING SLEEVEs.
9. Temporarily slide SHAFT FEED to the right, draw out SHAFT FEED from the
left-side bearing on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and remove together with ROLL
ASSY FEED 500 and ROLL SUPPORT 500.
10. Unhook the hook on ROLL SUPPORT 500 on the right side fastened to SHAFT
8)-1
FEED, and remove ROLL SUPPORT 500.
11. Unhook the hook on ROLL ASSY FEED 500 fastened to SHAFT FEED, and
remove ROLL ASSY FEED 500.
8)-2
11)-2
11)-1
10)-1
10)-2
Leg_Sec03_037FA
Figure 4-153. Removal of ROLL ASSY FEED 500

REINSTALLATION

attachment direction of ROLL ASSY FEED 500.
1. Attach ROLL ASSY FEED 500 to SHAFT FEED so that the hook on ROLL
ASSY FEED 500 is facing the right side, and fasten the hook on ROLL ASSY
FEED 500 to the groove on SHAFT FEED.
2. Attach ROLL SUPPORT 500 to SHAFT FEED, and fasten the hook on ROLL
SUPPORT 500 to the groove on SHAFT FEED.
3. Insert the right side of SHAFT FEED into the right-side bearing on HOUSING
ASSY FEED, then slide SHAFT FEED to the left, and attach together with ROLL
ASSY FEED 500 and ROLL SUPPORT 500.
4. Match the double D cut surface of BEARING SLEEVE with the left and right
bearings of HOUSING ASSY FEED, attach BEARING SLEEVE, and fasten both
sides of SHAFT FEED with the E-rings.
6. Fasten COVER FEED to HOUSING ASSY FEED with the 2 screws (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).

4.3 Scanner Section
4.3.1 ADF Unit

REMOVAL
2)
1. Remove the Scanner. (p319)
2. Disconnect the cable of the ADF Unit from the IR A Assy.
CABLE
3. Remove the two screws (M3 x 12 mm, P-type, P-head) that secure the ADF Unit
to the IR A Assy.
4. Open the ADF Unit and remove it toward upward.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the ADF HINGE of the ADF Unit into the hole on the IR A Assy, and close
the ADF Unit.
2. Secure the ADF Unit to the IR A Assy with the two screws (M3 x 12 mm, P-type, ADF Unit
P-head). 4)
3. Connect the cable of the ADF Unit to the IR A Assy.

4. Install the Scanner. (p319) IR A ASSY
4)
ADF HINGE ADF HINGE
3) 3)
Figure 4-154. Removal of ADF Unit
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Scanner Section 494

4.3.2 COVER Obverse Side 3) IR COVER A ASSY
4.3.2.1 IR COVER A ASSY
REMOVAL

2. Remove the ADF Unit. (p494)
3. Remove the screw (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the both left and
right HINGE HOLDER 2s to the IR COVER A ASSY.
4. Turn the Scanner over and remove the two screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head) Figure 4-155. Removal of IR COVER A ASSY (1)
that secure the left and right HINNGE HOLDER 2s to the IR BASE A ASSY to
remove the two HINGE HOLDER 2s from the assy.
5. Remove the seven screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the IR Reverse Side IR BASE A ASSY
COVER A ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY.
5)
4)
HINGE HOLDER 2
Figure 4-156. Removal of IR COVER A ASSY (2)

6. Turn the Scanner back to normal orientation, and remove the IR COVER A ASSY 7. Remove a piece of tape that bundles the harness and FFC of the IR COVER A ASSY.
from the IR BASE A ASSY. There are two hooks on left and right shorter sides of
8. Pull out the IR COVER A ASSY harness through the hole on the IR BASE A ASSY.
the IR BASE A ASSY to secure the IR COVER A ASSY, so push the shorter side
of the IR BASE A ASSY while pulling the IR COVER A ASSY upward to
remove it (do the procedure for both left and right side one by one).
C H E C K The two hooks of the IR BASE A ASSY that secure the IR

P O IN T COVER A ASSY are indicated on the picture below.
6)
Hooks
IR BASE A ASSY IR COVER A ASSY

IR BASE A ASSY
If the IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY and the ADF IR LOCK ASSY Through-hole for the Harness IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
prevent the IR COVER A ASSY from separating from the IR
BASE A ASSY, access them from the bottom of the IR BASE A ADF IR LOCK ASSY
ASSY to set them in position so that they do not interfere the IR Harness
COVER A ASSY.
Bottom of the IR BASE A ASSY IR COVER A ASSY
IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
8)
ADF IR LOCK ASSY


REINSTALLATION Through-hole for the Harness IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY

ADF IR LOCK ASSY
1. Draw the IR COVER A ASSY harness through the hole on the IR BASE A ASSY. Harness
2. Bundle the harness and the FFC of the IR COVER A ASSY with a piece of tape.
3. Attach the IR COVER A ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY inserting the IR
ENGINE LOCK ASSY and the ADF IR LOCK ASSY into the holes on the IR COVER A ASSY
reverse side of the IR COVER A ASSY.
C H E C K The IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY may fall off the IR BASE A ASSY
P O IN T while attaching the IR COVER A ASSY. In such case, reattach it
following the procedure given below. Through-hole for the ADF IR LOCK ASSY
1. Pass the pintle through the center hole on the IR ENGINE
LOCK ASSY, and hitch one end of the spring to the oblong Through-hole for the IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
hole on the assy.
Figure 4-159. Reinstallation of IR COVER A ASSY
2. Attach the IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY
with the pintle placed on the bearing of the IR BASE A ASSY.
3. Hitch the other end of the spring to the protrusion on the IR
BASE A ASSY.
1) 2) 3)
Pintle Protrusion
Spring Groove on Groove on

the IR BASE A ASSY IR BASE A ASSY the IR BASE A ASSY
IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY Bottom of the IR BASE A ASSY
4. Turn the Scanner over and secure the IR COVER A ASSY to the IR BASE A
ASSY with seven screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head).
5. Attach the two HINGE HOLDER 2s to left and right grooves on the IR BASE A
ASSY respectively, and secure them with the two screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-
head) (one screw for one HINGE HOLDER 2).
HINGE HOLDER 2
6. Turn the Scanner back to normal orientation, and secure the left and right HINGE
HOLDER 2s to the IR COVER A ASSY with the two screws (M3 x 10 mm, P- Figure 4-160. Reinstallation of HINGE HOLDER 2
type, B-head) respectively.
7. Attach the ADF Unit. (p494)
8. Install the Scanner. (p319)
4.3.3 IR A Assy
CCD MODULE ASSY
4.3.3.1 CCD MODULE ASSY FFC CLIP

6)-1
REMOVAL 6)-2
FFC CR
2. Remove the ADF Unit. (p494) 5)
3. Remove the IR COVER A ASSY. (p495)
4. Slide the PULLEY ASSY in the direction of an arrow shown in Figure 4-161 to
release the tension of the IR TIMING BELT, and remove the IR TIMING BELT
from the pulley of the PULLEY ASSY.
5. Move the CCD MODULE ASSY to the center.
6. Turn the CCD MODULE ASSY upward upon the IR SHAFT, and hold it to
remove the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, B-type, P-head) that secure the FFC CR to
the CCD MODULE ASSY. Figure 4-162. Removal of FFC CLIP
7. Disconnect the FFC CR from the connector on the CCD MODULE ASSY.
8. Release the left end of the IR SHAFT from the bearing of the IR BASE ASSY, and
remove the CCD MODULE ASSY together with the IR SHAFT. CCD MODULE ASSY
9. Pull out the IR SHAFT from the CCD MODULE ASSY.

IR SHAFT
8)-1 8)-2
4)
Figure 4-163. Removal of CCD MODULE ASSY
IR TIMING BELT PULLEY ASSY
Figure 4-161. Releasing the Tension of IR TIMING BELT

REINSTALLATION
1. Put the IR SHAFT through the shaft hole of the CCD MODULE ASSY.
2. Insert the right end of the IR SHAFT into the right bearing of the IR BASE ASSY,
and then push the left end into the left bearing of the assy. See Figure 4-163.
3. Move the CCD MODULE ASSY to the center.
4. Attach the PULLEY ASSY to the IR BASE ASSY.
5. Draw the FFC CR through the FFC CLIP, and turn the CCD MODULE ASSY
upward upon the IR SHAFT and hold it to secure the FFC CLIP to the CCD
MODULE ASSY with the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, B-type, P-head). See Figure
4-162.
6. Connect the FFC CR to the connector on the CCD MODULE ASSY.
7. Hitch the IR TIMING BELT to the gear of the MOTOR ASSY, and to the pulley
of the PULLEY ASSY by sliding the PULLEY ASSY leftward. See Figure 4-161.
8. Attach the IR COVER A ASSY. (p495)

4.3.3.2 MOTOR ASSY Harnesses Harness Tie IR BASE A ASSY
5)-2
REMOVAL
5)-1
Grounding Wire 6)
4. Remove the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p498)
5. Pull the harnesses and the grounding wire of the MOTOR ASSY to the inner side
of the IR BASE A ASSY, and release the MOTOR ASSY harnesses from the HP Flag MOTOR ASSY 8) Ferrite Core
groove on the IR BASE A ASSY.
6. Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the harness tie.
7. Cut the harness tie, and remove the ferrite core from the harnesses.
Figure 4-164. Removal of MOTOR ASSY
8. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the MOTOR
ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY, and remove the MOTOR ASSY from the IR
BASE A ASSY.
C A U T IO N When removing/reinstalling the MOTOR ASSY, be careful not to

displace or remove the carriage home position detection flag.

REINSTALLATION
1. Wind the harnesses of the MOTOR ASSY around the ferrite core once, and secure Place the harnesses in the order of brown,
orange, black, and yellow from the top.
them with the harness tie.
2. Draw the grounding wire through the hole of the IR BASE A ASSY.
3. Install the MOTOR ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY matching the guide pins of
the IR BASE A ASSY with the positioning holes of the MOTOR ASSY.
4. Secure the bottom-right corner of the MOTOR ASSY with the screw (M3 x 8 mm,
P-type, B-head), and secure the upper-left corner of the assy. together with the
grounding terminal with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head).
5. Secure the harness tie to the IR BASE A ASSY with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-
type, B-head).
Wind harnesses once around the ferrite core
6. Put the harnesses of the MOTOR ASSY through the hole of the IR BASE A
ASSY, and secure the harnesses on the groove of the IR BASE A ASSY.
C H E C K When securing the harnesses of the MOTOR ASSY on the groove of

6)
P O IN T the IR BASE A ASSY, arrange them in the prescribed order; brown,
orange, black, and yellow from the top as shown in Figure 4-165. 5)
Grounding Wire
7. Attach the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p498)
Ferrite Core
MOTOR ASSY
4)
Positioning Holes and Guide Pins
Figure 4-165. Reinstallation of MOTOR ASSY

4.3.3.3 PCB ASSY IR BASE A ASSY

CCD MODULE ASSY 6)
REMOVAL

Positioning Holes
2. Remove the ADF Unit. (p494) and Guide Pins

4. Move the CCD MODULE ASSY to the left side (home position side).
5. Disconnect the FFC BOARD from the connector on the PCB ASSY.
6. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the PCB ASSY FFC BOARD 5) PCB ASSY
4)
to the IR BASE A ASSY, and remove the PCB ASSY from the IR BASE A
ASSY.
Figure 4-166. Removal of PCB ASSY
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the positioning holes of the PCB ASSY and the guide pins of the IR BASE
A ASSY, and secure the PCB ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY with the two screws
(M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head).
2. Connect the FFC BOARD to the P201 connector on the PCB ASSY.

4.3.3.4 FFC CR IR BASE A ASSY
REMOVAL

2. Remove the ADF Unit. (p494) 8)
Ferrite Core
PLATE HARNESS2
4. Remove the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p498) PLATE HARNESS
5. Remove the MOTOR ASSY. (p500)
7)-2
6. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the PLATE
HARNESS 2 to the IR BASE A ASSY, and remove the PLATE HARNESS 2
6)
from the IR BASE A ASSY. 7)-1
7. Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secures the PLATE
HARNESS to the IR BASE A ASSY, and slide the PLATE HARNESS in the Figure 4-167. Removal of FFC CR (1)
direction of an arrow shown in the figure to remove it from the IR BASE A ASSY.
See Figure 4-167.
Tape Sponge
8. Disconnect the FFC BOARD from the connector on the PCB ASSY.
9. Remove the sponge adhered to the FFC CR, and pull the FFC CR to the inner side
of the IR BASE A ASSY through the hole of the assy.
10. Remove the piece of tape that bundles the FFC CR, and remove the FFC CR from
the ferrite core of the CORE ASSY.
11. Remove the FFC CR from the IR BASE A ASSY.
IR BASE A ASSY
C H E C K The FFC CR is secured on the IR BASE A ASSY with two-sided 9)

P O IN T tapes. Remove the FFC CR slowly and carefully. 10)
FFC CR
11)
Figure 4-168. Removal of FFC CR (2)

REINSTALLATION
Sponge
1. Put the FFC CR through the ferrite core of the CORE ASSY, and bundle the FFC
CR with a piece of tape.
2. Pull out the FFC CR outward through the hole of the IR BASE A ASSY, and
secure the FFC CR to the IR BASE ASSY with the sponge. Ferrite Core
C H E C K Attach the sponge, which secures the FFC CR, to the IR BASE A
ASSY with a two-sided tape. PLATE-HW
P O IN T
3. Draw the FFC CR under the PLATE-HW, and secure the FFC CR to the IR BASE Two-sided Tapes Attaching Positions Reference Line for attaching the FFC CR
A ASSY with two-sided tapes aligning the FFC CR with the reference line on the
IR BASE A ASSY. FFC CR
4. Hitch the hook of the PLATE HARNESS to the IR PLATE FFC, and secure the
PLATE HARNESS to the IR BASE A ASSY with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type,
B-head).
5. Secure the PLATE HARNESS 2 to the IR BASE A ASSY with the two screws Figure 4-169. Reinstallation of FFC CR (1)
(M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) matching the positioning holes of the PLATE PLATE HARNESS2
HARNESS 2 with the guide pins of the IR BASE A ASSY.
6. Connect the FFC BOARD to the connector on the PCB ASSY.
7. Install the MOTOR ASSY. (p500)
8. Attach the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p498)
10. Attach the ADF Unit. (p494) Positioning Holes and Guide Pins
11. Install the Scanner. (p319) Hook of the PLATE HARNESS
PLATE HARNESS
IR PLATE FFC
Figure 4-170. Reinstallation of FFC CR (2)

4.4 ADF Section ADF COVER C
4.4.1 COVER
4)-2
4.4.1.1 ADF COVER R 4)-1
REMOVAL

2. Remove the ADF Unit. (p494) Figure 4-172. Removal of ADF COVER R (1)
3. Turn the ADF Unit over, remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that
secure the HOOK FIX PLATE to the SDH COVER, and remove the HOOK FIX
Obverse Side
PLATE from the SDH COVER. See Figure 4-171.
4. Turn the ADF Unit back to the normal orientation, open the ADF COVER C, and
remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, S-type, A-head) that secures the ADF COVER R.
See Figure 4-172.
5. Release the seven tabs of the ADF COVER R from the SDH COVER in the order ADF COVER R
shown in, and remove the ADF COVER R. See Figure 4-173.
Notch
C H E C K To release the seven tabs, push them with a flat-blade screwdriver or Notch
P O IN T similar tool toward the direction shown in Figure 4-173. 7
Tab Tab
Reverse Side ADF HINGE Tab ADF HINGE

HOOK FIX PLATE
6 5 4
1 2
3)
SDH COVER
Figure 4-173. Removal of ADF COVER R (2)

Figure 4-171. Removal of HOOK FIX PLATE
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ADF Section 505

REINSTALLATION Positioning Hole and Guide Pin
1. Open the ADF COVER C.

2. Put the cable of the ADF Unit into the notch of the ADF COVER R, and attach the
ADF COVER R to the SDH COVER inserting the seven tabs of the ADF COVER HOOK FIX PLATE
R in the order shown in Figure 4-173.
3. Secure the ADF COVER R to the SDH COVER with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, S-
type, A-head). See Figure 4-172.
4. Match the positioning hole of the HOOK FIX PLATE with the guide pin of the SDH COVER 3)
SDH COVER, and secure the HOOK FIX PLATE to the SDG COVER with the
two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-174.
5. Attach the ADF Unit. (p494) Figure 4-174. Reinstallation of HOOK FIX PLATE

4.4.1.2 CABLE
Grounding Wire
REMOVAL

3. Remove the ADF COVER R. (p505)
4. Disconnect P301 connector from the ADF PCB ASSY.
5. Remove the screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secures the grounding wire
of the CABLE, and remove the CABLE.
4) 5)
CABLE
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the grounding wire of the CABLE with the screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-
head). Figure 4-175. Removal of CABLE
2. Connect the CABLE connector to P301 connector on the ADF PCB ASSY.
3. Attach the ADF COVER R. (p505)

4.4.1.3 PCB COVER
REMOVAL
The Longer Lateral Side PCB COVER
3. Remove the ADF COVER R. (p505) Gap
4. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the PCB
COVER, and remove the PCB COVER.
SDH COVER ADF PCB ASSY
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the longer lateral side of the PCB COVER into the gap between the ADF
PCB ASSY and the SDH COVER, and secure the PCB COVER with the two
screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-176.
4)
Figure 4-176. Removal of PCB COVER

4.4.1.4 ADF COVER C ADF COVER C
REMOVAL

4. Remove the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p528)
5. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the ADF
COVER C. 5)
6. Close the ADF COVER C. Figure 4-177. Removal of ADF COVER C (1)
7. Lift the paper feeding side of the ADF COVER C, and remove it from the ADF
BASE ASSY toward the direction shown in Figure 4-178. 7)-1
7)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Close the ADF BASE ASSY, and attach the ADF COVER C to the ADF BASE
ASSY matching the hooks of the ADF COVER C with the holes on the ADF
BASE ASSY. See Figure 4-179.
2. Secure the ADF COVER C to the ADF BASE ASSY with the two screws (M3 x 8
mm, P-type, A-head). ADF COVER C
3. Attach the ADF COVER R. (p505) Figure 4-178. Removal of ADF COVER C (2)
ADF COVER C Hooks Hooks
Figure 4-179. Reinstallation of ADF COVER C

4.4.1.5 ADF HINGE Obverse Side
REMOVAL
4)-1
4. Remove the two screws (M3 x 12 mm, P-type, P-head) that secure the left and
right ADF HINGEs to the SDH COVER, and remove the two ADF HINGEs.
SDH COVER
ADF HINGE
Figure 4-180. Removal of ADF HINGE (1)

REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the left and right ADF HINGEs to the SDH COVER with the two screws
(M3 x 12mm, P-type, P-head). Reverse Side

4)-2
SDH COVER
ADF HINGE
Figure 4-181. Removal of ADF HINGE (2)

4.4.2 ADF BASE ASSY 7)
4.4.2.1 ADF BASE ASSY
REMOVAL

5. Remove the ADF COVER C. (p509)
6. Disconnect the all connectors on the ADF PCB ASSY.
7. Remove the four screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the ADF
FRAME ASSY to the SDH COVER, remove the COVER SPRING ASSY, and
then remove the ADF FRAME ASSY together with the ADF BASE ASSY.
COVER SPRING ASSY
Figure 4-182. Removal of ADF BASE ASSY (1)

8. Cut the tie that secure the ferrite core to the harness of the ADF BASE ASSY, and
Ferrite Core Tie Harnesses
remove the ferrite core from the harness. 10)
9. Release the two harnesses of the ADF BASE ASSY from the two CABLE TIEs.
10. Release the harnesses of the ADF FRAME ASSY from the notch on the ADF
BASE ASSY.
11. Open the ADF BASE ASSY.
12. Viewed from the direction as shown in Figure 4-184, push the right frame of the
ADF FRAME ASSY outward to remove the right pintle of the ADF BASE ASSY
from the bearing of the ADF FRAME ASSY.
13. Pull out the left pintle of the ADF BASE ASSY from the left bearing of the ADF
FRAME ASSY, and remove the ADF BASE ASSY. CABLE TIE
ADF FRAME ASSY
12)-2
12)-1
ADF BASE ASSY

REINSTALLATION
C H E C K When attaching the ADF FRAME ASSY to the SDH COVER,
1. Viewed from the direction as shown in Figure 4-184, insert the left pintle of the P O IN T make sure to match the positioning hole and the guide pin.
ADF BASE ASSY into the left bearing of the ADF FRAME ASSY, and push the
Guide Pin of the SDH COVER and Positioning
right frame of the ADF FRAME ASSY outward to insert the right pintle into the Hole of the ADF FRAME ASSY
right bearing of the ADF FRAME ASSY. See Figure 4-184.
COVER SPRING ASSY
2. Secure the harnesses of the ADF FRAME ASSY into the notch of the ADF BASE
ASSY. See Figure 4-183.
3. Secure the harnesses of the ADF BASE ASSY with the two CABLE TIEs. See
Figure 4-183.
4. Bundle the harnesses of the ADF BASE ASSY, wind them around the ferrite core
once, and then secure the ferrite core to the harnesses with the tie. Guide Pin of the ADF FRAME ASSY and
Positioning Hole of the COVER SPRING ASSY
5. Install the ADF FRAME ASSY to the SDH COVER matching the positioning
hole of the ADF FRAME ASSY with the guide pin of the SDH COVER.
6. Attach the COVER SPRING ASSY to the ADF FRAME ASSY matching the
positioning hole of the COVER SPRING ASSY with the guide pin of the ADF
FRAME ASSY, and secure them to the SDH COVER with the four screws (M3 x
8 mm, P-type, A-head).
7. Connect the CABLE connector of the ADF FRAME ASSY and the ADF BASE
ASSY to the ADF PCB ASSY.
8. Attach the ADF COVER C. (p509)

4.4.2.2 E CLUTCH UNIT CLUTCH FIX PLATE 8) 10)
REMOVAL
9)
3. Remove the ADF COVER R. (p505) Positioning Hole GEAR 20T
and Guide Pin
TRANSFER SHAFT
ADF BASE
6. Remove the ADF BASE ASSY. (p511)
7. Release the hook of the GEAR 20T, and remove the GEAR 20T. CLUTCH SHAFT MAGNETIC CLUTCH
8. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the CLUTCH
FIX PLATE.
9. Release the CLUTCH FIX PLATE from the guide pin of the ADF BASE, and
Figure 4-185. Removal of E CLUTCH UNIT (1)
slide the CLUTCH FIX PLATE leftward.
10. Pull out the TRANSFER SHAFT leftward from the hole on the ADF BASE.
11. Pull out the CLUTCH SHAFT from the MAGNETIC CLUTCH. MAGNETIC CLUTCH
12. Release the harnesses of the MAGNETIC CLUTCH from the notch of the ADF
BASE, and remove the MAGNETIC CLUTCH. See Figure 4-186.
Notch
Figure 4-186. Removal of E CLUTCH UNIT (2)

REINSTALLATION C H E C K Attach BUSH D4, GEAR 12T, E RETAINING RING, and BUSH
P O IN T D6 to the TRANSFER SHAFT before attaching the shaft to the
1. Attach the CLUTCH SHAFT to the bearing of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE, and bearing of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE.
insert the CLUTCH SHAFT to the MAGNETIC CLUTCH.
Attach BUSH D4, GEAR 33T M0.8, and BUSH D6 to the CLUTCH TRANSFER SHAFT
C H E C K
P O IN T SHAFT before attaching the CLUTCH SHAFT to the bearing of BUSH D4
the CLUTCH FIX PLATE.
GEAR 12T GEAR 20T
BUSH D6
BUSH D6
CLUTCH SHAFT
GEAR 33T M0.8 E RETAINING RING
BUSH D4
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
2. Insert the antirotation tab of the MAGNETIC CLUTCH into the hole of the ADF
BASE, and secure the MAGNETIC CLUTCH to the ADF BASE. See Figure
Antirotation Tab
4-187.
C H E C K After securing the MAGNETIC CLUTCH, make sure that the

P O IN T antirotation tab is properly inserted into the hole of the ADF BASE.
3. Attach the TRANSFER SHAFT to the bearing of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE, and
put the TRANSFER SHAFT through the hole of the ADF BASE.
Figure 4-187. Reinstallation of E CLUTCH UNIT

4. Attach the CLUTCH FIX PLATE to the ADF BASE matching the positioning
hole of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE with the guide pin of the ADF BASE, and
CLUTCH FIX PLATE Positioning Hole and Guide Pin
secure the CLUTCH FIX PLATE with the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-
head). See Figure 4-188.
5. Secure the harnesses of the MAGNETIC CLUTCH into the notch of the ADF
BASE. See Figure 4-186.
6. Attach the GEAR 20T to the TRANSFER SHAFT. See Figure 4-185.
7. Attach the ADF BASE ASSY. (p511)
Figure 4-188. Reinstallation of E CLUTCH UNIT

4.4.2.3 PICK UP ASSY

ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE TENSION SPRING PICK UP ASSY
REMOVAL

4. Remove the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p539) 9)

7. Remove the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p514)
8. Release the TENSION SPRING from the hook of the PICK UP ASSY and the Figure 4-189. Removal of PICK UP ASSY (1)
ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE.
9. Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the ADF ROLLER
FIX PLATE, and remove the ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE.
10. Lift the left shaft of the PICK UP ASSY, and pull out the right shaft of the PICK
10)-2
UP ASSY from the bearing of the ADF BASE, and then remove the PICK UP
ASSY from the ADF BASE.
10)-1
Figure 4-190. Removal of PICK UP ASSY (2)

REINSTALLATION C H E C K Before attaching the ADF Roller FIX PLATE, make sure that the
P O IN T flat surface of the ADF SHAFT faces upward.
1. Insert the right shaft of the PICK UP ASSY into the bearing of the ADF BASE,
and insert the left shaft of the PICK UP ASSY into the bearing of the ADF BASE. OK NG
2. Place the left ADF SHAFT with its flat surface facing upward, and attach the ADF
ROLLER FIX PLATE matching the positioning hole of the ADF ROLLER FIX
PLATE with the guide pin on the ADF BASE.
3. Secure the ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE to the ADF BASE with the screw (M3 x 8
mm, P-type, A-head).
ADF SHAFT
4. Hitch the both ends of the TENSION SPRING to the hook of PICK UP ASSY and
the hook of ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE respectively.
5. Attach the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p514)
Positioning Hole
and Guide Pin

4.4.2.4 AS SENSOR
REMOVAL

AS SENSOR
7. Release the harnesses of the AS SENSOR from the three hooks, two holes, and
three notches of the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-191.
ADF BASE
8. Turn the ADF BASE ASSY over, and remove the AS SENSOR releasing its two
7)
tabs from the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-192.
Figure 4-191. Removal of AS SENSOR (1)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the AS SENSOR to the ADF BASE inserting the two tabs of the AS
SENSOR into holes on the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-192.
2. Route the harnesses of the AS SENSOR as shown in the figure, and secure them
with three hooks and three notches of the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-191.
5. Attach the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p539)
8)
Figure 4-192. Removal of AS SENSOR (2)

4.4.2.5 SENSOR LEVER
REMOVAL

3. Remove the ADF COVER R. (p505) SENSOR LEVER

7)-2
7)-1
7. Remove the left shaft of the SENSOR LEVER from the bearing and pull out the
other shaft from the bearing to remove the SENSOR LEVER from the ADF ADF BASE
BASE. See Figure 4-193.
Figure 4-193. Removal of SENSOR LEVER
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the right shaft of the SENSOR LEVER into the right bearing of the ADF
BASE, and push the other shaft into the left bearing of the ADF BASE. See Figure
4-193.

4.4.2.6 CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU 10. Install the Scanner. (p319)
REMOVAL
9)
10)
7. Remove the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p514)
8. Remove the SENSOR LEVER. (p520)
9. Release the harnesses of the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU from the notch of the
ADF BASE. CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU ADF BASE
10. Release the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU from the tab of the ADF BASE to
remove the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU. Figure 4-194. Removal of CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
REINSTALLATION
1. Push the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU into the place on the ADF BASE and
secure it with the tab of the ADF BASE.
2. Route the harnesses of the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU as shown in the figure,
and secure them with the notch on the ADF BASE.
3. Attach the SENSOR LEVER. (p520)
4. Attach the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p514)

4.4.3 ADF FRAME ASSY MOTOR MOTOR CUSHION

4.4.3.1 MOTOR
REMOVAL
7. Cut off the tie wrap that bundles the harnesses and the grounding wire of the
MOTOR.
8. Cut the tie wrap that secure the ferrite core to the harnesses of the MOTOR, and
remove the ferrite core from the harnesses. 8)
9. Remove the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the MOTOR
CUSHION to the ADF FRAME ASSY, and remove the MOTOR CUSHION Figure 4-196. Removal of MOTOR (2)
together with the MOTOR. See Figure 4-195.
10. Remove the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, G-type, C-head, W/spring washer, Φ5 flat
washer) that secure the MOTOR to the MOTOR CUSHION. See Figure 4-196.
MOTOR CUSHION
11. Move the MOTOR toward the relief hole on the MOTOR CUSHION, and remove
the MOTOR taking the pinion gear out through the hole. See Figure 4-197.
7) MOTOR CUSHION Pinion Gear
Harnesses
Relief Hole
Grounding Wire
Ferrite Core
MOTOR
Figure 4-197. Removal of MOTOR (3)

Tie wrap MOTOR
Figure 4-195. Removal of MOTOR (1)

REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the MOTOR to the MOTOR CUSHION with the two screws (M3 x 6 mm,
G-type, C-head, W/spring washer, W/Φ5 flat washer).
C A U T IO N Make sure to attach the MOTOR CUSHION to the ADF FRAME

ASSY positioning the MOTOR CUSHION as shown in Figure 4-195.
2. Secure the MOTOR CUSHION to the ADF FRAME ASSY with the two screws
(M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head).
3. Wind the harnesses of the MOTOR around the ferrite core once, and secure the
ferrite core to the harness with a tie wrap.
4. Bundle the harnesses and the grounding wire of the MOTOR with a tie wrap.

4.4.3.2 GUIDE FRONT ASSY

LOCKING CABLE CLIPS
REMOVAL

6. Remove the ADF BASE ASSY. (p511) Grounding Wire 8) 9) MOTOR FIX PLATE
7. Remove the MOTOR. (p522) Figure 4-198. Removal of GUIDE FRONT ASSY (1)
of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE, and remove the grounding wire of the
CABLE. FIX PLATE R
GEAR 60T 18T
9. Remove the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the MOTOR
FIX PLATE to the FIX PLATE R, and remove the two LOCKING CABLE
CLIPs, and then remove the MOTOR FIX PLATE from the ADF BASE ASSY. GEAR 33T M0.5
10. Remove the five gears attached on the FIX PLATE R in the order shown below.
1. GEAR 60T 18T
2. GEAR 48T
3. GEAR 40T 18T
4. GEAR 30T
5. GEAR 33T M0.5
GEAR 48T GEAR 40T 18T GEAR 30T
C H E C K GEAR 33T M0.5 is secured with a hook. When removing GEAR Figure 4-199. Removal of GUIDE FRONT ASSY (2)
P O IN T 33T M0.5, release it from the hook with a pair of tweezers or
similar tool.

11. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the FIX PLATE
R to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the FIX PLATE R from the ADF
FRAME UNIT.
12. Remove BUSH D6 from the shaft of the TURNING ROLLER and the shaft of the 11)
EXIT ROLL ASSY respectively.
FIX PLATE R
Figure 4-200. Removal of GUIDE FRONT ASSY (3)
12)
Shaft of EXIT ROLL ASSY Shaft of TURNING ROLLER

13. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the FIX PLATE
ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the FIX PLATE ASSY. 14)
14. Remove BUSH D6 from the shaft of the TURNING ROLLER and the shaft of the
EXIT ROLL ASSY respectively.
15. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the GUIDE
FRONT ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the GUIDE FRONT
ASSY.
Shaft of TURNING ROLLER Shaft of EXIT ROLL ASSY
FIX PLATE ASSY

GUIDE FRONT ASSY
13)
15)
Figure 4-202. Removal of GUIDE FRONT ASSY (5) Figure 4-204. Removal of GUIDE FRONT ASSY (7)

REINSTALLATION 7. Secure the grounding wire of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE with the
screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure 4-198.
8. Attach the MOTOR. (p522)
A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after reinstalling GEAR
R E Q U IR E D 40T 18T, GEAR 48T, GEAR 60T 18T. 9. Attach the ADF BASE ASSY. (p511)
1. Secure the GUIDE FRONT ASSY to the ADF FRAME ASSY with the two
screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-204. 12. Attach the ADF COVER R. (p505)
2. Attach BUSH D6 to the both ends of the TURNING ROLLER and the EXIT 13. Attach the ADF Unit. (p494)
ROLL ASSY respectively. See Figure 4-201 and Figure 4-203. 14. Install the Scanner. (p319)
C H E C K When attaching BUSH D6, match it with the groove of the ADF
P O IN T FRAME UNIT, and insert it until it clicks.
3. Secure the FIX PLATE ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two screws
(M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-204.
4. Secure the FIX PLATE R to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two screws (M3 x 8
mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-200.
5. Attach the five gears to the FIX PLATE R in the order shown below. See Figure
4-199.
1. GEAR 33T M0.5
2. GEAR 30T
3. GEAR 40T 18T
4. GEAR 48T
5. GEAR 60T 18T
6. Secure the MOTOR FIX PLATE and the two LOCKING CABLE CLIPS to the
FIX PLATE with the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure
4-198.

4.4.3.3 PAPER GUIDE R
REMOVAL 9)

7. Remove the MOTOR. (p522)
8. Remove the GUIDE FRONT ASSY. (p524) PAPER GUIDE R
9. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the PAPER
GUIDE R to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the PAPER GUIDE R from the
ADF FRAME UNIT.
Figure 4-205. Removal of the PAPER GUIDE R
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the PAPER GUIDE R to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two screws (M3
x 8 mm, P-type, A-head).
2. Attach the GUIDE FRONT ASSY. (p524)

4.4.3.4 FRAME COVER ASSY

FRAME COVER ASSY
REMOVAL

6. Remove the ADF BASE ASSY. (p511) 10)
7. Remove the MOTOR. (p522) Figure 4-206. Removal of FRAME COVER ASSY (1)
8. Remove the GUIDE FRONT ASSY. (p524)

9. Remove the PAPER GUIDE R. (p528)
10. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the FRAME
COVER ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT.
11. Open the FRAME COVER ASSY from the NEUTRALIZING BRUSH side, and
remove the FRAME COVER ASSY from the ADF FRAME UNIT.
11)
NEUTRALIZING BRUSH
Figure 4-207. Removal of FRAME COVER ASSY (2)

REINSTALLATION
1. Couple the FRAME COVER ASSY (NEUTRALIZING BRUSH attached side) to NEUTRALIZING BRUSH Side
the ADF FRAME UNIT positioning them as shown in Figure 4-208.
C H E C K When attaching the TURNING ROLLER to the ADF FRAME

P O IN T UNIT, make sure to place the shaft of the TURNING ROLLER so
that one end of the shaft with D-shaped cross-section is at the right
side as shown in Figure 4-209. STOPPER UP
2. Insert the two STOPPER UPs of the EXIT ROLL ASSY into the holes of the
FRAME COVER ASSY as shown in Figure 4-208. Figure 4-208. Reinstallation of FRAME COVER ASSY (1)
3. Secure the FRAME COVER ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT by inserting six
tabs of the FRAME COVER ASSY in the order shown in Figure 4-209. D-shaped Cross-section of
TURNING ROLLER Shaft
4. Secure the FRAME COVER ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two
screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-206.
5. Attach the PAPER GUIDE R. (p528)
2)
8. Attach the ADF BASE ASSY. (p511) TURNING ROLLER

10. Attach the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p539) ADF FRAME UNIT

2
4
6
5
3
EXIT ROLL ASSY
1
FRAME COVER ASSY
Figure 4-209. Reinstallation of FRAME COVER ASSY (2)

4.4.3.5 EXIT ROLL ASSY REINSTALLATION

REMOVAL
1. First insert the one end of the EXIT ROLL ASSY shaft with longer cut surface
1. Remove the Scanner. (p319) into the right shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT, and then insert the other end
into the left shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT.
3. Remove the ADF COVER R. (p505) Make sure to position the EXIT ROLL ASSY with its longer cut
C H E C K
4. Remove the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p539) P O IN T surface side on the right when attaching the EXIT ROLL ASSY to the
ADF FRAME UNIT. See Figure 4-210.
2. Attach the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p529)
7. Remove the MOTOR. (p522)
8. Remove the GUIDE FRONT ASSY. (p524)
10. Remove the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p529)
11. Slide the EXIT ROLL ASSY rightward to pull out its left shaft, and then pull out
its right shaft from the ADF FRAME UNIT to remove the EXIT ROLL ASSY.
C H E C K When sliding the EXIT ROLL ASSY rightward, lift it upward so 9. Attach the ADF COVER R. (p505)
P O IN T that its roller does not hit the ADF FRAME UNIT.
EXIT ROLL ASSY

11)-1
11)-2
ADF FRAME UNIT The cut surface is longer than the other end
Figure 4-210. Removal of EXIT ROLL ASSY

4.4.3.6 TURNING ROLLER 10. Attach the ADF Unit. (p494)

REMOVAL

TURNING ROLLER
2. Remove the ADF Unit. (p494) 11)-1
11)-2
7. Remove the MOTOR. (p522) ADF FRAME UNIT
8. Remove the GUIDE FRONT ASSY. (p524) Figure 4-211. Removal of TURNING ROLLER
10. Remove the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p529)
11. Slide the TURNING ROLLER rightward to pull out its left shaft, and then pull out
its right shaft from the ADF FRAME UNIT to remove the TURNING ROLLER.
REINSTALLATION
1. First insert the one end of the TURNING ROLLER shaft with longer cut surface
into the shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT, and then insert the other end into
the shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT.
2. Attach the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p529)

4.4.3.7 COVER SENSOR

LOCKING CABLE CLIPS
REMOVAL

6. Remove the ADF BASE ASSY. (p511) Grounding Wire 8) 9) MOTOR FIX PLATE
7. Remove the MOTOR. (p522) Figure 4-212. Removal of COVER SENSOR (1)
of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE, and remove the grounding wire of the
CABLE. FIX PLATE R
9. Remove the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the MOTOR
FIX PLATE to the FIX PLATE R, and remove the two LOCKING CABLE
CLIPs, and then remove the MOTOR FIX PLATE from the ADF BASE ASSY.
10. Remove the three gears attached on the FIX PLATE R in the order shown below.
1. GEAR 60T 18T
2. GEAR 48T
3. GEAR 40T 18T
GEAR 48T GEAR 60T 18T GEAR 40T 18T
Figure 4-213. Removal of COVER SENSOR (2)

11. Release the COVER SENSOR from the two clamps of the FIX PLATE R.
COVER SENSOR
12. Remove the screw (M2 x 10 mm, G-type, P-head) that secure the COVER
SENSOR to the FIX PLATE R, and remove the COVER SENSOR from the FIX
PLATE R.
12)
11) FIX PLATE R
Figure 4-214. Removal of COVER SENSOR (3)

REINSTALLATION
A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after reinstalling GEAR

R E Q U IR E D 40T 18T, GEAR 48T, GEAR 60T 18T.
1. Secure the COVER SENSOR to the FIX PLATE R with the screw (M2 x 10 mm,
G-type, P-head). See Figure 4-214.
2. Secure the harnesses of the COVER SENSOR with the two clamps of the FIX
PLATE R.
3. Secure the three gears to the FIX PLATE R in the order given below. See Figure
4-213.
1. GEAR 40T 18T
2. GEAR 48T
3. GEAR 60T 18T
4. Secure the MOTOR FIX PLATE and the two LOCKING CABLE CLIPS to the
FIX PLATE with the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure
4-212.
5. Secure the grounding wire of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE with the
screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure 4-212.

4.4.3.8 CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
REMOVAL CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
1. Remove the Scanner. (p319) 7)-2

7)-1
7. Turn the ADF FRAME ASSY over, release the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
from the tab of the ADF FRAME ASSY to remove the CONNECTOR UNIT
ADF FRAME ASSY
ACEMU.
Figure 4-215. Removal of CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU into the place on the ADF FRAME
ASSY and secure the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU with the hook of the ADF
FRAME ASSY.

4.4.3.9 SENSOR ARM

REMOVAL SENSOR ARM

PAPER GUIDE F
7. Remove the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU. (p536)
8. Remove the shaft of the SENSOR ARM from the bearing of the PAPER GUIDE 8)
F, and remove the SENSOR ARM.
REINSTALLATION
Figure 4-216. Removal of SENSOR ARM
1. Insert the shaft of the SENSOR ARM into the bearing of the PAPER GUIDE F.
See Figure 4-216.
C H E C K A spring is attached to the SENSOR ARM.If the spring falls off the
P O IN T SENSOR ARM, reattach it referring to the figure below.
SENSOR ARM
Spring
2. Attach the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU. (p536)


4.4.4 ADF PCB ASSY

5)
4.4.4.1 ADF PCB ASSY
REMOVAL

4. Remove the PCB COVER. (p508)
5. Disconnect the nine connectors on the ADF PCB ASSY.
6. Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secures the ADF PCB ASSY
to the SDH COVER, and remove the ADF PCB ASSY. 6)
Figure 4-217. Removal of ADF PCB ASSY

REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the ADF PCB ASSY to the SDH COVER with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-
type, A-head).
P305
2. Connect the all harnesses to the nine connectors on the ADF PCB ASSY. See COVER SENSOR P309
PAPER GUIDE
Figure 4-218. P306 P308
ASSY
AS SENSOR
3. Attach the PCB COVER. (p508) P301 P307
P302
CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
CABLE MAGNETIC CLUTCH
4. Attach the ADF COVER R. (p505) (ADF BASE)
P303 P301
5. Attach the ADF Unit. (p494) MOTOR CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
(ADF FRAME ASSY)
Figure 4-218. Connector Layout

4.4.5 PAPER GUIDE ASSY

4.4.5.1 PAPER GUIDE ASSY P308 Connector
Hook
REMOVAL
P309 Connector
5)
4. Open the ADF COVER and remove the KNOB from the ADF FRAME ASSY.
5. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the PAPER
GUIDE ASSY to the SDH COVER.
6. Disconnect P308 and P309 connectors of the PAPER GUIDE ASSY from the
ADF PCB ASSY.
7. Release the hook of the PAPER GUIDE ASSY to remove the PAPER GUIDE
ASSY from the SDH COVER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the PAPER GUIDE ASSY to the SDH COVER matching the protrusion on
the PAPER GUIDE ASSY with the hole on the SDH COVER, and secure the
PAPER GUIDE ASSY with its hook.
C H E C K When attaching the PAPER GUIDE ASSY, match the rib on the
P O IN T PAPER GUIDE ASSY with the hole on the SDH COVER.
Hook
Rib
KNOB 5) PAPER GUIDE ASSY
PAPER GUIDE ASSY
SDH COVER ASSY
Holes on the SDH

COVER ASSY
2. Open the ADF COVER and attach the KNOB to the ADF FRAME ASSY.
4)
5. Install the Scanner. (p319) Figure 4-219. Removal of the PAPER GUIDE ASSY

4.4.5.2 GEAR PLATE, TRAY GEAR 24T, DOC. ADJUST L/R TRAY GEAR 24T GEAR PLATE
REMOVAL

Hooks
Figure 4-221. Removal of GEAR PLATE, TRAY GEAR 24T, DOC.ADJUST L/R
4. Remove the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p539) (2)
5. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the TRAY
COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
6. Release the hook and remove TRAY GEAR 24T.
7. Release the hook and remove the two GEAR PLATEs.
8. Release the hook and remove the DOC.ADJUST L and R. DOC. ADJUST L
DOC. ADJUST R
TRAY COVER
5)
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
(3)
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
(1)

REINSTALLATION
A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after reinstalling the

R E Q U IR E D DOC.ADJUST L/R and TRAY GEAR 24T, or replacing them with
new ones.
GEAR PLATE
1. Put the DOC. ADJUST L through the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE and attach
the DOC. ADJUST L to the groove on the GEAR PLATE.
Attach TRAY GEAR 24T
2. Put the DOC. ADJUST R through the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE and with the smallest gap
attach the DOC. ADJUST R to the groove on the GEAR PLATE. between two GUIDE
PLATEs.
3. Move the two GEAR PLATEs so that the gap between them becomes smallest,
and attach TRAY GEAR 24T to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
4. Secure the TRAY COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE with the two screws (M3
x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). DOC. PAPER GUIDE TRAY GEAR 24T

Figure 4-223. Reinstallation of GEAR PLATE, TRAY GEAR 24T, DOC.ADJUST L/R

4.4.5.3 PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L, PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R

Hole for the Harness of the PAPER SENSOR
SWITCH L/R
REMOVAL
PAPER SENSOR
1. Remove the Scanner. (p319) SWITCH R

PAPER SENSOR
3. Remove the ADF COVER R. (p505) SWITCH L

5. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the TRAY
COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
6. Remove the two screws (M2 x 8 mm, B-type, P-head) that secure the PAPER
SENSOR SWITCH L and PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R to the DOC. PAPER
GUIDE. 6)
DOC. PAPER GUIDE

7. Pull out the harnesses from the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE, and remove the
PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L and the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R. Figure 4-224. Removal of PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L/R
REINSTALLATION
1. Pull the two harnesses for the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L and PAPER
SENSOR SWITCH R outward through the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
2. Secure the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L and the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R to
the DOC. PAPER GUIDE with the screw (M2 x 8 mm, B-type, P-head)
respectively.
3. Secure the TRAY COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE with the two screws (M3
x 8 mm, P-type, A-head).

CHAPTER
5
ADJUSTMENT
5.1 Overview
This chapter describes the adjustment procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts in the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/CX21F.
There is no required adjustment for the Scanner/ADF.
5.1.1 Precautions
Be sure to observe the following precautions before starting adjustments.
C A U T IO N Refer to “ 5.1.2 Part/Unit-based Adjustment Items” (p544), always confirm the adjustment items and the orders for the replaced/removed parts and
units in advance.
Start adjustment after fully checking the Caution given in the explanation area of each adjustment item. Incorrect work may interfere with the product
operations and/or functions.
5.1.2 Part/Unit-based Adjustment Items

The following table indicates the adjustment items and life counter clear items necessary when the specific unit is replaced or removed.
Table 5-1. Adjustment Item List

Repaired Part Adjustment Item Execution Timing Adjustment Execution Means Reference
FUSER ASSY Life counter clear After replacement With the control panel, execute “Reset Fuser Counter” in “Maintenance Menu”.
p566
with a new one
2ND BTR ASSY Life counter clear After replacement With the control panel, execute “Reset 2ndBTRCounter” in “Maintenance Menu”.
p566
with a new one
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Life counter clear After replacement With the control panel, execute “Reset X* DvlpCounter” in “Maintenance Menu”.
p566
with a new one
PWBA ESS Writing USB ID After replacement Execute by the dedicated program
p545
with a new one
--- Controller Firmware Update --- Start up the product in “Program ROM update” mode by performing special
p548
operation, and send the firmware data from the PC.
--- MCU Firmware Update --- Start up the product in “Engine Firmware Update” mode by performing special
p550
operation, and send the firmware data from the PC.
--- Color table update --- Start up the product in normal mode, and send the program data from the PC. p553
--- Fax unit Firmware Update --- Start up the product in normal mode, and send the program data from the PC. p554
Note : Updating the firmware does not initialize the setup data stored on the EEPROM.To initialize the setup data, execute “Factory Setting” from the control panel.
"*" : X = Y, M, C, K
ADJUSTMENT Overview 544

5.2 Printer Section INSTALLATION METHOD AND BASIC OPERATION
1. Copy all the “Main Board Initialization Tool” files in a folder onto a computer.
5.2.1 Writing USB ID
AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/CX21F are equipped with a USB interface as a All the files of “Main Board Initialization Tool” should be copied in
C A U T IO N
standard feature. The PC connected to the product via the USB interface identifies the one folder.
product by referring to the USB ID information specific to each product. AS the USB
ID information is stored in the EEPROM on the main board, writing the USB ID on the
new main board is required after replacing the board.
The procedure to write the USB ID is given below.

2. Double-click on the [ ] icon to start up the program and select a model name in
REQUIRED TOOL the “Select Model”.
The following shows the name of the program to write the ID, and the operating 3. Select the port used to connect the printer at the [Interface].
environment.
C H E C K If you select “Auto”, connected products are detected and
Program P O IN T communication with the first detected one start automatically.
Main Board Initialization Tool When connecting with 2 or more products, specify the target port to
Operating Environment avoid unexpected connection since the auto detection varies
depending on the connection state.
(OS)
Windows95/OSR2.0 or later, Windows98, Windows Me, Windows 2000/XP
Port
LPT, USB
Figure 5-1. Basic Operation
ADJUSTMENT Printer Section 545

WRITING METHOD
The method of writing USB ID differs, according to the condition of the main board. Referring to the following table, figure out what to do depending on the conditions.
Follow the instructions shown in the program to do the writings.
Table 5-2. Writing Method

Writing Method
Condition of Main Board Check of the previous ID Explanation
(Button Name)
Communication is impossible between PC The previous ID can be confirmed by a status sheet Store optional ID Enter the previous ID to write it into the new Main Board.
and the Main Board or something else that has been already printed out.
There is no way to confirm the previous ID. Store auto-generated The program automatically creates the new ID from the serial number of the
NEW ID product and write it into the new Main Board.
Communication is possible between PC (Can retrieve the previous ID from the previous OLD ID Retrieval/ Retrieve the ID from the old board, and then enter the retrieved ID value into
and the Main Board Main Board) Restore the new board.
Store optional ID OLD ID Retrieval/Restore Store auto-generated NEW ID
Figure 5-2. “Store optional ID” Screen Figure 5-3. “OLD ID Retrieval/Restore” Screen Figure 5-4. “Auto-generated NEW ID” Screen
CONFIRMING THE WRITING
When completed to write USB-ID, print a status sheet to confirm that the serial number printed on the sheet is identical to that on the label attached on the product. (Refer to “ 1.4
Status Sheet” (p79))

5.2.2 Firmware Update

This section explains how to update the firmwares.
Updating Method
Unit Data Format
Panel Operation Tool
Controller (p548) RCC NR Required
CRB Required Required
MCU (p550) BIN Required Required
Color table (p553) RCC NR Required
REQUIRED TOOL
The firmware for the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/CX21F can be updated by

transferring the program update data from the PC to the product via USB using a
dedicated tool. The dedicated tool is shown below.
Name
Firmware Update Tool
Note: Make sure to install the USB driver when you use this tool.

5.2.2.1 Controller Firmware Update

The procedure to update the controller firmware is given in the following table.
Table 5-3. Controller Firmware Update

Method 1 Method 2
Procedure
(RCC) (CRB) LCD Panel
Check the current Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware version. Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware version.
1 ---
version.
Connect the printer to the computer with a USB cable. After turning the power off for both the printer and computer,
connect them with a USB cable.
Connect the printer with Confirm that the “Ready” is displayed on the LCD.
2 C A U T IO N Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to ---
the computer.
disconnect other interface cables from the
product.
Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the
3 Prepare the update data. ---
extension is RCC) onto the computer. extension is CRB) onto the computer.
Turn the product ON while holding down the [Color Start],
[Reset], and [Down] buttons.The product will start up in Program Device
“Program ROM update” mode. Version XX.XX
Please Send Data
4 Start up the Printer. ---
Start up the Firmware Update Tool.Specify the port and the Start up the Firmware Update Tool.Specify the port and the
5 Prepare to send the data. ---
program update file on the selection window of the tool. program update file on the selection window of the tool.
Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen. Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
Program Device
Version XX.XX
OLD: XXXX NEW: XXXX
6 Transmit the data.

Table 5-3. Controller Firmware Update

Method 1 Method 2
Procedure
(RCC) (CRB) LCD Panel
Once file-receiving or rewriting operation is started on the Confirm that both the old and new firmware versions are
printer side, the data LED flashes and the message "ROM P displayed on the LCD, and press the [Right ] button on the Program Device
Writing" is displayed on the LCD panel. control panel. Version XX.XX
Erasing Device
When the transfer is complete, "completed" window pops up. “Completion” pop-up window will be displayed when the
Click [OK]. data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
7 Execute the update.
Program Device
Version XX.XX
PRG XXXXXXXX
When the program update is finished, the checksum will be

indicated on the LCD panel. Program Device
Version XX.XX
Confirm the checksum.
Code=
8 Confirm the checksum. ---
XXXX, XXXX, XXXX, XXXX
Total=
XXXX, XXXX, XXXX, XXXX
After confirming that the data LED of the printer is turned Pressing the [Right ] button on the control panel reboots
9 Reboot the product. off and the LCD panel displays "Ready", turn the printer the product. ---
power off and turn back on again.
10 Print the status sheet. Prints the status sheet. Prints the status sheet. ---
Confirm that the program firmware version has been Confirm that the program firmware version has been
Check the version on the
11 updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that ---
status sheet. printed in step 1. Refer to “ 1.4 Status Sheet” (p79) printed in step 1. Refer to “ 1.4 Status Sheet” (p79)

5.2.2.2 MCU Firmware Update

The procedure to update the MCU firmware (engine firmware) is given in the following tables.
Table 5-4. MCU Firmware Update

Procedure Method LCD Panel
1 Check the current version. Print a status sheet or engine status sheet, and check the current firmware version. ---
After turning the power off for both the printer and computer, connect them with a USB cable.
Connect the printer with the C A U T IO N Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to disconnect other interface cables from the product.
2 ---
computer.
3 Prepare the update data. Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the extension is MOT) onto the computer. ---
Turn the product ON while holding down the [Color Start], [Reset], [Up], and [Down] buttons. The product will start
up in “Engine Firmware Update” mode. Engine Firmware Update
EFU Ver. XXX
4 Start up the Printer.
Please send EFU data


Start up the Firmware Update Tool. Specify the port and the program update file on the selection window of the tool.
5 Prepare to send the data. ---
Click the [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.

send size=XXX
SENT SIZE=XXX
Type: XXX sum=XXX


Press the [Right ] button on the control panel of the product.
Writing : Erasing
“Completion” pop-up window will be displayed when the data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
7 Execute the update.
Writing: Size=XXX
When the program update is finished, the checksum will be indicated on the LCD panel.
TYPE: XXX SUM: XXX
Confirm the checksum.
8 Confirm the checksum.
WAIT RESET
9 Reboot the Printer. Turn the printer off and back on. ---
10 Print the status sheet. Prints the status sheet or engine status sheet. ---
11 Check the version on the status Confirm that the program firmware version has been updated correctly by comparing the status or engine status sheet
---
sheet. with that printed in step 1. (Refer to “ 1.4 Status Sheet” (p79), “ 6.4.2.1 Engine Status Sheet” (p568))

5.2.2.3 Color Table Update

The procedure to update the Color Table is given below.
Table 5-5. Color Table Update

Procedure Method
1 Check the current version. Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware version.
Connect the printer with the C A U T IO N Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to disconnect other interface cables from the product.
2
computer.
3 Prepare the update data. Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the extension is RCC) onto the computer.
4 Start up the Printer. Start up the product in normal mode.
5 Prepare to send the data. Start up the Firmware Update Tool. Specify the port and the program update file on the selection window of the tool.
Click the [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
“Completion” pop-up window will be displayed when the data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
7 Print the status sheet. Prints the status sheet.

Check the version on the status Confirm that the program firmware version has been updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that printed in step 1.(Refer to “ 1.4 Status Sheet”
8
sheet. (p79))

5.3 Fax Function REQUIRED TOOL
Program
5.3.1 Fax unit Firmware Update EPSON MFP Maintenance Utility
The procedure to update the Fax unit firmware is the same with that of the color table. Operating Environment
(Refer to “ 5.2.2.3 Color Table Update” (p553)) OS Windows 98, Windows 98 Second Edition,
Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition
5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data PC/AT compatible machine with a USB port (USB 1.1)
The Fax Maintenance Tool is an application that operates under Windows. Retrieving/ CPU Intel Pentium II 233 MHz or higher
writing the user-established data, retrieving received fax jobs and backup data (for Memory: 128 MB or more
collecting information on fax troubles) can be made by connecting the product with the
Display Resolution: 800 x 600 dots or more Color
computer on which the tool is installed with a USB cable. number: 256 colors or more
It is not necessary to install AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/CX21F Printer driver Driver for AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/CX21F
C H E C K
P O IN T printer driver to run or execute this utility. Note : It is necessary to install the printer driver when using Windows 98 or Windows ME. (In
case of Windows 2000 or Windows XP, this utility can be run or executed if the printer
driver is not installed.)
USB Cable
C A U T IO N The tool does not allow multiple products to be connected to the

computer at a time.
And connecting using a USB hub is not supported.
INSTALLING AND STARTING UP THE SOFTWARE
Install
Execute the “Setup.EXE”.
Start up
Start up the “MFP Maintenance Utility” from the Windows menu.
ADJUSTMENT Fax Function 554

5.3.2.1 Retrieving the User Data Speed Dial Information
With this function, the user-established data stored in the fax unit can be retrieved and
stored onto the computer by information type specifying the folders to save them. Stored name and fax number Stored name and fax number
XXH (77 bytes) XXH (77 bytes)
File Name File Name Description
BackUpDataYY-MM-DD SysParam.Txt System Parameter Information
Speed-dial code (1 through 60) (1 byte)
G3-ID.Bin G3-ID information
TxHeader.Bin Information in the fax header
SpeedDial.Bin Speed Dial information
Group Dial Information
GroupDial.Bin Group Dial information
OneTuch.Bin One-Touch button information
Information assigned to the Information assigned
XXH group-dial code (65 bytes) XXH
group-dial code (65 b
System Parameter Information
Relative addresses and the corresponding parameter settings are written in hexadecimal Group-dial code (1 through 20) (1 byte)
onto the computer as shown below.
0x0000 = 08 G3-ID Information/Header Information

0x0001 = 00 The binary parameters are stored onto the computer without changing the format.
0x0002 = 00
Relative Address 0x0003 = 00 Parameter Setting
....
0x013E = 01
0x013F = 00
Figure 5-5. System Parameter Information
C A U T IO N Do not shuffle the order or delete the settings. Only changing the
setting values is allowed.

RETRIEVING METHOD
Procedure Method
C A U T IO N Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to disconnect other interface cables from the product.
1 Connect the printer with the computer.
2 Start up the computer and the product. Turn the power ON for both the computer and the product.
3 Start up the tool Start up the Fax Maintenance Tool.
Click on the “User Data” tab, and select the “Read user data”, then click the [Start] button.
Select the destination to save the user data in the selection window, and click the [OK] button.
4-1
4-3
4 Retrieve the user data
4-4
4-2
C A U T IO N Once the communication and the transaction are started when the MFP Maintenance Tool is executed, the message "Using Fax　
Tool" is displayed on the LCD panel.
Note : When the folder already exists in the selected destination, a confirmation message about whether or not to overwrite will appear.
When retrieving the user data is finished, a completion message will appear.
5 Completion of user data read

5.3.2.2 Writing the User Data

The function enables the user data stored onto the computer to be written into the fax unit. Corresponding memory sections in the fax unit are completely overwritten.
WRITING METHOD
Procedure Method
C A U T IO N Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to disconnect other interface cables from the product.
1 Connect the printer with the computer.
2 Start up the computer and the product. Turn the power ON for both the computer and the product.
3 Start up the tool Start up the Fax Maintenance Tool.
Click on the “User Data” tab, and select the “Write user data”, then click the [Start] button.
Select the folder in which the user data is stored in the selection window, and click the [OK] button.
4-1
4 4-3
Write the user data
4-4
4-2
Note : When the [OK] is clicked, the tool searches the files in the folder and starts writing them to the fax unit upon finding them. If the
corresponding files cannot be found, the writing is not performed.
When writing the user data is finished, a completion message will appear.
5 Completion of user data write

CHAPTER
6
MAINTENANCE
6.1 Overview Take extra care not to let the laser beam get into your eye, or it
W A R N IN G
could cause loss of sight.
This chapter provides information necessary for maintaining the AcuLaser CX11/
While servicing the laser printer, never open any cover on
CX11F/CX21/CX21F in its optimum condition.
which a Warning Label for Laser beam is attached.
Before starting the work, be sure to observe the following precautions.
Understand hazardous nature of the laser beam, use extreme
caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone around you.
W A R N IN G To prevent an electric shock, burn, injury, etc., always turn the When you need to work on the hot part or unit (Fuser Assy, for
product off and unplug it from power outlet before starting example), make sure to unplug the product from power outlet
maintenance work. in advance, and do not start the work basically until the part or
When the power supply cable must be connected to measure unit cool down sufficiently to avoid burn injury.
voltage or for any other task, use extreme caution in working This printer produces a laser beam when the following
on electronic components. conditions are all satisfied.
While the product is operating, never inspect the drive areas • The printer is in ready status.
such as the motor, sprockets and gears.
• The interlock switches are OFF (TOP COVER and FRONT
Since the product is heavy in weight (approx. 25 kg, COVER are closed).
consumables not included), two or more personnel are required
Do not use a general vacuum cleaner to clean split toner. To do
to transfer the product. On this occasion, make sure to lay
so may cause the sucked toner particles to catch fire by sparks
hands on the specified places.
of the electric contacts. If the toner has split on the floor, etc.,
Special care must be taken to maintain safety devices such as clean it with a broom or wipe it with a cloth moistened with
fuse, INTERLOCK S/W, which are provided to prevent the neutral detergent. If it is necessary to clean a lot of split toner
product from malfunction and accidents, and also carefully with a cleaner, use a cleaner exclusively designed for toner.
check the parts such as panel, covers, which are directly
operated by the user. Always wear gloves when servicing to avoid injury from sharp
C A U T IO N
Do not touch the FUSER ASSY immediately after using the metal edges.
product, or you may burn your hand. Allow the assy to cool Do not disassemble the Toner Cartridge.
enough to work with it. Do not expose the Photoconductor Unit to direct sunlight.
Pay attention to the following when turning the product back Do not disassemble the ROS ASSY.
on after servicing. Do not touch the onboard components with bare hands to
• Be careful not to get your hands and clothes caught up in the prevent the ICs and other electrical components from being
rotating parts (various rollers and cooling fans) of the damaged by static electricity. (When necessary, wear a wrist
product. strap.)
• Never touch the electrical terminals and high-voltage To ensure safety and workability, use the specified tools.
components such as the HVPS and LVPS unit. Do not turn the product off until all motors stop completely.
To avoid dust explosion or ignition, never bring the Should the printer be transported, use the special packing
consumables close to flame or throw them into fire. material, pallet, etc.
Do not use alcohol, paint thinner, or any other such solvents.
MAINTENANCE Overview 559

6.2 On-site Service ON-SITE SERVICING FLOWCHART
This section describes about on-site servicing procedures.To prevent possible accidents
during servicing, strictly observe the warnings and cautions given in this section and What to Do First
Section 6.1.Never perform dangerous operations. 1. Ask the user about the printer conditions.
When it is necessary to transport the main unit, use the special 2. Ensure safety.
C A U T IO N
packing material, pallet, etc. 3. Grasp the printer conditions from the status sheet.
Be sure to bring back trash created during the work and old
parts or consumables that are replaced, and not to leave them 4. Grasp how the printer has been used from the engine status sheet.
on the site.
Before starting your work, spread a sheet of cloth or paper
over the working place to prevent the site from getting dirt with Trouble Repeatability Check Which is the Purpose of Visit?
split toner. Perform troubleshooting according
to the procedure given in Chapter 3. Repair Maintenance
Image Quality Check
Cleaning
Preventive maintenance
Replacement of regular replacement

parts and main after-sales service parts
General operation checks
What to Do Last
1. Check the printer appearance.

2. Train the user as necessary
Figure 6-1. On-site Servicing Flowchart
MAINTENANCE On-site Service 560

6.2.1 Details of On-site Servicing IMAGE QUALITY CHECK

This section explains the details of on-site servicing. 1. Print the status sheet and confirm the image quality.
WHAT TO DO FIRST Image quality check items

Color balance
1. Ask the user about the printer conditions.
Color shift
Frequency of paper feeding errors (jams)
Density (color) unevenness
How the product has been used (paper type, printing frequency, environment,
etc.) Poor color reproducibility with low density
Image quality status (front and back, separately) Others
2. Check how the power cord is plugged, damage to the cord and plug, etc. to ensure 2. If any of the image quality problem described above is shown:
safety.
Take corrective action with reference to Section “3.4.5 Printing Quality-
3. Print and check several status sheets to grasp the printer conditions. related Trouble” (p259).
4. Print the engine status sheet, and grasp the lives of the consumables, regular
replacement parts and how the product has been used.
TROUBLE REPEATABILITY CHECK
Perform troubleshooting according to the procedure given in Chapter 3.
1. Refer to Section “3.4.3 FIP” (p155) and confirm the trouble conditions and
execute troubleshooting.
2. If a fatal image quality problem (all white, all black, etc.) has occurred due to
engine failure, perform troubleshooting with reference to Section 3.4 Image
Quality-related Troubles “3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble” (p259).

CLEANING Cleaning the Exposure Window
1. Open the cleaner cover on the right side of the product, and open Cover A.
There is no part to be cleaned regularly in the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/CX21F.
The following describes the procedure to clean certain parts which should be cleaned 2. Pull the lever placed right inner side of the product in the direction of the arrow.
on an as-needed basis.
C A U T IO N Do not use chemical solvent such as thinner, benzine, acetone

to clean the housing or any other exterior part of the product.
Doing so may deteriorate or deform those parts.
Lever
Be careful not to get the internal components wet when
cleaning.
Cleaning the Pick Up Roller

Cover A
1. Open the MP Tray Cover and take out the loaded papers.
Cleaner Cover
2. Wipe the rubber part of the Pick Up Roller using a clean soft cloth moistened with
water. Figure 6-3. Cleaning the Exposure Window (1)
3. Slowly pull the cleaner outward and push it back. (1 cycle)
C A U T IO N When cleaning the Pick Up Roller, be careful not to damage the

actuator placed in front of the Feed Roller C A U T IO N To clean the printhead properly, pull the cleaner until it do not
move anymore, and push it back as far as it will go.
Feed Roller
Actuator
Cleaner
Figure 6-2. Cleaning the Pick Up Roller Figure 6-4. Cleaning the Exposure Window (2)
4. Push the lever back to its original position.

5. Close Cover A and then close the cleaner cover. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (CONSUMABLES/COMPONENTS
Cleaning the Document Table NEEDING PERIODIC REPLACEMENT)
If scanned image quality trouble occurs, clean the document table with a clean dry soft Do preventive maintenance work to maintain the product performance and prevent
cloth wiping off any dirt on it. failures from occurring.
1. After completion of repair or maintenance, print several status sheets and make
sure that there are no problems.
Cleaning the ADF Pick Up Roller
2. After completion of repair or maintenance, print the engine status sheet.
If the ADF has troubles to feed paper, open the ADF and clean the ADF Pick Up Roller
with a clean dry soft cloth and remove paper dust. Note: The judgement whether to replace components needing periodic
replacement can be done by the cumulative numbers of printed
sheets. Replace the components as the occasion arises.
REPLACEMENT OF CONSUMABLES AND COMPONENTS NEEDING

ADF Pick Up Roller PERIODIC REPLACEMENT
Do the replacement with reference to “6.5 Consumables and Components needing

Periodic Replacement” (p575).
GENERAL OPERATION CHECKS
After completion of servicing, make general operation checks. Print a status sheet and
perform several print jobs from the host computer testing both one-side printing and
duplex printing (if an optional unit for duplexing is installed).
Simplex printing
Feed paper from the MP Tray
Figure 6-5. Cleaning the ADF Pick Up Roller Feed paper from the 500-sheet Cassette
1. Make sure that there are no image quality problems.

2. Make sure that the paper feeding is normal and there is no abnormal noise.
WHAT TO DO LAST
1. Check the appearance of the product.

2. If necessary, inform the user on how to handle the product, deal with paper jam,
and replace the consumables.

6.3 Lubrication and Glueing 6.3.2 Scanner/ADF Section

This section explains the part required glueing and lubrication when performing the 6.3.2.1 Glueing
service work, or replacing the unit or parts.
There is no relevant glueing part for this unit.
6.3.1 Printer Section 6.3.2.2 Lublication

6.3.1.1 Glueing The part requires lubrication for this unit is as below
There is no relevant glueing part for this unit. Parts Name FIX PLATE R
Lubrication Part Shaft of the [FIX PLATE R]
6.3.1.2 Lublication Types of oil Parts Name : GREASE G-45
applied Parts Number : 1033657
The part requires lubrication for this unit is as below
Amount of A little modest amount
Parts Name lublicate
CHUTE ASSY FSR
Lubrication Part Spring attached on the [CHUTE ASSY FSR]
FIX PLATE R
Types of oil Parts Name : GREASE G-76
applied Parts Number :1304691
Amount of About 5mm
lublicate
Note Lubrication is required when CHUTE ASSY FSR and FRAME ASSY 2ND
are replaced at the same time. When replacing only one of them, lubrication
is not necessary as the grease is remaining on the other one.
FRAME ASSY 2ND
CHUTE ASSY FSR
Lubrication Part
Lubrication Part
MAINTENANCE Lubrication and Glueing 564

Parts Name DOC. PAPER GUIDE Parts Name TRAY GEAR 24T
Lubrication Part Parts of the [DOC. PAPER GUIDE] indicated in the figure Lubrication Part Parts of the [TRAY GEAR 24T] indicated in the figure
Types of oil Parts Name : GREASE G-31 Types of oil Parts Name : GREASE G-31
applied Parts Number : 1080618 applied Parts Number : 1080618
Amount of A little modest amount Amount of A little modest amount
lublicate lublicate
TRAY GEAR 24T

Lubrication Part
Lubrication Part
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
Lubrication Part
MAINTENANCE Lubrication and Glueing 565

6.4 Printer Maintenance Function Reset 2ndBTRCounter

Resets the life counter of the 2nd BTR ASSY.
After executing the counter reset, open and close the Cover A, and do not turn the
6.4.1 Maintenance Menu printer off until the engine stops completely.
The counter must be reset after the 2nd BTR ASSY is replaced with a new one.
C A U T IO N This menu is provided only for a service personnel to perform When resetting the counter, the number of printed pages for the previous 2nd BTR
maintenance. It must not be disclosed to the users. ASSY at that point is stored in the engine.The stored value will be printed on the
Engine Status Sheet as the number of previous replacement.
Reset Y (M, C, K) DvlpCounter
Resets the life counter of the Housing ASSY-DEVE.
After executing the counter reset, open and close the Cover A, and do not turn the
This menu is displayed and selectable only when a special operation performed at
printer off until the engine stops completely.
power-on to enter the maintenance mode. Basically, this menu is provided to be used
The counter must be reset after the Housing ASSY-DEVE is replaced with a new
by a service personnel for maintenance.
one.
At the time of maintenance, print the Engine Status Sheet from the Maintenance Menu
and grasp the usage conditions of various consumables and components needing Reset Fuser Counter
periodic replacement. Resets the life counter of the FUSER ASSY.
The counter must be reset after the Fuser unit is replaced with a new one.
6.4.1.1 Maintenance Menu Items When resetting the counter, the number of printed pages for the previous FUSER
ASSY is stored in the engine. The stored value will be printed on the Engine Status
This menu is displayed and selectable only when a special operation performed at Sheet as the number of previous replacement.
power-on to enter the maintenance mode.
When the power is then turned off once and on again, the Maintenance Menu is deleted Clear Error Log
(the printer returns to the normal operating mode). Clears error log list stored in the engine to print on Engine Status Sheet.
Performing this operation reboots the printer.
Engine Status Sheet (p568)
Press the [Right ] button to print the Engine Status Sheet. MCU DATA BackUp
Before entering the maintenance mode, make sure that an engine-related service Backups the data stored on the NVM in the engine controller.
call error is not occurring in normal operating mode (not maintenance mode). The "MCU Data BackUp" is displayed while the backup is in progress.
sheet is printed according to the default settings, except RIT, toner save, and MCU DATA Restore
resolution settings (current settings are applied for those settings), and others are Restores the backup data made by “MCU DATA Backup” on the NVM in the
printed according to the factory settings.The user default environment (settings) engine controller.
does not change after the printing. While the printing is in progress, the LCD "MCU DATA Backup" is displayed while the restoring is in progress.
keeps flashing.
The contents of the engine status sheet are the counted values of each unit which
makes up the printer engine.
Print Log Report (p573)
Prints a log file of printing status.
MAINTENANCE Printer Maintenance Function 566

Executing “MCU DATA BackUp” and,“MCU DATA Restore” MCU DATA Restore
C A U T IO N
is not possible when the product in the following statuses: [Right ] button
[Right ] button
• In sleep mode
Maintenance Menu Engine Status Sheet Print execution
• During warming-up
[Up ] button [Down ] button
• During printing
• During adjusting the printer
Information Menu Print Log Report Print execution
Do not turn the power OFF until the engine completely stops
[Up ] button
after executing “MCU DATA BackUp” and “MCU DATA
Restore”.
Ready Reset 2ndBTRCounter Clear execution
6.4.1.2 Accessing the Maintenance Menu

Reset C DvlpCounter Clear execution
1. Turn the product ON while holding down the [Left ], [Right ], [Up ], and
[Down ] buttons.
Reset M DvlpCounter Clear execution
When the product is turned on, all LEDs and LCD light and the following message
is then displayed.
(When “MAINTENANCE MODE” appears on the LCD, release the buttons.) Reset Y DvlpCounter Clear execution
RAM CHECK **.*MB MAINTENANCE ÇlODE Ready

2. Refer to the Maintenance Menu flowchart, access the desired function in the menu Reset K DvlpCounter Clear execution
using the control panel.
NOTE 1: Disconnect all the Interface Cables in advance.

Reset Fuser Counter Clear execution
2: Engine-related service call errors are ignored when the Maintenance
Mode starts. Before starting the product in the Maintenance Mode and
executing printing, make sure that no errors have occurred in the normal Clear execution
Clear Error Log
operating mode.
3:
4: Turn the product OFF to exit from the Maintenance Menu. Be sure not to MCU DATA BackUp Command
turn the product OFF until the engine stops operating. [Up ] button
MCU DATA Restore Command
Engine Status Sheet
Figure 6-6. Maintenance Menu Flowchart

6.4.2 Maintenance Information Output Photoconductor Change

: Number of replacements of Photoconductor Unit.
6.4.2.1 Engine Status Sheet Fuser : Total number of pages printed using the current FUSER ASSY
This Engine Status Sheet is used only by a service personnel for Fuser Change : Number of replacements of FUSER ASSY. /Number of
C A U T IO N
maintenance. It must not be disclosed to the users. pages printed at the time of replacing the previous one.
2nd BTR : Total number of pages printed using the current 2nd BTR.
2nd BTR Change : Number of replacements of 2nd BTR ASSY.
Development Unit
ENGINE STATUS SHEET ITEMS
C Development : Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE C.
Total Counts
M Development: Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE M.
Total Pages : Total number of pages printed to date.
Y Development : Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE Y.
Color Pages : Total number of pages printed in color to date.
K Development : Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE K.
Jam Counts : Number of occurrence of a jam.
C Deve Change : Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C.
ET Cartridge (Toner Cartridge)
M Deve Change: Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M.
C Toner :Amount of C toner used (dispense time)
Y Deve Change : Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y.
C toner limit value, C total dots
K Deve Change : Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K.
M Toner :Amount of M toner used (dispense time)
M toner limit value, M total dots 2nd BTR Offset
Y Toner :Amount of Y toner used (dispense time) Normal : Setting value of the transfer voltage for plain paper.
Y toner limit value, Y total dots
SemiThk : Setting value of the transfer voltage for High quality paper.
K Toner :Amount of K toner used (dispense time)
Thick : Setting value of the transfer voltage for thick paper.
K toner limit value, K total dots
ExtraThk : Setting value of the transfer voltage for Extra thick paper.
C Toner Change :Number of replacements of C toner (for 4K),
Number of replacements of C toner (for 1.5K). Card : Setting value of the transfer voltage for postcard paper.
M Toner Change:Number of replacements of M toner (for 4K), Envelope : Setting value of the transfer voltage for envelope.
Number of replacements of M toner (for 1.5K).
Power On : Number of times power is turned on.
Y Toner Change :Number of replacements of Y toner (for 4K),
Sleep : Number of times printer returns from standby mode.
Number of replacements of Y Toner (for 1.5K).
Engine Version
K Toner Change :Number of replacements of K toner (for 4K),
Number of replacements of K Toner (for 1.5K). MCU : Firmware version of mechanical controller.
Photoconductor : Number of revolutions of photoconductor.

Error Log displays the latest 20 errors with the following information; panel Jam Code
message, EJL status code, the number of pages, jam code, paper size, paper type, The location of the jam is indicated by 8-digit hexadecimal strings as bit data.
and date/time.The 20 errors are listed in the order of number of pages form largest
to smallest. Service call errors which occurred after the Ready mode and jam Table 6-1. Jam code
errors are listed. The errors with total pages which are the same as previously Bit Location of jam
recorded errors are not included. 31-24 ---
23 At Exit sensor
22 At Fuser In sensor
21 At Regi sensor
20 At OHP sensor
19 At Tray Path1 sensor
18 At Tray Path2 sensor
17 At Dup In sensor
16 At Dup Out sensor
15 After Exit sensor turns off, Dup In sensor does not turn off
14 After Dup In sensor turns on, Dup Out sensor stays off
13 After Duplex loading signal, Regi sensor stays off
12 After Regi sensor turns on, Exit sensor stays off.
11 After Regi Roll turns on, Exit Fuser In sensor is stays off.
10 ---
The setting is for transparency, but media other than transparencies
9 was fed. The setting is for other than transparency, but transparencies
were fed.
8 ---
7 After Regi Roll turns on, Exit sensor stays off, Fuser In sensor off.
6 After Regi Roll turns on, Exit sensor is stays off, Fuser In sensor on.
5 After Regi Roll turns on, Regi sensor stays on.
4 Regi sensor signal from cassette 1 or 2 is not received.
3 Regi sensor signal from MP tray is not received.
2 Tray Path1 sensor signal from cassette 1 is not received.
1 (Tray Path1 sensor signal from cassette 2 is not received.)
0 (Tray Path2 sensor signal from cassette 2) is not received.

Paper Size
Indicated same as the panel display.
Paper type:
Indicated as the specified value set for each media to control the engine.
Table 6-2. Paper Type

Paper Type Front Side Back Side
Plain paper 1 17
High quality paper 8 24
Thick paper 4 20
Extra thick paper 10 26
Coated paper 7 23
Transparency 2 ---
Labels 5 ---
Envelopes 15 ---
Postcards 14 30
Note *1: The date and time (yy/mm/dd hh:mm) are indicated in the local time when
generated.
(The date and time is not re-calculated even if the time difference is changed.)
yy are the lower two digits of the calendar year.
In the non-synchronous mode, “--/--/-- --:--” is displayed.
*2: The value of the total dot counter on ASIC is used in the dot calculation.Threshold is
128.
Figure 6-7. Engine Status Sheet

LIST OF INFORMATION MANAGED AND METHODS OF MANAGEMENT
Table 6-3. List of information managed and methods of management

Count processing and storage
Information name Range Unit Count conditions Clear conditions
location
Total Pages Controller 0 - 99,999,999 Pages During printing When a jam occurs
Color Pages Controller 0 - 99,999,999 Pages During printing When a jam occurs
Jam Counts Controller 0 - 100,000 Times When a jam occurred. (EEPROM Initialization)
C Toner Dispense time Engine 0 - 99,999,999 msec During printing New C toner detected
Limit value Engine msec (Fixed value) ---
Total dots Controller 0 - 2,147,483,647 --- 4096dots (EEPROM Initialization)
M Toner Dispense time Engine 0 - 99,999,999 msec During printing New M toner detected
Y Toner Dispense time Engine 0 - 99,999,999 msec During printing New Y toner detected
C Toner Dispense time Engine msec (Fixed value) ---
K Toner Dispense time Engine 0 - 99,999,999 msec During printing New K toner detected
C Toner Change 4K only Controller 0 - 255 Times When replaced C Toner (EEPROM Initialization)
1.5K only Controller 0 - 255 Times When replaced C Toner (EEPROM Initialization)
M Toner Change 4K only Controller 0 - 255 Times When replaced M Toner (EEPROM Initialization)
1.5K only Controller 0 - 255 Times When replaced M Toner (EEPROM Initialization)
Y Toner Change 4K only Controller 0 - 255 Times When replaced Y Toner (EEPROM Initialization)
1.5K only Controller 0 - 255 Times When replaced Y Toner (EEPROM Initialization)
K Toner Change 4K only Controller 0 - 255 Times When replaced K Toner (EEPROM Initialization)
1.5K only Controller 0 - 255 Times When replaced K Toner (EEPROM Initialization)
Photoconductor Engine 0 - 99,999,999 Rotation During printing New photoconductor detected
Photoconductor Change Controller 0 - 255 Times When replaced Photo (EEPROM Initialization)
conductor
Fuser Controller 0 - 99,999,999 Pages During printing Counter clear
Fuser Change Controller 0 - 255 Times Counter clear (EEPROM Initialization)
Fuser Change (Pages at the time of replacing the Controller 0 - 99,999,999 Pages Counter clear (EEPROM Initialization)
pervious one)


location
Second BTR & FUSER Engine 0-` Pages During printing Counter clear
2nd BTR Change Controller 0 - 255 Times Counter clear (EEPROM Initialization)
Development Unit
C Development Engine 0 - 13,631,488 msec During printing Counter clear
M Development Engine 0 - 13,631,488 msec During printing Counter clear
Y Development Engine 0 - 13,631,488 msec During printing Counter clear
K Development Engine 0 - 13,631,488 msec During printing Counter clear
C Deve Change Controller 0 - 255 Times Counter clear (EEPROM Initialization)
M Deve Change Controller 0 - 255 Times Counter clear (EEPROM Initialization)
Y Deve Change Controller 0 - 255 Times Counter clear (EEPROM Initialization)
K Deve Change Controller 0 - 255 Times Counter clear (EEPROM Initialization)
2nd BTR Offset
Normal Engine 0 - 15 --- (Setting value) (Setting)
SemiThk Engine 0 - 15 --- (Setting value) (Setting)
Thick Engine 0 - 15 --- (Setting value) (Setting)
ExtraThk Engine 0 - 15 --- (Setting value) (Setting)
Card Engine 0 - 15 --- (Setting value) (Setting)
Envelope Engine 0 - 15 --- (Setting value) (Setting)
Controller At Power on
Power On (Times power is turned on) 0 - 99,999,999 Times (EEPROM Initialization)
Controller When returning from
Sleep (Number of recoveries from standby) 0 - 99,999,999 Times (EEPROM Initialization)
standby
MCU Engine --- --- (Fixed value) None
Duplex Engine --- --- (Fixed value) None
Panel Message 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
Error Code 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
Error Page 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
SelecType
Jam Code 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
(EEPROM initialization)
Page Size 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
Paper Type 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
Date, Time 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs

6.4.2.2 Print Log Report
PRINT LOG REPORT ITEMS
S/N : Serial number of main unit

Date : yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm
The date and time are indicated in the local time.
Not displayed when it is in asynchronous state.
Toner Remain
C Toner : Remaining amount of C toner [%]
M Toner : Remaining amount of M toner [%]
Y Toner : Remaining amount of Y toner [%]
K Toner : Remaining amount of K toner [%]
Print of papers [pages]
: Number of printed pages by paper size.
Total : Number of printed pages.
Mono Simplex : Monochrome Number of printed pages by one-side printing.
Color Simplex : Color (process color) Number of printed pages by one-side printing.
Print of mode : Number of printed pages by print mode.
Coverage Duty [%] : Percentage of printed dots in total dots per page of each color.
It is averaged each time one page is printed.
Dots/1% [dots] : Number of dots when 1% of each toner is used.Updated with
every reduction of 1%.
Estimate [pages] : Estimated number of pages that can be print with remained toner.
The estimate is made based on the “Coverage Duty [%]” and
“Dots/1%[dots]”.
Figure 6-8. Print Log Report

LIST OF INFORMATION MANAGED AND METHODS OF MANAGEMENT

location
Serial Number Controller xxxxxxxxxx --- --- None
Date, Time Controller --- --- --- At Power on
C Toner Engine 0 - 100 % During printing New C toner detected
M Toner Engine 0 - 100 % During printing New M toner detected
Y Toner Engine 0 - 100 % During printing New Y toner detected
K Toner Engine 0 - 100 % During printing New K toner detected
Print [pages]
Total Controller 0 - 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM Initialization)
Mono Simplex Controller 0 - 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM Initialization)
Mono Duplex Controller 0 - 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM Initialization)
Color Simplex Controller 0 - 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM Initialization)
Color Duplex Controller 0 - 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM Initialization)
Dummy Controller 0 - 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM Initialization)
Coverage Duty [%] C,M,Y,K Controller 0.0 - 100.0 % During printing (EEPROM Initialization)
Dots/1% [dots] C,M,Y,K Controller 0 - 2,147,483,647 dots During printing (EEPROM Initialization)
Estimate [pages] Controller 0 - 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM Initialization)
Note : Values in parentheses in the Clear Condition column are cleared as a result.If a value exceeds its range, it is not guaranteed if it is controlled by the controller.

6.5 Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement
C A U T IO N The print page-based service life values of the Consumables and Periodical Replacement Parts are guidelines. The number of printable pages varies
depending on how they are printed. The number of printable pages decreases depending on the intermittent printing (where a few pages, one to several
pages, are printed each time), paper size, paper orientation, thick paper printing, printed document, frequent power-on/off, etc. Hence, the number of
printable pages of the consumables and periodical replacement parts may become less than a half depending on the operating conditions and environment
of the user.
6.5.1 Consumables
Table 6-5. Information on Consumables
Part Name Part Code Life (Pages) Service life indication Remarks
Toner Cartridge LPCA4ETC4Y 1500*1 Replace Toner C (1500 pages by the K toner is the figure for the packaged cartridge only.)
Yellow
LPCA4ETC5Y 4000*1
LPCA4ETC4M 1500*1 Replace Toner M
Magenta
LPCA4ETC5M 4000*1
LPCA4ETC4C 1500*1 Replace Toner Y
Cyan
LPCA4ETC5C 4000*1
--- --- Replace Toner K
Black
LPCA4ETC5K 4000*1
Photoconductor Unit Replace Photocondctr When the error LED is flashing, the product shifts to eco-mode by pressing the
LPCA4KUT3 14000*2 [Start] button.(Printing can be continued)
However, the print quality is not guaranteed.
Note *1: A4, Print ratio=5 %
*2: Monochrome : Color = 1:2, 2P/J, A4, Print ratio is 5%
MAINTENANCE Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement 575

6.5.2 Regular Replacement Parts

Table 6-6. Maintenance Information on Regular Replacement Parts
Part to be replaced
Part Name Part Code Life (Pages) Service life indication Remedy after Replacement Remarks
at the same time
FUSER ASSY Worn Fuser 2ND BTR ASSY Execute “Reset Fuser Counter” in While it can still be printed, it is
the Maintenance Menu to reset the desirable to replace the unit. If
life counter. printing is continued, a paper
2090471 100000 jam will occur at the fusing
section frequently because the
wear of the heat roller shaft
increases the torque of the heat
roller.
HOUSING K 1292991 100000 Worn K Dev Unit PIVOT AD Execute “Reset X DvlpCounter” While it can still be printed,
ASSY-DEVE Y 1292994 Worn Y Dev Unit PIVOT AD (X=Y, M, C, or K) in the it is desirable to replace the
Maintenance Menu to reset the life unit.
M 1292996 Worn M Dev Unit PIVOT AD counter. The “PIVOT AD” is packed
66700 Worn C Dev Unit PIVOT AD After executing the counter reset, with the ASP “HOUSING
open and close the Cover A. Do not ASSY-DEVE”.
C 1292999
turn the printer off until the engine
completely stops.
2ND BTR ASSY FUSER ASSY Execute “Reset 2ndBTRCounter” in While it can still be printed after
the Maintenance Menu to reset the the message is displayed, it is
life counter. desirable to replace the unit.
1292981 100000 --- After executing the counter reset,
open and close the Cover A. Do not
turn the printer off until the engine
completely stops.
MAINTENANCE Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement 576

CHAPTER
7
APPENDIX
7.1 System Connection Diagram

The following diagram shows the connection between the main board and each system.
Control Panel
CN601 CN602
Engine I/F Video I/F
CN405
(16Pin) (2Pin)
Panel I/F
(30Pin)
CN701
CCD_A I/F
(14Pin)
CN300 ROM/RAM DIMM P (90Pin) P CN501
Power (5V, 3.3V)
CN702 (2Pin)
CCD_B I/F
(13Pin) CN201 RAM DIMM A (90Pin) S0
CN703 CN407
Motor I/F CN202 RAM DIMM B (90Pin) S1 Network I/F
(4Pin) (30Pin)
CN704
ADF I/F*1
(12Pin)
CN705
Sensor I/F*2
(2Pin)
CN502 CN410 CN402

Power (24V) FAX I/F*2 USB I/F
(2Pin) (40Pin) (2Pin)
Figure 7-1. Main Board Block Diagram
APPENDIX System Connection Diagram 578

7.2 Printer System Electrical Connection Table 7-1. IOT

P/J Location Remarks
125 G-108
7.2.1 Connector Summary Connects SWITCH-FRONT DOOR and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
126 F-138 Connects SENSOR TNER FULL and HARNESS ASSY TNER FULL
This section gives the connector summary for the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F/CX21/ 128 G-153 Connects FUSER LOCK SWITCH and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
CX21F and each connector’s plug and jack alignment.
200 H-153 Connects MOT ASSY P/R and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
7.2.1.1 Plug and Jack Layout 201 G-153 Connects MOT ASSY P/R and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
202 F-124 Connects CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
IOT 203 F-122 Connects CLUTCH ASSY REGI and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
204 C-109 Connection in MOT ASSY ROT
Table 7-1. IOT
400 I-149 Connects PWBA MCU and FFC-ASSY ESS
P/J Location Remarks
401 I-149 Connects PWBA MCU and FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
1 G-156 Connects PWBA FUSER CONT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
403 H-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
2 G-156 Connects PWBA FUSER CONT and HARNESS ASSY AC
404 H-148 Connects PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY FSR
3 G-157 Connects PWBA FUSER CONT and HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
405 H-148 Connects PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MAG
100 F-122 Connects SWITCH-P/H and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
406 H-149 Connects PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MAG
101 G-123 Connects SENSOR OHP and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
407 H-149 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
102 F-123 Connects SENSOR REGI and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
408 H-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
103 D-124 Connects SENSOR PAPER ENPTY and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
409 H-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
104 H-110 Connects SENSOR HUM&TEMP and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
410 I-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Connects SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI and HARNESS ASSY
105 D-108 411 I-148 Connects PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PRO
MAIN
106 H-108 412 I-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Connects ANTENNA CTRG and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
107 D-107 413 I-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Connects SENSOR IBT RETRACT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
108 D-106 414 I-147 Connects PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PRO
Connects SENSOR TR-O and HARNESS-ASSY XERO
109 D-106 415 J-147 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Connects ANTENNA ASSY and HARNESS ASSY XERO
111 G-137 416 J-147 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS-ASSY XERO
Connects SENSOR FUSER IN and HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS
112 H-137 417 I-147 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
Connects SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT and HARNESS ASSY ADC
113 H-136 418 I-147 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ADC
Connects SWITCH 2BTR COVER and HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW
114 D-104 420 J-148 Not used
Connects SWITCH-INLK FUSER and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
115 G-107 421 J-148 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Connects SWITCH-INLK FRONT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
116 G-108 422 I-147 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ADC
Connects SWITCH ASSY TOP and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
117 D-105 429 D-109 Connects PWBA CRUM and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Connects SWITCH-INLK FUSER and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
APPENDIX Printer System Electrical Connection 579

Table 7-1. IOT Table 7-1. IOT

P/J Location Remarks P/J Location Remarks
430 E-109 Connects PWB ASSY ROT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN 620 H-137 Connects HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS and HARNESS ASSY ADC
431 F-138 Connects SENSOR ASSY ADC and HARNESS ASSY ADC 621 I-136 Connects HARNESS ASSY 2BTR and HARNESS ASSY ADC
432 D-109 Connects PWB ASSY ROT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN CN1 B-106 Connects OP PANEL and HARNESS ASSY PANEL
433 D-109 Connects PWB ASSY ROT and PWB ASSY MOT CN405 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY PANEL
500 H-153 Connects LV/HVPS and FFC-ASSY LV/MCU CN410 G-156 Connects PWBA ESS and FAX BOARD
501 I-152 Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN CN501 G-156 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
502 I-153 Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN CN502 F-155 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
503 I-155 Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY AC CN601 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and FFC-ASSY ESS
D H-154 Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY BTR CN602 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
F F-109 Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY 2BTR CN1 I-153 Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
G E-109 Connects PWBA HVPS and WIRE ASSY IBT CN701 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and SCANNER
H E-109 Connects PWBA HVPS and WIRE ASSY DTN CN702 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and SCANNER
A H-155 Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY BCR CN703 G-156 Connects PWBA ESS and SCANNER
C H-156 Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY DEVE CN704 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and SCANNER
510 I-108 Connects HOLDER ASSY BIAS and WIRE ASSY DEVE CN705 G-155 Connects PWBA ESS and SCANNER
512 I-107 Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY and WIRE ASSY BTR T2 I-107 Connects PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY and WIRE ASSY 2BTR
513 H-107 Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY AD and WIRE ASSY IBT T4 H-107 Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY AD and WIRE ASSY DTN
514 I-108 Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY AD and WIRE ASSY BCR
515 H-153 Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
516 F-110 Connects PWBA HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
600 F-153 Connects MOT ASSY MICRO and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
601 H-138 Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
602 H-138 Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
603 F-124 Connects HARNESS ASSY P/H1 and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
604 F-124 Connects MOTOR-PH and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
605 E-124 Connects SOLENOID PICK UP and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
607 E-140 Not used
614 E-105 Connects FUSER ASSY and HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
Connects HARNESS-ASSY TNER FULL and HARNESS ASSY
617 D-140
MAIN

500 FEEDER 7.2.1.2 Plug and Jack Layout
Table 7-2. 500 FEEDER A B C D E F G H I J K L
P/J Location Remarks 109 108 117 114 614 125 115 T4 (IBT)
101
119 E-307 Connects SENSOR NO PAPER and HARNESS ASSY FEED3
120 D-307 Connects SENSOR T/R (P120) and HARNESS ASSY FEED3 102
Connects SWITCH FEEDER DOOR and HARNESS-ASSY FEED

121 C-308
MAIN 103
435 E-309 Connects PWBA TRAY 500 and HARNESS-ASSY FEED1

436 E-309 Connects PWBA TRAY 500 and HARNESS-ASSY FEED2 104
107
437 E-309 Connects PWBA TRAY 500 and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
CN1 E-308 Connects PWBA MOT and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN 105
T2
CN2 D-308 Connects PWBA MOT and MOTOR ASSY FEEDER (2BTR)
CN1
106
608 D-307 Connects HARNESS ASSY MAIN and HARNESS-ASSY FEED1 512
609 C-309 Connects CLUTCH ASSY FEED and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN (1BTR)
107
610 C-308 Connects SOLENOID FEED and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN 513
(IBT)
Connects HARNESS ASSY FEED MAIN and HARNESS ASSY
618 D-307 108
514
FEED3 105 (BCR)
4358 D-309 Not Connects 109 510
(DEVE)
204
110 106
429
111
112
113
433 432 430 H G 516 F 104 116
114
115
Leg_04_001RB
Figure 7-2. Plug and Jack Layout for IOT (1)

A B C D E F G H I J K L A B C D E F G H I J K L
116 131 126 431 111 620 112 113
117 132
118 133
119 134
100
120 135
121 136
621
203
122 137
102
602
123 101 138

601
124 202 139
125 140
126 141
127 142
128 143
103 605 603 604 617 607
129 144
130 145
Leg_04_002RA Leg_04_003RB
Figure 7-3. Plug and Jack Layout for IOT (2) Figure 7-4. Plug and Jack Layout for IOT (3)

A B C D E F G H I J K L A B C D E F G H I J K L
146 301
417 418 422 414 416
147 415 302

404 412
403 421
148 405 420 303
409 411
406 413
149 304
121 608 618 120 119 CN2 CN1
408 407 410 400 401
150 305
200
151 515 306

201
502
152 501 307
510
153 308
600 500
D
154 309
128
CN405 503
155 CN702 CN601 310
CN704
CN602
156
CN502 311
A
C 609 610 4358 436 435 437
CN705
157 312
CN701 608
CN703
158 313
CN410
159 1 2 3 CN501 314
160 315
Leg_04_004RC Leg_Sec04_006EB
Figure 7-5. Plug and Jack Layout for IOT (4) Figure 7-6. Plug and Jack Layout for 500 FEEDER

7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams Table 7-3. List of the Symbols

Symbols Explanation
7.2.2.1 Symbols used in the Overall Wiring Connection Diagram Indicates a functional component in a part, and its name.
The table below shows how to interpret the Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams.
Table 7-3. List of the Symbols

Symbols Explanation
Indicates a connection between parts with a harness or wire.
Indicates a section in “7.2.3 Wiring Connection Diagram
Indicates a connection that differs according to the specification.
between Parts (p586)”, and the section No.
Indicates a connection between parts by conductive materials

such as a leaf spring.
Indicates a connection between parts with a screw.

Indicates a screw that secures conductive material such as a leaf
spring to harness.
Indicates Frame Ground.
Indicates conductive materials such as leaf spring.
Indicates a connector, and the connector No.
Indicates a connection terminal with a leaf spring or other spring

on a board, and the connector (terminal) No.
Indicates a connector attached directly to the board, and the

connector No.
Box with a part name in it indicates the part.

APPENDIX
PWBA MCU ROS ASSY
PL12.2.1 PL8.1.1
9-1
P/J407 P/J601
MOT ASSY FSR
P/J404 4 PWBA ESS
PL11.1.3
PL12.2.7
FUSER ASSY P/J400 CN601

P/J614 P/J417
PL10.1.1 10 LV/HVPS
CN602 P/J602
PL12.2.3
P/J410 P/J502 CN502
P/J510
% FUSER LOCK SWITCH & #
1 OP PANEL
PL10.1.6
P/J501 CN501 PL1.1.17
P/J128 P/J128 $
CN405 CN1
SWITCH-INLK
P/J115 FRONT P/J115
PL1.1.27 6 PWBA HVPS
SWITCH-INLK SWITCH PL12.1.9
FUSER P/J114 P/J403 P/J116 ASSY TOP P/J116 P/J515 P/J516
PL1.1.34 PL1.1.7
D H
5 SWITCH-INLK
P/J201 # P/J117 FUSER P/J117 C F
MOT ASSY P/R PL1.1.34
PL11.1.6
P/J200 P/J401 P/J500 A G
P/J503
9-2
7.2.2.2 Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams
P/J411 PWBA FUSER

DRIVE ASSY PRO CONT
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE PL9.2.5㨪
PL11.1.2 PL12.2.12
IBT ASSY PL7.1.1
P/J414 2ND BTR ASSY PL6.1.12
% P/J1 P/J2 FUSER ASSY
PL10.1.1
&
P/J3 P/J614
P/J4
SENSOR TNER FULL

P/J126 P/J617 P/J413 3
PL7.1.24
PWBA TRAY 500
PL14.3.3
SENSOR
IBT RETRACT P/J107 P/J415
PL6.1.26 P/J436 J4358 N.C.
P/J421 P/J608 P/J435
SENSOR TR-0 P/J108 P/J416 PWBA MOT
PL7.1.2 PL14.3.4
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
P/J437 CN1 CN2
ANTENNA ASSY PL14.3.9
P/J109
PL7.1.10
P/J609 CLUTCH ASSY FEED

7 PL14.3.12
SENSOR HUM & TEMP
P/J104
PL12.1.6 SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
P/J121
PL14.3.18
PWBA CRUM
P/J429 P/J412
PL12.1.11
SENSOR NO PAPER
P/J618 P/J119
P/J405 PL14.4.3
MOT ASSY MAG
PL11.1.4
P/J406 SENSOR T/R (P120)
P/J120
PL14.4.7
SENSOR ROTARY
Printer System Electrical Connection

HOME POSI P/J105
P/J610 SOLENOID FEED
PL9.1.18
PL14.3.8
ANTENNA CTRG
P/J106
PL9.1.12
Figure 7-7. Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
P/J125 2
PL1.1.26 MOTOR-PH
PWB ASSY ROT P/J409 P/J604
PL5.2.20
PL12.1.10
MOT ASSY ROT
P/J204 P/J433 P/J430 SOLENOID PICK UP
PL11.1.5 P/J605
PL4.1.23
P/J432 $
P/J408 P/J603 P/J202
PL5.2.22
8
SENSOR FUSER IN CLUTCH ASSY REGI
P/J111 P/J620 P/J418 P/J203
PL6.1.3 PL5.2.2
SENSOR 2BTR SWITCH-PH DOOR

P/J100
RETRACT P/J112 PL5.2.23
PL6.1.22
P/J101 SENSOR OHP

SWITCH 2BTR PL5.2.16
COVER P/J113 P/J621
PL6.1.18
SENSOR REGI
P/J102
SENSOR ASSY ADC PL5.2.19
P/J431 P/J422
PL6.1.20
SENSOR PAPER EMPTY

P/J103
MOT ASSY MICRO PL4.1.24
P/J600
PL11.1.7
Leg_007_001RA
Revision D
585
7.2.3 Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts Table 7-4. List of the Symbols
Symbol Explanation
7.2.3.1 Symbols used in the Wiring Connection Diagram between Indicates a connection between parts with a
Parts harness or wire, and its signal name/details.An
DEVE_A
The table below shows how to interpret the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts arrow indicates the direction of the signal.
given on the following pages.
Indicates the logical value (Low: L, High: H) of
Commonly used symbols are omitted here. REGI CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC the signal for enabling the function. The voltage is
the value when the signal is High.An arrow
Table 7-4. List of the Symbols indicates the direction of the signal.
Symbol Explanation
Indicates the logical value (Low: L, High: H) of
Indicates a plug. EXIT PAPER SENSED (L) +3.3VDC the signal when the function is detected. The
voltage is the value when the signal is High. An
arrow indicates the direction of the signal.
Indicates cable-to-cable connection.
Indicates a jack.
I/L +24VDC Indicates the DC voltage when the HNB MCU

Indicates a Pin YY or Jack YY of the connector P WITH CPU internal interlock switch is ON.
P/JXX XX and J XX.
+5VDC Indicates DC voltage.
YY +3.3VDC
SG Indicates a Signal Ground.
Indicates a part.
PWBA HNB DRV PL AG Indicates Analog Ground.
X.Y.Z
RTN Indicates a Return.
Indicates a functional component in a part, and its

Heater name.
Indicates control inside the PWB, and a brief

Control outline of the control.

7.2.3.2 Composition of the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts 3. FEEDER (500) (p591)
The Overall Wiring Connection Diagram is divided into 11 sections as shown below to Connection between PWBA MCU and PWBA TRAY 500
indicate the detailed connection between parts. Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and CLUTCH ASSY FEED
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SWITCH FEEDER
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SENSOR NO PAPER
1. DC POWER SUPPLY (p589)
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SENSOR T/R
Connection between PWBA MCU and LV/HVPS
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SOLENOID FEED
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA FUSER CONTROL
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and PWBA MOT
Connection between LV/HVPS and MOT ASSY P/R
Connection between PWBA MOT and MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWB ASSY ROT
Connection between LV/HVPS and SWITCH-INLK FRONT
Connection between the SWITCH-INLK FRONT and SWITCH ASSY TOP 4. ROS (p592)
Connection between the SWITCH ASSY TOP and SWITCH-INLK FUSER Connection between PWBA MCU and ROS ASSY
Connection between SWITCH-INLK FUSER and LV/HVPS Connection between ROS ASSY and PWBA ESS
2. MSI REGI (p590) 5. XEROGRAPHIC (p593)

Connection between PWBA MCU and MOTOR-PH Connection between PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PRO
Connection between the PWBA MCU and SOLENOID PICK UP Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR TNER FULL
Connection between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR IBT RETRACT
Connection between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY REGI Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR TR-O
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH-PH DOOR Connection between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA ASSY
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR OHP Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY P/R
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR REGI Connection between LV/HVPS and MOT ASSY P/R
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR PAPER EMPTY
6. HIGH VOLTAGE (p594)

Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA HVPS
Connection between LV/HVPS and HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, IBT ASSY,
2ND BTR ASSY
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA MCU

7. DEVELOPER (p595) 10. CONTROLLER (p598)

Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH FRONT-DOOR Connection between PWBA MCU and PWBA ESS
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR HUM&TEMP Connection between PWBA ESS and OP PANEL
Connection between PWBA MCU and PWBA CRUM Connection between PWBA ESS and LV/HVPS
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MAG
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
Connection between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA CTRG
Connection between PWBA MCU and PWB ASSY ROT
Connection between PWBA ASSY ROT and MOT ASSY ROT
Connection between PWB ASSY ROT and LV/HVPS
8. 2nd BTR (p596)

Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR FUSER IN
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH 2BTR COVER
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR ASSY ADC
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MICRO
9. FUSER (p597)
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY FUSER
Connection between PWBA MCU and FUSER ASSY
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
Connection between PWBA MCU and FUSER LOCK SWITCH
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA FUSER CONT
Connection between PWBA FUSER CONT and FUSER ASSY
Connection between PWBA FUSER CONT and PWBA MCU
Connection between PWBA FUSER CONT and FUSER LOCK SWITCH
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA MCU

1. DC POWER SUPPLY
LV/HVPS PWBA MCU
PL12.2.3 P/J500 P/J401 PL12.2.1
Overcurrent Protection Power 3
POWER SAVE
20
All outputs (+24VDC, +5VDC, +3.3VDC) from LV/HVPS are stopped when Save 4 19
short-circuiting on the way to the earth or ground. Each output is restored by SWITCH- SWITCH
eliminating the cause of the short-circuit, and turning the printer OFF and then INLK
FRONT
ASSY
TOP
P/J502 P/J115 PL.1.1.27 P/J115 P/J116 P/J116
back ON at specified time interval. The overcurrent protection circuit is activated
PL.1.1.7
+5VDC
13 13 13 13 13
when a current exceeds 16A flows. SWITCH-

INLK
Overvoltage Protection P/J117
FUSER
PL.1.1.34 P/J117
All outputs from LV/HVPS are stopped when an overvoltage is detected. The +5VDC
15
I/L +5VDC
31 31
operating voltages for overvoltage protection of each output are as follows: +5VDC
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
P/J500 P/J401 Interlock
Supply I/L +5VDC
+24VDC: 36VDC 5
P/J502
18
P/J410
+5VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
3 3
+5VDC: 7VDC 4
SG
4
+3.3VDC: 5VDC +24VDC INTERLOCK

+24VDC +24VDC
Power save Supply
5
I/L +24VDC
5
I/L +24VDC
6 6
Name of Signal Line Remarks 7

SG
7
SG
8 8
POWER SAVE Signal for turning +24VDC OFF
+3.3VDC
+3.3VDC +3.3VDC
Supply +3.3VDC
1 1
SG
2 2
Stopping output by Interlock Switch
MOT ASSY P/R
Name of Signal Line Remarks PL11.1.6
Interlock
P/J201
I/L +24VDC +24VDC
I/L +5VDC --- 9
SG
1
10 2
The I/L +5VDC signal that arrives via Front Interlock Switch, Upper PWB ASSY
ROT
Interlock Switch and Fuser Interlock Switch becomes the power source of the I/L +24VDC
P/J432
PL12.1.10
Interlock
11 1
LV/HVPS internal Relay coil. This signal opens/closes Relay contacts, and 12
SG
3
+24VDC
controls INTERLOCK +24VDC and INTERLOCK +5VDC. PWBA FUSER CONTROL

PL12.2.12
P/J503 P/J2
3 3
1 1
Leg_Sec007_002FB
Figure 7-8. DC POWER SUPPLY Connection and Wiring Diagram

2. MSI&REGI
Name of Signal Line Remarks PWBA MCU

PL12.2.1 P/J409 P/J604
MOTOR-PH
P/H MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC PL5.2.20
1 6 1
PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +5VDC Paper detection signal for MSI generated by 2
P/H MOT PWM +3.3VDC
5 2
Sensor Photo (No Paper Sensor) INTERLOCK 3
P/H MOT TG +3.3VDC
4 3
M
P/H MOT ON CW/CCW
+24VDC 4 3 4
P/H MOTER ON (H) +3.3VDC P/H MOTOR drive control signal 5
SG
2 5
I/L +24VDC
P/H MOTER PWM 6 1 6
P/H MOTER FG P/J409 P/J605

P/H MOTER CW/CCW 7
I/L +24VDC
FEED SOL ON (L) +24VDC
2 1 SOLENOID
PICK UP
8 1 2
FEED SOL ON (L) +24VDC Solenoid Feed ON/OFF signal INTERLOCK
PL4.1.23
+24VDC P/J408 P/J603 P/J202

PREREGI CL ON (L) +24VDC Pre-Regi Clutch ON/OFF signal 1
PRE REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC
12 1 2 1 CLUTCH ASSY
I/L +24VDC PRE REGI
REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC Regi Clutch ON/OFF signal 2 11 2 1 2 PL5.2.22
P/H DOOR SW OPEND (H) +3.3VDC CHTE ASSY REATR open/close detection REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC
P/J203
CLUTCH ASSY
3 10 3 2 1
signal generated by P/H Door Switch 4
I/L +24VDC
9 4 1 2
REGI
PL5.2.2
OHP SENSED (H) +5VDC OHP media detection signal generated by Sensor P/J100
Photo (OHP Sensor) 5
SG
8 5 2 SWITCH-PH
P/H POOR SW OPENED (H) +3.3VDC DOOR
6 7 6 1
REGI SENSED (H) +5VDC Paper detection signal at REGI section generated PL5.2.23
by Sensor Photo (REGI Sensor) +5VDC

SG
P/J101
7 6 7 3
OHP SENSED (H) +5VDC SENSOR OHP
8 5 8 2
+5VDC PL5.2.16
9 4 9 1
P/J102
PULL UP +5VDC
10 3 10 3
SG SENSOR REGI
11 2 11 2
+5VDC REGI SENSED (H) +5VDC PL5.2.19
12 1 12 1
P/J103
PULL UP +5VDC
13 3 SENSOR PAPER
SG
14 2 EMPTY
PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +5VDC PL4.1.24
15 1
Leg_Sec007_003FB
Figure 7-9. MSI&REGI Connection and Wiring Diagram

3. FEEDER (500)
PWBA MCU PWBA TRAY 500
Tray Interface
PL12.2.1 PL14.3.3
Connector INTERLOCK
+24VDC
P/J421 P/J608 P/J435 P/J436 J4358
TRAY +5VDC
N.C. 10 1 10 1 N.C. 1 10
SENSOR +5VDC
RXD
2 9 2 2 9
8 3 8 3 3 8
+5VDC TXD
TRAY SENSOR PWBA TRAY CONT. control signal 7
SG
4 7 4 4 7
N.C.
6 5 6 5 5 6
RXD 5
+5VDC
6 5 6 6 5
SG INTERLOCK
TXD INTERLOCK
+24VDC
4
SG
7 4 7 +24VDC 7 4
3 8 3 8 8 3
FEED MOTOR ON (H) + FUSER MOTOR control signal 2
I/L +24VDC
9 2 9 9 2
I/L +24VDC
1 10 1 10
FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC Feed Clutch ON/OFF signal
DOOR SW OPEND (H) +5VDC Rear Cover open/close detection signal generated PWBA TRAY
by Door Rear Cover Switch 500
PWBA MOT
PL14.3.4
MOTOR ASSY
FEEDER
PL.14.3.3
PL14.3.9
NO PAPER SENSED (H) +5VDC Paper detection signal for Paper Tray generated INTERLOCK P/J437 CN1 CN2
FEED MOT ON (H) INTERLOCK
by Sensor Photo (No Paper Sensor) +24VDC 1 5 +24VDC 1
2 4 2
PAPER PASS SENSED (L) +5VDC Paper feed starting signal generated by Sensor 4
I/L +24VDC
SG
2 3
M
Photo (Paper Pass Sensor) 5 1 4
5
FEED SOL ON (L) +24VDC Solenoid Feed ON/OFF signal 6
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
P/J609
I/L +24VDC CLUTCH ASSY FEED
6 2 1
FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC PL14.3.12
7 1 2
P/J121
DOOR SW OPENED (H) +5VDC SWITCH FEEDER
8 2
+5VDC SG DOOR
9 1 PL14.3.18
P/J618 P/J119
PULL UP +5VDC
10 6 1 3
SG SENSOR NO PAPER
11 5 2 2
NO PAPER SENSED (H) +5VDC PL14.4.3
12 4 3 1
P/J120
PULL UP +5VDC
13 3 4 3
SG SENSOR T/R (P120)
14 2 5 2
PAPER PASS SENSED (L) +5VDC PL14.4.7
15 1 6 1
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
P/J610
I/L +24VDC SOLENOID FEED
16 2 1
FEED SOL ON (L) +24VDC PL14.3.8
17 1 2
Leg_Sec007_004FB
Figure 7-10. FEEDER 500 Connection and Wiring Diagram

4. ROS
Name of Signal Line Remarks

PWBA ESS ROS ASSY
ESS DATA- Image signal from ESS PL12.2.7 PL8.1.1
PWBA LD
ESS DATA+ CN602 P/J602 P/J427
DATA-
MCU DATA- Image signal from MCU 1
DATA+
2 1 2
2 1 2 1
MCU DATA+
PCONT PWBA LD control signal in ROS ASSY
PWBA MCU
LASER ON (L) +5VDC PL12.2.1 P/J407 P/J601 P/J424 Single
VREF 1
DATA-
16 1 9
Beam Laser
Diode
DATA+
2 15 2 8
SCANNER MOTOR ON (L) +5VDC PWBA Scanner control signal in ROS ASSY 3
P CONT
14 3 7
SCANNER MOTOR CLOCK +5VDC 4
LASER ON (L) +5VDC
13 4 6
SG
5 12 5 5
SOS SENSED (L) +5VDC Reference signal for start of laser scanning +3.3VDC 6
VREF
11 6 4
SG
7 10 7 3
+5VDC
8 9 8 2
+3.3VDC
9 8 9 1
INTERLOCK
+24VDC SCANNER PWB
P/J425 SCANNER MOTOR
I/L +24VDC
10 7 10 5
SG
11 6 11 4
SCAN MOT ON(L) +5VDC M
12 5 12 3
SCAN MOT CLOCK

13 4 13 1
+5VDC SOS PWB

P/J426
SG
14 3 14 3
SOS SENSED (L) +5VDC
15 2 15 2
+5VDC
16 1 16 1
Leg_007_005RA
Figure 7-11. ROS Connection and Wiring Diagram

5. XEROGRAPHIC
PWBA MCU DRIVE ASSY PRO
PL12.2.1 PL11.1.2
P/J411 IBT BRUSH MOTOR
IBT BRUSH MOT ON
1
IBT BRUSH MOT PWM
2
IBT BRUSH MOT TG
3
Name of Signal Line Remarks INTERLOCK
+24VDC 4
IBT BRUSH MOT CW/CCW M
SG
5
IBT BRUSH MOT ON IBT Brush Motor drive control signal 6
I/L +24VDC
IBT BRUSH MOT PWM IBT CLEANER

IBT BRUSH MOT TG INTERLOCK P/J414
IBT CLEN RET MOT ON
RETRACT MOTOR
IBT BRUSH MOT CW/CCW +24VDC 1

2
SG
M
I/L +24VDC
IBT CLEN RET MOT START IBT Cleaner Retract Motor drive control signal 3
IBT CLEN RET MOT PWM

P/J413 P/J606
IBT CLEN RET MOT TG 8
I/L +24VDC
2
RETRACT SOL ON (L) +24VDC N.C.
9 1
FULL TONER SENSED (H) +5VDC Full toner detection signal generated by Sensor +5VDC P/J617 P/J126
SG
Photo (Sensor Toner Full) 10
FULL TONER SENSED (H) +5VDC
3 1 3 SENSOR
11 2 2 2 TNER FULL
PULL UP +5VDC
IBT RETRACT SENSED (L) +5VDC IBT Cleaner retract detection signal generated by 12 1 3 1 PL7.1.24
Sensor Photo (IBT Retract Sensor) P/J415 P/J107

PULL UP +5VDC
3 3
TR0 SENSED (H) +5VDCS Belt position detection signal generated by 4
SG
2
SENSOR
IBT RETRACT
IBT RETRACT SENSED (L) +5VDC
Sensor Photo (TR0 Sensor) 5 1 PL6.1.26
+5VDC
ANTENNA OUT Crum XERO Antenna control signal P/J416
+5VDC
P/J108
1 3
ANTENNA IN 2
TRO SENSED (H) +5VDC
2
SENSOR TR-0
PL7.1.2
SG
3 1
P/R MOT GAIN P/R MOTOR drive control signal
P/R MOT CLK ANTENNA OUT
P/J109
ANTENNA
4 2
P/R MOT LD 5
ANTENNA IN
1
ASSY
PL7.1.10
P/R MOT FG MOT ASSY P/R
P/J403 P/J200 PL11.1.6
P/R MOT ON (L) + 4
P/R MOT GAIN
7
P/R MOT CLK
5 6
P/R MOT LD
6 5
P/R MOT FG
+5VDC 7 4 M
P/R MOT ON (L) +
8 3
+5VDC
9 2
SG
10 1
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
INTERLOCK INTERLOCK
+24VDC +24VDC
P/J502 P/J201
I/L +24VDC
9 1
SG
10 2
Leg_Sec007_006FC
Figure 7-12. XEROGRAPHIC Connection and Wiring Diagram

6. HIGH VOLTAGE
LV/HVPS PWBA MCU
12.2.3 P/J500 P/J401 PL12.2.1
1st BTR CONT
22 1
IBT CLEANER H/L
21 2
SG
20 3
SG
BCR CONT
4
18 5
DE-TONER CONT
1st BTR CONT 1st BTR Bias voltage control signal 17
16
DEVE BIAS ON
6
7
IBT CLEANER H/L IBT CLEANER Bias voltage control signal 15

14
DEVE BIAS CONT
8
9
IBT CLEANER ON
BCR CONT BCR Bias voltage control signal 13
12
1st BTR REV ON
10
11
2nd BTR REV ON
DE-TONER CONT DE-TONER Bias voltage control signal 11
10
1st BTR ON
12
13
2nd BTR ON
DEVE BIAS ON DEVE Bias ON/OFF signal 9
8
DEVE BIAS CLK
14
15
2nd BTR CONT
DEVE BIAS CONT DEVE Bias voltage control signal 7
6
BCR CLK
16
17
IBT CLEANER ON Belt Cleaning Brush Bias ON/OFF signal

1st BTR REV ON 1st BTR DC Bias control signal PWBA HVPS
PL12.1.9
INTERLOCK INTERLOCK
2nd BTR REV ON 2nd BTR DC Bias control signal +24VDC
P/J515 P/J516
+24VDC
SG
1st BTR Bias ON/OFF signal
1 9
1st BTR ON 2
I/L +24VDC
8
CLEANER H/L
3 7
2nd BTR ON 2nd BTR Bias ON/OFF signal 4
DE-TONER CONT
6
5 5
DEVE BIAS CLK DEVE AC Bias cycle control signal 6
IBT CLEANER ON
4
2nd BTR REV ON
7 3
2nd BTR CONT 2nd BTR Bias voltage control signal 8
2nd BTR ON
2
2nd BTR CONT
9 1
BCR CLK BCR Bias cycle control signal D H
1st BTR DE-TONER
D 1 1 H
C F
DEVE
C 1 1 F
PHOTO
A CONDUCTOR G
BCR
A 1 UNIT 1 G
PL7.1.1
2nd
BTR
2ND BTR
ASSY
PL6.1.12
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
PL9.2.5㨪8
IBT CLEANER Leg_Sec007_007FB
Figure 7-13. HIGH VOLTAGE Connection and Wiring Diagram

7. DEVELOPER
PWBA SWITCH-FRONT
MCU DOOR
PL12.2.1 P/J415 P/J125 PL1.1.26
SG
10 2
FRONT DOOR OPENED (H) +3.3VDC
11 1
SENSOR HUM & TEMP

Name of Signal Line Remarks P/J413 P/J104 PL12.1.6
+5VDC TEMP.
1 4 +5VDC
MAG ROLL MOT ON Magnet Roll Motor drive control signal 2
SG
HUMI.
3
MAG ROLL MOT PWM 3

4
+5VDC
2
1
MAG ROLL MOT TG
MAG ROLL MOT CW/CCW PWBA CRUM
PL12.1.11
P/J412 P/J429 +5VDC
TEMP. Data of temperature inside the printer measured +5VDC
1
DATA
CLOCK
4
by Sensor (analog value) 2

3
+5VDC
3
2
SG
HUMI. Data of humidity inside the printer measured by 4 1
Sensor (analog value)

MOT ASSY MAG
HOME POSITION SENSED (H) +5VDC Deve Rotary home position detection signal PL11.1.4
generated by Sensor Photo (Rotary Home P/J405

MAG ROLL MOT ON
MAGNET
ROLL MOTOR
Position Sensor) (High) 1
2
MAG ROLL MOT PWM
Interlock MAG ROLL MOT TG
ANTENNA OUT CRUM Cartridge Antenna control signal +24VDC
3
4
MAG ROLL MOT CW/CCW M
ANTENNA IN
SG
5
I/L +24VDC
6
SG PWBA Rotate Motor Control control signal P/J406
HOLD
I/L +24VDC
1
DISP CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC DISPENSE CLUTCH
2
CLOCK +5VDC
ON (H) +5VDC P/J413

PULL UP +5VDC
P/J105
5 3 SENSOR ROTARY
DEVE ROT A, XA, B, XB Deve Rotate Motor excitation signal 6
SG
2 HOME POSI
HOME POSITION SENSED (H) +5VDC PL9.1.18
7 1
DATA PWBA CRUM control signal P/J415 P/J106
ANTENNA OUT
CLOCK 1
2
ANTENNA IN
2
1
ANTENNA CTRG
PL9.1.12
FRONT DOOR OPEN (H) +3.3VDC Front Door open/close detection signal PWB ASSY ROT
PL12.1.10
P/J415 P/J430
SG
6 4 MOT
HOLD ASSY ROT
7 3
CLOCK Interlock PL11.1.5
8 2
ON (H) +5VDC +24VDC P/J433 P/J204
9 1 DEVE ROT A
1 1
I/L +24VDC
2 3
LV/HVPS DEVE ROT XA
3 5
PL12.2.3 DEVE ROT B M
Interlock 4 7
+24VDC I/L +24VDC
5 9
DEVE ROT XB
P/J502 P/J432 6 11
I/L +24VDC
11 1
SG
12 3
Leg_Sec007_008FB
Figure 7-14. DEVELOPER Connection and Wiring Diagram

8. 2ND BTR
Name of Signal Line Remarks

FUSER IN SENSED (L) +5VDC 2nd BTR paper detection signal generated by
PWBA MCU
Sensor Photo (Fuser In Sensor) PL12.2.1 P/J418 P/J620 P/J111
+5VDC SG
1 3 1 3
RETRACT SENSED (H) +5VDC 2nd BTR retract detection signal generated by +5VDC 2
FUSER IN SENSED (L)+5VDC
2 2 2
SENSOR
FUSER IN
+5VDC
Sensor Photo (2nd BTR Retract Sensor) 3 1 3 1 PL6.1.3
P/J112
ADC SOL RELEASE ON (L) +24VDC Sensor ADC internal Solenoid ON/OFF signal 4
PULL UP +5VDC
3 SENSOR
SG 2BTR
(The shutter is placed on the position to measure 5
RETRACT SENSED (H) +5VDC
2
RETRACT
6 1 PL6.1.22
reflection from the reference board) 7
SG
COVER OPENED (H) +3.3VDC
8
ADC SOL NIP ON (L) +24VDC Sensor ADC internal Solenoid ON/OFF signal SWITCH
2BTR COVER
(The shutter is placed on the position to measure P/J621 P/J113
PL6.1.18
diffuse light) 2 1 2
1 2 1
ADC LED COLOR ON (L) +5VDC Lighting signal of LED for detection of Sensor
ADC internal color toner patch Interlock
SENSOR ASSY ADC
+24VDC
ADC LED BLACK ON (L) +5VDC Lighting signal of LED for detection of Sensor P/J422
ADC SOL RELEASE ON (L) +24VDC
P/J431 PL6.1.20
1 8
ADC internal black toner patch 2
I/L +24VDC
7
ADC SOL NIP ON (L ) +24VDC
3 6
ADC SENSOR Toner patch density data measured by the sensor 4
SG
5
(analog value) +5VDC
5
ADC LED COLOR ON (L) +5VDC
4
ADC LED BLACK ON (L) +5VDC
6 3
RETRACT MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC 2nd BTR Retract Motor control signal 7
ADC SENSOR
2
+5VDC
RETRACT MOT PWM 8 1
MOT ASSY MICRO

Interlock PL11.1.7
+24VDC P/J403 P/J600
RETRACT MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC
1 3 1
SG
2 2 2 M
I/L +24VDC
3 1 3
Leg_Sec007_009FB
Figure 7-15. 2nd BTR Connection and Wiring Diagram

9. FUSER
MOT ASSY FSR
PWBA MCU P/J404
FUSER MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC PL11.1.3
PL12.2.1 1
+5VDC FUSER MOT PWM
2
Interlock FUSER MOT TG
3
+24VDC +5VDC M
4
SG
I/L +24VDC
6
FUSER MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC Fuser Motor drive control signal
FUSER MOT PWM FUSER ASSY
PL10.1.1
FUSER MOT TG P/J417 P/J614 P/J615

RL
FUSER MOT CW/CCW 1
SG
12 2 2 1 Safety Temp.
2 11 3 1 2 Sensor
RL Heat Roll surface temperature data measured by 3

SG
Vc
P/J616
Temp. Sensor for high-temperature detection 4

5
Vd
10 4
9 5
3
2
1
2 Temp. Sensor
(analog value) +5VDC 8 6 1 3
P/J619 P/J110
VC Temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for 6
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
7 7 3 1 3
temperature control (analog value) 7

8
FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +5VDC
6
5
8
9
2
1
2
3
2
1
VD Temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for FUSER EXIT

SENSOR
temperature control (analog value)
FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +5VDC Paper ejection detection signal generated by
Sensor Photo (Fuser Exit Sensor) (High: P/J403
SG
P/J114
11 2 SWITCH-FUSER
CRUM control signal FUSER DOOR SW OPENED (H) +3.3VDC DOOR

DATA 12 1 PL1.1.36
CLOCK LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
P/J503
P/J401 P/J500 4
FLICKER CLK +3.3VDC Flicker countermeasure control signal (AC220V/ 21

FRIKER CLK +3.3VDC
LAMP ON (L)
2 5
AC240V only)
22 1 6
LAMP ON (L) + Fuser Lamp lighting signal FUSER

P614
220/240V
Thermostat
RELAY PWBA FUSER CONT
RELAY ON (L) +24VDC Fuser Lamp Relay ON/OFF signal in PWBA CONTROL P/J2 PL12.2.12 3
4
Fuser Cont 220/240V ONLY USE
5
2
Heater
FUSER DOOR SW OPEND (H) +3.3VDC Cover Fuser open/close detection signal Interlock
+24VDC 6
100/115V
P/J410 P/J1
I/L +24VDC P/J3 P/J614 Thermostat
10 1
2 3
9 3
RELAY ON (L) +24VDC 1 1
FUSER LOCK Heater

SWITCH
PL10.1.6
1 2
Leg_Sec007_010FB
Figure 7-16. FUSER Connection and Wiring Diagram

10. CONTROLLER
PWBA ESS PWBA MCU

PL12.2.7 CN601 P/J400 PL12.2.1
1 16
2 15
3 14
4 13
5 12
6 11
7 10
8 9
9 8
10 7
11 6
12 5
13 4
14 3
15 2
16 1
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
+3.3VDC
CN501 P/J501
1 1
2 2
+5VDC
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
CN502 P/J510
1 1
2 2
OP PANEL
PL1.1.17
CN405 CN1
Leg_007_011FA
Figure 7-17. CONTROLLER Connection and Wiring Diagram

7.3 Packaging Specification MAIN UNIT
Fax Model
C A U T IO N Carrying the product should be done by two or more people
keeping it in a horizontal position. 1) Main Unit
Since the rear side of the product is heavier than its front side, 2) Toner Cartridge (YMCK)
3) POWER CORD
be aware of the difference when carrying the product. 4) Anticounterfeit Label (15 countries)
Use extreme care during the installation to avoid an accident Note: Photoconductor unit is packed
separately.
and injury.
1. After unpacking, make sure that there is no missing component, and check the 3)
appearance.
2. Then remove all tapes and protection materials.
2)
1)
4)
APPENDIX Packaging Specification 599

Base Model 500-SHEET CASSETTE

1) Main Unit
2) IBT ASSY
1) Main Unit
3) Toner Cartridge (YMCK)
4) POWER CORD
5) CAUTION SHEET
6) Anticounterfeit Label (15 countries)
Note: Photoconductor unit is packed
separately.
4)
1)
5) 3)
2)
6)
1)
APPENDIX Packaging Specification 600

7.4 Parts List Table 7-5. AcuLaser CX11/CX21

No. Name
AcuLaser CX11/CX21 01-01-38 COVER FUSER GUIDE
Table 7-5. AcuLaser CX11/CX21 01-01-99 KIT SLIDE BAR
No. Name 01-02-39 COVER LEG LH OUTER
01-01-02 TRAY EXTENSION 01-02-40 COVER HINGE;L
01-01-03 COVER TOP 01-02-41 COVER LEG LH INNER
01-01-04 COVER FUSER 01-02-42 COVER LEG RH INNER
01-01-05 COVER TOP SIDE L 01-02-44 COVER HINGE;R
01-01-06 COVER TOP SIDE R 01-02-45 COVER LEG RH OUTER
01-01-07 SWITCH ASSY TOP 01-02-47 HINGE LARGE
01-01-10 COVER CLEANER 01-02-48 HINGE LARGE;B
01-01-100 “LOGO PLATE,13X54;C” 12-02-01 PWBA MCU
01-01-12 FOOT REAR 12-02-02 FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
01-01-13 FOOT FRONT 12-02-03 LV/HVPS
01-01-14 COVER MSI 12-02-04 HARNESS ASSY AC
01-01-15 COVER FRONT-L 12-02-05 FFC-ASSY ESS
01-01-16 COVER FRONT ASSY-U 12-02-07 “BOARD ASSY., MAIN”
01-01-17 CONTROL PANEL 12-02-08 “BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY”
01-01-18 HARNESS 12-02-09 NETWORK BOARD
01-01-19 COVER ASSY LH 12-02-10 HARNESS ASSY MAIN
01-01-20 COVER LH 12-02-11 “BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY”
01-01-21 COVER ESS 12-02-12 PWBA FUSER CONT
01-01-22 SWITCH ASSY FUSER 04-01-01 MSI ASSY
01-01-23 COVER TRAY 04-01-02 ROLL ASSY MSI
01-01-24 COVER INNER TOP 04-01-08 ROLL MSI
01-01-26 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH 04-01-09 CHUTE MSI
01-01-27 SWITCH INLK FRONT 04-01-11 GEAR MANUAL
01-01-28 COVER ASSY RH 04-01-12 GUIDE SIDE L
01-01-33 COVER INNER LOW 04-01-13 GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
01-01-34 SWITCH INLK FRONT 04-01-15 PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI
01-01-36 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH 04-01-16 HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI
APPENDIX Parts List 601

Table 7-5. AcuLaser CX11/CX21 Table 7-5. AcuLaser CX11/CX21

No. Name No. Name
04-01-17 PLATE ASSY RETARD 06-01-08 GEAR 27
04-01-20 OIL DAMPER 06-01-12 2ND BTR ASSY
04-01-22 GEAR PICK UP 06-01-13 CAM ASSY-2ND
04-01-23 SOLENOID PICK UP 06-01-15 COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
04-01-24 SENSOR UPPER PASS 06-01-16 HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW
04-01-25 ACUTUATOR EMPTY 06-01-18 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
04-01-26 HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 06-01-20 SENSOR ASSY ADC
05-01-01 COVER-PH 06-01-21 HOLDER-ADC 2ND
05-01-02 CHUTE ASSY-REAR 06-01-22 SENSOR UPPER PASS
05-02-01 FRAME ASSY-PH 06-01-26 SENSOR UPPER PASS
05-02-02 CLUTCH ASSY REGI 06-01-27 PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY
05-02-06 GEAR-REGI 06-01-29 CAM ASSY-IBT CL
05-02-08 ROLL REGI RUBBER 06-01-30 HARNESS ASSY ADC
05-02-11 VARISTOR 07-01-02 SENSOR TR-0
05-02-12 ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI 07-01-04 GUIDE CRU ASSY D
05-02-16 SENSOR 07-01-12 HARNESS ASSY XERO
05-02-17 SPRING-ACTUATOR 07-01-13 GUIDE CRU ASSY AD
05-02-18 ACTUATOR-REGI 07-01-15 LEVER-LATCH PR
05-02-19 SENSOR UPPER PASS 07-01-16 CAP-PLATE PR
05-02-20 MOTOR-PH 07-01-20 BCR CLN XERO ASSY
05-02-21 HARNESS ASSY P/H2 07-01-24 SENSOR TNER FULL
05-02-22 CLUTCH ASSY REGI 07-01-27 GUIDE CRU
05-02-23 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH 07-01-30 WIRE ASSY IBT
05-02-24 DRIVE ASSY PH 07-01-31 WIRE ASSY BTR
05-02-25 COVER HARNESS 07-01-32 WIRE ASSY BCR
06-01-01 CHUTE ASSY-FSR 07-01-33 WIRE ASSY DTN
06-01-03 SENSOR 08-01-01 ROS ASSY
06-01-04 HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS 08-01-02 CLEANER ASSY
06-01-06 DIODE FUSER 08-01-05 CLEANER ASSY BASE
06-01-07 FRAME ASSY-2ND 09-01-01 LATCH ASSY-ROTARY

Table 7-5. AcuLaser CX11/CX21 Table 7-5. AcuLaser CX11/CX21

No. Name No. Name
09-01-04 LEVER LATCH 12-01-11 PWBA CRUM
09-01-10 ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG 13-02-01 IR BASE B ASSY
09-01-15 LEVER CTRG SET 13-02-01-2 SHEET HOLE
09-01-17 HOLDER ASSY-BIAS 13-02-02 CORE ASSY
09-01-18 SENSOR UPPER PASS 13-02-03 IR TIMING BELT
09-01-20 WIRE ASSY DEVE 13-02-04 IR SHAFT
09-02-05 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K 13-02-05 PLATE HW
09-02-06 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y 13-02-06 FFC CR
09-02-07 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M 13-02-07 SPONGE1
09-02-08 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C 13-02-08 SPONGE3
09-02-09 FRAME ASSY-ROTARY 13-02-09 PLATE HARNESS
09-02-10 PIVOT ASSY 13-02-10 ASSLUG ASSY GND
09-02-11 PIVOT AD 13-02-11 ASSLUG ASSY GND 2
09-02-13 BEARING BALL 13-02-12 PULLEY ASSY
10-01-01 FUSER ASSY 13-02-13 MOTOR ASSY
10-01-02 HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L 13-02-14 CCD MODULE ASSY;B
10-01-06 FUSER LOCK SWITCH 13-02-15 IR COVER B ASSY
10-01-07 HOOK BASE;L 13-02-16 FFC CLIP
10-01-08 HOOK BASE;R 13-02-17 FERRITE BEAD
11-01-01 DRIVE ASSY BTR 13-02-18 LOCK CR
11-01-02 DRIVE ASSY PRO 13-02-24 HINGE HOLDER 1
11-01-03 MOT ASSY FSR 13-02-26 “SCANNER UNIT,STD”
11-01-04 MOT ASSY MAG 14-03-01 DOCUMENT COVER UNIT
11-01-05 MOT ASSY ROT 14-03-01-2 WHITE PAD ASSY
11-01-06 MOT ASSY P/R 14-03-02 HINGE HOLDER 2
11-01-07 MOT ASSY MICRO 14-03-05 DOCUMENT COVER
11-01-09 GEAR 2ND
12-01-06 SENSOR HUM & TEMP
12-01-09 PWBA HVPS
12-01-10 PWB ASSY ROT

AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F Table 7-6. AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F
Table 7-6. AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F No. Name

01-02-39 COVER LEG LH OUTER
No. Name
01-02-40 COVER HINGE;L
01-01-02 TRAY EXTENSION
01-02-41 COVER LEG LH INNER
01-01-03 COVER TOP
01-02-42 COVER LEG RH INNER
01-01-04 COVER FUSER
01-02-44 COVER HINGE;R
01-01-05 COVER TOP SIDE L
01-02-45 COVER LEG RH OUTER
01-01-06 COVER TOP SIDE R
01-02-47 HINGE LARGE
01-01-07 SWITCH ASSY TOP
01-02-48 HINGE LARGE;B
01-01-10 COVER CLEANER
13-01-01 ADF FRAME ASSY
01-01-100 “LOGO PLATE,13X54;C”
13-01-02 ADF BASE ASSY
01-01-12 FOOT REAR
13-01-03 PAPER GUIDE ASSY
01-01-13 FOOT FRONT
13-01-04 ADF COVER C
01-01-14 COVER MSI
13-01-05 ADF COVER R
01-01-15 COVER FRONT-L
13-01-06 SDH COVER EXTEND
01-01-16 COVER FRONT ASSY-U
13-01-07 PCB COVER
01-01-17 CONTROL PANEL
13-01-08 ADF PCB ASSY
01-01-18 HARNESS
13-01-09 SDH COVER
01-01-19 COVER ASSY LH
13-01-10 HOOK FIX PLATE
01-01-20 COVER LH
13-01-14 WHITE PAD ASSY;B
01-01-21 COVER ESS
13-01-17 MAGNETIC
01-01-22 SWITCH ASSY FUSER
13-01-19 HINGE SMALL
01-01-23 COVER TRAY
13-01-20 CABEL;B
01-01-24 COVER INNER TOP
13-01-22 RUBBER FOOT
01-01-26 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
13-01-23 ADF UNIT
01-01-27 SWITCH INLK FRONT
12-02-01 PWBA MCU
01-01-28 COVER ASSY RH
12-02-02 FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
01-01-33 COVER INNER LOW
12-02-03 LV/HVPS
01-01-34 SWITCH INLK FRONT
12-02-04 HARNESS ASSY AC
12-02-05 FFC-ASSY ESS
01-01-38 COVER FUSER GUIDE
12-02-07 “BOARD ASSY., MAIN”
01-01-99 KIT SLIDE BAR

Table 7-6. AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F Table 7-6. AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F

No. Name No. Name
12-02-08 “BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY” 05-02-16 SENSOR
12-02-09 NETWORK BOARD 05-02-17 SPRING-ACTUATOR
12-02-10 HARNESS ASSY MAIN 05-02-18 ACTUATOR-REGI
12-02-11 “BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY” 05-02-19 SENSOR UPPER PASS
12-02-12 PWBA FUSER CONT 05-02-20 MOTOR-PH
12-02-16 FAX BOARD 05-02-21 HARNESS ASSY P/H2
04-01-01 MSI ASSY 05-02-22 CLUTCH ASSY REGI
04-01-02 ROLL ASSY MSI 05-02-23 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
04-01-08 ROLL MSI 05-02-24 DRIVE ASSY PH
04-01-09 CHUTE MSI 05-02-25 COVER HARNESS
04-01-11 GEAR MANUAL 06-01-01 CHUTE ASSY-FSR
04-01-12 GUIDE SIDE L 06-01-03 SENSOR
04-01-13 GUIDE ASSY SIDE R 06-01-04 HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS
04-01-15 PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI 06-01-06 DIODE FUSER
04-01-16 HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI 06-01-07 FRAME ASSY-2ND
04-01-17 PLATE ASSY RETARD 06-01-08 GEAR 27
04-01-20 OIL DAMPER 06-01-12 2ND BTR ASSY
04-01-22 GEAR PICK UP 06-01-13 CAM ASSY-2ND
04-01-23 SOLENOID PICK UP 06-01-15 COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
04-01-24 SENSOR UPPER PASS 06-01-16 HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW
04-01-25 ACUTUATOR EMPTY 06-01-18 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
04-01-26 HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 06-01-20 SENSOR ASSY ADC
05-01-01 COVER-PH 06-01-21 HOLDER-ADC 2ND
05-01-02 CHUTE ASSY-REAR 06-01-22 SENSOR UPPER PASS
05-02-01 FRAME ASSY-PH 06-01-26 SENSOR UPPER PASS
05-02-02 CLUTCH ASSY REGI 06-01-27 PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY
05-02-06 GEAR-REGI 06-01-29 CAM ASSY-IBT CL
05-02-08 ROLL REGI RUBBER 06-01-30 HARNESS ASSY ADC
05-02-11 VARISTOR 07-01-02 SENSOR TR-0
05-02-12 ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI 07-01-04 GUIDE CRU ASSY D


No. Name No. Name
07-01-12 HARNESS ASSY XERO 10-01-02 HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
07-01-13 GUIDE CRU ASSY AD 10-01-06 FUSER LOCK SWITCH
07-01-15 LEVER-LATCH PR 10-01-07 HOOK BASE;L
07-01-16 CAP-PLATE PR 10-01-08 HOOK BASE;R
07-01-20 BCR CLN XERO ASSY 11-01-01 DRIVE ASSY BTR
07-01-24 SENSOR TNER FULL 11-01-02 DRIVE ASSY PRO
07-01-27 GUIDE CRU 11-01-03 MOT ASSY FSR
07-01-30 WIRE ASSY IBT 11-01-04 MOT ASSY MAG
07-01-31 WIRE ASSY BTR 11-01-05 MOT ASSY ROT
07-01-32 WIRE ASSY BCR 11-01-06 MOT ASSY P/R
07-01-33 WIRE ASSY DTN 11-01-07 MOT ASSY MICRO
08-01-01 ROS ASSY 11-01-09 GEAR 2ND
08-01-02 CLEANER ASSY 12-01-06 SENSOR HUM & TEMP
08-01-05 CLEANER ASSY BASE 12-01-09 PWBA HVPS
09-01-01 LATCH ASSY-ROTARY 12-01-10 PWB ASSY ROT
09-01-04 LEVER LATCH 12-01-11 PWBA CRUM
09-01-10 ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG 14-02-01 FRAME COVER ASSY
09-01-15 LEVER CTRG SET 14-02-01-2 NEUTRALIZING BRUSH
09-01-17 HOLDER ASSY-BIAS 14-02-08 CLIP
09-01-18 SENSOR UPPER PASS 14-02-09 KNOB
09-01-20 WIRE ASSY DEVE 14-02-11 COVER SENSOR
09-02-05 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K 14-02-12 COVER HOOK
09-02-06 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y 14-02-13 BUSH D6
09-02-07 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M 14-02-16 MOTOR
09-02-08 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C 14-02-17 TURNING ROLLER
09-02-09 FRAME ASSY-ROTARY 14-02-18 PAPER GUIDE R
09-02-10 PIVOT ASSY 14-02-19 EXIT ROLLER
09-02-11 PIVOT AD 14-02-20 EXIT ROLLER SPRING
09-02-13 BEARING BALL 14-02-25 GEAR 30T
10-01-01 FUSER ASSY 14-02-26 GEAR 40T 18T


No. Name No. Name
14-02-27 GEAR 15T 17-04-09 AS SENSOR
14-02-28 GEAR 60T 18T 17-04-12 SENSOR LEVER
14-02-29 GEAR 33T M0.5 18-01-01 IR BASE A ASSY
14-02-30 GEAR 26T 18-01-01-2 SHEET HOLE
14-02-31 GEAR 48T 18-01-02 CORE ASSY
14-02-32 GEAR 32T 15T 18-01-03 IR TIMING BELT
14-02-33 E RING 18-01-04 IR SHAFT
15-02-02 PAD BASE ASSY 18-01-05 PLATE HW
15-02-03 CORK HOLDER ASSY 18-01-07 SPONGE1
15-02-04 GUIDE FRONT ASSY 18-01-08 SPONGE3
15-02-05 FIX PLATE ASSY 18-01-09 PLATE HARNESS
15-02-06 ADF FRAME UNIT 18-01-10 ASSLUG ASSY GND
15-02-06-7 READING SHEET 18-01-11 ASSLUG ASSY GND 2
15-02-07 EXIT ROLL ASSY 18-01-12 PULLEY ASSY
16-03-02 PAPER GUIDE EXTEND 18-01-13 MOTOR ASSY
16-03-03 “DOC,AJUST L” 18-01-14 CCD MODULE ASSY;B
16-03-04 “DOC,AJUST R” 18-01-15 IR COVER A ASSY
16-03-05 GEAR PLATE 18-01-16 FFC CLIP
16-03-06 TRAY GEAR 24T 18-01-17 FERRITE BEAD
16-03-08 PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L 18-01-18 LOCK CR
16-03-09 PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R 18-01-23 FFC BOARD
17-04-01 PICK UP ASSY 18-01-26 PLATE HARNESS 2
17-04-01-1 ADF ROLLER 18-01-27 PCB ASSY
17-04-01-2 PICK UP ROLLER 18-01-29 “SCANNER UNIT,ADF”
17-04-02 E CLUTCH UNIT
17-04-03 GEAR 20T
17-04-04 TENSION SPRING
17-04-05 GEAR 12T
17-04-06 E RETAINING RING
17-04-07 CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU

Option cassette unit Table 7-7. Option cassette unit
Table 7-7. Option cassette unit No. Name

01-03-29 LEVER 500
No. Name
01-03-32 GUIDE CST R
01-01-01 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY
01-03-34 GUIDE CST L
01-01-02 GUIDE END ASSY
01-04-01 HOUSING ASSY FEED
01-01-04 GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500
01-04-03 SENSOR UPPER PASS
01-01-05 PINION 12
01-04-04 ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST
01-01-06 GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
01-04-05 SPRING ACTUATOR
01-01-09 LOCK LIFT R
01-04-06 ACTUATOR T/R
01-01-10 ROLL LINK
01-04-07 SENSOR UPPER PASS
01-01-12 COVER FRONT CST 500
01-04-11 ROLL ASSY FEED 500
01-01-14 LOCK LIFT L
01-04-14 HARNESS ASSY FEED 3
01-02-01 COVER LEFT 500
01-04-15 CAP ACTUATOR
01-02-02 CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
01-02-10 COVER RIGHT 500
01-03-02 HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
01-03-03 PWB TRAY 500
01-03-04 PWBA MOT
01-03-08 SOLENOID FEED
01-03-09 MOT ASSY FSR
01-03-10 GEAR ASSY DRIVE
01-03-11 GEAR FEED
01-03-12 CLUTCH ASSY FEED
01-03-14 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
01-03-16 ROLL ASSY TURN 500
01-03-20 FOOT FEEDER
01-03-21 BLOCK CST
01-03-22 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2
01-03-23 CHUTE ASSY 500
01-03-24 HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
01-03-26 FILM ASSY FDR

7.5 Exploded Diagram

AcuLaser CX11/CX21
APPENDIX Exploded Diagram 609

C588-CASE-001 The parts to which no reference number
is assigned will not be available as
after-sale service parts.
01-01-04
01-01-02
01-01-03
01-01-23
01-01-19
01-01-21
01-01-24
01-01-38
01-01-05
01-01-20
01-01-22
01-01-34 01-01-07
01-01-06
01-01-36
01-01-26
01-01-33
01-01-18
01-01-27
A
01-01-17
01-01-12
01-01-12
01-01-16 01-01-13 01-01-13
01-01-100
01-01-15
01-01-99
A 01-01-10
01-01-28
Leg_005_001RC
01-01-14 Front
FOR LP-A500/EPSON AcuLaserCX11N/CN11/CX11/N NO.1-1 Rev.01 C588

C588-CASE-002 The parts to which no reference number
01-02-47
01-02-48
01-02-40
01-02-44
01-02-39
01-02-41
01-02-42
01-02-45
Leg_005_031RA

The parts to which no reference number
C588-ELEC-001 is assigned will not be available as
12-02-01
12-02-02
Front A
12-02-03
12-02-04
12-02-06
12-02-11 A 12-02-05
B
12-02-08
B 12-02-07
12-02-12 12-02-09 (Only the spec with the Network Card)
12-02-13
12-02-10
Leg_005_013RC

C588-MECH-001 The parts to which no reference number
04-01-01
04-01-09
04-01-02
04-01-08
04-01-15
04-01-11
04-01-12
04-01-13
04-01-26
04-01-24
04-01-25
04-01-16
04-01-17
04-01-23
04-01-22 04-01-20
Front Leg_Sec005_002EB

C588-MECH-001DOC The parts to which no reference number
14-03-05 (All this page)
14-03-01
14-03-02
14-03-02
14-03-01-2

C588-MECH-001IR-B The parts to which no reference number
13-02-24
13-02-18
13-02-24
13-02-17 13-02-15
13-02-10
13-02-14 13-02-04
13-02-16 13-02-13
13-02-03
13-02-08
13-02-02
13-02-09
13-02-06 13-02-05
13-03-07
13-02-12
13-02-11
13-02-01-2
13-02-01-2 13-02-01-2
13-02-01
13-02-01-2

05-01-01
05-01-02
[Ref PL5.2.1]
Front
Leg_Sec005_003RA

05-02-02
05-02-06
05-02-23
05-02-24
05-02-08
B
05-02-06
05-02-25 05-02-22
05-02-11
D 05-02-18
05-02-19 05-02-17 05-02-16
B 05-02-20 E
A
E
05-02-21 C
05-02-12

06-01-03 06-01-01
06-01-04
C
06-01-06
06-01-07
06-01-08
B
06-01-12
06-01-13
06-01-30
06-01-15
06-01-18
06-01-16
E C
06-01-20
06-01-26
D
06-01-21 06-01-27
06-01-22
A B
E
06-01-29
Front Leg_Sec005_005RA

07-01-04
C
07-01-02
07-01-13
07-01-15
07-01-16
07-01-12 C
B
07-01-33 D E A
D E F
07-01-30 07-01-31 07-01-24

F
07-01-32 07-01-20
07-01-27
07-01-27

08-01-01
08-01-02
Front
08-01-05
Leg_Sec005_007RB

09-01-01 09-01-10
09-01-04
09-01-15
09-01-17
09-01-18
09-01-20

C588-MECH-008 is assigned will not be available as
09-02-05 (with 11)
09-02-10 09-02-10
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-09
09-02-08 (with 11) 09-02-06 (with 11)

09-02-13
09-02-13
09-02-10
09-02-10
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-07 (with 11)

10-01-01
10-01-02
10-01-07 10-01-08
10-01-06
Front
Leg_005_010RA

11-01-02
11-01-03
Front
11-01-09
11-01-01
11-01-04
11-01-05
11-01-06
11-01-07
Leg_005_011RA

12-01-11
12-01-10
12-01-06
12-01-09

AcuLaser CX11F/CX21F

C588-CASE-001A The parts to which no reference number
01-01-04
01-01-02
01-01-03
01-01-23
01-01-19
01-01-21
01-01-24
01-01-38
01-01-05
01-01-20
01-01-22
01-01-34 01-01-07
01-01-06
01-01-36
01-01-26
01-01-33
01-01-18
01-01-27
A
01-01-17
01-01-12
01-01-12
01-01-16 01-01-13 01-01-13
01-01-100
01-01-15
01-01-99
A 01-01-10
01-01-28
Leg_005_001RC
01-01-14 Front
FOR LP-A50F/EPSON AcuLaserCX11NF/CN11F/CX11F/NF NO.1-1 Rev.01 C588

C588-CASE-001ADF The parts to which no reference number
13-01-03
13-01-04
13-01-02
13-01-05
13-01-06
13-01-01
13-01-07
13-01-20
13-01-19
13-01-08
13-01-17
13-01-19
13-01-14
13-01-10
13-01-09
13-01-22

C588-CASE-002A The parts to which no reference number
01-02-47
01-02-48
01-02-40
01-02-44
01-02-39
01-02-41
01-02-42
01-02-45
Leg_005_031RA

C588-ELEC-001A is assigned will not be available as
12-02-01
12-02-02
Front A
12-02-03
12-02-04
12-02-06
12-02-11 A 12-02-05
B
12-02-08
B 12-02-07
12-02-16
12-02-12
12-02-09 (Only the spec with the Network Card)
12-02-13
12-02-10
Leg_005_013RC

C588-MECH-001A The parts to which no reference number
04-01-01
04-01-09
04-01-02
04-01-08
04-01-15
04-01-11
04-01-12
04-01-13
04-01-26
04-01-24
04-01-25
04-01-16
04-01-17
04-01-23
04-01-22 04-01-20

C588-MECH-001ADF The parts to which no reference number
14-02-01-2
14-02-01
14-02-33
14-02-27
14-02-33 14-02-16
14-02-26
14-02-32
14-02-11 14-02-30
14-02-25
14-02-28
14-02-08 14-02-29
14-02-12
14-02-31
14-02-17 14-02-20
14-02-13 14-02-08
14-02-12
14-02-20
14-02-09
14-02-13 14-02-18

C588-MECH-001IR-A
18-01-18
18-01-17 18-01-15
18-01-10 18-01-04
18-01-14
18-01-16 18-01-13
18-01-26
18-01-03
18-01-09
18-01-08
18-01-02
18-01-07
18-01-05
18-01-23
18-01-27
18-01-12
18-01-11
18-01-01-2
18-01-01-2
18-01-01-2
18-01-01
18-01-01-2

05-01-01
05-01-02
[Ref PL5.2.1]
Front
Leg_Sec005_003RA

15-02-03
15-02-02
15-02-04
15-02-05
15-02-06
15-02-07

05-02-02
05-02-06
05-02-23
05-02-24
05-02-08
B
05-02-06
05-02-25 05-02-22
05-02-11
D 05-02-18
05-02-19 05-02-17 05-02-16
B 05-02-20 E
A
E
05-02-21 C
05-02-12

16-03-04
16-03-03
16-03-02
16-03-08
16-03-09
16-03-06
16-03-05

06-01-03 06-01-01
06-01-04
C
06-01-06
06-01-07
06-01-08
B
06-01-12
06-01-13
06-01-30
06-01-15
06-01-18
06-01-16
E C
06-01-20
06-01-26
D
06-01-21 06-01-27
06-01-22
A B
E
06-01-29

17-04-06
17-04-03
17-04-05 17-04-07
17-04-12
17-04-02
17-04-09
17-04-01
17-04-04
17-04-01-1
17-04-01-2

07-01-04
C
07-01-02
07-01-13
07-01-15
07-01-16
07-01-12 C
B
07-01-33 D E A
D E F
07-01-30 07-01-31 07-01-24

F
07-01-32 07-01-20
07-01-27
07-01-27

08-01-01
08-01-02
Front
08-01-05
Leg_Sec005_007RB

09-01-01 09-01-10
09-01-04
09-01-15
09-01-17
09-01-18
09-01-20

C588-MECH-008A is assigned will not be available as
09-02-05 (with 11)
09-02-10 09-02-10
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-09
09-02-08 (with 11) 09-02-06 (with 11)

09-02-13
09-02-13
09-02-10
09-02-10
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-07 (with 11)

10-01-01
10-01-02
10-01-07 10-01-08
10-01-06
Front Leg_005_010RA

11-01-02
11-01-03
Front
11-01-09
11-01-01
11-01-04
11-01-05
11-01-06
11-01-07
Leg_005_011RA

12-01-11
12-01-10
12-01-06
12-01-09

Option cassette unit

C802-OPTI-053A The parts to which no reference number
01-01-05 All this page including
01-01-02
01-01-04
01-01-05 01-01-06
01-01-10
01-01-14
01-01-10
01-01-09
01-01-12
Front Leg_Sec005_018EA
FOR 500-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit NO.1-1 Rev.01

01-02-02
01-02-01
01-02-10
[Ref PL1.3.1]
[Ref PL1.1.1]
Front Leg_Sec005_019EA

01-03-12
01-03-08
01-03-09 01-03-10
D
E
01-03-11 01-03-14
01-03-16
01-03-18
F
C
01-03-04
D E
01-03-03
F
01-03-02
A
01-03-21
B
01-03-20
01-03-20
01-03-21 01-03-20
C 01-03-22
01-03-20 01-03-23
01-03-26
01-03-24
[Ref PL1.4.1]
01-03-29
01-03-34
Front B
01-03-32
Leg_Sec005_020EA

01-04-01 All this page including
01-04-15
01-04-14
01-04-03
01-04-04
01-04-05
01-04-06
01-04-07
01-04-11
Front
Leg_Sec005_021EB

7.6 Schematic Circuit Diagram

C588 MAIN (AcuLaser CX11/CX11F)
APPENDIX Schematic Circuit Diagram 652

Board : C588MAIN BOARD
Model : Aculaser CX11/CX11F
Sheet : 1 of 6
Rev. :A
Sheet : 2 of 6
Rev. :A
Sheet : 3 of 6
Rev. :A
Sheet : 4 of 6
Rev. :A
Sheet : 5 of 6
Rev. :A
Sheet : 6 of 6
Rev. :A
C680 MAIN (AcuLaser CX21/CX21F)
APPENDIX Schematic Circuit Diagram 659

Sheet : 1 of 6
Rev. :B
Sheet : 2 of 6
Rev. :A
Sheet : 3 of 6
Rev. :A
Model: Aculaser CX21/CX21F
Sheet : 4 of 6
Rev. : C
Model: Aculaser CX21/CX21F
Sheet : 5 of 6
Rev. : B
Sheet : 6 of 6
Rev. :A
7.7 Fax Unit System
7.7.1 List of System Parameter
C A U T IO N Some of the system parameter settings are restricted according

to the regulations or standards of the country or region. To
prevent those settings from being changed by mistake,
changing system parameter settings that are not described in
this manual is prohibited.
Be sure to observe the specified setting range for the system
parameter. Setting a value out of the range is not guaranteed.
If a malfunction of the fax operation occurs due to the
improper setting, the system parameter should be initialized.
See “3.3.2.1 Memory Clear” (p148)
The list of system parameter is given on the following pages.

“ System” (p667)
“ Print” (p670)
“ Scan” (p671)
“ Phone Line” (p672)
“ Communication Control” (p679)
“ Report” (p688)
“ Image Data Processing” (p689)
See the pages given below for information on how to check and overwrite the system parameter.
“3.3.2.3 Parameter Check” (p150)
“3.6.4.3 System Parameter Settings” (p311)
APPENDIX Fax Unit System 666

SYSTEM
Table 7-8. List of System Parameter (System)

Maintenance
Code User Internal
Label Description Setting Value Default Remarks
Access Address
Main Sub
SYS_COUNTRY 300 009 { 001 Country setting 0x00 ~ 0xFF (ITU-T T.35 Country Code) Common Original codes are
Phone line-related system parameter settings are changed 0x00 = Japan (0xFF) assigned to countries
automatically according to the selected country. 0x04 = Germany or areas that are not
0x07 = Argentine defined in T.35
0x09 = Australia
0x0A = Austria
0x0F = Belgium
0x16 = Brazil
0x20 = Canada
0x26 = China
0x2E = Czechoslovakia
0x31 = Denmark
0x3C = Finland
0x3D = France
0x46 = Greece
0x50 = Hong Kong
0x51 = Hungary
0x57 = Ireland
0x59 = Italy
0x61 = Korea
0x69 = Luxembourg
0x6C = Malaysia
0x73 = Mexico
0x7B = Holland
0x7E = New Zealand
0x82 = Norway
0x8A = Poland
0x8B = Portugal
0x9C = Singapore
0xA0 = Spain
0xA5 = Sweden
0xA6 = Swiss
0xA9 = Thailand
0xB4 = England
0xB5 = America
0xB8 = Russia
0xFD = CTR (*1)
0xFE = Taiwan(*1)
0xFF = Common (*1)


Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
SYS_OEM_MODE 300 010 --- 002 OEM setting 0 = ORIGINAL ORIGINAL Fixed to 0
1 = OEM (0) (for expansion)
SYS_LANGUAGE 300 011 { 003 Language setting to be used for printing fax reports 0 = Japanese Japanese ---
1 = English (0)
2 = US English
3 = Germany
4 = French
5 = Spanish
6 = Portuguese
7 = Italian
8 = Dutch
9 = Russian
10 = Chinese
11 = Korean
12 = Taiwanese
13 = Danish
14 = Swedish
15 = Finnish
SYS_MACHINE_MODE 300 028 --- 004 Operating Mode 0 = Normal mode1 = Maintenance mode Normal ---
(0)
SYS_SPEAKER_ENABLE 300 002 --- 005 Enables or disables the line monitor function 0 = Disable Enable Fixed to 1
When this is set to “disable”, the speaker volume setting (300- 1 = Enable (1)
003) becomes invalid. (The speaker does not sound)
SYS_SPEAKER_VOLUME 300 003 { 006 Speaker volume setting 1 = OFF Medium ---
2 = Minimum (3)
3 = Medium
4 = Full
SYS_INFORMATION_SERVICE 300 004 --- 007 Enables or disables the notification function 0 = Disable Disable Not used
1 = Enable (0)
SYS_FILE_MEM_SIZE 300 008 --- 008 Total memory size (SDRAM) for a file 1 to 4 Mbytes 4Mbytes Not used
SYS_FORCED_POLLING 300 012 --- 009 Enables or disables the forced polling function 0 = Disable Disable Not used
1 = Enable (0)
SYS_DRPD_ENABLE 300 029 --- 00A Enables or disables the DRPD setting 0 = Disable Disable ---
When this is set to “disable”, the DRPD setting (100-013) becomes 1 = Enable (0)
invalid.
SYS_RX_RESTRICT 310 005 --- 00B Enables or disables the fax receiving restriction function 0 = Disable Disable Not used
When the function is enabled, the fax unit does not accept faxes 1 = Enable (0)
from sources whose numbers are not stored in the speed-dial
memory.


Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
SYS_RX_LIMIT_MEM 310 031 --- 00C Threshold level for judging received faxes as NG 0 ~ 100 % (1step = 1%)100% = Rejects to 0% ---
When available memory lowers the threshold level, faxes are receive all faxes. (0)
not received automatically.
SYS_SIFT_PRINT_LIMIT_MEM 310 032 --- 00D Threshold level for judging to print a received fax immediately 0 ~ 99 % (1step = 1%) 20% ---
When available memory lowers the threshold level, a received (20)
fax is printed out immediately without being stored into the
memory.
SYS_TX_LIMIT_MEM 310 033 --- 00E Threshold level for judging sending faxes as NG 0 ~ 100 % (1step = 1%) 0% ---
When available memory lowers the threshold level, any more (0)
fax jobs to be sent are rejected causing an insufficient memory
error.
SYS_TX_HEADER 100 002 { 00F Source information (fax header) setting 0 = OFF OFF ---
1 = ON (0)
SYS_DATE_FORMAT 100 003 { 010 Year-month-day format 0 = YY_MM_DD YY_MM_DD ---
1 = MM_DD_YY (0)
2 = DD_MM_YY
SYS_TIME_FORMAT 100 004 --- 011 Time display format 0 = Displays on a 12-hour basis 24-hour basis ---
1 = Displays on a 24-hour basis (1)
SYS_MANRX_POLL_SEL 100 006 --- 012 [Start] button function during a call 0 = Manual receiving Manual Not used
Sets the [Start] button to receive a fax manually or performs 1 = Manual polling receiving
manual polling when it is pressed during a call. (0)
SYS_OVERSEAS_SENDING 100 010 --- 013 Overseas transmitting mode 0 = OFF OFF Not used
1 = ON (0)
SYS_OUTPUT_PAPER_SIZE 100 011 --- 014 Paper size 0 = A4 A4 Not used
1 = Letter (0)
2 = Legal
SYS_OUTPUT_PAPER_KIND 100 012 --- 015 Paper type 0 = Standard paper Standard paper Not used
1 = Coated paper (0)
2 = etc.
SYS_DRPD_SETTING 100 013 { 016 DRPD setting 0 = OFF (All) OFF ---
1 = ON (Normal) (0)
SYS_COLOR_RX_PAGE_LIMIT 100 014 --- 017 Maximum data size of one page in color for receiving 0 ~ 4MB (1step = 64KB) 1MB ---
When a received one page exceeds the set value, the product (16)
causes an insufficient memory error.

PRINT
Table 7-9. List of System Parameter (Print)

Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
PRN_SPLIT_MARGIN 320 001 --- 020 Threshold value for dividing a received one page to print on multiple 0 ~ 127 mm (1step = 1mm) 10mm Not used
sheets (10)
When a received image exceeds the set value and valid length for one
page, it is divided into two or more pages.
PRN_PAGE_MERGE 320 002 --- 021 Page combining setting for printing received faxes 0 = Not combine Not combine Fixed to 0
Received two pages are laid out in one page and printed on one sheet. 1 = Combine (2 pages into one page) (0) Not used
PRN_REDUCTION 320 003 --- 022 Auto reducing print setting 0 = Not reduce (100%) 100% Not used
1 = Reduce (0)
PRN_ROTATE_90 320 004 --- 023 Image rotating setting 0 = Not rotate Not rotate Fixed to 0
Prints a received image with it rotated 90 degrees. 1 = Rotate (0) Not used
PRN_CAS1_ENABLE 200 001 --- 024 Cassette 1 available/not available 0 = Not available Available Not used
1 = Available (1)
1 = Available (1)
1 = Available (1)
PRN_CAS4_ENABLE 200 004 --- 027 Cassette 4 available/not available 0 = Not available Not available For expansion
1 = Available (0)
1 = Available (0)
1 = Available (0)
PRN_CAS7_ENABLE 200 007 --- 02A Cassette 7 available/not available 0 = Not available Not available For expansion
1 = Available (0)
PRN_CAS8_ENABLE 200 008 --- 02B Cassette 8 available/not available 0 = Not available Not available For expansion
1 = Available (0)
PRN_CAS9_ENABLE 200 009 --- 02C Cassette 9 available/not available 0 = Not available Not available For expansion
1 = Available (0)
PRN_CAS10_ENABLE 200 010 --- 02D Cassette 10 available/not available 0 = Not available Not available For expansion
1 = Available (0)
PRN_SCANDOC_OUT 200 011 --- 02E Print out of stored sending fax jobs 0 = Do not print stored sending fax jobs Not print Fixed to 0
1 = Print stored sending fax jobs (0) For debugging
(Do not transmit)

Table 7-9. List of System Parameter (Print)

Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
PRN_SAVE_FILE 200 012 --- 02F Data handling at the time of forced print interruption 0 = Delete the data Delete the Fixed to 0
1 = Save the data data Not used
(0)
PRN_PAGE_OVERLAP 200 013 --- 030 Amount of overlap space for printing divided page 1 to 20 mm (1 step = 1 mm) 2mm Not used
(2)
PRN_OFSET_L_300DPI 200 020 --- 031 Amount of left margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image 0 to 255 dots (in increments of 8 dots) 64dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_R_300DPI 200 021 --- 032 Amount of right margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image 0 to 255 dots (in increments of 8 dots) 64dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_T_300DPI 200 022 --- 033 Amount of top margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image 0 to 255 dots 60dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_B_300DPI 200 023 --- 034 Amount of bottom margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image 0 to 255 dots 60dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_L_600DPI 200 024 --- 035 Amount of left margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image 0 to 255 dots (in increments of 8 dots) 120dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_R_600DPI 200 025 --- 036 Amount of right margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image 0 to 255 dots (in increments of 8 dots) 120dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_T_600DPI 200 026 --- 037 Amount of top margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image 0 to 255 dots 120dot Not used
PRN_OFSET_B_600DPI 200 027 --- 038 Amount of bottom margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image 0 to 255 dots 120dot Not used
SCAN
Table 7-10. List of System Parameter (Scan)

Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
SCN_MEMOVR_CONTINUE 100 005 --- 040 Handling sending fax jobs when available memory becomes insufficient 0 = Cut the phone line (delete the job) Cut phone Fixed to 0
1 = Transmit pages that can be line Not used
stored in the memory (0)

PHONE LINE
Table 7-11. List of System Parameter (Phone Line)

Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
LIN_DIAL_TYPE 300 001 { 050 Dial type 0 = PB (DTMF) PB ---
1 = DP (10 PPS) (0)
2 = DP (20 PPS)
LIN_RX_MODE 300 005 { 051 Reception mode 0 = reserVe Auto switch ---
1 = Fax only (2)
2 = Auto switch
3 = Phone only
4 = TAM
LIN_LINE_TYPE 300 007 { 052 Line type 0 = PSTN (Public Switched Telephone PSTN ---
Network) (0)
1 = PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
LIN_PBX_TO_PSTN 300 013 { 053 PSTN connection method 0 =Numbers Numbers ---
1 =Not numbers (earth start/flash start) (0)
LIN_FLASH_ENABLE 300 014 --- 054 Flash start enabling or disabling 0 = Disable Disable ---
1 = Enable (0)
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MIN 300 015 --- 055 Minimum ringer frequency 0 ~ 127.5 ms (1step = 0.5ms) 14ms ---
(28)
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MAX 300 016 --- 056 Maximum ringer frequency 0 ~ 127.5 ms (1step = 0.5ms) 100m ---
(200)
LIN_MAKE_10PPS 300 017 --- 057 10 PPS Make time 0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms) 31.275ms ---
Make time for dialing at DP (10 PPS) (75)
LIN_BREAK_10PPS 300 018 --- 058 10 PPS Break time 0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms) 67.137ms ---
Break time for dialing at DP (10 PPS) (161)
LIN_MAKE_20PPS 300 019 --- 059 16/20 PPS Make time 0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms) 16.263ms ---
Make time for dialing at DP (16/20 PPS) (39)
LIN_BREAK_20PPS 300 020 --- 05A 16/20 PPS Break time 0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms) 33.777ms ---
Break time for dialing at DP (16/20 PPS) (81)
LIN_DP_PAUSE_TIME 300 021 --- 05B DP interdigit time 0 ~ 5100 ms (1step = 20ms) 720ms ---
The time between output digits for DP dialing (36)
LIN_PAUSE_WAIT_TIME 300 022 --- 05C Pose wait time 0 to 25.5 sec(1 step = 100 ms) 4 seconds ---
Wait time for pose signal (40)
LIN_BUSYTONE_DETECTION 300 023 --- 05D Enables or disables detecting busy tone at the time of dialing 0 = Disable Disable ---
1 = Enable (0)
LIN_BLIND_TIME 300 026 --- 05E Blind time when performing blind dialing 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 5 seconds ---
(5)


Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
LIN_DIALTONE_DETECT_TIME 300 027 --- 05F Dial tone detecting time out 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 20 seconds ---
(20)
LIN_RING_DETECT_TIME 300 030 --- 060 Ring detecting time 100 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms) 180ms ---
The time from detecting ring until it is judged as dialing (18)
LIN_ONHOOK_DETECT_TIME 300 031 --- 061 Off-hook detection time 200 to 5100 ms (1 step = 20 ms) 1300ms ---
Time limit for attached phone off-hook condition to regard it as a (65)
shut-off signal
LIN_DIALTONE_DETECTION 300 032 --- 062 Enables or disables detection of dial tone 0 = Enable (detect) Disable ---
Select whether detect or not detect dial tone immediately after 1 = Disable (not detect) (1)
detecting off-hook condition when the line type is set to PSTN.
When this is set to “disable”, blind dialing is performed.
LIN_DIALTONE_FREQ 300 033 --- 063 Dial tone frequency 0 = 350 to 450Hz 400Hz ---
1 = 300 to 500Hz (0)
2 = 450 to 650Hz
LIN_BUSYTONE_FREQ 300 034 --- 064 Busy tone frequency 0 = 400Hz 400Hz ---
1 = 350 to 450Hz (0)
2 = 300 to 500Hz
3 = 450 to 650Hz
LIN_BUSYTONE_PATTERN 300 035 --- 065 Busy tone pattern 0 = ON 0.30 ~ 0.80S (0) ---
OFF 0.30 ~ 0.80S
1 = ON 0.20 ~ 0.60S
OFF 0.30 ~ 0.60S
2 = ON 0.50 ~ 1S
OFF 0.50 ~ 1S
3 = ON 0.12 ~ 1.2S
OFF 0.12 ~ 1.2S
LIN_NCU_TYPE 300 036 --- 066 NCU type 0 = For Japan (0) Not used
LIN_20PPS_ENABLE 300 037 --- 067 Enables or disables 20 PPS setting 0 = Enable Enable ---
When this is set to “disable”, 20 PPS setting specified in the dial 1 = Disable (0)
type setting (300-001) becomes invalid.
LIN_DP_RELAY_DELAY 300 038 --- 068 Waiting time until the line stabilizes when performing pulse dialing 0 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms) 10ms ---
(1)
LIN_DIAL_NG_NUMBER 300 039 --- 069 Allows or not allows to store emergency phone number into the 0 = Allows Allows Fixed to 0
speed-dial memory 1 = Not allows (0) Not used
Emergency phone number: XXXXX
LIN_RING_INVALID_TIME 300 040 --- 06A Time for judging ring signal is OFF 0 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms) 125ms ---
The time limit for ring signal. The line is shut-off if the time exceeds 0 = 125 ms (0)
the set value.


Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
LIN_TAM_SOUNDLESS_LEVEL 300 041 --- 06B Noiseless level at TAM setting 0 = -43dBm -43dBm ---
According to the noiseless level, a call received by an answer phone 1 = -40dBm (0)
(attached phone) is judged as a fax. 2 = -39dBm
3 = -38dBm
LIN_TAM_SOUNDLESS_TIME 300 042 --- 06C Noiseless time at TAM setting 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 5.0 seconds ---
When the set noiseless level continues for the time, a call received (50)
by an answer phone (attached phone) is judged as a fax.
LIN_DRPD_ON_MIN 300 043 --- 06D Minimum ON time of distinctive ring 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 1.6 seconds ---
(16)
LIN_DRPD_ON_MAX 300 044 --- 06E Maximum ON time of distinctive ring 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 2.4 seconds ---
(24)
LIN_DRPD_OFF_MIN 300 045 --- 06F Minimum OFF time of distinctive ring 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 3.2 seconds ---
(32)
LIN_DRPD_OFF_MAX 300 046 --- 070 Maximum OFF time of distinctive ring 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 4.8 seconds ---
(48)
LIN_OFFHOOK_ALARM 300 047 --- 071 Enables or disables the off-hook alarm after finishing fax 0 = Disable Disable Not used
communication 1 = Enable (0)
The alarm goes off when off-hook condition of the attached phone is
detected after finishing fax communication.
LIN_EARTH_TIME 300 048 --- 072 Earth time 100 to 1000 ms (1 step = 10 ms) 300ms ---
Earthing time when the outside line connecting method is earth start. (30)
LIN_FLASH_TIME 300 050 --- 073 Flash time 100 to 1000 ms (1 step = 10 ms) 320ms ---
Flashing time when the outside line connecting method is flash start. (32)


Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
LIN_DAA_REG16 300 051 --- 074 SiDAA country setting register 1 --- 0x04 ---
(bit0) Ringer Threshold Select 0 = 11 To 22 VRMS 0 ---
1 = 17 To 33 VRMS
(bit1) Ringer Impedance 0 = Maximum ringer impedance 0 ---
1 = Synthesize ringer impedance
(bit3, 2) DC Termination Select 00 = Low Voltage Mode 10 ---
01 = Japan Mode
10 = FCC Mode
11 = CTR21 Mode
(bit4) IIR Filter Enable 0 = FIR Filter Enable 0 ---
1 = IIR Filter Enable
(bit5) AC Termination Select 0 = Select the real impedance 0 ---
1 = Select the complex impedance
(bit6) On-Hook Speed 0 = fast 0 ---
1 = Slow (Australia/South Africa)
(bit7) DC Termination Off Fixed to 0 0 ---
(bit0) Billing Tone Detected 0 = No billing tone detected 0 ---
1 = Billing tone detected
(bit1) ReceiVe OVerload 0 = Normal receiVe input leVel 0 ---
1 = ExcessiVe receiVe input leVel
(bit2) Billing Tone Protect Enable 0 = Billing Tone Protect disabled 0 ---
1 = Billing Tone Protect enabled
(bit3) OVerload Protect Enable 0 = Disable oVerload protection 0 ---
1 = Enable oVerload protection
(bit4) Current Limit 0 = All other mode 0 ---
1 = CTR21 mode
(bit5) Auto-Calibration Disable 0 = Enable auto-calibration 0 ---
1 = Disable auto-calibration
(bit6) Manual Calibration 0 = No calibration 0 ---
1 = Initiate calibration
(bit7) ReserVed Fixed to 0 0 ---


Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
(bit0) Ring Detect Network Squelch 0 = Normal operation Fixed to 0 ---
1 = Squelch function enabled
(bit1) Ring Detector Full WaVe Rectifier Enable 0 = Half WaVe 0 ---
1 = Full WaVe
(bit2) MODE control don’t care 0 ---
(bit3) Force Low Voltage DC Termination Mode 0 = Normal Gain 0 ---
1 = Force Low Voltage Mode
(bit4) Line Voltage Adjust 0 = Normal operation 0 ---
1 = Lower DCT Voltage
(bit5) Force Japan DC Termination Mode 0 = Normal Gain 0 ---
1 = Force Japan Mode
(bit6) DTMF Dialing Mode 0 = Normal operation 0 ---
1 = Increase headroom for DTMF
(bit7) Full Scale 0 = Default 0 ---
1 = Transmit/receiVe full scale
LIN_DAA_MODE 300 054 --- 077 SiDAA operating mode --- 0 ---
(bit0) Automatic adjustment of boundary value between On-hook and Off- 0 =Enable 0 ---
hook 1 =Disable
(DAA base is used for the boundary
value)
(bit1) Automatic adjustment of DCT mode 0 = Enable 0 ---
1 = Disable
(bit2) Line monitor setting at ringer check 0 = Ringer check without monitoring line 0 ---
1 = Ringer check with monitoring line
(bit3) Setting value of country register 16 0 =Recommended value by the manufacturer 0 ---
(Refer to the manual)
1 =Value set for DAA_REG 16
(bit6) Free --- --- ---
(bit7) Free --- --- ---


Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
LIN_ONHOOK_LVCS_BASE 300 055 --- 078 SiDAA on-hook detection threshold value (LVCS value) 1 to 30 20 ---
(20)
LIN_ONHOOK_LVCS_MIN 300 056 --- 079 SiDAA on-hook detection lowest level (LVCS value) 1 to 31 (LVCS value) 7 ---
(7)
LIN_ONHOOK_LVCS_CHG 300 057 --- 07A SiDAA on-hook detection variation range (LVCS value) 1 to 31 (LVCS value) 6 ---
(6)
LIN_ONHOOK_RATE_NORING 300 058 --- 07B SiDAA ring noiseless on-hook threshold value (%) 1 to 100% (1 step = 1%) 85% ---
(85)
LIN_ONHOOK_RATE_RING 300 059 --- 07C SiDAA ringing on-hook threshold value (%) 1 to 100% (1 step = 1%) 85% ---
(85)
LIN_DIAL_END_TIME 300 060 --- 07D Dialing end judging time 0 to 25.5 sec(1 step = 100 ms) 5.5 seconds ---
(55)
LIN_NUM_DP 300 061 --- 07E Number of pulses of DP 0 = n, "0"=10 n, ”0”=10 ---
1 = "10-n" (0)
2 = "n+1"
LIN_DTMF_TX_TIME 300 062 --- 07F PB (DTMF) transmitting time 0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms) 100 ms ---
Tone transmitting time at PB (DTMF) dialing (100)
LIN_DTMF_PAUSE_TIME 300 063 --- 080 PB (DTMF) pose time 0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms) 101 ms ---
Interdigit time at PB (DTMF) dialing (101)
LIN_DTMF_TX_LEVEL 300 064 --- 081 PB (DTMF) transmitting level 4 to 15 (-4 to -15 dBm) -9 dBm ---
DTMF transmitting attenuator level at PB (DTMF) dialing 4 = -4 dBm (9)
5 = -5 dBm
6 = -6 dBm
:
15 = -15 dBm
LIN_DTMF_LEVEL_GAP 300 065 --- 082 PB (DTMF) level difference between the higher and lower audio 0 = 2.0 dB 2.0 dB ---
frequencies at PB (DTMF) dialing 1 = 2.5 dB (0)
Difference = Higher frequencies ñ Lower frequencies 2 = 3.0 dB
3 = 3.5 dB
4 = 4.0 dB
5 = 4.5 dB
6 = 5.0 dB
12 = 0 dB
13 = 0.5 dB
14 = 1.0 dB
15 = 1.5 dB


Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
LIN_REDIAL_TIMES 310 001 { 083 Number of redialing 0 to 255 times (1 step = 1 time) 5 times ---
When the product cannot send a fax by auto dialing because the 0 = Does not redial (5)
receiving fax machine does not answer or is busy, it performs
redialing set number of times.
LIN_REDIAL_INTERVAL 310 002 --- 084 Redialing intervals 1 to 255 min (1 step = 1 min) 1 minute ---
(1)
LIN_RING_RESPONSE_TIME 310 004 { 085 Attached phone ringing time-out period 1 to 99 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 10 seconds ---
When the phone rings with the reception mode set to “auto switch”, (10)
the product starts to receive a fax after a lapse of the set time period.
LIN_RESEND_TIMES 310 025 --- 086 Number of re-faxing 0 to 5 times (1 step = 1 time) 3 times ---
When an automatic fax sending is interrupted due to line fault or any (3)
other external factors, the product starts to send remaining pages
after a lapse of a predetermined time interval. The attempt is made
the set number of times.
LIN_COMM_INTERVAL 310 026 --- 087 Time interval between the independent communications 3 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 8 sec ---
(8)
LIN_NUM_CHECK_ENABLE 310 027 --- 088 Enables or disables calling control for identical destination 0 = Disable Enable ---
1 = Enable (1)
LIN_NUM_CHECK_INTERVAL 310 028 --- 089 Calling control time for identical destination 1 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 60 seconds ---
(60)
LIN_CNG_DETECT_TIME 310 030 --- 08A CNG signal (dial tone) detecting time 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 5.5 seconds Not used
Use this setting when phone-first mode is set. (55)
If CNG signal is not detected during the set time interval, the
product starts to call the answer phone (attached phone).
LIN_REDIAL_TIMES_MAX 310 078 --- 08B Maximum number of redialing 0 to 255 times (1 step = 1 time) 99 times ---
(99)
LIN_RING_TIMES_MIN 310 079 --- 08C Minimum time interval between answering and starting to receive a 0 to 10 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 0 second ---
fax (0)

COMMUNICATION CONTROL
Table 7-12. List of System Parameter (Communication Control)

Maintenanc
e Code User Internal Remark
Label Description Setting Value Default
Access Address s
Main Sub
COM_TX_ATT_LEVEL 300 006 --- 0A0 Tone transmitting level 5 to 15 (-5 to -15dBm) -10 dBm ---
(decreasing amount from offset 0 dBM) 1step = -1dBm (10)
Tone transmitting level = minus set dBm
COM_MANTX_CNG 300 024 --- 0A1 CNG transmitting at manual sending 0 = Not send Send ---
Set whether send or not send the CNG signal when sending a fax 1 = Send (1)
manually.
COM_RX_ATT_LEVEL 300 025 --- 0A2 Receiving level 0 = -43 dBm -43 dBm ---
Set the tone level to be detected as an incoming fax. 1 = -38 dBm (0)
2 = -33 dBm
3 = -48 dBm
COM_CED_DETECT_TIME 310 006 --- 0A3 CED detecting time 0 to 2550 ms (1 Step = 10 ms) 100 ms ---
(10)
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_MAX 310 007 --- 0A4 Symbol speed maximum variation tolerance 0 = 2400 baud 3429 baud ---
This setting is enabled only when receiving a fax 1 = 2743 baud (5)
2 = 2800 baud
3 = 3000 baud
4 = 3200 baud
5 = 3429 baud
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_MAX 310 008 --- 0A5 Maximum bit speed 1 = 2400 bps 33600 bps ---
2 = 4800 bps (14)
3 = 7200 bps
4 = 9600 bps
5 = 12000 bps
6 = 14400 bps
7 = 16800 bps
8 = 13200 bps
9 = 21600 bps
10 = 24000 bps
11 = 26400 bps
12 = 28800 bps
13 = 31200 bps
14 = 33600 bps


Maintenanc
Access Address s
Main Sub
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_ENABLE 310 009 --- 0A6 Direction to enable symbol speed --- 0xFF ---
Corresponds to bit 12 to 19 of INGO0c and INFO0a.
(bit0) 2743 baud symbol speed support 0 = Not support Support ---
1 = Support (1)
1 = Support (1)
1 = Support (1)
(bit3) Low carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3000 baud symbol 0 = Disable Enable ---
speed 1 = Enable (1)
(bit4) High carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3000 baud symbol 0 = Disable Enable ---
(bit5) Low carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3200 baud symbol 0 = Disable Enable ---
(bit6) High carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3200 baud symbol 0 = Disable Enable ---
(bit7) Transmitting at 3429 baud symbol speed 0 = Not allow Allow ---
1 = Allow (1)
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_ENABLE1 310 010 --- 0A7 Direction to enable bit speed 1 --- 0xFF ---
This setting is used during MPh sequence.
(bit0) V.34 2400 bps ability 0 = Disable Enable ---
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)


Maintenanc
Access Address s
Main Sub
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_ENABLE2 310 011 --- 0A8 Direction to enable bit speed 2 --- 0x3F ---
This setting is used during MPh sequence.
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
1 = Enable (1)
COM_V34_CTRL_BIT_RATE 310 012 --- 0A9 Control channel bit speed 0 = 1200 bps 1200 bps ---
1 = 2400 bps (0)
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_THRESH1 310 013 --- 0AA Symbol speed threshold value 1 0xFA = -6 dB Difficult to judge 0dB ---
Phone line characteristic distortion permissible level 0xFB = -5 dB (0x00)
The smaller value, the more difficult it is to select higher symbol 0xFC = -4 dB
speed. 0xFD = -3 dB ↑
0xFE = -2 dB
0xFF = -1 dB
0x00 = 0 dB Standard
0x01 = 1 dB
0x02 = 2 dB
0x03 = 3 dB ↓
0x04 = 4 dB
0x05 = 5 dB
0x06 = 6 dB Easy to judge


Maintenanc
Access Address s
Main Sub
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_THRESH2 310 014 --- 0AB Symbol speed threshold value 2 0xFA = -6 dB Easy to judge 0dB ---
Minimum S/N permissible level 0xFB = -5 dB (0x00)
The smaller value, the easier it is to select higher symbol speed. 0xFC = -4 dB
0xFD = -3 dB ↑
0xFE = -2 dB
0xFF = -1 dB
0x01 = 1 dB
0x02 = 2 dB
0x03 = 3 dB ↓
0x04 = 4 dB
0x05 = 5 dB
0x06 = 6 dB Difficult to judge
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_THRESH 310 015 --- 0AC Bit speed selecting threshold value 0xFA = -8 dB Easy to judge 1dB ---
The smaller value, the easier it is to select higher communication 0xF9 = -7 dB (0x01)
speed. 0xFA = -6 dB
0xFB = -5 dB
0xFC = -4 dB ↑
0xFD = -3 dB
0xFE = -2 dB
0xFF = -1 dB
0x01 = 1 dB
0x02 = 2 dB
0x03 = 3 dB
0x04 = 4 dB ↓
0x05 = 5 dB
0x06 = 6 dB
0x06 = 7 dB Difficult to judge
COM_V8_ANSAM_REVERSE 310 016 --- 0AD ANSam signal phase reversing 0 = Not perform Perform ---
Set whether perform phase reversing for 450 ms when transmitting 1 = Perform (1)
ANSam.
COM_V8_TE_TIME 310 017 --- 0AE The time at V.8 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 1.1 seconds ---
When this is set to more than 1 second, echo canceller is disabled. (11)
COM_V34_CC_TIME 310 018 --- 0AF Time-out interval from when starting V.34 mode (Phase 2) to the 5 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 30 seconds ---
control channel. (30)


Maintenanc
Access Address s
Main Sub
COM_V34_SHIFT_G3 310 019 --- 0B0 Enables or disables shifting to G3 mode when V34_CC time-out 0 = Not allow Not allow ---
occurs. 1 = Allow (0)
Set whether shift or not to shift to usual G3 mode when
COM_V34_CC_TIME time-out occurs.
C A U T IO N If this is set to shift to G3 mode, it may happen to infringe

certain patent.
COM_V34_ENABLE 310 020 --- 0B1 Enables or disables the V.34 ability 0 = Disable Enable ---
Set whether enables or disables V.34 performance regarding the 1 = Enable (1)
modulation method.
COM_ANSAM_TX_TIME 310 021 --- 0B2 ANSam signal maximum transmitting time 0.1 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 4.0 seconds ---
(40)
COM_ANSAM_START_DELAY 310 022 --- 0B3 Time interval until ANSam signal is transmitted 0.1 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 2.2 seconds ---
Set the time interval to start transmitting ANSam signal after the (22)
line gets disconnected.
COM_V34_FRAME_SIZE 310 023 --- 0B4 Frame size when transmitting V.34 0 = 256 octets 256 octets ---
1 = 64 octets (0)
COM_ECM_ENABLE 310 024 --- 0B5 Enables or disables the ECM performance (auto resending 0 = Disable Enable ---
function) 1 = Enable (1)
When line fault occurs in the middle of sending a fax, the function
allows the fax to be resend automatically immediately after the line
is restored.
COM_RTN_TX_RATE 310 034 --- 0B6 RTN command transmitting criterion (percentage) 0 to 100 % (1 step = 1%) 5% ---
RTN: Indicates that training is required because messages are not (5)
received correctly.
COM_RTN_TX_LINE 310 035 --- 0B7 RTN command transmitting criterion (number of continuous lines) 0 to 255 lines (1 step = 1 line) 5 lines ---
(5)
COM_T1_TIME_CALL 310 036 --- 0B8 T1 timer immediately after dialing 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 50 seconds ---
(50)
COM_T1_TIME_TX 310 037 --- 0B9 T1 timer when transmitting a fax 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 36 seconds ---
(36)
COM_T1_TIME_RX 310 038 --- 0BA T1 timer when receiving a fax 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 39 seconds ---
(39)
COM_T2_TIME 310 039 --- 0BB T2 timer 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 6 seconds ---
(60)
COM_T3_TIME 310 040 --- 0BC T3 timer 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 15 seconds ---
(150)


Maintenanc
Access Address s
Main Sub
COM_T4_TIME_AUTO 310 041 --- 0BD T4 timer when communicating automatically 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 3 seconds ---
T4 timer for automatic transmitting and receiving (30)
COM_T4_TIME_MANU 310 042 --- 0BE T4 timer when communicating manually 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 4.5 seconds ---
T4 timer for manual transmitting and receiving (45)
COM_SOUNDLESS_TIME 310 043 --- 0BF T.30 noiseless timer 0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms) 75 ms ---
Timer for noiseless time recommended by T.30. (75)
COM_FSK_CHK_TIME 310 044 --- 0C0 FSK receiving judge timer 0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms) 200 ms ---
When the product is waiting for incoming data in high speed (200)
receiving mode, it judges that the incoming fax is FSK within the
set time interval.
COM_PIX_DELAY 310 045 --- 0C1 Time interval before starting to transmit image data in G3 mode 0 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms) 500 ms ---
(50)
COM_DROP_OUT_TIME 310 046 --- 0C2 Drop-out judging timer when receiving image data 0 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms) 1000 ms ---
Time interval from carrier down in the middle of receiving image (100)
data to when judging it as drop-out.
COM_DIS_RESEND_TIME 310 047 --- 0C3 NSF, DIS resend timer 0 = 3 seconds 3 seconds ---
NSF: Signal to indicate that the receiving fax machine supports 1 = 3.45 seconds (0)
functions other than those given in ITU-T G3 standard. 2 = 2.55 seconds
DIS: Signal to notify the sender that the receiving fax machine 3 = 4.5 seconds
features meet the ITU-T G3 standard.
COM_TX_SPEED 310 048 --- 0C4 Transmitting speed performance 0 = Fallback by best performance of the (0) ---
Enabled when communicating at V.17 or lower. receiving machine
1 =V.27 ter fallback mode (2400 bps) only
2 =V.27 ter fallback mode (2400, 4800 bps)
only
3 =V.29 (7200, 9600 bps) only
4 = V.33(TC12000bps,TC14400bps) only
5 = V.17(TC7200bps, TC9600bps,
TC12000bps, TC14400bps) only
COM_RX_SPEED 310 049 --- 0C5 Receiving speed performance 0 =V.27ter, V.29, V.33 and V.17 (0) ---
Reception mode that receives a fax declaring DIS, NSF (DTC, 1 =V.27ter fallback mode (2400 bps)
NSC). 2 = V.27ter(2400bps,4800bps)
Enabled when communicating at V.17 or lower. 3 = V.29(7200bps,9600bps)
4 =V.27ter and V.29
5 =V.27ter, V.29 and V33
COM_MODEM_MODE 310 050 --- 0C6 Modem mode 0 = Auto (unique mode enabled) ITU-T G3 Fixed to 1
1 = ITU-T G3 (unique mode disabled) (1)


Maintenanc
Access Address s
Main Sub
COM_DIS_NEGLECT_NUM 310 051 --- 0C7 Number of ignoring DIS 0 to 255 times (1 step = 1 time) 0 time
(0)
COM_TSI_CIG_SEND 310 052 --- 0C8 Transmitting TSI and CIG 0 = AUTO AUTO ---
TSI: Signal that notifies ID of the sending machine as a response to 1 = forced transmit (0)
CSI signal sent from the receiving machine. 2 = not transmit
CIG :Signal that indicates identification information on the sending
machine.
COM_CSI_SEND 310 053 --- 0C9 Transmitting CSI 0 = Transmit transmit ---
CSI :Signal that notifies the sending machine of ID code of the 1 = off (0)
receiving machine.
COM_FTT_FALLBACK 310 054 --- 0CA FTT number for judging fallback 0 = All 2 FTT Fall Back All 2 FTT ---
Number of FTT until the product falls back at 14400/12000/9600/ 2 = All 1 FTT Fall Back (0)
7200/4800/2400 bps.
“Fallback” means an operation to find out an acceptable
communication speed for the receiving machine by reestablishing
the communication at lower speed when a training check signal at
certain transmitting speed is rejected by the receiving machine.
COM_TCF_CHECK 310 055 --- 0CB TCF signal judging time 0 = 1.2 seconds 1.2 seconds ---
TCF: Training check signal consists of “0” signal for about 1.5 seconds. 1 = 1.0 second (0)
COM_TX_CABLE_EQU 310 056 --- 0CC Transmitting cable equalizer 0 = 0db (equivalent to 0 Km) 8db ---
1 = 4db (equivalent to 1.8 Km) (2)
2 = 8db (equivalent to 3.6 Km)
COM_RX_CABLE_EQU 310 057 --- 0CD Receiving cable equalizer 0 = 0db (equivalent to 0 Km) 8db ---
1 = 4db (equivalent to 1.8 Km) (2)
COM_TAP_HOLD 310 058 --- 0CE Enables or disables tap hold 0 = Disable Enable ---
1 = Enable (equalizer freeze) (1)
COM_RX_RESO 310 059 --- 0CF Specify resolution for received fax 0 x 00 = Default (0x00) ---
(for evaluation) 0x01 = (Not used)
0x02 = (Not used)
0x04 = R8x15.4l/mm, AR8x7.7l/mm,
AR8x3.85l/mm
0x08 = (Not used)
0x10 = (Not used)
0x20 = R8x7.7l/mmÅAR8x3.85l/mm
0x40 = (Not used)
0x80 = R8x3.85l/mm


Maintenanc
Access Address s
Main Sub
COM_V29_EPTONE 310 060 --- 0D0 Enables or disables superimposing V.29 EP-tone 0 = Disable Disable ---
Set whether superimpose or not superimpose EP-tone to V.29 tones 1 = Enable (0)
based on the ITU-T G3 standard.
COM_BYTE_DIS_DTC 310 061 --- 0D1 Number of bytes for transmitting FIF of DIS/DTC 0 = 4 bytes system 10bytes ---
DTC: Transmit command corresponds to DIS. 1 = 5 bytes system (6)
2 = 6 bytes system
3 = 7 bytes system
4 = 8 bytes system
5 = 9 bytes system
6 = 10 bytes system
7 = 11 bytes system
8 = 12 bytes system
9 = 13 bytes system
10 = 14 bytes system (maximum capacity)
COM_CTC_NUM 310 062 --- 0D2 Number of transmitting CTC 0=000 to 7=111 5 ---
COM_T5_TIME 310 063 --- 0D3 ECM T5 timer 0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec) 65 seconds ---
Timer for RNR signal sent from the receiving machine when the (65)
receiving machine cannot continue to receive a fax due to
insufficient memory or any other troubles.
COM_EQM_48 310 064 --- 0D4 EQU comparison value at 4800 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x3A ---
COM_EQM_72 310 065 --- 0D5 EQU comparison value at 7200 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x32 ---
COM_EQM_96 310 066 --- 0D6 EQU comparison value at 9600 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x3A ---
COM_EQM_120 310 067 --- 0D7 EQU comparison value at 12000 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x4F ---
COM_EQM_144 310 068 --- 0D8 EQU comparison value at 14400 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x3F ---
COM_EQM_TCM72 310 069 --- 0D9 EQU comparison value at TCM 7200 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x48 ---
COM_EQM_TCM96 310 070 --- 0DA EQU comparison value at TCM 9600 bps 0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion 0x4E ---
COM_TX_CODE 310 071 --- 0DB Encoding method for transmission 0 = MH MMR ---
Changes the method according to the receiving machine 1 = MR (2)
performance. 2 = MMR
3 = JBIG (Not used)
COM_RX_CODE 310 072 --- 0DC Encoding method for reception 0 = MH MMR ---
1 = MR (2)
2 = MMR
3 = JBIG (Not used)
COM_V34_GAIN_CHG 310 073 --- 0DD Gain switching mode when detecting V.34 tones 0 = Not switch the gain Switches ---
1 = Switches the gain (1)


Maintenanc
Access Address s
Main Sub
COM_RX_GAIN_AJST 310 074 --- 0DE Received gain correction value 0 = 0.0 dB 3.0dB ---
1 = 0.5 dB (6)
2 = 1.0 dB
3 = 1.5 dB
4 = 2.0 dB
5 = 2.5 dB
6 = 3.0 dB
7 = 3.5 dB
8 = -4.0 dB
9 = -3.5 dB
10 = -3.0 dB
11 = -2.5 dB
12 = -2.0 dB
13 = -1.5 dB
14 = -1.0 dB
15 = -0.5 dB
COM_MANRX_CED_DELAY 310 075 --- 0DF Time interval for CED signal when receiving a fax manually 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 0 second ---
Time interval from when starting to receive a fax manually to when (0)
issuing CED signal.
COM_CNG_DELAY 310 076 --- 0E0 Time interval for CNG signal 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 3 seconds ---
Time interval from when finishing dialing to when issuing the first (30)
CNG signal.
COM_MANTX_CNG_DELAY 310 077 --- 0E1 Time interval for CNG signal when sending a fax manually 0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms) 0 second ---
Time interval from when starting to send a fax manually to when issuing (0)
the first CNG signal.
COM_COLOR_MONO_CHG 320 010 --- 0E2 Action when the receiving machine does not support color faxing 0 = Continue by changing the data into Continue ---
monochrome (0)
1 = Cut off the line
COM_SAVE_DECERR_PAGE 320 011 --- 0E3 Storing pages which occur decode error 0 = Not store Store ---
1 = Store (1)

REPORT
Table 7-13. List of System Parameter (Report)

Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
REP_MONITOR_OUT 100 001 --- 0F0 Monitor report automatic printing 0 : OFF OFF Not used
Disabled (it is included in transmission report) 1 : ON (0)
REP_DOHO_OUT 100 007 { 0F1 Multiple transmission report automatic printing 0 = Not print Not print ---
1 = Print only when failed to transmit (0)
2 = Print
REP_TX_OUT 100 008 { 0F2 Transmission report automatic printing 0 = Not print Not print ---
1 = Print only when an error occurs (0)
2 = Print
REP_ACTIV_OUT 100 009 { 0F3 Activity report automatic printing 0 = Not print Not print ---
1 = Print (0)
REP_PROTOCOL_OUT 330 001 --- 0F4 Protocol monitor report automatic printing 0 = Not print Not print ---
1 = Print only when an error occurs (0)
2 = Print
REP_SEL_OPP_NAME 310 003 --- 0F5 The second priority for “Name of The Other End” on the activity report 0 = Name Phone Fixed to 1
Select which to be printed at “Name of The Other End” column on the 1 = Phone number number
activity report as the second priority, name (which sent from the other end) (1)
or phone number.
REP_SEND_ALL 330 002 --- 0F6 Transferring size for printing report 0 = Transfers all data Transfers all ---
The ASIC transfers data for printing report so that it fits within a standard 1 = Transfers data so that it fits within a data
(letter) sized paper. standard (letter) sized paper (0)

IMAGE DATA PROCESSING
Table 7-14. List of System Parameter (Image Data Processing)

Maintenance
Code User Internal
Access Address
Main Sub
--- Sub-scanning OR setting when changing resolution
0 = Not perform OR process Not perform
IMG_TX_LINE_OR 320 005 100 Set whether process of not process sub-scanning OR when changing Not used
1 = Perform OR process (0)
resolution to transmit a fax.
--- 101 128 lines
IMG_JBIG_L0 320 006 Number of lines for one stripe of JBIG encoding to transmit a fax 1 to 65535 (lines) Not used
102 (128)
IMG_JBIG_ATMOVE 320 007 --- 103 Maximum horizontal offset allowed for AT pixels in JBIG encoding 0 to 127 0 Not used
--- 0 = Not use TP Not use TP
IMG_JBIG_TP 320 008 104 Use or not use TP for prescribed layers in JBIG encoding Not used
1 = Use TP (0)
--- 0 = 3 lines 3 lines
IMG_DEF_JBIG_LRLTWO 320 009 105 LRLTWO value (number of reference lines) in JBIG encoding method Not used
1 = 2 lines (0)

7.7.2 Error List

The error list is given on the following pages.
“ Service Call Error” (p691)
“ Operator Call Error” (p693)
“ Other Error Codes” (p701)
The following is information on the error codes.

External Error Code
This code consists of main and sub codes and displayed in that order on the fax
reports listed below.
1) Activity Report
The code is displayed as "XXX-XXX" on the "Result" column.
2) Fax Setting List
C A U T IO N The code is displayed on the list only when the operating mode is
set to "Maintenance Mode" by the corresponding system
parameter setting.
The code is displayed as "XXX-XXX" on the "Error Code" column in the "Error
History".
(Example) "300-048"= DCN reception (During faxing, something went wrong with the
other end machine and the fax could not be completed)
Internal Error Code

This code can be checked by the backup data obtained using the "MFP
Maintenance Tool".
The code is displayed in two bytes binary form (XXXX) on the "Error Code"
column in the "Internal Error History" at the top part of the backup data (TXT
data).
(Example) "6F00" = Internal error in process of creating REPORT FILE.

SERVICE CALL ERROR
Table 7-15. Service Call Error

External Panel
Error Code Internal Description Cause Remedies Display Report Display Trigger for Stopping Operation
Notification
Code Message
MAIN SUB (reference)
100 000 0x1000 An error occurs in reading and writing SDRAM SDRAM failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices End of initialization
during power-on sequence required for a fax communication
100 001 0x1001 The product failed to write date information in RTC Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 002 0x1002 The product failed to read time after initializing the Not used --- --- --- --- ---
clock
100 003 0x1003 The product failed to write into the fax flash Flash memory failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices ---
memory required for a fax communication
100 004 0x1004 SUM check of the fax flash memory was not Flash memory failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices End of initialization
performed correctly required for a fax communication Diagnosing job
termination
100 005 0x1005 An error occurs in reading and writing SRAM Not used --- --- --- --- ---
during power-on sequence
100 006 0x1006 SRAM backup failure Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 007 0x1007 Normal writing on the EEPROM was not Not used --- --- --- --- ---
performed
100 008 0x1008 Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT SDRAM failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices Diagnosing job
(An error of writing/reading image data on the required for a fax communication termination
memory)
100 009 0x1009 Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT Not used --- --- --- --- ---
(BM in the ASIC could not be cleared)
100 010 0x100A Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT Not used --- --- --- --- ---
(MN86064 related error)
100 011 0x100B Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT ASIC failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices Diagnosing job
(ASIC related error) required for a fax communication termination
100 012 0x100C The ASIC could not clear buffer memory Not used --- --- --- --- ---
100 013 0x100D The product failed to write into the modem flash Not used --- --- --- --- ---
memory
100 014 0x100E Modem failure Modem failure Replace the fax board *1, *2 External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices Diagnosing job
required for a fax communication termination
100 900 --- This code is used by the MFP --- --- --- --- --- ---
(Using for fax is prohibited)

Table 7-15. Service Call Error

External Panel
Error Code Internal Description Cause Remedies Display Report Display Trigger for Stopping Operation
Notification
Code Message
MAIN SUB (reference)
200 000 0x2000 Fault of parts in the PWBA MCU Not used --- --- --- --- ---
200 001 0x2001 MODEM&NCU LOOPBACK TEST NG Not used --- --- --- --- ---
200 900 This code is used by the MFP --- --- --- --- --- ---
Note *1: Displays the external error code.

*2: A message requesting to turn off and back on the product, or to call service center is
displayed.

OPERATOR CALL ERROR
Table 7-16. Operator Call Error

External Panel Trigger for
error code Internal
Description Cause Remedies Display Report Display Stopping Notification Message
Code
MAIN SUB (reference) Operation
300 000 0x3000 Sending a fax is attempted at the time of receiving a fax Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 001 0x3001 NSS/DCS function used by the received fax does not It is more likely that there Confirm if the sending *1, *2 Receiving failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax is finished
meet those of the product. is something wrong with machine is normal.
the sending machine
300 002 0x3002 Abnormal commands are received from the other end The other end machine Confirm the condition of *1, *2 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
machine. failure the other end machine, Receiving failure Receiving a fax is finished
and resend the fax. Or
ask the sender to resend
the fax if the error occurs
during receiving process.
300 003 0x3003 CS becomes ON in FSK method Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 004 0x3004 Overrun Noises in the line or GND, Check the line, GND, and *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
or loose connection of the the modular cable, and try Receiving failure Receiving a fax is finished
modular cable, or etc. the failed operation again
300 005 0x3005 Under run Noises in the line or GND, Check the line, GND, and *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
or loose connection of the the modular cable, and try Receiving failure Receiving a fax is finished
300 006 0x3006 CS of the modem did not become ON for RS request Noises in the line or GND, Check the line, GND, and *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
while training in high speed or loose connection of the the modular cable, and try
300 007 0x3007 The product received illegal commands from the other The other end machine Confirm the condition of *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
end machine after receiving a communication reserve failure the other end machine, Receiving failure Receiving a fax is finished
request signal and try the failed
operation.
300 008 0x3008 The product received RTN/PIN when transmitting in Line quality is not good Ask the recipient if the *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
G3 mode fax was sent correctly,
and resend the fax as
necessary.
300 009 0x3009 The product sent RTN when receiving in G3 mode Line quality is not good Ask the sender to resend *3 Receiving failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is
the fax if necessary. finished
300 010 0x300A The product sent EOR-Q when transmitting ECM Line quality is not good Confirm the condition of *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
the other end machine,
and try the failed
operation.


error code Internal
Code
300 011 0x300B The product received EOR-Q when receiving ECM Line quality is not good Confirm the condition of *3 Receiving failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is
the other end machine, finished
and ask to resend the fax.
300 012 0x300C The product terminated the communication by issuing Not used --- --- --- --- ---
command reject signal
300 013 0x300D The product terminated the communication by issuing Not used --- --- --- --- ---
procedure invalid signal
300 014 0x300E The product terminated the communication because it Not used --- --- --- --- ---
received a command reject signal
300 015 0x300F T1 time-out for transmitting a fax The modular cable is Check that the modular *1, *2 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
disconnected, or the other cable is properly
end machine does not connected, confirm the
answer condition of the other
end, and try the failed
operation.
300 016 0x3010 DCS/NSS resending over The other end machine cut Check that the modular *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
off the line, or the modular cable is properly
cable get disconnected connected, confirm the
condition of the other
operation.
300 017 0x3011 Fallback error Line quality is not good Try the operation again *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
Receiving failure Receiving a fax is finished
300 018 0x3012 Post message resending over The other end machine cut Check that the modular *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
off the line, or the modular cable is properly
operation.
300 019 0x3013 T2 time-out The other end machine cut Check that the modular *3 Receiving failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is
off the line, or the modular cable is properly finished
operation.


error code Internal
Code
300 020 0x3014 T1 time-out for receiving a fax The other end machine cut Check that the modular *3 Receiving failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is
end, and ask the sender
to resend the fax.
300 021 0x3015 T5 time-out The other end machine Confirm the condition of *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is
runs out of paper or the the other end machine, finished
memory is full and try the failed
operation.
300 022 0x3016 Carrier cut off The other end machine cut Check that the modular *3 Receiving failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is
end, and ask the sender
to resend the fax.
300 023 0x3017 The product received an illegal frame in ECM Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 024 0x3018 CTC/EOR resending over Line quality is not good Try the operation again *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 025 0x3019 Not for the operator (for RX and communication Not used --- --- --- --- ---
reservation)
300 026 0x301A Time-out between frames in ECM Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 027 0x301B PIN reception (except EOR) Line quality is not good Try the operation again *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 028 0x301C The product could not detect EOL within 13 seconds Line quality is not good, Confirm the condition of *3 Receiving failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is
(default time) when receiving image data in G3 mode. or there is something the other end machine, finished
wrong with the other end and ask to resend the fax.
machine
300 029 0x301D The product failed to detect dial tones before starting The line type setting is Correct the line type External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
dialing wrong, or the line is setting. Connect the line
disconnected properly.
300 030 0x301E The product failed to detect the second dial tones Not used --- --- --- --- ---
before starting dialing
300 031 0x301F The product detected busy tones before starting dialing Not used --- --- --- --- ---
(BT1)
300 032 0x3020 The product detected busy tones before starting dialing Not used --- --- --- --- ---
(BT2)
300 033 0x3021 The product failed to detect the second dial tones Not used --- --- --- --- ---
during dialing operation


error code Internal
Code
300 034 0x3022 The product detected busy tones during dialing Not used --- --- --- --- ---
operation (BT1)
300 035 0x3023 The product detected busy tones during dialing Not used --- --- --- --- ---
operation (BT2)
300 036 0x3024 The product failed to detect dial tones during dialing Not used --- --- --- --- ---
operation
300 037 0x3025 The product failed to detect dial tones after dialing Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 038 0x3026 The product detected busy tones after dialing (BT1) Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 039 0x3027 The product detected busy tones after dialing (BT2) Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 040 0x3028 The product received no reply from the other end Not used --- --- --- --- ---
machine after dialing
300 041 0x3029 The product detected off-hook condition while making Not used --- --- --- --- ---
auto dialing
300 042 0x302A The product could not detect line current Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 043 0x302B The product could not detect the polarity Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 044 0x302C The other end machine backed to ready status from Not used --- --- --- --- ---
busy status which was detected by busy tones while
ringing
300 045 0x302D The other end machine is not ready or available for During polling faxing, Confirm the condition of *4 External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
sending a fax original documents were the other end machine,
not set on the other end and ask the sender to
machine resend the fax.
300 046 0x302E The other end machine is not ready or available for The other end machine Confirm the condition of *4 External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
receiving a fax runs out of paper or the the other end machine,
memory is full and resend the fax.
300 047 0x302F The product disconnect the line because it received Not used --- --- --- --- ---
forced polled transmission (for maintenance) in the
middle of processing a fax job
300 048 0x3030 DCN reception During the fax If the error occurs when *4 External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
communication, transmitting, resend the Receiving a fax is finished
something went wrong fax. If the error occurs
with the other end during receiving process,
machine ask the sender to resend
the fax
300 049 0x3031 Auto dialing function is used, but no data is stored for The speed-dial memory is Check if the number of *5 External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
the function. deleted the speed-dial memory is
correct, and try the
operation again.


error code Internal
Code
300 050 0x3032 Invalid data exists in the dial data Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 051 0x3033 The current setting of the product does not support Not used --- --- --- --- ---
caller ID display service used for the phone line.
300 052 0x3034 Even though the current product mode supports caller Not used --- --- --- --- ---
ID service, the phone line is not using the service.
300 053 0x3035 JM is not detected Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
or a GND for the product GND condition, and try
is not established properly the failed operation again
300 054 0x3036 CJ is not detected Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 Receiving failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is
or a GND for the product GND condition, and try finished
300 055 0x3037 V8 error Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
or a GND for the product GND condition, and try Receiving failure Receiving a fax is finished
300 056 0x3038 Phase2(Line Probing) error Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 057 0x3039 Phase3(Primary Channel Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
Equalizer Trainning) error or a GND for the product GND condition, and try Receiving failure Receiving a fax is finished
300 058 0x303A Modem Parameter Exchange error Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 059 0x303B Primary channel re-synchronizing error Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 060 0x303C Control channel re-synchronizing error Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 061 0x303D Control channel re-train error Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
300 062 0x303E Control channel OFF time-out Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
or a GND for the product GND condition, and try Receiving a fax is finished
300 063 0x303F Primary channel OFF time-out Line quality is not good, Check the line and the *3 External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
or a GND for the product GND condition, and try Receiving a fax is finished


error code Internal
Code
300 064 0x3040 Receiving the fax is rejected due to the DM prevention Not used --- --- --- --- ---
function
300 065 0x3041 The product failed to read the original while The next original was not Try the operation again *3 External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
performing manual transmitting set in time
300 066 0x3042 When transmitting, image data conversion was not MFP data transferring External error code 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
made in time failure
300 100 0x3100 The product could not detect normal lines within a Not used --- --- --- --- ---
minute after starting to receive the image data in G3
mode
300 101 0x3101 Decoding data without RTC at the time of ECM Not used --- --- --- --- ---
reception caused the MN8604 to be disabled to perform
decode process
300 102 0x3102 Number of lines for received one page exceeded Not used --- --- --- --- ---
acceptable level (more than 65535 lines)
300 103 0x3103 Abnormal termination of MN86064 Not used
300 104 0x3104 MN8604 failed to process commands within a Not used --- --- --- --- ---
prescribed time period
300 105 0x3105 File pointer that is used for writing/reading in There is something wrong Replace the fax board --- Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
encoding/decoding process caused an error with the fax board or the
S/W
300 106 0x3106 The number of lines that indicate the processed lines in There is something wrong Replace the fax board --- Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
encoding/decoding process is 0 with the fax board or the
S/W
300 107 0x3107 Monitor timer for encoding/decoding by MN86064 Not used --- --- --- --- ---
became time-out
300 108 0x3108 Target file is empty in decoding/encoding process Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 109 0x3109 During MMR decoding, MN86064 decode error Not used --- --- --- --- ---
occurred
300 110 0x310A During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, BIH/over Not used --- --- --- --- ---
flow error was detected
300 111 0x310B During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, an end Not used --- --- --- --- ---
marker error was detected
300 112 0x310C During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, a YD error Not used --- --- --- --- ---
was detected
300 113 0x310D During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, an abort Not used --- --- --- --- ---
marker error was detected
300 114 0x310E During decoding JBIG data, BIH operated abnormally Not used --- --- --- --- ---


error code Internal
Code
300 115 0x310F Forced termination of data processing The communication was --- --- Forced stop 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
interrupted Receiving a fax is finished
300 200 0x3200 Communication was interrupted The communication was --- --- Forced stop 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished
interrupted Receiving a fax is finished
300 300 0x3300 The file to be opened does not exist The file was deleted for If t h e e rr o r o c cu r s *1, *2 External error code FDH: Fax scanning job is finished
some reason fr e qu e n t l y , Uncategorizable Writing pages is finished
init ia liz e or re plac e factors Printing of the received fax is
the fax board finished
Reading pages is finished
Printing report is finished
300 301 0x3301 The product attempted to perform Write Open, but Not used --- --- --- --- ---
could not get FCB (FCB FULL)
300 302 0x3302 Memory full (the memory for storing data is insufficient) Memory full Pre-stored received faxes --- --- 21H: Fax Fax scanning job is finished
are printed out When memory is Writing pages is finished
sending faxes are stored, insufficient Printing of the received fax is
the product waits for the finished
jobs to be send or delete Reading pages is finished
the jobs for starting the
latest job.
300 400 0x3400 When transferring data between PRMs, time-out error Not used --- --- --- --- ---
occurred before finishing the transferring
300 500 0x3500 The product failed to create a power-off report Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 501 0x3501 A log file for the communication result could not be made Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 502 0x3502 The product failed to read time Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 503 0x3503 When storing a two-page combined transmission data, Not used --- --- --- --- ---
the data exceeded 65535 lines for one page
300 504 0x3504 When the QM-Coder is in coding process, SC count Not used --- --- --- --- ---
over error occurred
300 505 0x3505 When the QM-Coder is in decoding process, the end Not used --- --- --- --- ---
marker was not detected
300 506 0x3506 When printing a received fax stored in the memory, the Not used --- --- --- --- ---
product failed to decode the top part of the page for 10
seconds


error code Internal
Code
300 507 0x3507 Memory full status (the memory has no more space for Memory full Pre-stored received faxes *1, *2* External error code 21H: Fax Writing pages is finished
the new job) was detected when the product received a are printed out. memory is Fax scanning job is finished
sending fax job When sending faxes are insufficient
stored, the product waits
for the jobs to be send or
delete the jobs for
starting the latest job.
300 508 0x3508 Creating a report file and log file for a report printing Memory full Pre-stored received faxes 1, *2 50H: Forced stop Printing report is finished
job could not be made are printed out.
When sending faxes are
stored, the product waits
for the jobs to be send or
delete the jobs for
starting the latest job.
300 509 0x3509 Opening/closing a report file for a report printing job There is something wrong If the error occurs *1, *2 50H: Forced stop Printing report is finished
could not be made with the fax board or the frequently, replace the
S/W fax board
300 510 0x350A Reserving memory for creating a report or an instant- Not used --- --- --- --- ---
faxing job could not be made
300 511 0x350B RTC was not detected during decoding process Not used --- --- --- --- ---
300 900 --- This code is used by the MFP --- --- --- --- --- ---
Note *1: Displays the external error code.

*2: A message requesting to see the user’s guide is displayed
*3: A message requesting to retry the operation is displayed
*4: A message requesting to confirm the condition of the other end machine is displayed
*5: A message requesting to confirm the condition of the other end machine and retry
the operation is displayed

OTHER ERROR CODES
Figure 7-18. Other Error Codes

Internal Error Code Description
0x4000 ~ 0x4FFF Fax unit Firmware failure (for SW debug)
0x5000 ~ 0x500A Internal error (MFP I/F task)
0x50B0 ~ 0x50B5 Internal error (Communication check task)
0x5100 ~ 0x5104 Internal error (Communication check task (Boot))
0x5200 ~ 0x5202 Internal error (Schedule task), Failed to write dummy data into FILE
0x5310 ~ 0x5316 Error between tasks (MFP/Others)
0x5501 ~ 0x6230 Internal error (HOOK task, CODE task, DECODE task)
0x6400 ~ 0x64F0 Internal error (CODEC all-purpose function)
0x6C00 ~ 0x6DDF Internal error (Report task)
0x6E00 ~ 0x6E14 Internal error (Self diagnosis report)
0x6E90 ~ 0x6EBC Internal error (Report common function)
0x6F00 ~ 0x6F20 Internal error (REPORT FILE creating process)
0x6F88 Internal error (ERROR CODE converting process)
0x6FC2 ~ 0x6FC4 Internal error (REPORT FILE-related)
0x7000 ~ 0x7080 Internal error (Self diagnosis task)
0x7100 ~ 0x7140 Internal error (Self diagnosis processing)
0x7400 ~ 0x7420 Internal error (RTC task)
0x81B7 Internal error (Timer interruption process related)
0x9000 ~ 0x9006 Internal error (Message I/F)
0xA000 ~ 0xA00B Internal error (Received fax print task)
0xF023 ~ 0xF07E Internal error (Protocol (ECM))
0xF303 Internal error (G2/G3)
0xF41C ~ 0xF485 Internal error (Protocol (G3))
0xF502 Internal error (G3 task)
0xF62F ~ 0xF63B Internal error (Modem process related)
0xF704 ~ 0xF77C Internal error (Protocol (V.34))

Aculaser Cx11 Cx11f Cx21 Cx21f (SM, CD)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aculaser Cx11 Cx11f Cx21 Cx21f (SM, CD)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

Color Multi-Function Page Printer

EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F

WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

Manual Configuration Symbols Used in this Manual

W A R N IN G  If you need to work on the printer with power applied, never

C H E C K  The laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more

 Caution Label About High-temperature Surface

W A R N IN G Do not pick up dropped toner with a general vacuum cleaner. To

1.1 Overview 1.1.2 Scanner Section

AcuLaser CX11/CX11F AcuLaser CX21/CX21F

Type Host-based controller PDL controller

CPU TX4955 (192 MHz) TX4955 (400 MHz)

RAM Standard 128 MB (expandable up to 576 MB)

Control Large LCD with backlight type

Interface  High Speed USB 2.0

Printer ESC/PageS03 ESC/Page-Color, Adobe PostScript

Copy  Copy Mode: Text, Photos, Text/Photos, and High resolution

Push-type Supports both Local TWAIN and Network TWAIN

IP Filtering Unsupported Supported

Scan to Unsupported Supported

1.2 Basic Specifications  Print*6

Table 1-1. Monochrome Print Mode (Unit: PPM)

NOISE 1.2.1.2 Electrical Characteristics

 Scanner consumption current

Table 1-5. Scanner Consumption Current

Table 1-5. Scanner Consumption Current RESISTANCE TO STATIC ELECTRICITY

When using 500-sheet cassette (option)

FAST TRANSIENT/BURSTS (AC LINE NOISE)

No effect on printing quality.

1.2.1.3 Environmental Specifications and Conditions AIR PRESSURE (ALTITUDE)

TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY Table 1-8. Air Pressure (Altitude)

VIBRATION 3, 000 lx or less (do not expose to direct sunlight)

There should be no damage under the following conditions

 Frequency sweep : Logarithmic sweep 10 minutes for one-way

1.2.1.4 Conformed Safety Standards COMMUNICATION STANDARDS

SAFETY STANDARDS Model Type Applicable Standards

Model Type Applicable Standards

1.2.1.5 Environmental Characteristics

International Energy Star Program not compliant

 Ozone concentration : 0.02 mg/m3 or less

 Toner : should have no affect on the human body

1.2.1.6 Reliability  Durability

 MPBF  Life of paper feed : 100,000 pages

Note: Calculated as Color : Monochrome = 2 : 1

Figure 1-1. Dimensional Outline Drawing

Base model FAX model

Figure 1-2. Dimensional Outline Drawing (main unit + 500-sheet cassette)

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT Top

 Installation Method 258mm 258mm

Front Base Model Fax Model

353 mm 258 mm 353 mm 258 mm

Figure 1-3. Space Requirements

1.2.2 Printer Section 1.2.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications

1.2.2.1 Process Specifications & System RESOLUTION

Table 1-13. Color mode (Unit: second or less)

PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE PAPER FEED

COMBINATION WITH OPTIONAL CASSETTE

Table 1-16. Combination with Optional Cassette

SUPPORTED PAPER SIZE, TYPE AND ORIENTATION

Table 1-17. List of Supported Paper Size, Type and Orientation

Legal 355.60 (14.00’’) 215.90 (8.50’’) { --- SEF Available

Envelop *1 235.00 120.00 {*3 --- SEF ---

W A R N IN G If you need to work on the printer with power applied, never

C H E C K The laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more

Caution Label About High-temperature Surface

Interface High Speed USB 2.0

Copy Copy Mode: Text, Photos, Text/Photos, and High resolution

1.2 Basic Specifications Print*6

Scanner consumption current

Frequency sweep : Logarithmic sweep 10 minutes for one-way

Ozone concentration : 0.02 mg/m3 or less

Toner : should have no affect on the human body

1.2.1.6 Reliability Durability

MPBF Life of paper feed : 100,000 pages

Installation Method 258mm 258mm

Envelop 1 235.00 120.00 {3 --- SEF ---

Envelop Orientation PAPER EJECT CAPACITY

Table 1-19. Available Paper by Feeder Maximum printable area

Temperature and humidity conditions

Image Quality Adjustment

1.2.3 Scanner Section Document Size Detection

1.2.4 ADF section Document Size Detection

Length: 257 ~ 355.6mm Size

Scanning Order Sub scanning ± 1.0% /356 mm

Definition A4 Document table ADF

Protocol : G3, G3ECM

Program ROM : 8 MB Flash (Mirror type) Fax interface* (attached telephone)

Panel : LCD 22 characters x 1 line USB interface

Alert screen Error Screen

STATUS DISPLAYED IN PRINT MODE Operation, status messages

Guidance Message Display Descriptions

List of Warnings Printing Including processing the job

Date and Time Display

SETUP ITEMS Fax Job Information

Fax Mode Setup Items Item Setup menu/item Remarks

STATUS DISPLAYED IN FAX MODE Operation, Status Messages

Guidance Messages Display Remarks

BUTTON FUNCTIONS Setup Items in Copy Mode

Details on Monochrome/Color Copy Settings

Details on Image Adjustment Settings

Advanced Copy Mode Setup Items

Additional Menu Items Operation, Status Messages